| Entries |
| Document | Title | Date |
|---|
| 20080198793 | POINT TO MULTIPOINT DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION WITH A PLURALITY OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS UNITS - A point to multipoint device for use in a wireless network to provide wireless communication with a plurality of telecommunications units is described, for communication from the point to multipoint device to the telecommunications units, the point to multipoint device being operable to employ multiple sets of beams, at any point in time one set being used. The point to multipoint device comprises beam set generation logic for generating the multiple sets of beams arranged into one or more groups, each group comprising one beam from each set. Within each group the beams of that group are orthogonal with respect to each other, and each beam within each set is generated randomly with respect to other beams in that set. An interface is provided for receiving a synchronisation signal issued to all point to multipoint devices in the wireless network. Beam switching logic is then used to determine, having regard to the synchronisation signal, switch times at which the point to multipoint device switches from one set of beams to another set of beams, the switch times being the same for all point to multipoint devices in the wireless network. An antenna array is controlled by the beam switching logic to produce at any point in time one of the sets of beams for transmitting data forming the communication to the telecommunications units. The use of such sets of beams has been found to lower the average co-channel interference observed within the wireless network. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198794 | VIRAL-LIKE ELECTRONIC DATA PROPAGATION - Data propagation is provided with an originating transmitter that receives and processes data into a data packet that it transmits. A sensory input device is connected with and sends data to the transmitter. A plurality of transceivers are disposed in a geographic space and may receive and retransmit the packet. A target receiver receives and processes the packet and reports a result of processing the data. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198795 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING UPLINK DATA BY DRX-MODE TERMINAL IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method and apparatus for transmitting uplink data by a terminal performing a DRX operation in a mobile telecommunication system. According to the method and apparatus, when a UE transmits the uplink data, the UE variably controls given active and sleep periods in consideration of whether or not retransmission for the uplink data is performed, thereby more flexibly operating in the DRX mode. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198796 | Method and Apparatus for Enhancing System Efficiency in a Wireless Communications System - A method for enhancing system efficiency of a user equipment, called UE hereinafter, in a wireless communications system includes operating in a Cell Forward Link Access Channel, called CELL_FACH hereinafter, state with a common High Speed Downlink Shared Channel radio network transaction identifier, called common H-RNTI hereinafter, and a dedicated H-RNTI, and providing a confirmation signal with utilizing the dedicated H-RNTI for a network when the network sends transmissions of Dedicated Control Channel, called DCCH hereafter, and Dedicated Traffic Channel, called DTCH hereinafter, with using the common H-RNTI to the UE. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198797 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICE IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Disclosed is an apparatus and method for an MBS service in a BWA system. An apparatus of a base station includes a time controller, a CAC processor, and a buffer controller. The time controller manages a broadcast start time and a broadcast end time and generates a broadcast start message at a predetermined time before the actual broadcast start time. Upon receipt of the generated broadcast start message from the time controller, the CAC processor calculates a capacity decrease due to broadcast service and subtracts the capacity decrease from the current available capacity to update the available capacity. Upon receipt of the generated broadcast start message from the time controller, the buffer controller controls the buffer occupation of unicast traffic in order to provide the buffer space required for a broadcast service. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198798 | Method And Network Apparatus For Adjusting Communication Resources Within A Community - A method and a network apparatus for adjusting communication resources in a community are disclosed. When the topological structure of the community changes, e.g., when new base station joins or exits, and when the community combines or splits, each base station re-allocates the communication resources by using a uniform algorithm, or the server or one base station in the community re-allocates the communication resources uniformly, then the base stations in the community are adjusted to the their own available resource at the same time based on the re-allocation results. The communication resources includes not only the frequency spectrum, but also those are exclusively occupied by a base station required by its normal operation, e.g., time slot, CDMA code word, sub-channel etc. With the present disclosure, the automatic optimum allocation and adjustment of the communication resources in a community could be realized. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080205326 | Communications Infrastructure for Content Delivery Using Edge Servers - A communications infrastructure, such as a public land mobile network (PLMN) complying with the GPRS standards, is described comprising at least a local support node for packet stream communication with a plurality of terminals and a gateway support node for packet stream communication with an external network, which may be an IP network such as the public internet. The local support node and the gateway support node are arranged for interconnection by a point to point tunnel, a GTP tunnel in the case of GPRS via for instance an IP network, for carrying packets between each terminal and addressed servers on the external network. A control element and one or more edge servers are associated with the local support node. The edge servers are each associated with respective addresses on the external network and the control element is interposed between the local support node and the gateway support node. The control element is arranged in operation to extract from the tunnel packets destined for a predeterminable set of external network addresses and redirect the extracted packets to corresponding ones of the edge servers. Finally, the control element is arranged route packets received from said edge servers to a corresponding terminal via the local support node. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205327 | Methods, Apparatuses, and Computer Program Products for Providing Dynamic Assignment of Slot Cycle Index for Network Nodes - An apparatus for providing dynamic assignment of slot cycle index includes a processing element. The processing element may be configured to send a registration message to a server for registering a network node to a service associated with the server, to receive a response to the registration message from the server in which the response identifies slot cycle index information, and to apply a slot cycle value at the network node based on stored information defining the slot cycle value corresponding to the identified slot cycle index information. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205328 | Method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink enhanced dedicated transport channel (E-DCH) and method for enabling use of a log-map turbo decoding algorithm for processing the E-DCH - A method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink E-DCH is provided, where the E-DCH is received from a user in a network for processing in a base station receiver in the network employing a log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm to process the E-DCH. The E-DCH includes an E-DPDCH from which the soft symbols are generated at the base station receiver, and an E-DPCCH used to transmit control information associated with the E-DPDCH, which along with configuration information from a radio network controller (RNC) of the network enables the base station receiver to determine a reference amplitude ratio linked to the actual power offset of the E-DPDCH from the legacy DPCCH. In the method, a reference E-DPDCH to DPCCH amplitude ratio is multiplied by a value greater than 1 to output a scaling factor, and the soft symbols are scaled by the scaling factor for processing by the log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm in the base station receiver. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205329 | Method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink enhanced dedicated transport channel (E-DCH) and method for enabling use of a log-map turbo decoding algorithm for processing the E-DCH - A method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink E-DCH is provided, where the E-DCH is received from a user in a network for processing in a base station receiver in the network employing a log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm to process the E-DCH. The E-DCH includes an E-DPDCH from which the soft symbols are generated at the base station receiver, and an E-DPCCH used to transmit control information associated with the E-DPDCH, which along with configuration information from a radio network controller (RNC) of the network enables the base station receiver to determine a reference amplitude ratio linked to the actual power offset of the E-DPDCH from the legacy DPCCH. In the method, an estimated E-DPDCH to DPCCH amplitude ratio that represents a scaling factor for the soft symbols is determined, and the soft symbols are scaled by the scaling factor to enable the soft symbols to be processed by the log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm in the base station receiver. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205330 | TOKENIZED COMPRESSION OF SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL DATA - Systems and methods are provided for compressing and decompressing session initiation protocol (SIP) messages. A serializer and parser compress and decode SIP data structures according to a tokenized binary protocol. The compression/decompression protocol uses tokens that represent message elements of the internal data structures that define SIP messages. Tokens may be assigned to message elements based on various design requirements. Some tokens provide sufficient generality to encode any legal SIP message, while others are highly optimized to match the elements found in most common SIP messages. For those elements requiring specific strings, three dictionaries are defined. Two of the dictionaries are static and are never transmitted; the third dictionary is dynamic and contains strings found only in the specific message. Because the message dictionary is transmitted with each message, and contributes to the size of the transmitted message, the message element tokens are designed to reduce the size of the message dictionary to the greatest degree possible. The compression of SIP messages in this manner is stateless in that it does not require knowledge of the characteristics of previous messages. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205331 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving system information in a mobile communication system are provided, in which a System Frame Number (SFN) is transmitted as system information, and other system information, which excludes the SFN, is transmitted using resources different from resources used to transmit the SFN on a broadcast channel. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205332 | HYBRID PROACTIVE ON-DEMAND ROUTING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Key scalability issues in the management of routing information at each node in wireless networks running a proactive routing protocol have been identified and a solution is set forth based on hybrid proactive on-demand routing with focus on the STA association information management at each MP in a WLAN mesh. A fisheye-scope-based GAB management scheme is described where the priority of an entry is the reverse of the hop count of its associated MAP/MPP from the MP, which can be easily applicable to the case of management of general routing information. For example, the GAB proposed can maintain only those entries whose associated MAPs/MPPs are two or less hops away from the MP. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080212522 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION FROM BASE STATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for receiving system information from a Base Station (BS) in a Mobile Station (MS) in a mobile communication system are provided, in which it is determined whether there is buffered system information in a buffer, if current system information has an error, it is determined whether a combining condition is satisfied, in the presence of the buffered system information, the combining condition being defined by at least one of a Master Information Block (MIB) value tag, a System Information Block (SIB) value tag, and modification time information that are associated with the current system information, and the current system information is combined with the buffered system information, if the combining condition is satisfied. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212523 | Session based communication - A user terminal requesting a session establishment although the session already exists, is informed on the existing session in a response to the request. If the user terminal offered in the request one or more media types that were rejected, the response contains an indication of a reason for rejection. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080219207 | BASE STATIONS ROUTING TRAFFIC OVER A PACKET BACKHAUL NETWORK TO MULTIPLE ROUTING ELEMENTS - System, methods, and networks are disclosed that allow base station systems of a wireless communication network to transmit outgoing traffic over a packet backhaul network to multiple routing elements on the MSC side of the network. A base station system described herein identifies a primary routing element and a backup routing element. The primary routing element is the device to which the base station system transmits outgoing traffic under normal operation, and the backup routing element is an alternate to the primary routing element. To transmit traffic over the packet backhaul network, the base station system monitors the availability of the primary routing element. If the primary routing element is available, then the base station system transmits outgoing traffic over the packet backhaul network to the primary routing element. If unavailable, then the base station system transmits outgoing traffic over the packet backhaul network to the backup routing element. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219208 | System and Method for Optimizing Roaming in a Wireless Data Network - A system and method for a mobile client device to associate with a preferred access point in a wireless network A determination is made as to whether the mobile client device is stationary within the wireless network The preferred access point is determined between the different access points within the wireless network. The mobile client device associates with the preferred access point to gain desired access to the wireless network | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080219209 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIUSER WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS USING ANTI-INTERFERENCE TO INCREASE TRANSMISSION DATA RATE - A method and system for multi-user wireless communications between a sender and a receiver enables effective blocking of interference signals by other senders and improving the channel data rate. The receiver uses two or more receiving devices, such as antennas or smart antennas, to receive multiple wireless input signals. By performing a noise-transparent autocorrelation matching analysis on the multiple input signals, the receiver derives an anti-interference filter for interference-blocking action, without the need for information of the interfering and its transmission channel. In a multi-user environment, the noise-transparent autocorrelation matching analysis is implemented by the Autocorrelation Division Multiple Access (ADMA) system that includes the design and the implementation of ADMA code, the ADMA encoder, the ADMA algorithm and the ADMA decoder. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080225778 | Service Discovery Mechanism in Broadcast Telecommunication Network - Aspects of the invention are directed to service discovery in a digital broadcast network. A service discovery descriptor, which may be electronic service guide-provider and cell specific, provides mapping between a service identifier, a logical channel identifier, and a physical channel, which may be characterized by a frame identifier and a slot identifier, that is, each physical channel may have one or more slots within one or more frames. A neighboring service discovery descriptor provides mapping for the service available within neighboring cells. Aspects of the invention are directed to an encapsulation protocol that encapsulates variable length data, including, but not limited to, the service discovery descriptor and the neighboring service discovery descriptor, into fixed length data stream packets. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225779 | LOCATION-BASED NETWORKING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A technique for creating a network model involves receiving location data associated with objects and using the location data to improve the size and/or accuracy of the network model. A technique for creating geo-tagged content involves providing a probable location associated with a client and geo-tagging content at that location. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225780 | USE OF DISTRIBUTED HASHTABLES FOR WIRELESS ACCESS MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method, apparatus and system for management of a wireless communication network in which the system has a plurality of access nodes. A distributed hash table (“DHT”) is created. The DHT contains mobility management data of mobile devices using the wireless communication network. The DHT is stored across at least a portion of the plurality of access nodes. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080225781 | Group MMSE-DFD with Order and Filter Computation for Reception on a Cellular Downlink - A method for decoding in a wireless downlink channel, where all dominant transmitting sources use inner codes from a particular set, including the steps of: estimating a channel matrix seen from each dominant transmitter source in response to a pilot or preamble signal transmitted by each such source; converting each estimated channel matrix into an effective channel matrix responsive to the inner code of the corresponding transmitting source; obtaining the received observations in a linear equivalent form whose output is an equivalent of the received observations and in which the effective channel matrix corresponding to each dominant transmitting source inherits the structure of its inner code; i) determining an order for processing each of the transmitting sources; ii) computing a filter for each transmitting source that will be decoded; iii) demodulating and decoding each transmitting source responsive to the determined order from step i) assuming perfect cancellation of signals of preceding or previously decoded transmitting sources; and iv) re-encoding the decoded message of each transmitting source, except the source decoded last, responsive to the modulation and coding scheme employed by the source and the corresponding effective channel matrix and subtracting it from the received observations in the equivalent linear form. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080232299 | Method for Wireless Data Transfer - A method for wireless data transfer between first and second multimedia devices connected via a wireless connection operated according to a first wireless standard or to a second wireless standard, which are different from and/or not compatible with each other. The method includes: choosing the first wireless standard or the second wireless standard as a chosen wireless standard; processing connection commands, connection parameters, and/or connection data to obtain processed connection commands, processed connection parameters, and/or process connection data of the chosen wireless standard; and sending the process connection commands, process connection parameters, and/or process connection data out via the wireless connection according to the chosen wireless standard. The method thus enables a seamless switching from one wireless standard to another wireless standard, wherein upper layers do not notice the switching. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232300 | REFERENCE SIGNAL SELECTION TECHNIQUES FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A technique for improving link performance in a wireless communication system includes detecting whether subscriber stations in the wireless communication system are power-limited. The subscriber stations include at least a first subscriber station that is power-limited and a second subscriber station that is not power-limited. The technique assigns a first reference signal having a first cubic metric to the first subscriber station and a second reference signal having a second cubic metric to the second subscriber station. In this case, the first cubic metric is lower in magnitude than the second cubic metric. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232301 | Slow Adaptation of Modulation and Coding for Packet Transmission - Systems and methods for performing MCS adaptation are provided. In some cases, the network performs MCS adaptation based on received NACKs. In other cases, the mobile station determines an MCS based on channel quality measurements, and feeds back the MCS adaptation decision to the network. In either case, NACK-only feedback may be implemented to reduce interference. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232302 | Wireless data transferring system for a lavatory with wireless local area network module - A wireless data transferring system for a lavatory comprises a host having a decoder to decode a data from a data source, a tuner coupled to the data source to select a desired data, a first WLAN module coupled to the decoder or the data source to transfer data; and at least one sanitary equipment coupled to a receiver, wherein the receiver is coupled to the first WLAN module, and a data output coupled to the receiver to output the data. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232303 | IP mobile communication system and base station - When mobile communication exchange detects that SIP client has moved out of communication area of base station, the mobile communication exchange generates a BYE message, sends the generated BYE message to SIP client and ends a session. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232304 | METHOD OF DETERMINING CHARACTERISTICS OF ACCESS CLASSES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The present invention provides a method of determining characteristics of access classes in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, a method is provided for implementation in an access network of a wireless communication system. The method includes mapping, at the access network, a plurality of priority levels to a plurality of access classes. Each access class is associated with at least one parameter used by access terminals to establish a wireless communication link with the access network. The method also includes transmitting, from the access network to a first access terminal, information indicating the mapping of the plurality of priority levels to the plurality of access classes in response to receiving a request to establish a communication session between the first access terminal and the access network. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232305 | Distributed Antenna System for MIMO Technologies - The invention is directed to a method and system for supporting MIMO technologies which can require the transport of multiple spatial streams on a traditional Distributed Antenna System (DAS). According to the invention, at one end of the DAS, each spatial stream is shifted in frequency to a pre-assigned band (such as a band at a frequency lower than the native frequency) that does not overlap the band assigned to other spatial streams (or the band of any other services being carried by the DAS). Each of the spatial streams can be combined and transmitted as a combined signal over a common coaxial cable. At the other “end” of the DAS, the different streams are shifted back to their original (overlapping) frequencies but retain their individual “identities” by being radiated through physically separate antenna elements. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232306 | Preserved Bearers - The invention describes a method of providing services on radio resources to a mobile terminal ( | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232307 | Method and apparatus to allocate resources for acknowledgments in communication systems - A method and apparatus for transmission between a plurality of units of user equipment and a base station in a wireless communication system. For each of the units of user equipment, a plurality of control channel elements are mapped to a plurality of downlink acknowledgement channel resources in accordance with a first mapping scheme, and the plurality of control channel elements are mapped to a plurality of uplink acknowledgement channel resources in accordance with a second mapping scheme. The first mapping scheme and the second mapping scheme may be different for different units of user equipment. Alternatively, the first mapping scheme and the second mapping scheme may change over time. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080240016 | IMS NETWORKS PROVIDING BUSINESS-RELATED CONTENT TO WIRELESS DEVICES - IMS networks and methods are disclosed for providing business-related content to wireless devices that are located within a business. For a business that has a WLAN, wireless devices within range of the wireless access point of the business receive an identifier for the wireless access point. The wireless devices then register with the IMS network using the access point ID. Through the access point ID, the IMS network identifies an application server that is associated with the business. The application server may then initiate sessions with the wireless devices, and transmit business-related content to the wireless devices while they are within range of the wireless access point of the business. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240017 | Method and apparatus of establishing connection in wireless local area network - An access point and a method to discover an associated station in a wireless network is presented. The access point scans the wireless network in order to discover one or more associated stations and establishes a connection with the discovered station. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240018 | Dynamic multi-access relaying for wireless networks - Methods, apparatuses and systems for communicating in a wireless network are disclosed. One embodiment includes a method for communication in a wireless network that comprises determining a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for channels between a base station, one or more relay stations, and a user and selecting a relay station based on the determined SNRs. Embodiments may also include determining a time sharing parameter and a total transmitting time, transmitting by the base station to the selected relay station for a first duration, and transmitting simultaneously by the base station and relay station using multi-access code for a second duration. The simultaneous transmission may be adapted to be decoded utilizing joint decoding with interference cancellation. Other embodiments are disclosed and claimed. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240019 | Methods and devices for scheduling the transmission of multicast messages in wireless local area networks - Real-time broadcast and multicast based packet transmissions/services over a wireless, local area networks (WLAN) may be improved by reducing the interference across neighboring access points (APs) while minimally impacting the performance of unicast transmissions/services. Minimal impact is assured by scheduling the transmission of multicast packet flows such that the duration of the time period required to transmit such flows is also minimized. One type of method provides a constant approximation of an optimal time period/schedule while another provides a logarithmic approximation of an optimal time period/schedule. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240020 | Routing support in heterogeneous communications networks - A device comprises a first binding unit which provides for a binding to a first tunnelling server using a first protocol, a second binding unit which provides for a binding to a second tunnelling server using a second protocol different from the first protocol, and an authorizing unit which causes the first or second binding unit to provide the binding. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080240021 | MAC coordination architecture for multi-ratio coexistence and a method for connecting over sideband channels - A wireless device with a multi-radio platform includes a scheduling coordinator connected by a control bus to enable the radios to share frequency spectrum by operating during time slots requested by the radios, avoid collisions, mitigate interference and control shared hardware components. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080247353 | CLUSTER HEAD ELECTION IN AN AD-HOC NETWORK - The ad-hoc network includes a plurality of mobile nodes including at least one group of mobile nodes operating as a cluster with a currently elected cluster head node. The mobile nodes include a controller and a wireless communications device cooperating therewith to determine whether the currently elected cluster head node appears inactive and then initiate a token-based cluster head node election based thereon. During the token-based cluster head node election, the cluster mobile nodes generate and transmit tokens having respective token weights, receive tokens from neighboring nodes, selectively retransmit the tokens based upon the token weights, and elect a new cluster head node based upon the token weights | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080247354 | METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TANGIBLE MACHINE-READABLE MEDIUM, AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PACKETS BASED ON A MULTI-HOP RELAY STANDARD - A method, a wireless communication system, a tangible machine-readable medium, and a communication apparatus for transmitting uplink hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) packets based on a multi-hop relay standard are provided. The wireless communication system comprises a BS, an SS, and a plurality of RSs. The RS transmits a plurality of first uplink HARQ packets to the RSs. After receiving one of the first uplink HARQ packets, at least one of the RSs replies a first ACK to the BS and retrieves a second uplink HARQ packet in the first uplink HARQ packet. Then, the at least one of the RSs transmits the second uplink HARQ packet to the BS. And the second uplink HARQ packet is the same as a part of one of the first uplink HARQ packets. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080247355 | DUPLICATE DETECTION METHOD FOR AD HOC NETWORK - A duplicate detection method is disclosed for reducing redundant traffic in an ad hoc network. The duplicate detection method of the present invention includes receiving a first packet having a content identifier and a subcontent identifier, storing the content identifier and the subcontent identifier of the first packet, receiving a second packet, extracting a content identifier from the second packet, determining whether the content identifiers of the first and second packets are identical, extracting, when the content identifiers are identical, a subcontent identifier from the second packet, determining whether the subcontent identifiers of the first and second packets are identical, determining, when the subcontent identifiers of the first and second packets are identical, the second packet is a duplicate of the first packet. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080253315 | Communication Network and a Communication Element and Method of Operation Thereof - The invention relates to a communication network in which a first communication element ( | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253316 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING FLOW DIRECTION IN A NETWORK - Method and system for providing flow direction in a network. According to an embodiment, the present invention provides a method for providing network connections. The method includes providing a first host. The first host includes a plurality of interfaces. The plurality of interfaces includes at least a first interface and a second interface. The first interface is associated with at least a first application. The second interface is associated with at least a second application. The method also includes storing a plurality of records at a server. The plurality of records is associated with the first host. The plurality of records includes a first record and a second record. The first record includes at least information associated with a name of the first host, the first interface, the first application, a first address of the first interface. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253317 | Wireless Networks for Vehicles - Vehicles having corresponding methods comprise a media source to provide digital data; a first wireless network station comprising a first transmitter to wirelessly transmit first packets of the digital data; a second wireless network station comprising a first receiver to wirelessly receive the first packets of the digital data; and a media player to reproduce media based on the first packets of the digital data wirelessly received by the second wireless network station. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253318 | Configurable Acknowledgement Processing in a Wireless Communication System - Techniques for sending and receiving acknowledgement (ACK) information in a wireless communication system are described. A base station sends control information and data to a user equipment (UE) and receives ACK information from the UE. The base station performs detection for the ACK information based on (i) a first hypothesis for the control information being missed by the UE and (ii) a second hypothesis for the control information being received correctly by the UE. In one design, the ACK information may have a variable size, and the base station may perform detection for the ACK information based on different block codes for the first and second hypotheses. In another design, the ACK information may have a fixed size, and the base station may perform detection for the ACK information based on a single block code and obtain a fixed number of bits for the ACK information for both hypotheses. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080253319 | RESTRICTIVE REUSE FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - For restrictive reuse, each cell (or each sector) is assigned (1) a set of usable subbands that may be allocated to users in the cell and (2) a set of forbidden subbands that is not used. The usable and forbidden sets for each cell are orthogonal to one other. The usable set for each cell also overlaps the forbidden set for each neighboring cell. A user u in a cell x may be allocated subbands in the usable set for that cell. If user u observes/causes high level of interference from/to a neighboring cell y, then user u may be allocated subbands from a “restricted” set containing subbands included in both the usable set for cell x and the forbidden set for cell y. User u would then observe/cause no interference from/to cell y. The subband restriction may be extended to avoid interference from multiple neighboring cells. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080259841 | SUBSCRIPTION AGGREGATION AND LOAD BALANCING IN A BROADBAND ROUTER - In one embodiment, a bandwidth aggregation router is provided including a wireless broadband modem interface for communicating with a wireless network, a wired wide area network interface, and a processor configured to aggregate bandwidth from the wireless broadband modem interface and the wired wide area network interface. The router may then efficiently allocate the aggregated bandwidth to at least one device for access to a network. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259842 | Multicast Control Channel Design - A system for providing a multicast control channel (MCCH) including information related to a service is provided. The system includes a processor programmed to promote transmission of a MCCH including a multi-cell information portion that contains information common to a plurality of cells in a wireless telecommunications network, and a cell-specific information portion that contains information specific to one of the cells. A method for providing control information is also provided. The method includes transmitting a multicast control channel (MCCH) including information related to a service, wherein the MCCH has a cell-specific portion that contains information specific to a specific cell in a telecommunications network, and wherein the MCCH has a multi-cell portion that contains information common to a plurality of cells in the telecommunications network. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259843 | Method and Apparatus for User Equipment for Long Term Evolution Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services - A user equipment is provided that includes a processor programmed responsive to receiving a point-to-multipoint (PTM) broadcast of a service at a low quality, to request a point-to-point (PTP) communication from the network. A method is provided for user equipment to receive a service. The method includes receiving a point-to-multipoint (PTM) broadcast of a service from a network, and attempting to obtain an improved quality of the service by requesting from the network a point-to-point (PTP) communication of the service | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259844 | OVER THE AIR MICROCONTROLLER FLASH MEMORY UPDATES - Techniques for over the air (OTA) microcontroller flash memory updates using a wireless network are disclosed herein. A control node first transmits the microcontroller flash memory update to all devices that can receive the message. Each packet of the message is relayed through multiple communication levels until all devices receive the packet. This starts with communications from the control node to each device node that has a direct communication path to the control node, which are referred to herein as “first level” device nodes. The first level device nodes then relay each communication to each other device node that has a direct communication path to the first level device nodes, which are referred to herein as “second level” device nodes. This process is repeated at each level of the wireless network until each of the plurality of device nodes has received the microcontroller flash memory update. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259845 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING MULTI MESH OPERATION MODES USING SINGLE WI-FI INTERFACING - A wireless-fidelity (Wi-Fi) interfacing method and a Wi-Fi interfacing system are provided. The Wi-Fi interfacing method includes: determining an interfacing operation mode related to a received packet, in interoperation with the receiving of the packet; and processing the packet via a single Wi-Fi interface, according to the determined interfacing operation mode. The Wi-Fi interfacing system includes: an operation mode determination unit determining an interfacing operation mode related to a received packet, in interoperation with the receiving of the packet; and a packet processing unit processing the packet via a single Wi-Fi interface, according to the determined interfacing operation mode. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259846 | Cooperative transceiving between wireless interface devices of a host device - A circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives packetized data with a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol. A second wireless interface circuit transceives packetized data with a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol and wherein the operation of the second wireless interface circuit interferes with the operation of the first wireless interface circuit. A processing module selectively preempts use of the second frequency spectrum by the second external device using a plurality of preemption modes including a first preemption mode and a second preemption mode. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259847 | Coordinated Beacon Period (Bp) Mergins for Distributed Wireless Networks - The application describes a method to merge two wireless networks in which each terminal gets a beacon slot within the beacon period. In order to merge two networks, the beacon slots have to be time-coordinated such that the beacon slots of the first network are completed before the beacon slots of the second network begin. The method includes transmitting a beacon frame having a beacon period switch information element which instructs the neighboring terminals in the first network of the need to merge, provides clock synchronization information; provides the time of the merge; and informs the neighboring terminals which beacon slot to occupy in the beacon period of the merged network. In order to deal with hidden terminals, the information needs to be forwarded terminal-to-terminal within each network. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259848 | Communication Node and Communication Control Method - A technique is disclosed whereby, in the case of wherein a communication node includes both a mobility management function and a multihoming function, based on a condition that occurs due to moving, an appropriate address can be selected from multiple addresses in a multihomed state. According to the technique, a mobility condition determination unit | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259849 | MACRO-DIVERSITY REGION RATE MODIFICATION - A system including a buffer to receive and store a stream of content data. A controller module may be configured to determine the macro-diversity region size based on a set of pre-selected configuration parameters including an incoming rate of the content data and to allocate at least a portion of the content data to a macro-diversity region, to monitor an amount of the content data in the buffer in accordance with the set of pre-selected configuration parameters including an incoming rate of the content data to determine whether the amount of content data falls into or out of a target range defined by a low-end value and a high-end value and to adjust the size of the macro-diversity region by one or more increments in response to changes in the amount of the content data in accordance with the target range. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259850 | METHOD FOR REALIZING MOBILE IP MANAGEMENT AND THE NETWORK SYSTEM THEREOF - A method for realizing mobile IP management includes: a mobile node (MN) sends a mobility registration signal to a mobility control (MC) entity in a control function entity of the transmission layer of the network; a home mobility control entity of the mobile node registers the mobile node, returns a registration response to the mobile node and transmits a control signal to a mobility forwarding (MF) entity in the transmission layer; the mobility control entity controls the mobility forwarding entity to provide communication services for the mobile node after it receives a request signal from the registered mobile node. A method for realizing mobile IP management in NGN network and a network system for realizing mobile IP management are also disclosed. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080267115 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UPDATING UATI OF AN ACCESS TERMINAL - A system for communication of an access terminal in a wireless network having a plurality of subnets. The system determines, based upon movement of the access terminal in a dormant state between subnets, and upon ColorCode and SecondaryColorCode values of each subnet, whether or not the access terminal should immediately initiate a Unicast Access Terminal Identifier (UATI) update request, or delay the Unicast Access Terminal Identifier (UATI) update. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267116 | Routing method and system for a wireless network - A method and system for selecting a route in a wireless network for the transmission of a data packet between wireless nodes in said network using a modified link-state routing algorithm wherein only a limited number of broadcast messages are generated to synchronize the link-state database throughout the wireless network. A subset of nodes called portal nodes within the network are elected to do the broadcasting for the entire network. Each portal node broadcasts an announcement of its identity to all of the wireless nodes. Each wireless node responds to these broadcasts to select one of the portal nodes as its root portal node. It then identifies a unicast route back to its root portal node, and sends a link-state register message to this portal node. These link-state register messages received by each portal node are aggregated by them and are broadcast to each of the wireless nodes for storage. When a data packet is thereafter received by a wireless node from a neighboring node, it detects if the data packet satisfies one of a plurality of predetermined conditions and rebroadcasts the data packet to neighboring wireless nodes if none of the conditions is satisfied. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080273484 | Wireless Communication System - It is an object of the present invention to provide a wireless communication system, which ensures that communication can be maintained in an excellent status although a mobile wireless station may be moved in a service area. A CPU ( | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080273485 | System and method of discovery of wireless control device - Disclosed herein is a wireless infrastructure node configured to receive a discovery message from a wireless control device, and reply to the wireless control device with a connection request if the wireless infrastructure node is not statically assigned to another wireless control device and the wireless infrastructure node is not being managed by another wireless control device. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080273486 | Wireless Protocol Adapter - A wireless protocol adapter for use in a process system includes a wireless interface that communicates with a multi-node wireless communication network using a wireless communication protocol, a wired interface that connects to a first field device over a wired link, and a processing unit that transfers process data between the wireless communication network and the first field device to enable operation of the first field device and of the wireless protocol adapter in the wireless communication network as distinct network nodes. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080273487 | PUSH-TO TALK OVER AD-HOC NETWORKS - The invention proposes a network system comprising a plurality of network nodes ( | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080273488 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE BASED ACCESS POINT NAME (APN) SELECTION - A procedure is provided wherein a serving general packet radio service (GPRS) support node (SGSN) receives a request for an access point name (APN) the SGSN making a determination if the requested packet data protocol (PDP) and APN are the same as subscribed information. In the event that the requested and subscribed PDP type and the requested and subscribed APN are not the same, the SGSN advises that the APN requested is not authorized and agreement to terms and conditions and the provision of credit (or debit) card information must be provided to obtain the requested APN. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080279136 | TECHNIQUES TO INCLUDE VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS IN A UNIVERSAL SERVICES INTERFACE - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a mobile station (MS) operable to communicate in a wireless network, the wireless network including a Universal Services Interface (USI) and wherein the MS includes a USI client adapted to monitor external IP addresses of the MS and if the MS enters a virtual private network (VPN) via a VPN tunnel, the external IP address of the VPN tunnel is cached. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279137 | DISCONTINUOUS INQUIRY FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A system for managing the operation of a plurality of wireless communication mediums supported by one or more radio modules integrated within a wireless communication device. A control strategy may be employed to regulate the operation of at least one wireless communication medium operating in a continuous mode, such as an discovery or inquiry mode, so as not to conflict with other active communication occurring substantially simultaneously within the wireless communication device. The regulation may occur in the one or more radio modules, and may include rescheduling part of, or alternatively a whole, discovery hop train. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279138 | Cooperative transceiving between wireless interface devices of a host device with shared modules - An circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives packetized data between a host module and a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol. A second wireless interface circuit transceives packetized data between the host module and a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol. The second wireless interface circuit includes at least one module that is shared with first wireless interface circuit, the module having a first state where the module is operational and a second state corresponding to a low-power state. The first wireless interface circuit and the second wireless interface circuit operate in accordance with a wireless interface schedule that includes a first time interval where the first wireless interface device and the second wireless interface device contemporaneously use the at least one module in the first state and a second time interval where the at least one module is in the second state. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080285505 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK TIMING RECOVERY IN COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A system and method for determining the network timing of a communications network from a mobile station that receives signals from a plurality of base stations. An estimated location of a mobile station may be determined through any number of or combination of location technologies. Network measurements such as observed time difference values and/or a round trip time values at the mobile station or base stations in the network may be utilized. Network timing relationships may be determined as a function of the estimated location and network measurements. An estimated location of a second mobile station may be determined as a function of the network timing relationships. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080285506 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING A TEMPORARY BLOCK FLOW TO WHICH A PIGGYBACKED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT/NON-ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIELD IS ADDRESSED - A method and apparatus for indicating a temporary block flow (TBF) to which a piggybacked acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement (PAN) field is addressed. A PAN check sequence (PCS) is created, for example using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) encoding. The PCS is masked with a temporary flow identity (TFI) assigned to a TBF or a mask generated based on the TFI. A data block including the PAN field and the masked PCS is then processed for transmission. The mask may be generated by converting the TFI using an (M, N) code, M being not greater than the number of bits of the PCS and N being the number of bits of the TFI. With this scheme, a TFI may be transmitted in a PAN field without using explicit bits to identify the TBF. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080291866 | Control Station Apparatus and Base Station Apparatus - A control station apparatus ensures that, even if transmission times are changed and set, data of channels can be acquired at the receiving end. In this apparatus, a synchronization part ( | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291867 | Dynamic Discovery of Home Agent With Specific Binding - The invention relates to a method for obtaining a home node address in a packet switched network comprising nodes. The method comprises the steps of a first node sending to a first home node of a home network a request containing information about a home address of a mobile node to determine whether a binding with said home address indicating a registration of said mobile node at the first home node exists; the first home node receiving the request, said first home node comprising a stored binding table; determining whether the binding with said home address exists in any home node of the home network; and if the home address of the mobile node is in the binding table of any of the home nodes in the home network, the first node receiving a reply comprising the address of the home node with said binding. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291868 | ROUTE PROTOCOL - A route protocol is established whereby a mobile device can communicate to a multitude of (receiving) base stations though a tunnel created through a serving base station. A message that includes a Route Creation Header can be transmitted by the mobile device to create the tunnel. The Route Creation Header is reviewed by the receiving base station while the mobile device is in a Waiting-To-Open State. Various errors might occur with respect to the Route Creation Header. These errors can be conveyed to the mobile device by base station by setting one or more error code fields. Once the errors are resolved, another attempt to create a tunnel with base station can be made, if desired. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291869 | Routing Method for Mobile Wireless Nodes Having Overlapping Internet Protocol Home Addresses - In mobile IP wireless data networking, methods are described for correctly routing packets through a foreign agent to or from wireless nodes where the wireless nodes have the same home network IP address. Instead of using normal IP routing, the foreign agent uniquely identifies the wireless node's home network IP address and home agent IP address with a PPP link address associated with a PPP link between the foreign agent and the wireless node. This association between PPP link addresses, home agent IP addresses, and home network IP addresses, is preferably implemented in software as a table stored in the foreign agent. The routing of packets through the foreign agent to the mobile nodes is performed by reference to the table. The table allows the foreign agent to correctly and efficiently route packets in the situation where multiple wireless nodes are registered with the foreign agent, but more than one of the wireless nodes have the same home network IP address. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080291870 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING MOBILE WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS - A mobile access point is disclosed. The mobile access point includes a terminal module configured to provide one or more terminal functions for use by a user, the one or more terminal functions including a voice or data communications application, and a gateway module configured to provide one or more gateway functions for use by at least one client device, the one or more gateway functions including providing the at least one client device access to a computer network, and a processor configured to execute the terminal module and the gateway module to effectuate their corresponding functions. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080298300 | Communication Control Method and System for Carrying Out Said Method - A system including communications means ( | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298301 | METHOD TO SWITCH BETWEEN NETWORK-CONTROLLED AND MOBILE-CONTROLLED MOBILE IP FUNCTIONALITY - A method for prioritizing Mobile IP between PMIP and CMIP includes the steps of connecting a mobile device ( | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298302 | SENSOR DEVICE, SERVER NODE, SENSOR NETWORK SYSTEM, METHOD OF ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION PATH, CONTROL PROGRAM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - For the purpose of allowing a sensor device ( | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298303 | MULTI-LINK SUPPORT FOR NETWORK BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS - The claimed subject matter relates to systems and methods for processing messages in a wireless communications environment. In an aspect, a communications method is provided. The method includes establishing a communications link though an access component with a network domain node and enabling at least one other communications link through at least one other access component with the network domain node. This also includes enabling concurrent communications with the network domain node via the access component or the other access component. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298304 | ROUTING METHOD IN WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless multi-hop network communication terminal | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298305 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, OUTPUT DEVICE, INPUT DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - The objective of the invention is to enable easy recognition of a wireless communication device at the connection destination and to enable connection when wireless connection is newly made between wireless communication devices. On display | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298306 | Implicit Signaling for Link Adaptation - Briefly, the invention concerns the issue of supporting link adaptation in a wireless network, and basically involves implicit signaling for link adaptation based on transfer of transmit duration information. More particularly, a designated originating node sends (S | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298307 | Apparatus, Method and Computer Program for Seamless Session Transfer - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method in a telecommunication system for controlling communication services between client terminals ( | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298308 | Event Notification in a Half Duplex Communication Environment - The present invention is directed towards providing event-triggered communication in a half duplex communication environment of a wireless communication network ( | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298309 | PROVIDING ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES - Advanced communications features are provided in a mobile communications network having at least one mobile switching center and at least one mobile station subsystem. The mobile switching center and mobile station subsystem each communicate signaling messages according to a mobile signaling protocol. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298310 | CROSS CHANNEL COEXISTENCE BEACONING PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS NETWORKS - A wireless system including a plurality of WRAN's operating on different channels identifies and addresses a number of important issues relating to the current CBP mechanism (in D0.3) used for inter-cell discovery and communication. The present invention provides fundamental remedies to respectively resolve these issues. Moreover, an Enhanced Coexistence Beaconing Protocol (CBP) is provided that allows efficient, scalable, and backward-compatible cross-channel inter-cell communications for IEEE 802.22 systems. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298311 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTERCONNECTING BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK WITH OPTICAL ACCESS BROADBAND NETWORK - A method and system for interconnecting a broadband wireless network with a wired network includes interconnecting a broadband wireless access (BWA) network with an optical access (OAN) broadband network at any reference point among reference points T, a, ODN, and V in the OAN broadband network, and interconnecting them with a digital subscriber line (DSL) network by the reference point V in the DSL network. The method of the present invention can solve the problem of the interconnection between the worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) network and the OAN broadband network, and the DSL network. An evolution approach is provided for the OAN broadband network operator and the DSL network operator to develop the WiMAX network. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298312 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING TUNNEL IN WLAN - A method and a system for establishing a tunnel in a wireless local area network (WLAN) are described. The method includes the following steps. A WLAN terminal initiates a tunnel establishment request in an Internet Key Exchange Security Association (IKE SA) that has been established. It is judged whether the number of tunnels already established in the IKE SA reaches a corresponding first threshold or not, if the number of tunnels does not reach the corresponding first threshold, establishing the tunnel for the WLAN terminal; otherwise, rejecting the establishment of the tunnel for the WALN terminal. It is decided whether to establish the tunnel for the WLAN terminal or not by judging whether the number of the tunnels already established in each IKE SA reaches the corresponding threshold or not during the tunnel establishment of the WLAN terminal, thereby effectively controlling the rationality and validity about the tunnel establishment. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080304438 | Method and Apparatus for Multimedia Communication - A method and apparatus for enabling communication of IP multimedia content to a called user during a circuit-switched call between a calling terminal (A) having called a primary communication unit (B | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304439 | Automatic Base Station Configuration - A basestation in a cellular communications network is configured such that it has a different Location Area Identification from other local basestations in the cellular network. This has the effect that a Location Area Update procedure is performed when a mobile device wishes to camp onto that basestation. The basestation is able to configure itself automatically, to ensure that its Location Area Identification differs from other local basestations. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304440 | Terminal and Method for Accessing Wireless Connection - A method for establishing a wireless connection performed by a subscriber station (SS) to receive Internet services from a given terminal node through a base station (BS), the method including: a) when an initial connection with the BS is established, establishing a first MAC connection with the BS, and setting the first MAC connection as a dedicated TCP connection; b) when a given packet is generated, the SS determining whether the given packet is a control packet for a TCP connection with the SS; c) transmitting the given packet through the dedicated TCP connection when a control packet is transmitted, and establishing a TCP connection with the SS; d) after establishing the TCP connection, establishing a second MAC connection for data communication between the SS and the BS; and e) after establishing the TCP connection and the second MAC connection, receiving data from the SS through the second MAC connection. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304441 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT MODE SELECTION IN MULTIPLE ACCESS WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate indicating and determining mobility management modes in access identifiers for wireless communications networks. Wireless devices can indicate mobility management modes to be utilized by choosing a target system and communicating the chosen system and a home system to one or more network components. The network components can infer or otherwise determine a mobility management mode based at least in part on a relationship between the target and home systems. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304442 | Wireless Base Station for Communications Network - A wireless base station includes: a trend factor regression expression calculator for determining, on the basis of measured wireless communication environment factor, the trend of the variation in the environment factor; a trend prediction value calculator for calculating, on the basis of the determined trend of the variation in the environment factor, the environment prediction value; an irregular variation factor calculator for calculating, on the basis of the difference between the determined trend of the environment factor variation and the measured environment factor, the magnitude of correction to be applied to the environment prediction value; and a radio environment prediction correction unit for correcting the environment prediction value according to the tolerance of the base station for its communication failure risk. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080304443 | Standards based communictions for a container security system - A container security system includes a plurality of wireless communication devices, each wireless communication device being associated with a respective container, and a sensor assembly located in the interior of each container. Each sensor assembly includes a sensor component and a wireless communication component that is configured to wirelessly communicate with the wireless communication device of the container in which the sensor assembly is located. A standards based wireless interface is utilized in the wireless communications between the wireless communication device of each container and the sensor assembly located in the interior of the container. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080310340 | Communication System, Communication Method, Communication Terminal Device, Control Method Thereof, and Program - The present invention proposes a highly reliable communication system and communication method, a communication terminal device used for the communication system, a control method thereof, and a program installed on the communication terminal device. In communication system and communication method, the communication terminal device used for the communication system, the control method thereof, and the program installed on the communication terminal device, a first communication terminal originates a first message. In response to the first message, a third communication terminal originates a second message. Based on these messages, the first through third communication terminals create routes to the first or third communication terminal. The first communication terminal transmits a route request composed of a request for a route used for communication with the third communication terminal. The second and third communication terminals create multiple routes to the first or third communication terminal. A communication route is established between the first and third communication terminals using a route that belongs to the created routes and satisfies the route request transmitted from the first communication terminal. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310341 | Wireless Transmission System - In the present invention, a wireless transmission system includes a plurality of mobile stations in a cell area, and a base station. The base station divides each of an uplink frame and a downlink frame into a plurality of blocks, assigns a specific one of the plurality of blocks to each of the plurality of the mobile stations, assigns a specific frequency channel to the mobile station, and notifies the specific block and the specific frequency channel to the mobile station. The length of each of the plurality of blocks is optional, and a sum of the lengths of the plurality of blocks is equal to the length of the frame. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310342 | Addressing Messages in a Two-Tier Network - In one embodiment, a method includes accessing a frame including a baseline header including a recipient address (RA) field, a transmitter address (TA) field, a destination address (DA) field, and a source address (SA) field. The method includes inserting into the frame a mesh header including a mesh destination address (MDA) field and a mesh source address (MSA) field. The MSA field specifies an address of a first edge node of the wireless mesh network, and the MDA field specifies an address of a second edge node of the wireless mesh network. The first edge node is a first transmitter of the frame with the baseline and mesh headers in the wireless mesh network, and the second edge node is a last recipient of the frame with the baseline and mesh headers in the wireless mesh network. The RA, TA, DA, and SA fields precede the MDA and MSA fields in the frame after insertion of the mesh header into the frame. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310343 | Methods of jointly assigning resources in a multi-carrier, multi-hop wireless communication system - Methods for jointly determining tones, power, scheduling and routing of links in a multi-carrier, multi-hop network to achieve certain desired throughput objectives between source and destination nodes. The methods effectively enhance or optimize throughput received by each destination router under node traffic constraints such as power, scheduling and flow constraints that apply to each link between each of a plurality of nodes within the mesh network. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310344 | TUNNEL OVERHEAD REDUCTION - Reduction of overhead normally caused by the addition of a second IP header in case of tunneling between a home agent and a mobile node located in a foreign network is achieved by replacing an encapsulated first IP header by a tunnel identifier. The home agent and the mobile node agree on a tunnel identifier value at the time of binding update and acknowledgement. The tunnel identifier may be used independently at the home agent and at the mobile node to reconstruct the first IP header, which identifies a correspondent node. Because the encapsulated first IP header is not terminated at either of the home agent or mobile node, overhead reduction is not impacted by eventual transmission error or loss between these two nodes. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310345 | Method of Generating Lower Layer Data Block in Wireless Mobile Communication System - A method of generating a data block including control information in a specific layer of a mobile communication apparatus having a hierarchical structure constructed with a plurality of layers is disclosed. The present invention includes the steps of inserting a control data block including control information into a first region of a lower layer data block if the lower layer has the control information to be transmitted to a receiving side and inserting at least one portion of the data block of an upper layer into a second region of the lower layer data block, wherein the first region is allocated to the control data block before the second region is allocated to the at least one portion of the upper layer data block. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310346 | Communication protocol for a wireless mesh architecture - A wireless mesh communication protocol that dynamically assigns communication time-slots and frequencies to mesh nodes. A first node is established as a PC that sequentially polls other nodes. A second node responds at a predetermined time with information that includes database records, and then a third node responds similarly. The second node is then established as the PC and the first node is polled during dynamically allocated time-slots and on a frequency that depend on the second node's database records. The third node is then established as a PC and acts similarly. In both cases the first node responds by sending information and data records. The first node is then re-established as the PC. The first node then polls the second and third nodes at times and frequencies that depend on the first node's database records. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310347 | Mobile communications system PDIF and method for peer detection of mobile terminal - With a system having no paging function, dead peer detection control and cutoff of a session are implemented as is the case with a system having a paging function. There is provided a method for dead peer detection of a mobile terminal, to be executed in a mobile communications system including a mobile terminal connected to plural wireless systems, a first connection device terminating a first wireless system with access points managing a connection status between the mobile terminal and a wireless link, and a second connection device terminating a second wireless system with access points not managing a connection status between the mobile terminal and a wireless link, said method comprising the steps of the second connection device acquiring the connection status of the mobile terminal in the first wireless system from the first connection device, and the second connection device changing a dead peer detection control process on the basis of the connection status of the mobile terminal, as acquired. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310348 | Wireless Systems and Methods Including Cooperative Communication Medium Access Control - A complementary medium access control (CMAC) method and apparatus are described. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310349 | MULTIPLE BINDINGS HAVING INDEPENDENT FORWARD AND REVERSE LINK BINDINGS FOR MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOLS - Methods, apparatus, systems and computer program products are defined that provide multiple bindings in a Mobile Internet Protocol (MIP) network environment. The multiple bindings that are established are independent of one another, such that a forward link binding is decoupled from, or otherwise does not affect, a reverse link binding and vice versa. Multiple reverse link-only bindings may be established within an active route set for an access terminal. Additionally a single primary binding may be established that provides a forward link binding and reverse link binding. At any point in time, the access terminal may maintain only one primary binding. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310350 | WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A wireless mesh network where a portion of the nodes have reduced receive sensitivity. The negative effects of the density of the wireless mesh network, such as interference, are reduced when fewer nodes receive messages to rebroadcast. In an alternative embodiment, some of the nodes of the mesh network are configured to not rebroadcast even if they receive a message. A method for configuring a dense mesh network is also provided. As many nodes as possible are discovered and registered in the network. Node characteristics of those nodes are adjusted to reduce or eliminate the negative effects of the dense mesh network so that additional nodes may be discovered and registered. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080310351 | Preamble Formats for MIMO Wireless Communications - A method for generating a preamble of a frame for a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless communication begins by, for each transmit antenna of the MIMO wireless communication, generating a carrier detect field, wherein, from transmit antenna to transmit antenna, the carrier detect field is cyclically shifted. The method continues by, for a first grouping of the transmit antennas of the MIMO wireless communication: generating a first guard interval following the carrier detect field; and generating at least one channel sounding field, wherein, from transmit antenna to transmit antenna in the first grouping, the at least one channel sounding field is cyclically shifted, and wherein the at least one channel sounding field follows the first guard interval. The method continues by, when the MIMO wireless communication includes more than the first grouping of the transmit antennas, for another grouping of the transmit antennas: generating at least one other channel sounding field, wherein, from transmit antenna to transmit antenna in the another grouping, the at least one other channel sounding field is cyclically shifted, and wherein the at least one other channel sounding field follows the at least one channel sounding field; and generating the first guard interval prior to the at least one other channel sounding field. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080316956 | Method and Apparatus for Route Optimization in a Telecommunication Network - A method and apparatus for controlling the routing of a data packet sent from a first node towards a second node of a telecommunication network. The first node is a mobile node having an associated home network. An access router intercepts the data packet and determines whether the packet relates to a first mode of communication between the first and second nodes in which data packets generally bypass a home agent associated with the first node's home network. In a second mode of communication, home agent packets generally passed through the home agent. The access router drops the packet if the packet relates to the first mode of communication and if dropping the packet is determined to be in accordance with a pre-determined routing policy. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080316957 | Selection of Orthogonal Covering Sequences and Phase Ramped Sequences - A transmission of information from a secondary to a primary node occurs in a plurality of N logical time durations. The transmission from the secondary to primary node in a wireless network is obtained using a first and a second sequence. Embodiments of the present invention mitigate interference by restricting the choice of the first sequence. Thus, in an embodiment of the invention, the first sequence is selected from a set of M sequences wherein M is strictly less than N. In order to accommodate high—velocity users, the restricted set contains a pair of sequences whose element—wise product is mirror symmetric. In other embodiments of the invention, the choices of the first sequence and second sequence in a time-frequency resource is arranged such that interference is mitigated. A transmission component for K-th logical time duration is obtained from the entire second sequence and K-th element of the first sequence. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20090003263 | NETWORK FOR A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A METHOD OF OPERATION THEREFOR - A network for a cellular communication system comprises access points ( | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003264 | LOAD BALANCING FOR MOBILE IP HOME AGENTS - In one embodiment, mobile nodes may be pre-provisioned with a static home agent address and a static home address. The home agent address may be the same for all the mobile nodes. The home address may be a unique identifier for the mobile node in a network. A registration request from a mobile node may be sent to the home agent address. A load balancer may be configured to receive the registration request at the home agent address. The load balancer is then configured to determine a home agent in the plurality of home agents to send the registration request to. The load balancer determines which home agent to send the request to based on the home address for the mobile node. The load balancer then sends the request to the determined home agent. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003265 | IMS NETWORK PROVIDING PURCHASING SESSIONS TO MOBILE DEVICES THAT ARE LOCATED PROXIMATE TO A BUSINESS - IMS networks and methods are disclosed for providing purchasing sessions to mobile devices that are located proximate to a business. IMS network includes an application server that provides advertisements for the business to mobile devices that are located proximate to the business (i.e., the advertisements are pushed to the mobile devices). Responsive to an advertisement, the user of a mobile device may contact the application server through the mobile device to purchase one or more items from the business. The application server responds to the mobile device with receipt information for the purchase. The user may then request delivery of the purchased item through the mobile device by transmitting some or all of the receipt information to the application server. The application server may then schedule delivery of the item to the user of the mobile device. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003266 | Method of Dynamic Resource Allocations in Wireless Systems - A method of dynamic resource allocations in wireless network is disclosed. The method provides that a base station in the network allocates resources to users independently of other base stations and without resource planning. Resource allocations are done based at least in part on a local optimization objective and a channel quality indicator from one or more users, and result in efficient resource reuse. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003267 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION SCHEDULING IN A MULTIHOP NETWORK - A method of communication scheduling in a multihop network is provided. The multihop network comprises a base station and at least one relay station. The method includes allocating a downlink relay to a relay station; assigning a first one or more connection identifiers to be locally scheduled at the relay station for communication on a first portion of the downlink relay; and assigning a second one or more connection identifiers to be centrally scheduled by the base station for communication on a second portion of the downlink relay. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003268 | CLIENT RESOURCE RESERVATION IN ACCESS NETWORKS FOR ROAMING - A method, apparatus, and system are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method includes granting a mobile device access to a network. The method also includes maintaining the mobile device state information on a network access device that is broadcasting the network, when the mobile device leaves the network, and also maintaining the network state information on the mobile device, when the mobile device leaves the network. Additionally, the method includes restoring the mobile device access to the network using the mobile device state information and the network state information. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003269 | Router Selection Method, Home Agent Device, Mobile Router, and Mobile Network System - Any mobile router or terminal informs a home agent device of a policy of selecting a mobile router, entered by the user. Then, the home agent device creates relay setting information according to the policy information informed and the characteristic information of the mobile routers, and transmits the information to the mobile routers. This relay setting information is for judging whether a packet addressed to the external network, received by the mobile routers is relayed to the external network or transferred to the own network, and if transferring, for determining a transfer destination. Each of the mobile routers relays a received packet according to its relay setting information, thus implementing communication reflecting a user's intention as needed. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090010201 | Mobile Communication Access System, Packet Transfer Device, and Path Re-Establishing Method - Disclosed is a technique for providing a mobile communication access system, etc., that can eliminate the useless consumption of resources due to route redundancy, reduce the load on the processing, such as the setup of an LSP, performed by an ingress LSR, avoid an increase in the length of a signal route for setting up an LSP, suppress a delay in providing a notification of a change for an egress LSR to which a mobile terminal is to be connected, and perform a rapid handover process. According to this technique, based on identification information for a second edge device | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010202 | Wireless base station - A wireless base station for mobile stations, includes a queue distributor for distributing packets among queues for a real-time system service and queues for a non-real-time system service and storing the packets; a scheduler for performing control of transmission sequence of the packets based on the queues for the real-time system service and the non-real-time system service separately; a buffer for storing the packets therein in the transmission sequence determined by the scheduler; and a mapper for allocating the packets stored at the buffer among ratio frames. Further, the scheduler uses, for the queues for the real-time system service and for the queues for the non-real-time system service, a same type of algorithm determining the transmission sequence according to priority values determined based on QoS requests and employs different equations to compute the priority values for the real time and the non-real-time system service | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010203 | Efficient Addressing in Wireless Hart Protocol - A method of providing a wireless extension to a wired protocol for transferring data to and from a field device operating in a process control environment via a wired connection, wherein the wired protocol and the wireless extension to the wired protocol have at least one protocol layer in common includes associating a unique address consistent with an addressing scheme of the wired protocol with each of a plurality of wireless devices operating in the process control environment and forming a wireless network, such that a data packet is routed between two of the plurality of wireless devices based on the unique address; associating a network identifier with the plurality of wireless devices; forming, for each of the plurality of wireless devices, a global address including the respective unique address and the network identifier in accordance with a second addressing scheme; and providing access to an external host operating outside the wireless network to each of the plurality of wireless devices based on the global address associated with the wireless device specified at the external host. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010204 | Support for Network Management and Device Communications in a Wireless Network - A method of efficiently operating a wireless communication network in a process control environment, such that the wireless communication network includes a plurality of field devices, includes defining a communication protocol for supporting wireless communications between pairs of the plurality of field devices, including providing a set of protocol commands, transferring process control data from at least some of the plurality of field devices using a first subset of the set of protocol commands of the communication protocol, and transferring network management data to at least some of the plurality of field devices using a second subset of the set of protocol commands of the communication protocol. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010205 | Priority-Based Scheduling and Routing in a Wireless Network - A method of routing data in a mesh communication network including a plurality of network devices and operating in a process control environment, including assigning one of a plurality of priority levels associated with the communication network to a data packet, sending the data packet from a source network device included in the plurality of network devices to a destination network device included in the plurality of network devices, and routing the data packet to a destination network device via at least one intermediate network device included in the plurality of network devices. The act of routing includes comparing, at each intermediate network device, the priority level of the data packet to a priority mask of the intermediate network device, and modifying at least one of scheduling or routing of the data packet if the priority level of the data packet is not associated with the priority mask of the intermediate network device. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010206 | MOBILE IP HOME AGENT DISCOVERY - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate Mobile IP home agent (HA) discovery in a wireless communication system. Discovery of a HA for Mobile IP can be conducted as described herein for a mobile terminal located on a network wherein movement of the terminal is managed by a network-based mobility protocol. For example, various aspects described herein can be utilized for discovery of a HA located in a 3GPP network from 3GPP and/or non-3GPP access. Further, various aspects described herein can be utilized to discover a gateway acting as mobility anchor for a network mobility protocol utilized by the network. As additionally described herein, HA discovery can be conducted in connection with DNS query formation and communication, network attach and/or re-attach procedures, Neighbor Discovery signaling, and/or other procedures. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010207 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO AUGMENT LEGACY TELEMETRY SYSTEMS AND SENSORS - A method and system to extend the reach and improve the reliability of legacy telemetry systems. A first node transmits a plurality of data to a base station directly or by using a second node and a plurality of transmission nodes. A consolidation node collects transmissions of the plurality of data from the plurality of transmission nodes, thereby extending the reach of the network. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010208 | APPARATUS AND METHOD DETERMINING TBS - In a TBS (Transport Block Size) determination apparatus, a CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) value setting section sets a CQI value which is transmitted from a UE (User Equipment) which communicates based on a packet transmission standard HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access). A TBS acquiring section acquires a TBS by referring to a CQI mapping table based on the set CQI value. A BLER (BLock Error Rate) setting section sets a BLER before, simultaneously, or after the setting a CQI value, and before, simultaneously, or after the acquiring a TBS. A TBS changing section changes the TBS based on the BLER. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090010209 | NOTIFICATION EQUIPMENT, TERMINAL EQUIPMENT, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A notification equipment comprises a transmission data determination unit configured to determine whether transmission data to be transmitted to a terminal equipment is first transmission data or repeated transmission data, an instruction data generator configured to generate identification instruction data indicating that the transmission data is the first transmission data or the repeated transmission data based on a transmission data determination result by the transmission data determination unit, and an instruction data transmitter configured to transmit the identification instruction data to the terminal equipment. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090016261 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING AND/OR USING A COMMUNICATIONS BAND FOR PEER TO PEER SIGNALING - Methods and apparatus for supporting peer to peer communications are described. A plurality of wide area network communications bands in a wireless communications system are also available for use to communicate peer to peer signals. At different times it may be advantageous for a mobile peer to peer communications device to use a different communications band in order to efficiently share air link resources. A peer to peer communications device receives a signal transmitted by a WAN device, e.g., a base station or WAN wireless terminal, and selects a WAN communications band to use as a function of the received signal, e.g., a corresponding band. In some embodiments, the received signal strength measurements from WAN devices are used in the selection process. In other embodiments, recovered decoded information conveyed in a received WAN device signal is used in the selection process. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016262 | Technique for Low-Overhead Network State Dissemination for Management of Mobile Ad-Hoc Networks - Aspects of the disclosure can provide an ad-hoc network having a clusterhead node and a plurality of nodes associated with the clusterhead, at least one of the plurality of nodes is a remote node and at least one is an intermediate node, the remote node can indirectly communicate with the clusterhead through the intermediate node. The remote node can also transmit network state information at a higher rate, but in lesser amounts, than the intermediate node. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016263 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT - It is an object to provide a wireless base station and a terminal equipment capable of shortening the processing time by not requiring the detection of the spatial correlation coefficient, which is required in general technology, and simplifying the selection process for terminal equipments to be connected to each other in a wireless base station that performs spatial multiplexing transmission to a plurality of terminal equipments and a terminal equipment responding for spatial multiplexing transmission. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016264 | PACKET TRANSFER METHOD IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM AND PACKET PROCESSING METHOD IN COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONSTITUTING THE SYSTEM - There is disclosed a technology in which a packet to be sent to a mobile terminal (an MN), distributed from a correspondent node (a CN), can surely reach the MN even in a situation in which the MN is moving. According to the technology, identification information of a plurality of access routers (ARs) | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016265 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A radio communication system of an HARQ method that makes an HARQ transmission interval of subpackets appropriate and reduces data transmission delay resulting from subpacket retransmission. In the radio communication system in which a packet is transmitted and receives with the HARQ method between a base station and multiple radio mobile stations, each of the base station and the multiple radio mobile stations has: a packet transmission circuit for transmitting subpackets in predetermined intervals; a packet reception circuit for repeating decoding processing by combining a newly received subpacket and a previously received former subpacket until an original packet is successfully decoded; and a HARQ control equipped with a function of, for packet communication whose data length is short, transmitting a subpacket or response from the packet transmission circuit in an HARQ transmission interval that is shortened from the HARQ transmission interval of the normal mode. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016266 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A MESSAGE VIA AN UPLINK CHANNEL IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a message via an uplink access channel in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes initiating a first preamble access procedure with Node B, receiving from Node B a first acknowledgement indication with respect to the first access preamble procedure, transmitting to Node B a first message upon receipt of the first acknowledgement indication, and receiving from Node B a second acknowledgment indication regarding the first message | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016267 | BASE STATION AND PACKET TRANSFER EQUIPMENT - A base station and a router are interactively connected by a multilink group which transmits VoIP packets and a multilink group which transmits data packets other than VoIP packets. The base station and the router split transmission lines by referencing the ToS area of received packets and transmit only VoIP packets by way of a dedicated line. In this way, VoIP packets can be transmitted without being affected by other data packets, and the quality of VoIP can be warranted on the mobile network. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016268 | DELAY CONTROL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is related to controlling delay in a wireless communication system. The present invention includes receiving a signal from a plurality of base stations, measuring at least one signal delay of each of the plurality of base stations, reporting the measured at least one signal delay of each base station to a controller controlling the plurality of base stations, and receiving an adjusted signal from each of the plurality of base stations as a result of reporting the measured at least one signal delay, wherein each adjusted signal is received in a synchronous manner. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016269 | METHOD FOR ROUTING A TRAFFIC FLOW IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK AND NODE FOR IMPLEMENTING SUCH A METHOD - It is disclosed a method for routing an upstream traffic flow generated at a node of a radio access network. The method comprises the following steps: a) at the node, splitting the upstream traffic flow in packets; b) at the node, inserting in at least one of the packets an information indicative of the destination of the upstream traffic flow; and c) routing the at least one of the packets according to the information indicative of the destination through a packet-switch operation. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016270 | MIP/PMIP CONCATENATION WHEN OVERLAPPING ADDRESS SPACE ARE USED - Systems, methodologies, and devices are described that enable communication devices, such as mobile devices, to efficiently connect and communicate with public data networks (PDNs) even if overlapping Internet protocol address spaces exist in the PDNs. The subject innovation can employ virtual home agents (v-HAs) that can respectively serve PDNs. To facilitate connection of a mobile device to a desired PDN, a message, including an identifier relating to the desired PDN, can be transmitted to a v-HA and it can be discovered whether that v-HA serves the desired PDN; if so, the v-HA transmits the message to a “home” home agent (h-HA) associated with the desired PDN; and if not, the v-HA can transmit a switch message indicating the correct v-HA to which the message should be sent. Concatenation of communication tunnels associated with the correct v-HA and h-HA facilitate efficient communication associated with the mobile device and desired PDN. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016271 | METHODS FOR SENDING SMALL PACKETS IN A PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) NETWORK - An improved mechanism is provided that facilitates transmission of small packets within an ad hoc peer-to-peer network. A small packet is identified to a receiver within a control channel so that its lower power can be considered in an interference management protocol implemented among local peer devices. In a traffic slot, a transmitter voluntarily backs down on the transmitter power as a smaller packet will require much lower signal-to-noise ratio. This will improve the signal energy per bit per noise power density for the transmission as well as minimize the interference caused to other wireless communications happening in the same spectrum. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016272 | METHODS FOR SENDING SMALL PACKETS IN A PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) NETWORK - An improved mechanism is provided that facilitates transmission of small packets within an ad hoc peer-to-peer network. A small packet is identified to a receiver within a control channel so that its lower power can be considered in an interference management protocol implemented among local peer devices. In a traffic slot, a transmitter voluntarily backs down on the transmitter power as a smaller packet will require much lower signal-to-noise ratio. This will improve the signal energy per bit per noise power density for the transmission as well as minimize the interference caused to other wireless communications happening in the same spectrum. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016273 | DEFERRED ACCESS METHOD FOR UPLINK PACKET CHANNEL - The equipment and techniques disclosed herein introduce a deferred acknowledgement (DACK), in the context of a protocol for a wireless station to request and obtain access to a wireless network resource for communication of one or more data packets. Essentially, a network node, such as a wireless base station, sends the DACK instruction in response to the access request telling the requesting station that the node has heard the request but that the requesting station should defer its transmission. The requesting station need not back off and re-initiate its access request. Instead, the requesting station waits for a later acknowledgement (ACK) granting access to a resource as requested. Although the DACK provides additional signaling, this technique can still utilize a fast ACK type message, that is to say a relatively short signaling packet. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090016274 | CHARGING AND LOCATION INDICATIONS IN A GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK - A Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) for providing both location and charging information from a Generic Access Network (GAN) to a core network. During registration of a mobile station (MS) the GANC determines a Charging Cell Global Identity (Charging-CGI) and a Location Cell Global Identity, (Location-CGI) for the MS and stores the CGIs in an MS context. The MS sends to the GANC, a request a to establish a signaling connection, and includes an Establishment Cause IE indicating a reason for the connection. The GANC selects from the MS context, either the Charging-CGI or the Location-CGI based upon the Establishment Cause IE, and sends the selected CGI to the core network in a message triggering a signaling connection. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090022089 | ARCHITECTURE TO SUPPORT NETWORK-WIDE MULTIPLE-IN-MULTIPLE-OUT WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - The present invention provides a method of coordinating transmission by and reception by a plurality of antennas associated with a plurality of radio heads. The method includes determining, at a controller, at least one relative time delay associated with a plurality of backhaul links between the controller and the plurality of radio heads. The method also includes providing information indicative of a first signal over the plurality of backhaul links. The method further includes providing timing information over the plurality of backhaul links. The timing information is determined based on the relative time delay(s) such that the plurality of radio heads can use the provided timing information to coherently transmit the first signal using the plurality of antennas and a plurality of controllers to receive mobile unit transmitted information. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022090 | SWITCHING ALLOCATION IN AD HOC NETWORK - A method in a wireless communication device ( | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022091 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING STANDARDIZED INTERFACE IN A WIRELESS DEVICE TO DISCOVER AND USE LOCAL AND REMOTE RESOURCES - A wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may discover available networks, and available local and/or remote resources. The WMC device may configure routes utilizing one or more of discovered resources and one or more available networks. The routes may be utilized to performed operations requested via the WMC device. A standardized language and/or protocol may be utilized in discovering and/or communicating with available resources and/or networks. The standardized language and/or protocol may enable commonality among the discovered networks and/or resources, and encryption of data communicated through the established routes. The standardized language and/or protocol may be updated and/or modified to incorporate new resources either by direct interactions between said new resources and the WMC device, or via existing available resources and/or networks. The discovery of resources and/or establishment of routes may be user-triggered, or it may be based on user preference information. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022092 | Method And System For Managing Information Among Personalized And Shared Resources With A Personalized Portable Device - A user's request via a portable or handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) to process data may result in discovery of one or more networked resources capable of handling the processing. One or more communication routes may be established between one or more discovered network resources and one or more of the HWCD and a networked terminating device. The portable HWCD may be configured as a gateway. The user's identity may be determined and the user's personal networking preferences may be acquired. Based user's preferences, a route may be established between discovered networked resources and one or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device. The user's identity may be authenticated. Data may undergo rate and/or format conversion. The data may be protected by secure operations. One or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device may consume or render the requested data. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022093 | WIRELESS NETWORK WITH SIMULTANEOUS UPLINK TRANSMISSION OF INDEPENDENT DATA FROM MULTIPLE CLIENT STATIONS - A wireless network comprises R client stations that respectively generate simultaneous uplink transmission (SUT) data, where R is an integer greater than one. An access point (AP) receives SUT data from each of the R client stations during an SUT period. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022094 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENCODING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN WIRELESS AND OTHER DEVICES - A method for encoding a message communicated between devices, the message having at least one field, the method comprising: if the field is not optional and contains a value, writing the value to one or more data bytes in a byte buffer; and, if the field is optional and contains a default value, marking a bit in a reserved byte in the byte buffer to indicate that the field contains a default value. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090028089 | Communication system and method to be performed in a communication system - The invention relates to a communication method and system wherein a network element of a roaming user is attachable to a visited first network and may still be served by a serving means of the home network. The network element of the roaming user is able to indicate a preference, e.g. home or local control, when registering or initiating a connection. A network element of the visited network such as proxy means adds information on the indicated preference when sending a message to the home network. The message is preferably sent as a protocol message, in particular a message of the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028090 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES - A method and system for wireless communication between devices over the same channel in a Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs) environment, and a device capable of wireless communication with other devices over the same channel in a WPANs environment. The method comprises the steps of broadcasting announcements from one or more WPAN control devices; providing in each announcement an announcement portion for announcing information about one or more WPAN control devices other than said respective announcing WPAN control device; and partitioning medium access time for the communication between the devices over the same channel based on the announcements. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028091 | METHOD FOR SENDING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT MESSAGES WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for selecting a radio access point of a network, and a method for transmitting information on at least two radio access points of a network to a mobile terminal. Further the invention relates to an adapted mobile terminal and control entity for performing the methods, respectively. To minimize the transmission delays of acknowledgement messages sent from a mobile terminal to a control entity, the invention provides an access point selection mechanism that determines for a respective one of the at least two radio access points, a selection criterion associated to the respective radio access point. This selection criterion may be based on a transmission delay for sending acknowledgement messages via a respective access point to a control entity. Based on the determined selection criterion the mobile terminal selects one of the at least two radio access points, and sends an acknowledgement message to the control entity through the selected radio access point. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028092 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING THE SPATIAL LOCATION OF NODES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method determines the propagation delays between nodes in a network, the network including a plurality of nodes. The method includes recording by each one of the nodes the transmission time of a beacon-signal respective of the one of the nodes and the reception times of other beacon-signals respective of other nodes. The beacon signal and the other beacon signals are transmitted according to a forward transmission sequence, a reverse transmission sequence is determined according to the forward transmission sequence. The procedure of recording for beacon signals is repeated and transmitted according to the reverse transmission sequence, and a propagation delay is determined between each pair of communicating nodes according to a forward propagation delay and a reverses propagation delay respective of the each of pair of communicating nodes. The forward propagation delay and the reverse propagation delay are determined according to the recorded times of transmissions and receptions of the beacon signals by the respective nodes. The pair of communicating nodes are defined as a pair of nodes that can receive transmissions of each other, and the time difference between transmissions of beacon signals respective of two nodes, during the forward transmission sequence, is substantially the same as the time difference between transmissions of the beacon signals respective of the two nodes, during the reverse transmission sequence. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028093 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA WITH TRANSFER OBLIGATION DELEGATED IN WSN - A method for transmitting/receiving data with transfer obligation delegated in a Wireless Sensor Network (WSN) reduces the time and power spent by a transmitting apparatus to wait for acknowledgment that a data transfer was successful. The method for transmitting data from a transmitting end to a receiving end through a set transfer route by multiple data transmit/receive apparatuses provided in a Wireless Sensor Network (WSN), typically includes the steps of: performing temporary storage of data to be transmitted on receiving a request to transmit data; requesting a data transmit/receive apparatus, existing on a next route, to transmit data while transmitting data to a data transmit/receive apparatus which is set as a transfer route; and confirming the delivery of the data to the data transmit/receive apparatus set as the transfer route, and then deleting the temporarily stored data frame. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028094 | Information Communication Terminal, Radio Communication Apparatus and Radio Communication Network System Capable of Performing Communication Corresponding to Purpose - In an information communication terminal, a receiving unit receives a frame for notifying of network identification information for specifying a radio network from a different information communication terminal, and a filter unit checks a preset filter condition and mode information indicating a communication mode of the different information communication terminal in the frame received by the receiving unit, and abandons the received frame based on a result of the checking. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028095 | Wireless Network Throughput Enhancement Through Channel Aware Scheduling - A channel aware scheduler (CAS) is disclosed that takes advantage of changing wireless channel conditions in order to maximize aggregated system throughput. The CAS is aware of the different channel conditions for one or more stations and adjusts its scheduling of packet transmissions in light of the same. A related CAS algorithm may take advantage of that knowledge in order to increase aggregated system throughput while concurrently addressing other potential fairness constraints. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090028096 | UPPER STATION, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD - An upper node station includes a packet flow multiplexing portion that multiplexes packet flows that are identified by QoS, in accordance with a QoS requirement; and a transmission portion that transmits the multiplexed packet flows. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090034450 | Methods and Devices for Transmitting Data to a Mobile Data Processing Unit - The invention concerns a method for transmitting data to a mobile data processing unit, the method comprising the steps of a. Receiving the data with a digital audio and/or television reception device ( | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034451 | System and method for handling QoS flows in a roaming scenario - A system and method for transmitting a packet in a network is described. The method includes establishing a session with a flow identifier between a mobile station and a roaming wireless access gateway via a radio access network. A communication link is established between a home wireless access gateway and the roaming wireless access gateway. A filter is maintained at the home wireless access gateway for packet flow between the home wireless access gateway and the mobile station. The flow identifier is identified for a packet received by the home wireless access gateway from the network. The packet is transmitted with the flow identifier from the home wireless access gateway to the roaming wireless access gateway. The session for the packet is identified the via the flow identifier. Systems and method for establishing a call are also described. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034452 | SYSTEM LEVEL INFORMATION FOR DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION, CELL RESELECTION AND RACH - A wireless transmit/receive unit is configured to receive system level information, including discontinuous reception (DRX) information, cell selection information, and RACH information. The system level information is received as defined parameters assigned to system information blocks or signaled through dedicated RRC signaling. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034453 | SCRAMBLE CODE ALLOCATION METHOD, A RADIO BASE STATION, A MOBILE STATION, AND A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A scramble code allocation method used by mobile communications systems, and a base station and a mobile station that use the method are disclosed. The scramble code allocation method autonomously and optimally sets up a scramble code unique to a target base station. The method includes a step of generating a collection packet for collecting unique information of surrounding base stations, the unique information being used for setting up respective identifiers of the surrounding base stations; a step of broadcasting the collection packet to the surrounding base stations through a network; a step of receiving response packets from the surrounding base stations in response to the collection packet; a step of extracting the unique information of the surrounding base stations inserted in the response packets that are received; a step of storing the extracted unique information; and a step of setting up an identifier of the target base station based on the stored unique information. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090034454 | Hierarchical Data Collection Network Supporting Packetized Voice Communications Among Wireless Terminals and Telephones - A packet-based, hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. The network accommodates real time voice transmission both through dedicated, scheduled bandwidth and through a packet-based routing within the confines and constraints of a data network. Conversion and call processing circuitry is also disclosed which enables access devices and personal computers to adapt voice information between analog voice stream and digital voice packet formats as proves necessary. Routing pathways include wireless spanning tree networks, wide area networks, telephone switching networks, internet, etc., in a manner virtually transparent to the user. A voice session and associate call setup simulates that of conventional telephone switching network, providing well-understood functionality common to any mobile, remote or stationary terminal, phone, computer, etc. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090040964 | DYNAMIC INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESSING SOLUTIONS WITH NETWORK-BASED MOBILITY - A media access gateway comprises a wireless network interface, an address assignment module, and a proxy mobility agent module. The wireless network interface establishes a wireless link with a wireless terminal. The address assignment module receives an address request message, which includes a mobility signal from the wireless terminal. The proxy mobility agent module selectively transmits a proxy binding update to a local mobility anchor and receives a proxy binding acknowledgement from the local mobility anchor. The address assignment module selectively transmits an address assignment message to the wireless terminal when the mobility signal indicates proxy mobility. The address assignment message is based on address information in the proxy binding acknowledgement. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040965 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device includes: an analyzing unit for analyzing an MAC header of a received frame; a storage unit for storing a source address when analyzed that the received frame is a suspension signal for suspending an occupancy of a radio channel; a determination unit for determining whether or not the source address of the received frame is stored in the storage unit when analyzed that a destination address of the received frame is for other device; and a power controlling unit for suspending a power supply to the demodulation unit and the analyzing unit for a remaining time of a period for occupying the radio channel which is described on the MAC header when determined that the source address is not stored. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040966 | METHOD FOR GUARANTEEING THE QUALITY OF SERVICES IN PACKET-SWITCHING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for guaranteeing the quality of services in packet-switching radio communications networks. The radio access network (RAN) and the core network (CN) use the quality of service information independently of one another, without signalling individual parameters, in order to guarantee the transmission of packets in the uplink and downlink according to the quality of service. This is achieved exclusively using local settings that have been configured for individual TCLs, permitting a radical reduction in complexity compared to conventional methods. The method is further simplified by the described interlinking of different tasks or the linking of such tasks to an existing data transmission. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040967 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR QUICKLY EXPLOITING A NEW LINK DURING HAND-OFF IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A way to deliver traffic to a mobile node that is undergoing a hand-off between two Access Routers (AR) is described. The method of the present invention operates to perform some or all of the following. Decrease, e.g., minimize, delays between the time the old link breaks and the first packet is sent from the new link. Reduce and/or eliminate packet bursts from old to new AR when an old (existing) link breaks. Ensure that packets are neither lost nor duplicated during hand-off. Maintain QoS control of delivery order to the MN. Make good or best use of multiple links during Make before break hand-off. Support both uplink and downlink traffic. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040968 | Wireless telephone system including voice over IP and POTS - A telephone capable of placing or receiving calls over the PSTN or a packet network. The telephone can store multiple telephone numbers for each potential called party along with preferences that govern the order of selecting telephone numbers to service any given outgoing call. Some or all of the telephone numbers can be associated with a presence service. Presence indicators stored in the telephone are dynamically updated via the packet network connection and are used as part of the telephone number selection algorithm. The preferred embodiment is a wireless system having a base station and a remote device. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040969 | Method and Apparatus for Non-Scheduled Transmission for Packet Service in a Mobile Communication System - A method and apparatus for non-scheduled transmission for a packet service in a mobile communication system are provided. A plurality of allowed maximum packet sizes are defined for the non-scheduled transmission and a UE selects one of the maximum packet sizes under circumstances and sends packets according to the selected maximum packet size in a non-scheduled transmission mode. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090046627 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROL OF DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION (DRX) BY A MOBILE DEVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SUPPORTING VOICE-OVER-INTERNET-PROTOCOL (VoIP) - A method and system for controlling discontinuous reception (DRX) in a mobile device in a wireless communications network that supports voice-over-internet-protocol (VoIP) and that uses an automatic repeat-request (ARQ) method, like a hybrid automatic repeat-request (HARQ) method, uses autonomous DRX control after initial VoIP traffic setup. If the mobile device transmits a negative-acknowledgement signal (NACK) indicating unsuccessful receipt of a VoIP packet, then it autonomously turns on a predetermined delay time later to receive the retransmission of the VoIP packet, where the predetermined delay time is related to the time for the base station to process the NACK and prepare the VoIP packet for retransmission. When the mobile device transmits or retransmits a VoIP packet, reception is deactivated, but is autonomously activated the predetermined delay time later to receive an acknowledgement signal (ACK) or NACK. VoIP packets may be transmitted from the mobile device the predetermined delay time before VoIP packets are transmitted from the base station. This alignment allows an ACK or NACK to be transmitted from the base station in the same transmission time interval (TTI) as a VoIP packet. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046628 | System and method for geocasting in a mobile ad hoc network - Disclosed is a wireless terminal that determines whether to retransmit a received packet. The wireless terminal is configured to determine a first distance from the wireless terminal to a point (e.g., the center point) in a geocast region. The wireless terminal is also configured to determine a plurality of distances between the point and each of a plurality of wireless terminals from which the wireless terminal has previously received a packet having an identifier that is the same as an identifier of the received packet. The wireless terminal is configured to retransmit the received packet if the first distance is less than each of the plurality of distances. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046629 | Signaling of Random Access Preamble Sequences in Wireless Networks - Transmission of random access preamble structures within a cellular wireless network is based on the use of cyclic shifted constant amplitude zero autocorrelation (“CAZAC”) sequences to generate the random access preamble signal. A pre-defined set of sequences is arranged in a specific order. Within the predefined set of sequences is an ordered group of sequences that is a proper subset of the pre-defined set of sequences. Within a given cell, up to 64 sequences may need to be signaled. In order to minimize the associated overhead due to signaling multiple sequences, only one logical index is transmitted by a base station serving the cell and a user equipment within the cell derives the subsequent indexes according to the pre-defined ordering. Each sequence has a unique logical index. The ordering of sequences is identified by the logical indexes of the sequences, with each logical index uniquely mapped to a generating index. When a UE needs to transmit, it produces a second sequence using the received indication of the logical index of the first sequence and an auxiliary parameter and then produces a transmission signal by modulating the second sequence. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046630 | Data-Transmitting Method for Wireless Sensor Network - A data-transmitting method for wireless sensor network comprises: constructing a wireless sensor network having a plurality of nodes for information sensing and a sink for quest raising and data collecting; clustering the nodes to form a plurality of groups, with one of the nodes in each group being identified as a kernel; identifying one of all the nodes as a summit dissemination node and the kernels in all the groups as first level dissemination nodes; and transmitting data between the quest-raising sink and one of the first level dissemination nodes or summit dissemination node to collect information sensed by a source that is one of the nodes. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046631 | TRANSPORT OF PDCP CONTROL PDUs WITHIN MAC FRAMES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate efficiently communicating a data packet related to a protocol layer within a wireless communication system. The systems and/or methods can provide cross-layer optimization by directly transporting or communicating data to a particular protocol layer. In general, a MAC header can include data that indicates a protocol layer to which such data is directed or targeted. The MAC header can allow a portion of data (e.g., PDUs, SDUs, etc.) to bypass at least one protocol layer above the MAC protocol layer for efficient and optimized processing of such data. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046632 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - In some aspect restricted access nodes are assigned to a designated common channel while access terminals that are in active communication with a macro access node may selectively be assigned to the designated channel. In some aspect an access terminal associated with macro access node may perform a handoff to a different carrier when the access terminal is in the vicinity of a coverage area of a restricted access node. In some aspect an access terminal associated with a macro access node may perform a handoff to a different carrier based on location information. In some aspect access to a restricted access node is controlled based on policy and/or based on operation of an access terminal associated with the restricted access node. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046633 | DIGITALLY SIGNING ACCESS POINT MEASUREMENTS FOR ROBUST LOCATION DETERMINATION - In an example embodiment, a wireless client sends a probe request frame and waits for responses to the probe frame. The responses to the probe request from comprise encrypted data representative of the signal strength of the client as measured by the respondent that are digitally signed by the respondent's certificate. The client aggregates the responses and forwards them to a location based server. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046634 | QOS SERVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A QoS server comprises a receiving unit that receives a QoS setting request for the communication flow of a mobile terminal; and a transmitting unit that simultaneously transmits a QoS setting instruction based on the QoS setting request to both of a wireless system mobile management node that accommodates the mobile terminal and a core network mobile management node that manages the wireless access system mobile management node. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046635 | MOBILE NODE, MOBILE AGENT AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A mobile node moves from a first IP (Internet Protocol) network to a second IP network in a network system in which the first IP network capable of executing communication in accordance with both first and second kinds of IPs and the second IP network capable of executing communication in accordance with only the first kind of IP are connected with each other. When the mobile node communicates a message with other nodes on the first network after its movement accordance with the second kind of IP, a header for the movement containing both home and foreign addresses of the first kind in IP is added to a header containing home and foreign addresses in the second kind of IP, and put to the message, is added. The message to which the movement header is thus added is used for the communication between a first mobile agent on the first network and a second mobile agent on the second network, or between the mobile node and the first mobile agent. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046636 | ROUTING APPRATUS AND SESSION CONTROL METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a routing apparatus and session control method. The routing apparatus includes: a first processor for performing session control of portable subscriber stations (PSSs); and a second processor for independently performing at least one additional function separated from session control. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090052374 | Wireless Communication Apparatus, Communication Routing Control Apparatus, Communication Routing Control Method and Communication System - A wireless communication apparatus for performing communication via a plurality of wireless interfaces in a wireless ad hoc network is disclosed. When the wireless communication apparatus receives a request frame via one of the plurality of wireless interfaces, the wireless communication apparatus sends the request frame from at least two wireless interfaces in the plurality of wireless interfaces. In addition, the wireless communication apparatus selects a wireless interface to be used for communication from among the plurality of wireless interfaces based on the request frame. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052375 | HIERARCHICAL MODULATION REVERSE LINK INTERFACE NODE - A wireless communication device transmits a hierarchically modulated reverse link (RL) WWAN signal comprising a lower modulation order component and a higher modulation order component. An interface node receives and demodulates the hierarchical modulated signal to recover the extended data sent with the higher modulation order component. The interface node sends extended data to a base station that is unable to recover the higher modulation order component from the UE device. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052376 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING PAGING OVER AN HS-DSCH IN CELL_PCH AND URA_PCH STATES - A method and apparatus for paging a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) in a CELL_PCH and URA_PCH states are disclosed. A WTRU may send an indication of an enhanced paging channel (PCH) capability of receiving a high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) in CELL_PCH and URA_PCH states, for example, in a CELL UPDATE message, a URA UPDATE message, or a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM message. A drift radio network controller (DRNC) may receive an indication whether the WTRU has an enhanced PCH capability from a serving RNC and page the WTRU based on the indication. An RNC may page the WTRU over both an HS-DSCH and a PCH/secondary common control physical channel (S-CCPCH) if a WTRU capability is not known. The WTRU may monitor both an HS-DSCH and a PCH/S-CCPCH. The WTRU may configure reception over an HS-DSCH based on the capability of the SRNC or configuration from the network. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052377 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - An object of the present invention is to make it possible to appropriately maintain PPP-based communications even in an environment in which the terminal moves and the communication environment continually changes. A mobile communication terminal comprises a plurality of wireless accessing means for establishing PPP-based communication links for respectively different modes of wireless communications with a fixed communication apparatus, which is a communication partner; a PPP device for combining the established communication links; and a valid wireless LAN searching portion for detecting that wireless communication is possible for a wireless LAN adapter. The PPP device executes control so as to establish communication links for the wireless LAN adapter detected as being capable of wireless communication, and for a L2TP virtual device. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052378 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELIABLY TRANSMITTING RADIO BLOCKS WITH PIGGYBACKED ACK/NACK FIELDS - Piggybacked acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement (PAN) bits in unreliable bit positions of a modulated symbol are swapped with data bits located in more reliable bit positions. In addition, a power offset value may be applied to the symbols containing the PAN bits. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052379 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MOBILITY IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL - A method is provided for managing mobility of an Access Terminal (AT) in a mobile communication system using a Mobile Internet Protocol (MIP). The method includes generating, by an AT that has entered a new network, a Security Parameter Index (SPI) and a security key for mutual authentication with a Home Agent (HA) of the new network, sending, by the AT, a registration request message including authentication information including the SPI, the authentication information being generated using the security key, upon receipt of the registration request message, searching, by the HA, a database for the SPI included in the authentication information, verifying the authentication information according to the search result, upon successful verification of the authentication information, generating, by the HA, mobility binding information of the AT, and sending, by the HA, a registration response message including the HA's IP address. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052380 | Mobile media router and method for using same - A mobile media router and a method for using the same receive multimedia data from a first wireless network and reroute the multimedia data in another format without rendering the multimedia. The mobile media router and the method for using the same may reroute the multimedia data over a second wireless network to a rendering device. The mobile media router and the method for using the same may translate, reformat and/or repackage the multimedia data into a form that allows consumption of the multimedia on the rendering device. The mobile media router and the method for using the same may reroute the multimedia data in real time so that the rendering device renders the multimedia as the multimedia data is received by the mobile media router. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090059840 | Wireless communication system and method for managing service flow identifier in the same - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and a service flow identifier management method thereof. The wireless communication system includes a plurality of RASs for controlling a plurality of PSSs in a radio network, and a plurality of ACRs for providing wireless communication services to the PSSs through the plurality of RASs, and respectively managing a service flow identifier used for identifying a connection service for each PSS. When a status of each service flow identifier managed by the plurality of ACRs is different, the wireless communication system releases the corresponding service flow identifier so as to set the status of each of the service flow identifiers to be the same. According to the present invention, in the wireless communication system, the plurality of ACRs separately manage service flow identifiers, and mismatched service flow identifier information due to errors in the system or a node or message transmission/receiving errors can be set to be the same. In addition, when a partial system error occurs and thus the system is restored, a service flow identifier not having the same status due to the error can be efficiently released and set to be the same. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059841 | Wireless communication methods and apparatus using beacon signals - Methods and apparatus supporting peer to peer communications are discussed. A base station, serving as an access node for wireless terminals also communicates information supporting peer to peer communications. A base station transmits a beacon signal conveying information about a peer to peer frequency band and also receives user data from a plurality of wireless terminals, using the base station as a current point of network attachment. In some embodiments, the beacon signal is transmitted into the same frequency band being used for access node based communications and identifies a different frequency band which is to be used as a peer to peer frequency band. Alternatively, or in addition, in support of peer to peer communications, a beacon signal transmission apparatus, a free standing device which doesn't transmit user data, transmits a sequence of beacon signal bursts, each beacon signal burst including at least one high power beacon symbol. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059842 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES THAT DYNAMICALLY ESTABLISH A SENSOR NETWORK - A wireless sensor network includes a network sink node and a plurality of cluster nodes. The cluster nodes are configured to pass communications upstream and downstream. Each cluster node has a communication range, or coverage area. A cluster node is configured to communicate with sensor nodes within the coverage area of cluster node. The sensor nodes are configured to register with at least one cluster node. The cluster nodes are configured to register with the network sink. Identifiers for the sensor nodes may be dynamically generated. Identifiers for the cluster nodes may be dynamically generated. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059843 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND COMPUTER PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING A GRADIENT DRIVEN MESH-NETWORK ESTABLISHMENT - Systems, methods and computer products for establishing a mesh-network consisting of wireless personal area network (WPAN) having a large number of nodes. Exemplary embodiments include a gradient-driven mesh-network establishment method, including switching on a plurality of nodes in a vicinity of the wireless personal area network, detecting an acknowledgment signal via a wireless personal area network signal, querying for at least one or a resource and a physical quantity, selecting a subset of the plurality of nodes and instructing the subset of the plurality of nodes to send out a low power radio transceiver DISCOVER squirt signal to a neighborhood associated with the subset of the plurality of nodes, wherein nodes exclusive of the subset of the plurality of nodes turn off in response to an expiration of a time-out period. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059844 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method of transmitting data in a wireless communication system comprises receiving feedback data on an uplink data channel, the feedback data comprising a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), wherein the value of the PMI corresponds to an index in a codebook, transmitting a precoding scheme for downlink data on a downlink control channel, wherein the preceding scheme is determined as one of at least two of a transmit diversity irrespective of the received PMI, an acknowledgement indicating preceding according to the received PMI and a new PMI indicating that it is used in precoding downlink data to be transmitted, and transmitting the downlink data on a downlink data channel after applying precoding according to the determined preceding scheme. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059845 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT SELECTION AND ACQUISITION OF SYSTEMS UTILIZING OFDM OR SC-FDM - Techniques for performing system selection and acquisition are described. In one design, a terminal may obtain at least one system record for at least one system utilizing orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) or single-carrier frequency division multiplexing (SC-FDM). Each system record may include system identification information for an associated system and an index for an associated acquisition record. The terminal may also obtain at least one acquisition record for the at least one system. Each acquisition record may include at least one value for at least one configurable system parameter, e.g., FFT size, cyclic prefix length, number of guard subcarriers, etc. The terminal may perform acquisition for the at least one system in accordance with the at least one system record and the at least one acquisition record. The system and acquisition records may be stored in a Preferred Roaming List (PRL) or a Most Recently Used (MRU) list. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059846 | PEER-TO-PEER PROTOCOL FOR CELLULAR BASESTATIONS - A novel method for coordinating the operation of cellular basestations through the use of direct communication among those basestations. This is a departure from the current use of “radio network control” (RNC) elements such as the basestation controller (BSC) and mobile switching center (MSC) of the GSM standard and functionally equivalent elements use in other cellular standards. The replacement of the RNC elements with direct communication among basestations gives a network that is less expensive and more reliable that what is afforded by current practices. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059847 | UNSOLICITED GRANT SERVICE CLASS OF IEEE 802.16/WiBro SYSTEM - Provided is a traffic class of an IEEE 802.16/WiBro system. The unsolicited grant service (UGS) scheduling method with regard to a subscriber station (SS) and a base station (BS) that are disposed in a network wherein an IEEE 802.16/WiBro system is realized, the method includes: when the SS requires 1 through M (where M is a positive integer) UGS flows, and the BS serves 1 through N (where N is a positive integer) frames, the BS storing grant periods and guaranteed sizes that are granted to the M UGS flows in each N frame; and the BS comparing service capacity of a frame and a sum of guaranteed sizes of each flow belonging to the N frames, and determining if an overload occurs. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059848 | Method and System for Supporting Large Number of Data Paths in an Integrated Communication System - Some embodiments provide a method and system for supporting a large set of data paths in a first communication network through a smaller set of data paths over which data services of a core network are accessed. Some embodiments provide such functionality by mapping identifiers associated with the larger set of data paths to a smaller set of proxy identifiers associated with the smaller set of data paths. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090059849 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication means which allocates a terminal identifier to a destination communication apparatus and carries out communication with the destination communication apparatus by use of a plurality of functions including an identifier generation section | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090067366 | Multi-Hop Communication Setup Subject to Boundary Values - A method controls the setup of multi-hop communications. For this purpose, boundary values for the multi-hop communications are determined, actual values of the multi-hop communications are detected and multi-hop communications to subscriber terminals are only established if the actual values do not exceed the determined boundary values. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067367 | Method for configuring a radio terminal through a radio communication network, related network and computer program product therefor - A method for configuring a re-configurable radio terminal through a communication network operating according to a communication system, wherein the radio terminal is configured for exchanging information with at least one node of the communication network by using the communicating system. The method is characterized by the steps of associating with the one node of the communication network a server entity configured for using a protocol layer of the communication system and including a set of operating software modules for configuring the radio terminal with at least one set of elements of protocol stack suitable to reconfigure the radio terminal; associating with the radio terminal a client entity configured for using a respective protocol layer corresponding to the protocol layer of the server entity, establishing an over-the-air connection between the radio terminal and the server entity by using the protocol layer, and downloading at least one module of the set of operating software modules from the server to the radio terminal configuring at least in part the radio terminal. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067368 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting a Radio Access Technology for Communication - A method and apparatus for communicating data between a mobile communication device and a communications node via an appropriate radio access technology. In one embodiment, the method comprises identifying at least one characteristic associated with data pending for communication, identifying a set of radio access technologies available for communication and at least one characteristic of each, evaluating the characteristics of the pending data relative to the characteristics of the available radio access technologies, selecting from the set of available radio access technologies a radio access technology relative to the pending data and effectuating communication of at least a portion of the pending data via a communication link employing the selected radio access technology. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067369 | ROUTING IN A MESH NETWORK - Apparatus and method for associating with any one of a plurality of access points in a mesh network including estimating a plurality of metrics for the access points, the estimated metrics being related to throughputs provided by the access points, and selecting one of the access points to associate with based on the metrics and a plurality of backhaul metrics for the access points, the backhaul metrics being related to backhaul throughputs for the access points. The backhaul metrics may be advertised by the access points. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067370 | CELL SEARCH METHOD IN OFDM CELLULAR SYSTEM, FRAME TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF, AND FORWARD LINK FRAME STRUCTURE - Provided are a cell search method, a frame transmission method thereof, and a forward link frame structure thereof. The cell search method used by a terminal to search a target cell using reception signals received from a plurality of base stations, each base station transmitting a frame of its cell, in an Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing (OFDM) cellular system comprising a plurality cells to which a cell-specific scrambling code is assigned includes: detecting a hopping pattern of the target cell using reception sync channel symbols, which are signals corresponding to sync channel symbol positions of the reception signals, wherein the frame of each cell comprises M sync channel symbols code-hopped according to a hopping pattern of the cell, where M is a natural number equal to or greater than 2, each hopping pattern containing M sync channel code sequences and respectively corresponding to each code group to which a scrambling code of each cell belongs, and an arbitrary hopping pattern used in the OFDM cellular system differs from a cyclically shifted result of the hopping pattern, other hopping patterns, or cyclically shifted results of the other hopping patterns; and detecting a code group of the target cell based on the detected hopping pattern. Accordingly, a cell search time and the complexity of the cell search can be reduced. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067371 | Gateway equipped with a multi-antenna transceiver system with MISO architecture for WI-FI communications - There is described a gateway including an electronic card ( | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067372 | HOST-BASED QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate providing quality of service (QOS) functionality on a host device or tethered processor to conserve resources on a network device. In particular, the host device/tethered processor can classify QOS data and manage QOS flows, transmitting data by flow to the network device. The data from the QOS flows can be tagged to identify the flow and/or characteristics thereof allowing the wireless device to simply route the data to its respective flow. Thus, the network device is saved from such classification and flow management freeing resources to provide increased performance and decreased power consumption. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067373 | Deep sleep mode for mesh points - Disclosed herein is an apparatus, method and computer program embodied in a computer-readable memory medium. The method includes transmitting a beacon or a directed transmission from a first device to inform at least one second device in a wireless communication network that the first device will be active only during an active time interval that comprises a beacon transmission period and an additional period near to the beacon transmission period and, at the completion of the active time interval, operating in a lower power mode of operation until a next active time interval. The wireless communication network may be embodied as a mesh network that includes a plurality of mesh points, and the first device and the at least one second device may each be a mesh point. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090073919 | Telecommunications apparatus and method - A telecommunications system comprises a user equipment operable to request a bearer for communicating internet protocol data according to the second internet protocol (IPv4) to and from a gateway support node of a packet radio network. The gateway support node is operable to establish a tunnelling protocol bearer for communicating the internet packet data to and from the user equipment across the packet data network. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to form a link local address. The link local address comprises an interface identifier including a tunnelling end identifier of the tunnelling protocol bearer which ends at a gateway support node of the core network part of the packet radio network. An internet protocol address according to the first internet protocol is requested from an address allocation server using the link local address. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to receive an allocated internet protocol address according to the first internet protocol, and to communicate with the user equipment using the allocated internet protocol address. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073920 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INCORPORATING DIFFERENT PHY MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - In a wireless communications network comprising at least two subscriber terminals each operative to communicate with the same base station using a different PHY mode transmissions than the other, a method and apparatus for allowing communications with these subscriber terminals along a single frequency communication channel is provided. The communication is carried by defining common radio transmission frames in which each of the at least two PHY modes communications is carried out while occupying a different part of the common radio transmission frames. Preferably, at least one of the PHY modes is in compliance with IEEE 802.16 Standard. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073921 | Data forwarding in hybrid mesh networks - A system and method are disclosed for forwarding data in hybrid wireless mesh networks. The method includes configuring a number of mesh network nodes as Potential Relay Nodes (PRNs) in an overlay network associated with a hybrid wireless mesh network, streaming data packets from a source node to a destination node using a native data forwarding algorithm of the hybrid wireless mesh network, dynamically identifying Relay Nodes (RNs) among PRNs in the overlay network, creating secondary paths for sending data packets towards selected RNs in the overlay network, and relaying data packets from RNs to the destination node using the overlay network. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073922 | MULTIPLEXING AND TRANSMISSION OF TRAFFIC DATA AND CONTROL INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for transmitting traffic data and control information in a wireless communication system are described. In an aspect, traffic data and control information may be multiplexed at a coded data level. A user equipment (UE) may encode traffic data to obtain coded traffic data, encode control information to obtain coded control data, multiplex the coded traffic data and the coded control data, modulate the multiplexed data, and generate SC-FDMA symbols. In another aspect, traffic data and control information may be multiplexed at a modulation symbol level. The UE may encode and modulate traffic data to obtain data modulation symbols, encode and modulate control information to obtain control modulation symbols, multiplex the data and control modulation symbols, and generate SC-FDMA symbols. The UE may perform rate matching for traffic data to account for control information. The UE may also perform multiplexing and puncturing for different types of control information. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073923 | Communication device, communication system thereof, and communication setting method thereof - A communication device is disclosed. The communication device includes a radio communication section and a switching section. The switching section switches a function between a station function and an access point function. In a state that the function of the communication device has been switched to the access point function, the communication device is connected to another communication device contained in a radio communication network through the radio communication section. The communication device receives connection setting information from the other communication device through the communication section. The connection setting information has been set to the communication section. The communication device stores the received connection setting information. After the function of the communication device has been switched from the access point function to the station function, the communication device is connected to the radio communication network containing the other communication device based on the stored connection setting information. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090073924 | METHOD OF DISCOVERING AN AD-HOC ON-DEMAND DISTANCE VECTOR ROUTE HAVING AT LEAST A MINIMUM SET OF AVAILABLE RESOURCES IN A DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a wireless communication network ( | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090080369 | RADIO SCHEDULER AND DATA PLANE INTERFACE - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a MAC layer architecture for a base station may comprise a radio scheduler disposed in a control plane separate from the data plane modules of a data plane. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080370 | Methods and apparatus for home agent discovery in mobile IP using link state advertisements - In one embodiment, an apparatus receives an advertisement from each of one or more Home Agents, the advertisement including a first set of information associated with a corresponding one of the Home Agents, each advertisement being in a first protocol. The apparatus obtains the first set of information associated with a corresponding one of the Home Agents from each advertisement. The apparatus composes a router advertisement including a second set of information associated with at least one of the Home Agents, the router advertisement being in a second protocol. The apparatus then sends the router advertisement. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080371 | Contextually-based local selective communications device - A local communications device comprises a station ( | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080372 | BASE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - Provided are a base station device and a mobile station device, which can lighten a cell-search processing. The base station device ( | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080373 | MULTICAST COMMUNICATIONS WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Methods of providing multicast communications within a wireless communications network are provided. In an example, an access network forms a target sector group, the target sector group including at least one target sector from among a plurality of sectors, each target sector expected to have one or more access terminals belonging to a given multicast group. The access network also forms a supporting sector group, the supporting sector group including at least one supporting sector from among the plurality of sectors, each supporting sector not being a target sector and satisfying a proximity metric (e.g., being adjacent to one or more target sectors) with respect to at least one target sector. The access network transmits multicast messages associated with the given multicast group in the at least one target sector and the at least one supporting sector. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080374 | METHOD OF CREATING AND DELETING SERVICE FLOW FOR ROBUST HEADER COMPRESSION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method of creating a service flow for ROHC in a control station is disclosed, which can establishes a ROHC channel between ROHC entities, the method comprising obtaining a first ROHC parameter from a ROHC entity of the control station, upon receiving a subscriber profile to which ROHC is applied; and transmitting a first message including the first ROHC parameter for requesting the creation of service flow to a mobile station related with the subscriber profile and a base station performing a dynamic service addition (DSA) procedure through the use of a second message including the first ROHC parameter. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090086663 | Selecting Aggregation Nodes in a Network - In one embodiment, a method includes determining, at a local node in a network of multiple nodes, a first neighbor node of one or more neighbor nodes with which the local node is in direct communication based on a first number of nodes with which the first neighbor node is in direct communication. The first neighbor node is selected as an aggregation node for information about the local node. The aggregation node outputs data that is a combination of data received from multiple different nodes. The method allows wireless routers in mobile ad hoc networks to automatically determine their own aggregation nodes for routing information and thus automatically enables routing protocols to scale for many thousands of mobile wireless nodes. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086664 | Packet forwarding in multi-radio multi-hop wireless networks - A packet forwarding technique is presented that forwards data packets through a multi-hop wireless network employing multi-radio nodes. In each multi-radio node, an output buffer is shared among the radios. Outgoing packets are stored in this buffer. Whenever there is a transmission opportunity on the radios sharing the output buffer, the node examines the buffer and searches for packets that are scheduled to be transmitted to a neighboring node having an open communication link with the transmitting node. The packet in the discovered group that has the highest transmission priority is then transmitted to its next scheduled node. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086665 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REQUESTING PILOTREPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for transmitting PilotReportRequest message in a wireless communication system is described. A PilotReportRequest message comprising an 8 bit MessageID field and an 8 bit ReportFormat field is generated, wherein the ReportFormat field indicates the format of the PilotReport being requested from an access terminal. The PilotReportRequest message is transmitted over a communication link | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086666 | METHOD FOR ARQ-ENABLED PRE-TRANSMISSIONS IN MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICES OF RELAY NETWORKS UTILIZING THE IDLE PERIODS - A method and apparatus is disclosed herein for transmitting data in a network (e.g., a relay network). In one embodiment, the method comprises performing pre-transmission of a packet to hops to enable the base station and the plurality of hops to transmit the packet synchronously to one or more mobile stations in the wireless communication system; and performing one or more re-transmissions of the packet at a first set of one or more hops in the system during a delay due to pre-transmissions at a second set of one or more hops in the system. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086667 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for Preserving A Signalling Connection - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for preserving a signaling connection after a network has indicated that the signaling connection can be closed, such as by selection of a no follow on proceed mode during routing area updates or attach procedures. By preserving the signaling connection, subsequent communications between the network and the user equipment can be completed without closing and then subsequently reopening the signaling connection. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086668 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A DUAL-STACK MN TO ROAMING IN AN IPV4 NETWORK - The disclosure provides a method and apparatus for a dual-stack Mobile Node (MN) to roam in an IPv4 network. The apparatus mainly includes a Foreign Home Agent (FHA). The method mainly includes: acquiring, by the MN, a temporary IPv4 address THOA that the FHA assigns to the MN, and registering its IPv4 Care-of Address (COA) in the FHA; and delivering, by the FHA, a packet between the MN and a Corresponding Node (CN) or Home Agent (HA), according to information about the IPv4 COA, which is assigned for the MN and has been registered by the MN in the FHA. With the method of the invention, a routing solution may be implemented for a dual-stack MN to roam from an IPv6 network to an IPv4 network. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090092075 | Methods and apparatus for establishing communications between devices with differing capabilities - Methods and apparatus for establishing communications between devices, e.g., mobile communications devices in an ad hoc network, with differing capabilities are described. A device which is capable of supporting multiple protocols in addition to a protocol used to communicate device capability information forms communications links with first and second devices which do not have the ability to form communications links directly between one another, e.g., because of they do not support the same protocols. Once the links are established the first and second devices can communicate via the third communications device. In some embodiments, each of the first, second and third devices support a first communications protocol which is suitable for communicating device capability information but is unsuitable for exchanging user data. The ability to discover other devices and there capabilities facilitates the creation of an ad hoc network. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092076 | Method and apparatus to reduce system overhead - System throughput is improved by decreasing the system overhead by reducing the size of control packets and data packet headers. A connection identifier (CID) is divided into a CID part | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092077 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING REORDERING FUNCTIONALITY IN RADIO COMMUNICATIONS - The definition and use of an additional timer for the MAC-hs reordering function in a user equipment. The timer counts transmission time intervals and is reset each time that the user equipment receives a data packet. If the timer reaches a set value, indicating a sufficiently long period of inactivity, then the transmission sequence number is reset to zero or another predefined value. A base station can run a similar timer and, after the timer reaches a set value, can consider the user equipment as no longer being active. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092078 | AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF ADMISSION POLICY FOR FEMTOCELL - Automatic provisioning of an access point base station or femtocell. The method may include the femtocell transmitting first information (e.g., location information, signal measurement information, capability information, etc.) to a service provider (e.g., over an IP network). The femtocell may receive second information from the service provider, where the second information includes one or more operational parameters. The operational parameters may include hand-off parameters, admission policy parameters, PN or scrambling codes, power parameters, and/or other parameters. The femtocell may operate according to the received parameters to provide access for a plurality of access terminals in a local area. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092079 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING UPLINK PROTOCOL CHANGES - A method and apparatus for supporting uplink (UL) protocol changes includes reconfiguring a medium access control (MAC) protocol. A hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process is flushed, and a MAC-e/es reset is performed. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092080 | CENTRALIZED MOBILE ACCESS POINT ACQUISITION - Providing for centralized access management to diverse types of mobile network access points is described herein. By way of example, network components can generate a system determination list (SDL) for a user terminal (UT) that is customized to access capabilities of the UT and/or current position of the UT. The SDL can be employed by the UT to determine which network access points to camp on, handoff to, or the like. The network components can include a network database that maintains UT subscriber and related home Femto cell information, or such information can be maintained at a network operator's home location register. In some aspects, the information can be obtained over the air from the UT or from a base station serving the UT. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092081 | DISTRIBUTED MOBILE ACCESS POINT ACQUISITION - Providing for distributed access point management for access to a mobile network is described herein. By way of example, an interface application maintained at a Femto cell base station (BS) can facilitate initial power up and/or acquisition for a Femto user terminal (UT). Upon start-up, a bootstrap process is utilized by the Femto cell to provision the UT with an SDL establishing at least one BS as high priority within a particular geographic area (GEO). Thus, when the Femto UT is within the GEO, the UT is more likely to acquire, camp on and/or handoff to the preferred BS. When outside the GEO, a serving access point can provision the Femto UT OTA with a custom SDL suited to another GEO having a different high priority access point. By implementing access point management at distributed access points, expensive network equipment can be mitigated or avoided. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092082 | MAINTAINING INFORMATION FACILITATING DETERMINISTIC NETWORK ROUTING - In a wireless network that includes a plurality of nodes, a method of maintaining, by a first node, information regarding communications links between nodes in the wireless network includes: for each communications link that is established with another node, recording an identification of the other node; and for each message received by the first node from the other node through the communications link with the other node, recording a network pathway by which the message has been sent in the wireless network, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent. Another method includes recording, by a server, for each message that is received by the server from the wireless network, a network pathway by which the message has been sent, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092083 | MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A source terminal measures characteristics of the path at the source terminal itself, produces a characteristics-measurement packet, and transmits the produced characteristics-measurement packet to a relay terminal. Upon receiving the characteristics-measurement packet, the relay terminal measures characteristics of the path at the relay terminal itself, renews the characteristics of the path included in the characteristics-measurement packet using the measured characteristics of the path, and transmits the characteristics of the wireless communication path to the destination terminal. The source terminal produces an admission-request packet and transmits the packet to the destination terminal. Upon receiving the admission-request packet, the destination terminal allows or rejects the traffic quality maintenance request according to the characteristics of the wireless communication path. The allowance or rejection of the quality maintenance request is transmitted to the source terminal with the admission-reply packet by the destination terminal. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090097436 | Methods for access control in femto system - In a method for controlling access to wireless resources provided by femto cells within a femto subnet a femto management system or radio access network may control access to femto cells within the femto subnet by assigning at least one hashing class mask of a first-type or hashing class mask of a second-type to a wireless user. The hashing class mask of the first-type or hashing of the second-type class mask may be assigned based on whether the wireless user is authorized to access a first femto cell within the femto subnet. The hashing class mask of the first-type provides access to at least one first femto cell within the femto subnet. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097437 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING AN ACCESSPARAMETERS GROUP MESSAGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting an AccessParameters group message in a wireless communication system, the method comprising generating the AccessParameters group message comprising a 2 bit AccessCycle Duration field wherein the AccessCycle Duration field determines the duration of the access cycle in units of Control Segment Periods (as defined by the Physical Layer), a 5 bit AccessSequencePartition field wherein the AccessSequencePartition field indicates the partition of the access sequence space to allow the access terminal to signal pilot power and buffer status information with the access sequence, a 4 bit MaxProbesPerSequence field wherein the MaxProbesPerSequence field determines the maximum number of probe sequence that can be part of one access sequence and is set to n+1, a 4 bit ProbeRampUpStepSize field wherein the ProbeRampUpStepSize field determines the power ramp up used for probes within a probe sequence and is set to a value 0.5*(1+n)dB, a 6 bit RDCHInitialPacketFormat field wherein the RDCHInitialPacketFormat field is set to the packet format that is used on the first transmission the access terminal makes on the R-DCH after getting an access grant, a 2 bit PilotStrengthSegmentation field wherein the PilotStrengthSegmentation field comprises a PilotThreshold1 and PilotThreshold2, a 8 bit OpenLoopAdjust field wherein the OpenLoopAdjust field determines the nominal power used by access terminal in the open loop power estimate and is set to value 70+n dB and transmitting the AccessParameters group message over a communication link. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097438 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMISSIONS IN POWER SAVE MODE - System and method for power saving transmission in a wireless communications networks. In one embodiment, a communications device includes a transceiver configured to transmit or receive frames over a peer communications link to or from another communications device in a wireless communications network. The communications device also includes a controller configured to initiate a service period for transmission of data frames to the another communications device. The controller is also configured to terminate the service period following an acknowledgement to a transmission of a last data frame therein addressed to either the communications device or the another communications device. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097439 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING BROADCASTING IN A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method of controlling broadcasting in a wireless sensor network. The method includes performing broadcasting from an upper node to a lower node for a predetermined number of times, transmitting a time offset calculated according to the broadcasting from the lower node to the upper node, calculating an average of the time offsets received from at least one lower node, by the upper node and resetting the number of times of broadcasting according to the calculated average by the upper node. Accordingly, the number of times of broadcasting may be controlled according to the average of received time offsets in the wireless sensor network. In another aspect, an adjustment to the number of times of broadcasting may be received and the number of times of broadcasting may be adjusted based on an average of the received adjustments. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097440 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve problems arising when a communication system such as a wireless LAN is constructed as a decentralized distributed type network without a relationship of control station and controlled stations such as a master station and slave stations, in a wireless communication system composed of a plurality of communication stations without a relationship of control station and controlled stations, respective communication stations transmit beacons with information concerning a network written thereon with each other to construct the network, and it becomes possible to make sophisticated judgment such as communication states of other communication stations by those beacons. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097441 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING MBMS RADIO BEARER TYPE - A method and apparatus for selecting a radio bearer type for providing a service to a plurality of mobile terminals according to a count of mobile terminals obtained through responses to a service response request message from a network is provided. An MBMS radio bearer type is selected according to a count that includes RRC-connected mobile terminals that still need to establish a connection in order to receive an MBMS such that the radio bearer type established is sufficient to provide the MBMS to all mobile terminals desiring to receive the service. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090103474 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING BLUETOOTH PERFORMANCE IN THE PRESENCE OF A COEXISTENT, NON-BLUETOOTH, WIRELESS DEVICE - The disclosed systems and methods relate to improving the coexistence of Bluetooth devices and devices that use other wireless standards. Aspects of the present invention may enable a higher level of data throughput by reducing the retransmission rate. Aspects of the present invention may minimize design cost by allowing manufactures to use Bluetooth radios from one source and non-Bluetooth radios from another source. Aspects of the present invention may be embodied in a single device or multiple devices that operate in a geographic area. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103475 | TELECOMMUNICATION AND MULTIMEDIA MANAGEMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention is directed to a node for transmitting data over a network. The node includes a first ascertaining element configured to ascertain the need to transmit one or more data streams from the node to a second node over the network, the one or more data streams including time-based media that is generated either locally or remotely on the network. The node also includes a second ascertaining element configured to ascertain a timeliness preference for reviewing the one or more data streams by one or more recipients respectively. The ascertained timeliness preference for each one of the data streams is either (a) time-sensitive where at least one recipient of the one data stream has indicated an intent to review the one data stream in a near real-time mode as received by the recipient over the network while the time-based media of the one data stream is being generated or (b) less-than time-sensitive. The node further includes a transmitter that transmits the one or more data streams using either a first transmission technique or a second transmission technique, depending on the ascertained timeliness preference of each data stream. The first transmission technique is used for the less-than time-sensitive preference data streams, whereas the second transmission technique is used for data streams with the time-sensitive preference. The first technique uses a larger first packetization interval, which is defined as the amount of time based media contained in each packet, compared to the second packetization interval used by the second technique. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103476 | GRACEFUL DEGRADATION FOR VOICE COMMUNICATION SERVICES OVER WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for gracefully extending the range and/or capacity of voice communication systems is disclosed. The method involves the persistent storage of voice media on a communication device. When the usable bit rate on the network is poor and below that necessary for conducting a live conversation, voice media is transmitted and received by the communication device at the available usable bit rate on the network. Although latency may be introduced, the persistent storage of both transmitted and received media of a conversation provides the ability to extend the useful range of wireless networks beyond what is required for live conversations. In addition, the capacity and robustness in not being affected by external interferences for both wired and wireless communications is improved. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103477 | GRACEFUL DEGRADATION FOR VOICE COMMUNICATION SERVICES OVER WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A communication device for gracefully extending the range and/or capacity of voice communication systems. The communication device includes a persistent storage device configured persistently store the voice media either generated when using the communication device or received over the network at the communication device. When the usable bit rate on the network is poor and below that necessary for conducting a live conversation, the communication device transmits voice media from persistent storage and stores received voice media in persistent storage at the available usable bit rate on the network. Although latency may be introduced during the back and forth transmissions of a conversation, the persistent storage of both transmitted and received media of a conversation provides the ability to extend the useful range of wireless networks beyond what is required for live conversations. In addition, the capacity and robustness in not being affected by external interferences for both wired and wireless communications is improved. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103478 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PCDP DISCARD - A method and apparatus for discarding a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) service data unit (SDU) are disclosed. A PDCP layer sets a timer and discards a PDCP SDU upon expiration of the timer. The timer may be set upon receiving the PDCP SDU from an upper layer or upon submitting the PDCP SDU to a lower layer for transmission. The timer and a radio link control (RLC) discard timer may be coordinated. Alternatively, the PDCP layer may discard the PDCP SDU based on a notification from an RLC layer or based on a PDCP status report. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103479 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION AND RADIO TERMINAL - A radio terminal | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103480 | HYBRID ARQ SCHEMES WITH SOFT COMBINING IN VARIABLE RATE PACKET DATA APPLICATIONS - A system and method for transmitting high speed data on fixed rate and for variable rate channels. The system and method provides the flexibility of adjusting the data rate, the coding rate, and the nature of individual retransmissions. Further, the system and method supports partial soft combining of retransmitted data with previously transmitted data, supports parity bit selection for successive retransmissions, and supports various combinations of data rate variations, coding rate variations, and partial data transmissions. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090109897 | LEGACY SUPPORT FOR WI-FI PROTECTED SETUP - Techniques and systems for automatically configuring devices to interact with “legacy” wireless access points (“WAPs”) are disclosed. According to one technique, a user programs a WPS-enabled WAP with the configuration information of a “legacy” WAP. This makes the WPS-enabled WAP “aware” of the “legacy” WAP. When any other user brings his device within discovery range of the WPS-enabled WAP, the WPS-enabled WAP sends, to that device, a list of the WAPs of which the WPS-enabled WAP is aware. The device's user selects one of the WAPs (e.g., a “legacy” WAP) from the list. The WPS-enabled WAP receives the user's selection and sends, to the device, the configuration information for the selected WAP. The user's device configures itself, using the configuration information, to interact with the selected WAP. Thereafter, the user's device can access a network through the selected WAP, even if the selected WAP is a “legacy” WAP. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109898 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A MESSAGE TRANSPORT FOR A MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to a system and method for selecting a network for use by a communication device to process a data transmission is provided. In the method, the following actions are conducted: tracking transmission characteristics of networks used by the device; maintaining a set of options for the device relating to the networks, including at least one option based on the transmission characteristics; utilizing a selected option identify a selected network to process the data transmission by the communication device; and processing the data transmission using the selected network. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109899 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PARAMETER SETTING CONTROL APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD - This invention has as its object to implement dynamic processing according to processing loads on access points in a wireless communication local network system including a plurality of independent wireless cells. According to this invention, a communication control method for a communication control apparatus, which controls a wireless communication in a wireless communication local network system including a plurality of independent wireless cells, includes: a step of determining the processing loads of respective APs; a step of selecting an STA, which is to associate with another independent wireless cell built using an AP with a low processing load by switching processing, of STAs, which associate with an independent wireless cell built using an AP with a high processing load; and a step of requesting to transmit parameter information required to associate with the other independent wireless cell. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109900 | RADIO CONTROLLER, RADIO BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CALL ADMISSION CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In a radio controller, a radio communication system, and a call admission control method, even when services such as a voice call service and a streaming service other than the best effort service are provided in communication using a shared channel, it is possible to admit a new call while guaranteeing a predetermined throughput for users in communication, the users receiving best effort services through the communication via the shared channel. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109901 | WIRELESS DEVICE WHICH SELECTS ROUTES EXCLUDING LOOP ROUTES AND A MESH NETWORK INCLUDING THE SAME - In wireless communication using links with neighbor wireless devices, a wireless device calculates ratios of throughput to maximum throughput for the links and calculates the costs of the links using the calculated ratios. Then the wireless device finds, for each destination, a route in which the sum of such calculated link costs is the minimum, and sends a packet to the destination using the route. As a consequence, routing can be done according to an isotonic, easy-to-implement routing protocol. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109902 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for a more efficient carrier search. The object is achieved by a method for sending a signal in a first node. The first node communicates with a second node via radio communication, which radio communication is performed by multi carrier transmission. The first node uses a carrier, being associated with a frequency range. The method comprises the step of transmitting an end-marker signal within or close to the frequency range. The end-marker signal is intended to be received and used by the second node for identifying the frequency range of the used carrier. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090116424 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A packet communication method according to the present invention includes: transmitting, at a mobile station, a random access request that includes mobile station information assigned to the mobile station, to a radio base station through a random access channel allocated to a predetermined radio resource; receiving, at the radio base station, the random access request from the mobile station; and transmitting, at the radio base station, a random access response signal that notifies the receipt of the random access request and includes the mobile station information, to the mobile station through a downlink shared control channel corresponding to the random access channel. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116425 | ERROR CONTROL METHOD, MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) FRAME DESIGNING METHOD, AND TERMINAL REGISTRATION METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In a method of registering with an access point in a terminal of a wireless communication system, a frame includes a downlink sub-frame including a broadcast interval and a first management connection interval, and an uplink sub-frame including an access interval and a second management connection interval, the broadcast interval being used for transmitting a map message, the method includes: sending a first ranging request message to the access point using the access interval; receiving allocation information of a ranging slot from the access point using the map message; performing ranging through the ranging slot; sending a registration request message to the access point using the second management connection interval; and receiving information on whether to permit the registering from the access point using the first management connection interval. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116426 | SDU DISCARD MECHANISMS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate packet discard restriction in a wireless communication system. As described herein, a discard prohibit counter and/or other similar mechanism can be employed to limit the number of consecutive packets that are discarded by a transmitter, even in the event that the delay bounds of those packets have been exceeded. A discard prohibit counter as described herein can be updated upon a packet transmission and reset upon a packet discard to ensure that an acceptable number of packets are transmitted before a packet can be discarded. An acceptable number of packets can be selected based on device specifications, requirements of a data packet flow and/or traffic associated with the flow, or other suitable factors, and can be constant or adaptable to changes in network conditions. As further described herein, multiple counters can be separately maintained and utilized for a plurality of corresponding packet flows. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116427 | ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY FRAME STRUCTURE WITH BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY - An advanced technology frame structure is described herein. The advanced technology frame structure can enhance a first technology frame structure in dimensions of time, frequency, or a combination of time and frequency. A second technology frame structure time division multiplexes second technology subframes with the first technology downlink and uplink subframes. The first technology downlink subframe can be divided into a first technology downlink subframe and one or more second technology downlink subframes. Similarly, the first technology uplink subframe can be divided into a first uplink subframe and one or more second technology uplink subframes. These principles can be expanded upon and can be applied in many communication systems. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116428 | Mobile communication method and system - In the method for wireless communication between a terminal and a base station supporting a real time packet transfer service mode and reliable packet transfer service mode according to the present invention, one of the real time packet transfer service mode and reliable packet transfer service mode is selected and a communication channel between the terminal and the base station is established, and the packet data are bidirectionally exchanged between the terminal and the base station over the communication channel in real time. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116429 | NETWORK SYSTEM - MTID of a terminal apparatus is preliminarily registered into a database of an ISP. In step S | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090122748 | Method and System for the Dynamic Adaptation of Service Quality Metrics in an Adhoc Network - A method and system for dynamically managing quality of service metrics in an ad hoc network including a plurality of routing nodes ( | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122749 | Method and apparatus for localizing AM/FM/XM radio advertisement - Within a metropolitan area, existing AM/FM radio audience listens to same advertisement message at a time throughout the whole area. Such advertisement could be out of listener's interest if ad sponsor is located geographically far away from the listener. Business owner, such as auto dealer, restaurants or grocery store, may want to reach nearby local customer via radio advertisement. With this invention, radio broadcasting companies can air different advertisements at a time tailored to listeners in a specific sub-areas. They can air multiple advertisements simultaneously each of which is focused on local town or county listeners. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122750 | Internet Protocol Version 4 Support for Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol Version 6 Route Optimization Protocol - A network component comprising at least one processor configured to implement a method comprising promoting an optimization of a communications route associated with a mobile node (MN) and a correspondent node (CN) using Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) packets is disclosed. Also disclosed is a network comprising a mobility access gateway (MAG) in communication with a MN, and a CN in communication with the MAG and that desires to communicate with the MN, wherein a communications route between the MN and the CN is optimized using IPv4 signaling. Included is a method comprising promoting an optimization of a communications route between a MN and a CN using IPv4 signaling. Standalone CNs and CNs under a MAG embodiments are supported. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090129313 | CONTROL STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND PACKET DATA DISCARDING METHOD - There is provided a control station device capable of suppressing a traffic amount by discarding packet data to be discarded by a control station device, without transmitting the packet data from the base station device to the control station device. In this device, a buffer ( | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129314 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION WITH LOCATION PRIVACY SUPPORT - The invention relates to a method for route optimisation of packet switched data transmissions between a first mobile node and a second mobile node in a mobile communication system comprising a plurality of access networks. The method comprises the step of transmitting return routability protocol packets and data packets. The return routability protocol packets and data packets are analysed, and at least part of an address comprised in headers of the return routability protocol packets and data packets is removed. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129315 | DATA DISCARD FOR RADIO LINK CONTROL IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate in-band notification of stale service data units (SDU) in a radio link control (RLC) layer for wireless communications. In particular, where SDUs become stale during protocol data unit (PDU) retransmission, in-band notifications can be packed in retransmit PDUs for receipt and interpretation by a receiver. The in-band notification can be a special length indicator that specifies discard of an SDU that was previously partially received, and the transmitter of the PDU can save payload by not retransmitting the stale SDU. In this regard, additional channels, mediums, and/or other out-of-band notifications are not required to specify discard. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129316 | Systems and methods for adaptive routing in mobile ad-hoc networks and disruption tolerant networks - The systems and methods described herein include adaptive routing processes for packet-based wireless communication networks. This routing approach works both in MANETs (when a contemporaneous end-to-end path is available) and in DTNs (when a contemporaneous end to end path is not available, but one of formed over space and time). In particular, the methods include adaptively selecting a routing process for transmitting a packet through a node in the network based on available information on the network topology and/or the contents of the packet. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129317 | ACK/NACK DTX detection - In a first aspect of the invention there is a method, apparatus, and executable software product for receiving scheduling information, determining that at least one downlink allocation of the scheduling information was not received, sending a reply to the received scheduling that comprises an indication of discontinuous transmission in response to the determining. In another aspect of the invention there is a method an apparatus to send scheduling information, and receive a reply to the scheduling information comprising an indication of discontinuous transmission that at least one downlink allocation of the scheduling information was not received. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129318 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPLICATION SERVER FOR ROUTING CS DOMAIN CALLS TO PS DOMAIN - A method and system for routing a Circuit Switched (CS) domain call to a Packet Switched (PS) domain are disclosed. The method includes a Voice Call Continuity Application Server (VCC AS) in the PS domain interacts with a Home Location Register (HLR) in the CS domain to obtain an original called number, allocates a PS domain routing number to a CS domain call, and originates a corresponding PS domain call according to the obtained original called number after the PS domain call, which uses the PS domain routing number as a called party identifier, arrives at the VCC AS in the PS domain. The VCC AS obtains the call information through the interaction with the HLR rather than the interaction with a Service Control Point (SCP). Therefore, a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) needs to communicate with the HLR only, without the requirement to communicate with the SCP, and the MSC in the present disclosure does not need to support intelligent processing. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129319 | INTEGRATED WEB CACHE - A gateway for mobile communications comprises a cache for storing network data recently downloaded from a network, a foreign agent, and a packet filter that directs requests for the network data from a mobile node to the cache. The packet filter directs the requested network data from the cache to the mobile node by way of the foreign agent, without forwarding the requested network data to a home agent of the mobile node. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129320 | Communications Terminal, Server, Playback Control Method and Program - The communications terminal comprises: a playback device which playbacks content; a reading device which reads in access information recorded on a prescribed recording medium, the access information being necessary for downloading the content which can be played back by the playback device, via a network; a communications device which downloads via communications the content corresponding to the access information according to the access information read in; a storage device which stores the downloaded content, the storage device storing details of the access information in association with the content, the details of the access information being used in downloading the content; a judging device which judges whether or not the content corresponding to the read access information is present in the storage device, according to information which is stored in the storage device, when the access information is read in by the reading device; and a control device which controls the playback device, the reading device, the communications device, the storage device, and the judging device, wherein: if the judging device judges that the content is present in the storage device, the control device controls for acquiring the content corresponding to the access information read in from the storage device, and for playing back the content; and if the judging device judges that the content is not present in the storage device, the control device controls for downloading the content corresponding to the access information read in, and for playing back the content. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090129321 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CLUSTERING WIRELESS DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Described are a system and method for clustering wireless devices in a wireless network. The system comprises a wireless access point and a plurality of wireless computing units grouped into a cluster as a function of a predetermined parameter. The cluster includes a cluster head unit and at least one cluster member unit. The at least one cluster member unit utilizes a first power level when wirelessly communicating with the cluster head unit, and the cluster head unit utilizes a second power level when communicating with the AP. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090135758 | Method for discovering neighbor networks in mobile station and network system for enabling the method - The present invention relates to a wireless network, and more particularly, a method (*“and system”?*) which a mobile station discovers a neighbor network in an Internet protocol based wireless network, a network management server for enabling the method, and a method of operating the network management server. A network management server of a wireless network system, the server including: a neighborhood (NH) database maintaining configuration information with respect to at least one neighbor network; a communication interface receiving a request message for capability/configuration information of the neighbor network from a mobile station which is connected via a predetermined access point or a base station; and a database management unit extracting the capability/configuration information of the neighbor network which is included in the request message by referring to the neighborhood database, and controlling a reply message including the capability/configuration information to be transmitted to the mobile station via the communication interface. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135759 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND NETWORK SIDE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A technology is disclosed for achieving fast and reliable handover. According to this technology, in the network composition where a network coverage area of the cellular base station | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135760 | MULTIMODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A multimode wireless communication apparatus that supports plural wireless communication systems and switches wireless communication systems to communicate. The apparatus includes a signal processor capable of switching wireless communication systems by plural manners; and a controller that directs to the signal processor a combination of manners of switching wireless communication systems according to a communication environment. The signal processor switches wireless communication systems according to the combination of manners of switching wireless communication systems directed from the controller. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135761 | PREAMBLE DESIGN FOR A WIRELESS SIGNAL - Providing for base station (BS) acquisition in semi-planned or unplanned wireless access networks is described herein. By way of example, a signal preamble can be dynamically allocated to wireless signal resources, such that the preamble is scheduled to different resource(s) across different cycles of the signal. Dynamic allocation can be pseudo-random, based on collision feedback, or determined by a suitable algorithm to mitigate collisions from a dominant interferer. In addition, dynamic scheduling can be particular to a type of BS to significantly reduce collisions from BSs of disparate types. In at least one aspect, a preamble resource can be sub-divided into multiple frequency sub-carrier tiles. Control channel information can be transmitted on each tile of a group of such tiles, further mitigating effects of a dominant interferer on a subset of the tile group. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135762 | POINT-TO-POINT COMMUNICATION WITHIN A MESH NETWORK - A method and system provide receiving communications via either a short address or a long address. The method may include, responsive to receiving a packet, parsing a packet header. The method may include computing a response to the packet. The method may include, responsive to determining the packet includes a short address addressee, transmitting the response via a mesh network. The method may include, responsive to determining the packet includes a long address addressee, transmitting the response via a point-to-point protocol. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135763 | BASE STATION - The present invention can be achieved by a base station in which a terminal is accommodated and the terminal is communicated with another terminal, and which includes: a data rate operation/management unit which operates and stores a time-averaged data rate Rave of the terminal; a threshold value operation/management unit which obtains a current communication data rate R of the terminal to operate and store R/Rave; and a delay management unit which controls to reduce delay on the basis of the R/Rave. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135764 | ROUTING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORK - A routing method and system for a mobile ad-hoc network is provided for efficiently routing a packet by quickly updating topology information shared by nodes adaptively to variation of the network topology while minimizing generation of redundant traffic. The routing method includes setting, at each current node, a self-potential value to a destination node upon receiving a route recovery request; and transmitting, when a transmission packet is destined to the destination node, the packet through a route established with at least one node in a descending order of potential value. The present invention reduces the redundant traffic dramatically, thereby improving the entire network throughput. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135765 | WIRELESS ROUTER SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless router employing a technique to couple a plurality a host services or host systems and a plurality of wireless networks. A method to route data items between a plurality of mobile devices and a plurality of host systems through a common wireless router. A point-to-point communication connection is preferably established between a first host system and a common wireless router, a mobile network message at a mobile device is generated, the mobile network message is transmitted via a wireless network to the common wireless router which in turn routes a data item component of the mobile network message to the appropriate host service. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090141669 | TRAVEL CHARACTERISTICS-BASED AD-HOC COMMUNICATION NETWORK ALGORITHM SELECTION - A method of operating an ad-hoc communication system is provided. The method comprises determining a pattern type relating to mobile node travel characteristics over a defined traveling region. Based on the pattern type, selecting a neighbor discovery and route determination algorithm. Implementing the neighbor discovery and route determination algorithm on received location and identification mobile node information to determine communication routes to at least one of mobile nodes and stationary communication stations in the ad-hoc communication system. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141670 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL HEADER FORMAT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate employing a variety of medium access control (MAC) header formats in wireless communications. The MAC header formats can be specialized for a particular type of data included in a protocol data unit (PDU). In addition, the MAC headers can have a variable length to accommodate payloads of varying sizes without incurring unnecessary overhead. Further, mechanisms are provided to enable direct access and delivery of control PDUs to associated protocol layers to ensure better quality of service treatment. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141671 | PACKET COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SUBSCRIBER-ASSOCIATED-INFORMATION DELIVERY CONTROLLER - In a packet communication network comprising an MNO network, and an MVNO network including an application server for providing an information service to wireless terminals via the MNO network, the MNO network includes a subscriber-associated-information delivery controller for delivering subscriber associated information of each wireless terminal, which is connected to a radio access network, to the MVNO network, and the MVNO network includes a subscriber-associated-information processor for receiving the subscriber associated information delivered from the subscriber-associated-information delivery controller. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141672 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA USING DOWNLINK DUMMY CONTROL BLOCK AND SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A method for transmitting data using a downlink dummy control block and a system using the same. The method includes receiving, by a Base Station, data to be broadcast to Mobile Stations (MSs) from a mobile communication service provider server, and inserting, by the BS, the received data into a padding bit field within a downlink dummy control block and broadcasting the downlink dummy control block to the MSs. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090141673 | Apparatus and method for rate control in a broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for rate control in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a preprocessor, a rate controller, a determiner, and a transmitter. The preprocessor determines feedback information on a physical layer packet using a feedback message of MAC ARQ. The rate controller updates a CQI reported from a receiver using the determined feedback information. The determiner determines an MCS using the updated CQI. The transmitter transmits data using the determined MCS. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090147729 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING OPEN STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for processing Open state is provided, the method comprising receiving a Control Channel and a Forward Traffic Channel, requesting a MultipleInputMultipleOutput(MIMO) mode on the Forward Traffic Channel by sending a MIMORequest message, monitoring overhead messages and determining if the access terminal receives a ConnectionClose messages. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147730 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A REDIRECT MESSAGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method of transmitting a Redirect message in a wireless communication system is described. A Redirect message is generated comprising an 8 bit MessageID field, a 16 bit StayAwayDuration field wherein the StayAwayDuration field indicates the units of second for which an access terminal will not make an access attempt at the sector sending this message, an 8 bit NumChannel field wherein the NumChannel indicates the number of channel records included in the message, an 8 bit RedirectReason field wherein the RedirectReason reflect the redirect reason and a Channel field wherein the Channel field indicates the channel that the access terminal should reacquire. The Redirect message is transmitted over a communication link. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147731 | Enhancement of Path Quality of Service in Multi-Hop Packet Communication Networks - Techniques and systems for enhancing quality of service (QoS) in communication networks, including wired and wireless communication networks. Implementations of described techniques and systems can be used to provide path-based QoS with distributed per-hop scheduling for carrying traffic over a multi-hop packet communication network. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147732 | METHOD FOR ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION SPEED OF WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for adjusting a transmission speed of a wireless network comprises the steps of: setting a transmission mode, wherein the transmission mode is either an idle mode or a traffic mode; setting an environmental case, wherein the environmental case is either an ideal case or a corner case; determining a transmission speed adjusting algorithm according to the transmission mode and environmental case; and determining an updated transmission speed according to the transmission speed adjusting algorithm. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147733 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING PREAMBLE INDEX TO SELF CONFIGURABLE BASE STATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for allocating a preamble index to a self configurable base station in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus comprises a first selector for selecting a segment IDentifier (ID) to be allocated to a Self Configurable-Base Station (SC-BS) by using a per-segment ID Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) estimated by the SC-BS, a second selector for selecting an ID cell to be allocated to the SC-BS by using geographical location information of surrounding BSs, and a communicator for transmitting a segment ID and the ID cell to the SC-BS. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090154392 | CODING BLOCK BASED HARQ COMBINING SCHEME FOR OFDMA SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for combining retransmitted hybrid automatic repeat-request (HARQ) messages divided into coding blocks in an orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM)/orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA) receiver are provided. According to such a coding-block-based HARQ combining scheme, the quality of each coding block may be compared to a threshold to determine whether the decoded bits or the HARQ combined signal should be saved for each coding block for subsequent HARQ iterations. In addition to reducing the required HARQ buffer size while preserving the combining gain, coding-block-based HARQ combining may also provide fast decoding and reduced power consumption when compared to conventional HARQ combining techniques. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154393 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A data transmission method suitable for a communication system is provided. The communication system includes a plurality of first stations which uses an 802.11 protocol and a plurality of second stations which uses an 802.11e protocol and supports Quality of Service (QoS). The data transmission method includes following steps. One of the second stations is used as a Contention AssisTance (CAT) station to obtain a medium access right with a first access category (AC). The second station broadcasts a CAT packet to all the first stations and the other second stations. The other second stations stop contending for the medium access right for a first predetermined time according to the CAT packet, and the first stations transmit a packet with a QoS requirement according to the CAT packet. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154394 | CALL CONTROL METHOD FOR SEAMLESS MOBILITY SERVICE - A call control method for an Internet Protocol (IP)-based mobility service is provided. The call control method for ensuring service continuity in a mobile communication service environment, includes: receiving a call signal message including permanent IP addresses and transport IP addresses from a transmitter terminal and a receiver terminal, and acquiring the permanent IP addresses and the transport IP addresses of the transmitter terminal and the receiver terminal; and performing call control between the transmitter terminal and the receiver terminal on the basis of the transport IP addresses and the permanent IP addresses of the transmitter terminal and the receiver terminal. Therefore, by interfacing with an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) for controlling a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)-based service, an IP mobility control apparatus for controlling mobility of a terminal when a call is controlled, and a network control apparatus for controlling a network, it is possible to prevent data transmission from being interrupted while the terminal is moving, thereby providing an IP-based seamless, high-quality service. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154395 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK HAVING HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE AND ROUTING METHOD THEREOF - A network having a hierarchical structure includes a plurality of clusters. Each of the clusters includes a plurality of nodes and a cluster head connected to the nodes in a mesh format. Each of the nodes is connected to other clusters via the cluster head. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154396 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - The present invention is to provide a mobile management communication system which can reduce the number of nodes involved in a packet delivery to a mobile terminal which has access to a home network compared to a packet delivery to a mobile terminal which is roaming and can perform a dynamic change to an anchor node suitable for a service, corresponding to a change of a service type required by a user. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154397 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING QUALITY OF SERVICE ENABLERS FOR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS - System and method for providing quality of service enablers for third party applications are described. In one embodiment, the method comprises user equipment (“UE”) establishing a communications session with a third party application server hosting a selected third party application and receiving from the third party application server QoS information comprising at least one of a plurality of QoS attributes and configuring a QoS of a radio access network (“RAN”) in accordance with the received QoS information. The method further comprises activating the RAN QoS for the selected application; and establishing an application session with the third party application server via the RAN. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154398 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION STATE NOTIFICATION METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PROGRAM - There is provided a wireless communication device forming an autonomous distributed wireless network by intermittently transmitting and receiving a predetermined communication management signal, which includes a reception portion to receive the communication management signal, an evaluation portion to evaluate a communication state of the wireless communication device in the wireless network based on a history of receiving the communication management signal by the reception portion, and a notification portion to provide a notification corresponding to an evaluation result of the communication state by the evaluation portion. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154399 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A RANGING SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for a base station of a wireless communication network includes a detector to detect an access code received from a mobile station in each of a plurality of time durations and to detect a timing offset of the access code detected in each of the plurality of time durations, an estimator to estimate a carrier-to-interference noise ratio (CINR) during each of the plurality of time durations, and a determining unit to determine a timing offset correction value to be applied to subsequent signals from the mobile station using the CINR, the timing offset, and the access code detected in each of the plurality of time durations. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090161600 | Wireless slave unit - In a network area of a wireless network managed by a wireless master device, a wireless slave device performs wireless network communication with another wireless slave device connected by wire to a terminal, and wired network communication with a terminal connected by wire to the wireless slave device. The wireless slave device includes a wireless reception unit ( | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161601 | Method and Apparatus for Detection of Network Having Multiple IP-Address Capability | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161602 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD USING BLUETOOTH - A wireless communication apparatus which is capable of communicating with a first wireless terminal holding a first data packet by Bluetooth includes a search unit, a first transceiver transmitting, a first controller, and a scheduling unit. The search unit reserves a search, and executing the search. The first transceiver transmits the first and second control packets, and receives the first data packet and a second data packet. The first controller reserves a transmission of the second control packet to the first wireless terminal, the first controller giving instructions to transmit the second control packet to the first transceiver. The scheduling unit accepts the reservation from the first controller and the search unit, the scheduling unit preferentially allowing a transmission of the second control packet compared with the search, and allowing the search when no reservation of the transmission of the second control packet is made. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161603 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus is capable of improving communication efficiency by reducing the amount of control information transmitted. A channel quality information extraction section extracts CQI's from a received signal. An allocation control section allocates subcarriers every communication terminal apparatus and selects a modulation scheme in such a manner that required transmission rate is satisfied for each communication terminal apparatus based on required transmission rate information etc. and CQI's for communication terminal apparatus of each user. A required subcarrier number determining section decides the number of subcarriers allocated every communication terminal apparatus in such a manner as to satisfy the required transmission rate for each communication terminal apparatus based on required transmission rate information etc. of communication terminal apparatus of each user. A required subcarrier number information generating section generates information for the number of subcarriers allocated every communication terminal apparatus. A subcarrier allocation section allocates packet data to selected subcarriers. Modulating sections adaptively modulate packet data allocated to each subcarrier. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161604 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE OF PACKET ROUTING FOR LOCALIZED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NETWORK - A method of packet routing for an LMM network includes: by an LMA, determining that both a sending end node and a receiving end node are located in an LMM domain controlled by the LMA, and starting a route optimization; directly forwarding, by an access device attached to the sending end node, a packet to be sent to the receiving end node to an access device attached to the receiving end node without being forwarded by the LMA; and forwarding, by the access device attached to the receiving end node, to the receiving end node. A system of packet routing for an LMM network includes a sending end node, a receiving end node, an access device attached to the sending end node, an access device attached to the receiving end node, and an LMA. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161605 | COOPERATIVE MIMO IN MULTICELL WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and system for cooperative multiple-input multiple output (MIMO) transmission operations in a multicell wireless network. Under the method, antenna elements from two or more base stations are used to from an augmented MIMO antenna array that is used to transmit and receive MIMO transmissions to and from one or more terminals. The cooperative MIMO transmission scheme supports higher dimension space-time-frequency processing for increased capacity and system performance. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090168692 | Packet radio communications system - A packet radio communications system communicates internet packets to and/or from mobile user equipment. The system comprises a core network comprising a plurality of packet data networks, each including network communications elements operable to communicate internet packets using an internet protocol transport plane, and a common gateway support node. The gateway support node is operable to route the internet packets via communications bearers established through the packet data networks using the network communications elements. The system includes a plurality of radio access networks connected by the internet protocol transport plane to the core network components of the packet data networks for communicating the internet protocol packets to and/or from the mobile user equipment. Each of the radio access networks is operable to provide radio access bearers for communicating the internet packets to and/or from the mobile user equipment. The system includes a packet service control subsystem function comprising an access network part and a non access network part. The access network part is arranged to control the communication of the internet packets via the radio access bearers and the non-access network part is arranged to control the communication of the internet packets via the communications bearers using the network communications elements of the packet data networks. At least one of the radio access networks is arranged to operate in accordance with a different telecommunications standard than the other radio access networks, and at least one of the plurality of packet data networks is arranged to operate in accordance with a different telecommunications standard than the other packet data networks. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168693 | TECHNIQUES FOR THE OPERATION OF MULTIPLE CLASSES OF DEVICES IN A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising communicating and coexisting in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) by a at least one device operating as an advanced device (AD) and at least one device operating as a simple device (SD) by using the at least one AD as a proxy for the at least one SD to control the communication of the at least one SD. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168694 | Breakout connection apparatus, system, and method - A system includes a local mobile network and user equipment, where the user equipment is configured to detect a local network identity of a local mobile network, determine whether a selected condition involving the local network identity is satisfied, and indicate whether a breakout connection is appropriate based on whether the selected condition is satisfied. The breakout connection is appropriate when the selected condition is unsatisfied. A non-breakout connection is appropriate regardless of whether the selected condition is satisfied or unsatisfied In some embodiments, the selected condition is satisfied when the local network identity corresponds to a network identity of a home public land mobile network or an equivalent home public land mobile network. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168695 | DEFINING A BOUNDARY FOR WIRELESS NETWORK USING PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS - A system and method for defining a boundary within a wireless coverage area using a physical access control system (PACS) and limiting access to the wireless network to devices located within the boundary area is provided. The system includes a PACS for controlling access to a secured area defined by the boundary to authorized personnel and a wireless network generating system for generating a wireless network. Access to the wireless network is limited to devices associated with an authorized personnel when the authorized personnel is determined to be within the secured area and denied to devices associated to personnel determined to be outside the secured area. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168696 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION SESSION FOR MULTIMEDIA - A method and arrangement for establishing a packet-switched multimedia session for a mobile terminal (A) in communication with another party (B), wherein a primary PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context has been activated in a mobile network for the mobile terminal. Information on the forthcoming session is received which has been negotiated and agreed between the communicating parties. It is then determined whether any network resources providing a required QoS are needed for the session, and whether a secondary PDP context is to be activated for the mobile terminal and the forthcoming session. If network resources are needed and a secondary PDP context is to be activated, the activation of said secondary PDP context is triggered. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168697 | METHOD FOR THE INTERCEPTION OF GTP-C MESSAGES - Disclosed is a species of control-message intercept method which includes a passive monitoring approach whereby the relevant control packets are inspected for the purpose of providing additional information for the purpose of facilitating the operation of some primary or ‘master’ Internet Protocol (IP) charging/rating middleware platform/gateway system (intended to equip network operators with the ability to rate and bill IP traffic), and secondly, an invasive technique whereby control (GTP-C) messages are injected for the purpose of altering the state of a given data session in an more aggressive fashion (e.g. to drop a data session when the subscriber runs out of money in his/her prepaid account). | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168698 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIMULTANEOUS LOCATION PRIVACY AND ROUTE OPTIMIZATION FOR COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - The invention relates to a method for routing packets in a system of packet-switched networks comprising a plurality of home agents, at least one mobile node and at least one correspondent node, the mobile node having at least a first home address and communicating with the correspondent node over a first of the plurality of home agents. The method comprises the following steps carried out by the mobile node: receiving an application layer request message from the correspondent node; looking up a correspondent node address in a part of the application layer request message; locating a second of the plurality of home agents in proximity to a direct path between the mobile node and the correspondent node using the correspondent node address; bootstrapping with the second home agent to obtain a second home address; including the second home address in a part of an application layer response message to the correspondent node to enable the correspondent node to use the second home address for data communications with the mobile node. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168699 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A NETWORK CONNECTION AND NETWORK DEVICE THEREOF - A method for establishing a network connection includes storing access point identifier information and connection information corresponding to the access point identifier information, establishing a network connection to a target access point, acquiring target identifier information of the target access point, determining whether the target identifier information conforms to the access point identifier information, and using the connection information to connect to a target electronic device through the target access point when the target identifier information conforms to the access point identifier information. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168700 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AVOIDING STALL USING TIMER FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS SYSTEM - At least one timer is used to prevent a stall condition. If a timer is not active, the timer is started for a data block that is correctly received. The data block has a sequence number higher than a sequence number of another data block that was first expected to be received. When the timer is stopped or expires, all correctly received data blocks among data blocks up to and including a data block having a sequence number that is immediately before the sequence number of the data block for which the timer was started is delivered to a higher layer. Further, all correctly received data blocks up to a first missing data block, including the data block for which the timer was started, is delivered to the higher layer. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168701 | MULTI-ACCESS TERMINAL WITH CAPABILITY FOR SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIVITY TO MULTIPLE COMMUNICATION CHANNELS - An apparatus is disclosed for permitting a mobile terminal having multiple, heterogeneous network connections (e.g., multiple wired or wireless transceivers of various types) to set up and maintain virtual connections over multiple networks to either the same or to multiple destinations. The mobile terminal can “load-share” traffic, i.e., it can distribute segments of traffic over a full set of heterogeneous networks, significantly improving the reliability and availability of communications. In a first embodiment, a mobile terminal is configured with multiple radio frequency (RF) transceivers. Operating system software is provided for dynamically establishing and maintaining traffic flow for user applications over multiple communications paths, and for automatically adapting to variations in the networking environment, application traffic flow requirements, end user preferences, or mobility. In a second embodiment, a software-defined radio is used to implement the physical layer protocols for each desired network, eliminating the need for multiple transceivers. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168702 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR IMPLEMENTING A VIRTUAL POSTING SERVICE - Methods, systems, and computer program products for implementing virtual posting services. Methods include receiving content from a communications device located in a geographic proximity that is serviced by an access node, storing the content in a storage device that is in communication with the access node, and tracking an amount of time the content item is stored. If the amount of time does not reach a pre-established threshold, the methods include transmitting the content to another communications device in response to detecting the presence of the other communications device within the geographic proximity and in response to an inquiry from the other communications device. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090175215 | Packet radio network and method - A packet radio network provides a facility for communicating internet packets to and/or from a mobile user equipment. The packet radio network comprises a gateway support node, a serving support node and a radio network controller. The gateway support node is operable to provide a packet data protocol context for controlling the communication of the internet packets to and/or from the packet radio network from and/or to the mobile user equipment via a packet communications bearer. The serving support node is connected to the gateway support node and is operable to control communications of the internet packets to and from the gateway support node to and/or from mobile user equipment to form the packet communications bearer. The radio network controller is operable to provide a radio access bearer for communicating the internet packets via a radio access interface to and/or from the mobile user equipment. In response to a packet data protocol activation request message requesting a common packet data protocol context, the serving support node is operable in combination with the gateway support node to establish a common packet data protocol context in association with a common packet communications bearer. The common packet data protocol context is established to communicate internet protocol packets via the common packet communications bearer. The common packet communications bearer is shared with at least one other communications session and is formed by the gateway support node and the serving support node using a common tunnelling protocol bearer. Therefore a packet radio network is provided which can provide a common communications bearer which can be shared between different communications sessions. As a result high-speed broadband communications, such as HSDPA can be supported efficiently, because more than one communications session shares common communications resources. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175216 | Mesh Networking for Wireless Communications - A method for optimizing wireless communications in a mesh network is described. The method includes transmitting a data stream from a wireless module (WM) host to a plurality of WM devices in the mesh network. The method further includes sending status messages from the WM devices to the WM host and the other WM devices. The WM devices are configured to transmit help requests and respond to help requests based on at least one WM device needing help receiving the data stream. The method further includes generating a WM host link quality map at the WM host with the WM host link quality map being dynamically updated upon receiving status messages from the WM devices. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175217 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ESTABLISHING ACCESS CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for establishing an access channel in a wireless communication system is provided, comprising receiving an AccessGrant on a carrier on which the last probe was transmitted and ending an access probe transmission upon receiving the AccessGrant. A method and apparatus is further provided, comprising determining expiration of an access grant timer and ending an access probe transmission upon the expiration of the timer. A method and apparatus is further provided comprising receiving an IdleState.IdleHO indication and ending an access probe transmission upon receiving the IdleState.IdleHO indication. A method and apparatus is further provided receiving a new AttemptAccess command, wherein the AttemptAccess command is processed after a current probe transmission ends and ending an access probe transmission on receiving the new AttemptAccess command. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175218 | DIGITAL BROADCAST SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DIGITAL BROADCAST DATA, AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD FOR USE IN THE SAME - A digital broadcast system having storing resistance to errors generated during the transmission of mobile service data, and a data processing method are disclosed. The digital broadcast system additionally encodes mobile service data. As a result, the mobile service data has strong resistance to a channel variation and noise, and at the same time the system can quickly cope with the channel variation. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175219 | Representation of a Delay Path in Mobile Networks - The present invention relates to a communication device in a communication network comprising at least two communication devices comprising means for:
| 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175220 | TRANSMISSION METHOD OF MOBILE STATION FOR RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL DIVERSITY - A transmission method performed by a mobile station for random access channel (RACH) burst transmission diversity gain is provided. According to the method, a variety of combinations of a time switching transmit diversity (TSTD) technique, a frequency hopping technique, and a power ramping technique that are robust against fading channel environments are applied to transmission of an RACH burst, thereby increasing the probability of detecting an RACH signature of a base station. Also, by using the transmission parameters (subband frequencies, transmission antennas, power, etc.) which are used for successful transmission of an RACH burst, for transmission of a successive user packet data, reliable transmission of the successive user packet data can be performed. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175221 | MULTIMEDIA WIRELESS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - An access point for wireless transmission of packets to user devices includes an application module and a radio module. If the radio module fails to successfully transmit a packet to a user device, the application module takes the packet from its queue and places it in the radio buffer for retransmission. This greatly increases the speed of retransmission. The application module can obtain information on the success of transmitting the packet directly from the radio module. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175222 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AVOIDING STALL USING TIMER FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS SYSTEM - At least one timer is used to prevent a stall condition. If a timer is not active, the timer is started for a data block that is correctly received. The data block has a sequence number higher than a sequence number of another data block that was first expected to be received. When the timer is stopped or expires, all correctly received data blocks among data blocks up to and including a data block having a sequence number that is immediately before the sequence number of the data block for which the timer was started is delivered to a higher layer. Further, all correctly received data blocks up to a first missing data block, including the data block for which the timer was started, is delivered to the higher layer. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175223 | System and Method for Mobile Ad Hoc Network - A method and system for geocasting data packets in a MANET. The MANET is combined with a long-range network such that a wireless terminal can decide whether to rebroadcast a geocast packet over the MANET, the long-range network, or not at all, depending on the wireless terminal's proximity to the geocast region, the location of the originating wireless terminal, or both. A wireless terminal close to or within the geocast region can rebroadcast on the MANET, whereas a wireless terminal far from the geocast region can rebroadcast on the long-range network. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175224 | Wireless Base Station Which Operates In Degraded Mode In Mobile Communication System During Disaster, And Mobile Communication System - A mobile communication system prevents the reduction of large communication range even during disasters. A wireless base station includes a communication unit allocates frequency bands and output powers corresponding to distribution areas of wireless terminals, and performs communication with the wireless terminals. The communication unit uses a modulation method with a large number of multiple values to perform communication with wireless terminals in an area with small distribution area in proximity to the center of the cell area, and uses modulation methods with successively smaller numbers of values to perform communication with wireless terminals in larger distribution areas moving toward the peripheral regions of the cell area, and during a disaster, uses a modulation method with the smallest to perform communication over all distribution areas, sets the output power to the lowest value in communication with wireless terminals in an area with small distribution area in proximity to the center of the cell area, and sets the output power so as to increase gradually in communication with wireless terminals in larger distribution areas moving toward the peripheral regions of the cell area. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090180422 | Interaction of VoIP calls and cellular networks - A communication system includes a switching network and a wireless network. The switching network includes a first gateway for receiving a communication from a caller, a second gateway for establishing an external connection through which the communication can be routed, and a command center that allows the first and second gateways to make an internal connection. The wireless network includes a visited mobile switch center and a home location register. The visited mobile switch center generates routing information, receives the communication from the external connection of the switching network, and routes the communication to a wireless network subscriber. The home location register locates the visited mobile switch center, and passes the routing information from the visited mobile switch center to the command center of the switching network. The command center causes the external connection to be established based on the routing information. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090185522 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISTRIBUTING CONTENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present invention allows content to be delivered to a mobile terminal over different types of networks in order to efficiently use network resources. Content can be delivered using a select delivery method over a cellular network, a local wireless network, or a broadcast network. Within any of the networks, the content may be unicast to individual mobile terminals using individual content flows, multicast to a group of mobile terminals, or broadcast to any or all of the mobile terminals. Content can be multicast or broadcast to mobile terminals via different ones of the disparate networks. During a content flow, the network through which the content flow is delivered may be changed to allow the mobile terminal to receive the content through a different network. Further, the delivery method used to deliver the content may dynamically change as the number of mobile terminals receiving or requesting the content changes. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090185523 | Personal Network Access Control System and Method - A server is provided that includes a processor such that for a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) request containing a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) identifying the first device, the processor is programmed to promote adding a URI and redirecting the SIP request to a second device. The added URI used by the second device to invoke a Personal Network Management (PNM) Controller function. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090185524 | MANUAL CELL DETECTION AND SELECTION PROCEDURES - A method for performing a manual cell search by a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) includes receiving a manual cell search command and searching for home enhanced Node B (HeNB) cells during a time period. The time period may be a measurement gap or a discontinuous reception period. If an existing measurement gap is available for the WTRU to use, the search can be performed during that gap. Otherwise, the WTRU can request a new measurement gap to search for HeNBs. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090185525 | NETWORK SYSTEM, DATA TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING METHOD AND DATA TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION PROGRAM - A network system including a mobile node, a correspondent node for transmitting/receiving a data packet to/from the mobile node, a first router to which the mobile node is connected at a visited domain and a second router to which the mobile node is connected at a moving destination to which the mobile node moves from the first router. The second router including a location registration message generating unit for generating a location registration message of the mobile node and transmitting the location registration message. The first router including a binding cache, a movement managing unit for receiving the location registration message and storing into the binding cache address information from before and after the mobile node moves and an encapsulating unit for receiving the data packet, encapsulating the data packet concerned, and creating and transmitting a data packet containing as a transmission destination the address information after the change. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090185526 | Method and Apparatus for a Dynamic Create/Change of Service Flows - A system and method for transmitting data is provided. A preferred embodiment comprises transmitting data by concatenating parameters for multiple service flows into a single transmission. Parameters associated with multiple service flows may be grouped together and other parameters that are not associated with multiple service flows are also preferably included within the same single transmission. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090190523 | Router unit, server unit and home agent function transfer control method - An HA function can be stopped and restarted without having an influence on MN performing registration and other nodes. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190524 | APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA TRAFFIC IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORKS - An apparatus for distributing data traffic in heterogeneous wireless networks is provided. A terminal for transmitting data to a plurality of wireless networks, includes a transmission rule storing unit to store a data transmission rule with respect to the plurality of wireless networks, a data dividing unit to divide first data into a plurality of first data groups based on the stored data transmission rule, a transmission network selecting unit to select an individual transmission network for each divided data group from the plurality of wireless networks based on the determined data transmission rule, and a network access unit to transmit each data group to the selected transmission network. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190525 | ENHANCEMENTS TO THE POSITIONING PILOT CHANNEL - A method for communicating transmitter identification in an interlace structure of a communication network system using positioning pilot channels (PPC), comprising:
| 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190526 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING RADIO LINK CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - A method and apparatus are used to generate radio link control (RLC) protocol data units (PDUs). A data request for a logical channel is received as part of an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transport format combination (E-TFC) selection procedure in a medium access control (MAC). Upon determining the data field size, an RLC PDU is generated such that it matches the requested data from the E-TFC selection. The size of the RLC PDU generated can be greater than or equal to the minimum configured RLC PDU size (if data is available) and less than or equal to the maximum RLC PDU size. The data is then transmitted in the RLC PDU in a current transmission time interval (TTI). | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190527 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE DATA RATE OF A CIRCUIT SWITCHED VOICE APPLICATION IN AN EVOLVED WIRELESS SYSTEM - An apparatus and method of transmitting a circuit switched (CS) voice application via an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH), implemented in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The method includes receiving a grant; performing an E-TFC selection procedure based on the grant, wherein a number of bits that may be transmitted over an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) is determined, determining an adaptive multi-rate (AMR) codec bit-rate based on the number of bits that may be transmitted over the E-DCH, generating AMR voice packets based on the determined AMR codec bit rate, and submitting the AMR voice packets to lower layers for transmission over the E-DCH. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190528 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION PERIODICALLY OR APERIODICALLY - A method for transmitting and receiving channel state information (CSI) periodically and aperiodically is disclosed. The method for aperiodically transmitting channel state information (CSI) by a terminal includes receiving an indicator requesting a channel state information report of a downlink channel from a base station over a downlink control channel, and aperiodically transmitting the channel state information (CSI) to the base station over a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) upon receiving the indicator from the base station. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190529 | Mobile IP Communication System - A mobile IP communication system includes a home agent | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190530 | METHOD FOR TERMINATING ATTACH PROCEDURE IN MOBILE TERMINAL - A system and method by which an unnecessary General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) attach procedure is no longer performed when a service cancellation situation is generated during execution of a GPRS attach procedure according to a data service requested by a user is provided. The system determines whether an abnormal situation occurs in an Europe-oriented General Packet Radio Service/Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (GPRS/UMTS) mobile terminal and immediately terminates a currently proceeding attach procedure when an abnormal service cancellation situation occurs. The abnormal situation occurs when the user cancels a service during use of a data service (e.g., Wireless Application Protocol (WAP), Multimedia Message Service (MMS)) or when connection of the service fails due to a bad network state. By not performing an unnecessary GPRS attach procedure due to the occurrence of an abnormal situation, the mobile terminal does not perform an unnecessary routing area updating procedure, thereby reducing power consumption. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190531 | Mesh Node Mobility Across Static and Mobile Mesh Networks - Methods and systems for mobility of mobile nodes in mesh networks are taught wherein the mobile mesh nodes choose an attachment point to another mesh node based on predetermined criteria, such as the characteristics of the attachment point's path to a reference destination, and other factors local to the attachment point, such as load and available capacity. The mobile nodes forward packets on each other's behalf. Static and mobile nodes and the links between them are treated differently from each other in view of their respectively different properties. A special metric is used for paths that include mobile links in addition to the static mesh links and wired mesh links. Mobility is handled completely transparently to any client devices attached to the mesh nodes, where this attachment could be wireless or wired. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190532 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE PROVIDING N-WAY COMMUNICATION THROUGH A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION SERVICES - A system and method, in a mobile communication device, providing N-way communication through a plurality of communication services. Various aspects of the present invention provide a mobile communication device comprising a user interface and at least one communication interface module adapted to perform a first communication with a first communication device through a first communication service and perform a second communication with a second communication device through a second communication service. At least one module may be adapted to receive outgoing information from the user interface and to receive first information from the first communication device through the first communication service. The at least one module may also combine at least the received outgoing information and the received first information and transmit such combined information to the second communication device through the second communication service. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190533 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING ACCESS MODE SELECTION TO MULTIMODE TERMINAL - A method, system and apparatus for providing access mode selection to multimode terminal are disclosed. After selecting an access mode according to a certain policy, a routing decision entity correspondingly instructs a routing execution entity to perform a call connection in the selected access mode. The method for providing access mode selection to multimode terminal includes the following steps: (1) when establishing a registration connection, a terminal notifies related information of a current access network type to a network side; and (2) when performing a call connection to a called party, a routing decision entity on the network side selects the access mode and correspondingly instructs a routing execution entity to perform the call connection according to the related information and the selected access mode. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090190534 | MOBILE STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCY BAND MAPPING METHOD, LOCATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD, PAGING METHOD, AND PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THE SAME AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In a method for mapping an operating frequency band of a mobile station device in a mobile communication system, an operating frequency band position at the time of idle mode of respective mobile station devices is arranged so as to be distributed throughout a unique frequency bandwidth of a base station device. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090196216 | Wireless communication device - An object of the present invention is to improve the throughput and reduce the circuit size and power consumption for transmission. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196217 | Signalling the Presence of Extension Frames - Aspects of the invention are directed to signalling extension frames in a telecommunication system. Extension-frame-signalling data may signal whether one or more extension parts are present in one or more gaps in time between data frames, when the one or more extension parts occur, and one or more durations for the one or more extension parts. The one or more extension parts may occur on the same radio frequencies as the data frames. The extension-frame-signalling data may signal when the one or more extension parts occur by signalling after which of one or more data frames in a super frame the extension parts occur. The one or more durations for the extension parts may be expressed in units of time. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196218 | WIRELESS SYSTEM GATEWAY CACHE - A wireless system gateway cache is presented. The gateway includes a first, wireless interface, a second interface, and a cache controller. The cache controller receives a characteristic of a parameter of a first device. The cache controller also receives a value of the parameter from the first device via the first interface and stores the value according to the characteristic of the parameter. The cache controller further receives a request for the value of the parameter from a second device via the second interface and sends the stored value to the second device in response to the request. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196219 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE-BASED UPLINK POLLING SCHEMES - A method for allocating polling bandwidth may include generating polling tokens corresponding to connections maintained by a base station. The polling tokens may be generated at configurable time intervals. The method may also include assigning priorities to the polling tokens. The priority of a polling token may depend on a scheduling type of a corresponding connection. The method may also include allocating polling bandwidth to the connections that correspond to the highest priority polling tokens when uplink bandwidth is available to allocate for polling. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196220 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - When a browser is started up by a user, a packet call establishment request unit of a cellular phone requests the start of processing for establishing a packet call, and a communication control unit executes a packet all establishment processing. A mobile communication network sends a packet call establishment response message to the cellular phone, then sends packet data. A packet date storage unit of the cellular phone stores the packet data in a memory when packet data is received before the packet call establishment response message. If the packet call establishment response message is received thereafter, the packet data storage unit reads the packet data from the memory, and deletes the packet data from the memory. The packet processing execution unit displays a screen corresponding to the packet data on the display. Thereby, instances when packet data is discarded is decreased. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196221 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SIGNALING ACCESS - Signaling-only access may be established with an access node under certain circumstances such as, for example, upon determining that a node is not authorized for data access at the access node. A node that is not authorized for data access at an access node may still be paged by the access node through the use of signaling-only access. In this way, transmissions by the access node may not interfere with the reception of pages at the node. A first node may be selected for providing paging while a second node is selected for access under certain circumstances such as, for example, upon determining that the second node provides more desirable service than the first node. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196222 | Method and apparatus for interfacing synchronous core network with asynchronous radio network - A method and apparatus for interfacing a synchronous core network with an asynchronous radio network in a next-generation mobile telecommunications system is disclosed. The method for mapping a message in order to interface a synchronous core network with an asynchronous radio network, the radio network having a base station (BS), the base station having a radio resource controller, a radio link controller, a medium access controller and a physical controller, the method comprising the steps of: a) selecting a function necessary to map a synchronous message to an asynchronous message; b) determining whether the synchronous message is to be transmitted to the mobile station or not; c) storing information necessary to map the synchronous message to the asynchronous message if the synchronous message is to transmitted to the mobile station, d) mapping parameters in the synchronous message to those in the asynchronous message, thereby generating the asynchronous message; e) discarding the message not to be transmitted to the mobile station after storing parameters included in the message not to be transmitted onto a predetermined device; and f) transmitting the asynchronous message to the radio resource controller. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196223 | TRANSMIT POWER CONTROLLER - A transmit power control system includes: an output power estimator for estimating a transmit power of a transmitter; and a transmit power controller responsive to the output power estimator and to compare this with a requested power in order to calculate a target power which takes account of errors within the transmit power control system, and to vary a gain of an amplifier in a transmit signal path so as to reduce an error between the transmit power of the amplifier and the requested power. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196224 | Base station and scheduling method used in base station - Disclosed in the present invention are base stations and scheduling methods used in base stations. The base station uses a multi-user multi-input and multi-output method, and is characterized in comprising: a storing means for storing codebook vector group information relevant to a combination of codebook vectors capable of being used as a pre-coding group, the codebook vector group information comprising an index of the combination of codebook vectors capable of being used as a pre-coding group; a pre-coding matrix element selecting means for selecting codebook vectors to be taken as elements of a pre-coding matrix; a pre-coding matrix index determining means for determining an index, to which a combination of the codebook vectors selected by the pre-coding matrix element selecting means corresponds, in accordance with the codebook vectors to be taken as elements of a pre-coding matrix as selected by the pre-coding matrix element selecting means and with reference to the codebook vector group information; and a pre-coding matrix index transmitting means for transmitting the index of the combination of the codebook vectors determined by the pre-coding matrix index determining means. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196225 | DEVICES AND METHOD FOR GUARANTEEING QUALITY OF SERVICE PER SERVICE DATA FLOW THROUGH THE BEARER LAYER - In scenarios where the quality of service is negotiated through a signalling layer whereas the services are actually carried through a bearer layer, application functions at the signalling layer are not always aware of how quality of service is individually accomplished at the bearer layer on a service basis. The invention provides a method and devices whereby events are detected on a service data flow basis at a detection device in the bearer layer and notified towards an application device in the signalling layer via a control device between the signalling and the bearer layer. The list of events to be notified is obtainable at the control device from the application device and is included in Quality of Service related rules, along with service data flow filters. This Quality of Service related rules are provided to the detection device for inspecting individual service data flows in order to detect and notify the indicated events. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196226 | BROADCAST RECEIVING TERMINAL DEVICE, BROADCAST RECEIVING METHOD, PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - Provided is a broadcast receiving terminal ( | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196227 | METHOD AND NETWORK NODE FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method routes data packets especially in wireless communication network formed by a plurality of network nodes. In order to transmit data packets from a first network node acting as a data packet source to a second network node acting as a data packet sink according to said method, the data packets are transmitted with the help of at least one additional communication network node that is dissociated from the source node, a first network message is transmitted from the source node at least to the additional network node so as to be successively forwarded to each additional network node until the additional network node corresponds to the sink node, the respective additional network node supplies routing data based on the first message in such a way that first data on a next network node on the way to the source node and the value of a first validity period in the actual additional network node is temporarily stored, and the value of the respective validity period is stored in such a way that all first data remains stored at least until a second network message which is sent by the sink node and confirms the first network message has been received by the source node. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196228 | METHOD OF CONNECTING TO NETWORK IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The primitives between an upper management layer and the MAC layer within a mobile station and a base station are defined in order to specify and clarify the operations within the protocol stack layers in a broadband wireless access system to allow a mobile station to perform a method of connecting to the network. Media Independent Handover (MIH) procedures can be achieved because the NCMS and MIH layer can communicate through use of these primitives. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196229 | ACKNAK and CQI Channel Mapping Schemes in Wireless Networks - A transmission of information from a secondary to a primary node occurs in a plurality of N logical time durations. The transmission from the secondary to primary node in a wireless network is obtained using an orthogonal covering sequence and a second sequence. Embodiments of the present invention mitigate interference by calculating a first orthogonal covering (OC) index and a second OC index from an indicator received from a serving base station (NodeB). A first index n | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196230 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK LOAD IN CELL_FACH STATE - A method for a user equipment (UE) to perform uplink re-access in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes performing an uplink access procedure to establish a data transmission channel, checking whether or not the data transmission channel has been released, and delaying uplink re-access to the data transmission channel by a wait time when the data transmission channel has been released. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196231 | MOBILE IP MULTIPLE REGISTRATIONS AND PCC INTERACTIONS - In a wireless communication system having multiple access nodes, a home agent (HA) maintains home address (HoA) for a mobile node so that an IP session can be established. As the mobile node moves within a coverage area of various access nodes, the mobile node can establish a secure relationship with a local access gateway and thereby register a local IP address, referred to as a care-of-address (CoA), with the HA. Mobile IP protocol can be established so that multiple sessions can be conducted. In maintaining policy and charging control (PCC), HA informs a policy and charging rules function (PCRF), which in turn can then send the appropriate PCC rules (e.g., IP flows and related policies) to a policy and charging enforcement function (PCEF) for a particular access gateway. Coordination necessary to associate CoA and HoA can further include filter information as to application can run on a particular interface. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196232 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO EXCHANGE CHANNEL INFORMATION - A method and apparatus to exchange channel state information between two or more stations is provided, The channel state information may be used to adapt a power, a transmission rate and a modulation scheme of a transmitted signal. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196233 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO ACCESS METHOD, ACCESS POINT AND GATEWAY - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a radio communication system and a radio access method. In accordance with the embodiments of the present invention, an AP with a PDP forward function unit forwards service traffic accessing an AS to a Packet Radio Service Gateway Support Node, and sends Internet service traffic to the Packet Radio Service Gateway Support Node or directly sends the Internet service data to the Internet via a configured forwarding interface according to the service property of the service traffic. Embodiments of the present invention further disclose an Access Point and a gateway. Therefore, the load of network elements of a mobile network is reduced; meanwhile, the control and the management of the high increment value services by operators can be guaranteed. The investment of the CS network can be protected by the gateway as a concentrator of Access Points and a forwarding node of CS services in the embodiments of the present invention. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196234 | Method And Apparatus For Persistent Communications, Interoperability And Situational Awareness In The Aftermath Of A Disaster - A system for providing situational awareness outside a temporary incident area network includes a prioritized connection module for connecting a mesh network at the incident area to one of a plurality of available communications channels, with the selection based not only on the availability of a communications channel but also on the associated expense, speed, reliability or bandwidth, so that high bandwidth traffic such as video and pictures can be reliably sent from the incident area to a location outside of the incident area. In one embodiment switching to a satellite phone network bypasses problems with terrestrial networks such as cell phone networks and landlines which may be down. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196235 | Method And Apparatus For Setting Gain Factors For Dedicated Physical Channels In A Mobile Telecommunications System - An apparatus and method are provided for setting gain factors for dedicated physical channels in a mobile communication system. The UE receives configuration information indicating uplink dedicated physical channel configuration. The UE sets a gain factor of a dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH) to 1 in the case that no DPDCH is configured. The UE calculates a gain factor of a enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) using the gain factor of the DPCCH. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090201848 | PATH CONTROL METHOD AND HOME AGENT - In a mobile network system composed of a mobile network with a mobile router and a terminal interconnected, and of a home agent, when the mobile router connects to an external network, the mobile router informs the home agent of path information to the mobile network including the mobile router. Receiving the path information, the home agent inquires the mobile router in the home network whether or not the mobile router connects to the mobile network informed. Then, the home agent advertises path information to this mobile network only when the mobile router connecting to the mobile network does not exist. Accordingly, the home agent can rapidly switch to an optimum path to the external network. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201849 | Transmission apparatus, transmission method, reception apparatus and reception method - A transmission apparatus which attempts improvement of signal quality in an uplink and a downlink carries out radio transmission of different signals simultaneously from respective ones of a plurality of antennas. The apparatus has pilot multiplexing means for multiplexing a pilot channel to transmit from each antenna in one or more of a time division multiplexing method, a frequency division multiplexing method and a code division multiplexing method, data multiplexing means for time-multiplexing a pilot channel and a data channel, and means for transmitting a signal in a least one of a space division multiplexing (SDM) method and a space time transmission diversity (STTD) method. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201850 | LOCATION TRACKING BASED ON PROXIMITY-BASED AD HOC NETWORK - A system and method is described for constructing a proximity-based ad hoc network among a plurality of sensors and for using such a network to perform location tracking. The system and method uses time-coded data received from each of the sensors to determine a current proximity of each of the sensors to one or more beacons. Then, by leveraging information relating to the effective transmission ranges of the beacons, the system and method determines the relative location of each of the plurality of sensors with respect to other sensors within the plurality of sensors. Where actual (as opposed to relative) location information is available for a particular sensor, it can be used to generate or augment location information associated with other sensors known to be spatially and temporally proximate to the particular sensor. The current location information for each of the sensors is then used in providing location-based services. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201851 | Coordinated Channel Change in Mesh Networks - A coordinated channel change system. In particular implementations, a method includes receiving a prepare-to-change message, wherein the prepare-to-change message indicates instructions to prepare to change channels and includes a designated channel, and forwarding the prepare-to-change message to one or more child nodes. The method also includes receiving a ready-to-change message from the one or more child nodes, and transmitting a change-to-channel message to the one or more child nodes, wherein the change-to-channel message indicates instructions to switch to the designated channel. The method also includes receiving an acknowledgement message from the one or more child nodes, and changing to the designated channel. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201852 | Telecommunications System and Method - A telecommunications system is arranged to provide a mobile communications session to a mobile node using an internet protocol. The telecommunications system comprises a home packet data network which includes a home agent of the mobile node and a visited packet data network. One of the home packet data network or the visited packet data network includes a packet data gateway for controlling the communication of the internet packets to and from the home packet data network from and to the visited packet data network. The mobile node is arranged to communicate a correspondent node binding update internet packet to the correspondent node via the packet date gateway, when the mobile node changes affiliation from the home packet data network to the visited packet data network. The correspondent node binding update internet packet provides a care of address of the mobile node within the visited packet data network and a home address of the mobile node. The packet data network is arranged to store the home address of the mobile node in association with the care of address of the mobile node, to adapt the correspondent node binding update internet packet by replacing the care of address in the received correspondent binding update packet with the address of the packet data gateway, and to communicate the adapted correspondent binding update packet to the correspondent node. The correspondent node therefore receives a correspondent binding update with the packet data gateway as the care of address. Thus, when the correspondent node communicates with the mobile node using the care of address of the packet data gateway, the packet data gateway can adapt the received internet packets, replacing the packet data gateway's address as the destination address with the care of address of the mobile node. Therefore, although a route optimisation process has taken place the internet packets are still routed via the packet data gateway. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201853 | Routing Data Packets in a Communication Network - Routing data packets includes receiving data packets from a network element at a routing gateway. The data packets are determined to be destined for a mobile node. A location of the mobile node is obtained. The data packets are forwarded to the mobile node according to the location on behalf of the network element. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201854 | Method for Optimizing the Reading by a User Equipment of Mcch (Mbms Point-to-Multipoint Control Channel) Information - The invention relates to a method for optimizing the reading by a User Equipment (UE) of MCCH (MBMS Point-to-Multipoint Control Channel) information transmitted periodically to said UE by a Radio Network Controller (RNC) in cellular communication network during a Modification Period (MP) comprising a number of Repetition Periods (RP) during which a same MCCH information is transmitted to the UE. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201855 | MOBILE IPV6 OPTIMISED REVERSE TUNNELLING FOR MULTI-HOMED TERMINALS - The invention relates to a method for packet-switched data transmission between a multi-homed mobile node and a correspondent node in a mobile communication system comprising a plurality of mobile networks. The method comprises the steps of selecting by the mobile node one of its home addresses to be used for communication with the correspondent node. The mobile node registers at least one of a plurality of addresses assigned to a considered network interface as care-of-address at a mobile node's home agent responsible for the selected home address. The correspondent node's home agent and mobile node's home agent receive and store candidate proxy home agent addresses. A correspondent node's home agent sends a request to the correspondent node. The correspondent node registers at least one of a plurality of addresses assigned to a considered network interface as care-of-address at the correspondent node's home agent. At least one of the proxy home agent addresses, one of the mobile node's care-of-addresses, and one of the correspondent node's care-of-addresses is selected on both the mobile node's home agent and the corresponding node's home agent, and the mobile node is triggered by the mobile node's home agent and the correspondent node by the corresponding node's home agent to switch a tunnel, so that two endpoints of the tunnel are one of the selected proxy home agent addresses and the selected mobile node's care-of addresses. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201856 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND BASE STATION - A base station includes a first selecting unit that selects a reduction target terminal, a first calculating unit that calculates a reduction amount of assigned transmission rate assigned to the reduction target terminal, a second selecting unit that selects an increase target terminal, a second calculating unit that calculates an increase amount of the assigned transmission rate assigned to the increase target terminal, and a transmitting unit that transmits transmission rate control date to a radio terminal. The second selecting unit selects the increase target terminal and the second calculating unit calculates the increase amount when the reduction target terminal is not selected by the first selecting unit. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201857 | UMA/GAN KEEP-ALIVE MECHANISIM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A wireless communication terminal ( | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201858 | Method, apparatus and computer program product providing slow associated control channel (SACCH) repetition - Techniques are presented for repetition on both uplink and downlink Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH) channels. For instance, an exemplary method is disclosed that is performed by a mobile node. The method includes receiving from a network node a first block of data over a downlink SACCH channel, and storing the first block of data. The method also includes, subsequent to receiving the first block of data, receiving from the network node a second block of data over the downlink SACCH channel. The method further includes attempting to decode the second block of data. The method additionally includes, in response to a failure in the attempt to decode the second block of data, combining into a combination the second block with the stored first block of data. The method also includes attempting to decode the combination. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201859 | Communication Device And Method - A base station unit of a communication device generates control information identical with those generated by other communication devices. The control information includes information defining regions in a radio frame that are used by the communication device and the other communication devices to transmit data. A terminal unit receives data in accordance with the control information. A switching unit changes the connection among the base station unit, the terminal unit and an antenna. When the control information is output from the base station unit, a switch controller operates the switching unit so that the base station unit may be connected to the terminal unit to output the control information to the terminal unit. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090207780 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROL DEVICE, AND BASE STATION DEVICE - There are provided a communication system, a base station control device, and a base station device capable of improving communication quality. In the communication system ( | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207781 | EXPLOITING KNOWN RATE MATCHING INFORMATION IN BLIND DECODING OF DOWNLINK WIRELESS DATA TRANSMISSIONS - In the processing of a data transmission received on wireless data channel HS-DSCH during HS-SCCH-less (HSL) operation according to 3GPP TS 25.214 V7.7.0, a situation is identified wherein redundancy version information corresponding to the received data transmission cannot be obtained from wireless control channel HS-SCCH. The redundancy version information is normally indicative of an HSL redundancy version that specifies derate matching for the received data transmission. In response to identification of the situation, derate matching is applied to the received data transmission according to an HSL redundancy version other than the HSL redundancy version that is specified by HSL for derate matching in the situation. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207782 | AGGREGATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AGGREGATE NODE, AND DEAGGREGATE NODE - A technology for providing an aggregation management system and the like which can quickly and efficiently manage aggregation in a mobile-environment is disclosed. According to the technology, an aggregate node adds mobile status information to signaling messages of end-to-end signaling sessions received from mobile terminals | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207783 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS USING VIRTUAL SINK NODE IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A communication method and apparatus using a virtual sink node in a wireless sensor network, in which location information about a destination node is acquired by a source node. If the location of the destination node is out of a transmission range of the source node, data including the location information about the destination node are transmitted from the source node to one of nodes adjacent to the source node, where the one node is typically closest to the destination node. The data are transmitted from the one node to another one of nodes adjacent to the one node, where another node is closest to the destination node, until the destination node is located within a transmission range of the one node. If the destination node is located within the transmission range of the one node, the data are transmitted from the one node to the destination node. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207784 | RANK FEEDBACK METHOD FOR MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT TRANSMISSION - A method for transmitting a plurality of control information through a PUCCH or a PUSCH is disclosed. The method includes transmitting first control information, and transmitting second control information. The transmission of the first control information and the transmission of the second control information are performed in units of one subframe and are performed once per predetermined period, respectively. In a subframe in which the transmission of the second control information is to be simultaneously performed with the transmission of the first control information, the second control information is excluded for transmission or the first and the second information are simultaneously transmitted, according to the configuration of a closed-loop system or an open-loop system. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207785 | Method and Apparatus for Assigning Persistent Resources Dynamically in a Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus for dynamically assigning persistent resources in a wireless communications system is provided. A method comprises transmitting a first boundary indication to a mobile station, and transmitting a position indication to the mobile station, wherein the position indication corresponds to a network resource assigned based on a network resource request, the position indication is relative to the first boundary indication. The method also comprises transmitting a second boundary indication to the mobile station in response to detecting a change in a position of a boundary, and transmitting a first transmission to the mobile station using a network resource corresponding to the position indication or receiving a second transmission from the mobile station using a network resource corresponding to the position indication, wherein the position indication is relative to the second boundary indication. The first boundary indication is based on a position of the boundary. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090207786 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FROM RLC LAYER IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for transmitting data from an RLC layer in a radio communication system. The method includes the steps of storing RLC SDUs transferred from an upper layer in a transmission buffer, transmitting RLC PDUs on which the RLC SDUs stored in the transmission buffer are loaded to a receiving side in order, discarding the RLC SDUs stored in the transmission buffer, checking whether a transmission mode indicator is configured, and transmitting discard information about the discarded RLC SDUs to the receiving side entirely or in part in accordance with whether the transmission MRW mode indicator is configured. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090213783 | Roaming Network Stations Using A Mac Address Identifier To Select New Access Point - There is disclosed a method of helping mobile stations such as voice over IP devices to roam between wireless access points, by each access point transmitting the MAC address of a spanning tree algorithm root switch of the local network domain. This MAC address is used by mobile stations to detect if two access points are in a common network domain. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213784 | SYSTEM, NODE, AND METHOD OPTIMIZING DATA CONNECTIONS FOR PACKET SERVICES - A method, a wireless node, and a telecommunication system optimizing data connections. The system has a servicing node ( | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213785 | System and Method for the Monitoring of Grouped Objects - A system and a method for monitoring grouped objects with a gateway and a plurality of radio nodes attachable to the objects. Each radio node has a computing unit, a short-range communications unit and an energy supply unit. One of the radio nodes or the gateway has a localization unit. Optionally, one of the radio nodes also has a long-range communications unit. The computing unit contains a control program for the processing of predetermined tasks in radio nodes, which is designed for the control of bi-directional communications between the radio nodes via the short-range communications unit for the formation of an ad hoc network. The control program undertakes the control of a tuning process between the radio nodes and selects one of the radio nodes for the processing of one of the predetermined tasks, the selected node at that instant being best suited for the task according to predetermined criteria. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213786 | MOBILE STATION, A BASE STATION, A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - There is disclosed a mobile station performing packet communications with a base station, including: a reservation control signal generating unit configured to generate a reservation control signal, based on control information transmitted in advance of a data packet; and a reservation control signal transmission control unit configured to transmit the reservation control signal at a predetermined timing. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213787 | Wireless Communication Device - A wireless communication device ( | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213788 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A SYSTEMINFO BLOCK IN AN ACTIVE STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a SystemInfo block in an Active state in a wireless communication system is described. The SystemInfo block is transmitted every N | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213789 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING IN READ SYSTEMINFO STATE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for processing in Read SystemInfo state in a wireless communication network, the method comprising issuing a ControlChannelMAC.Activate command, issuing a OverheadMessages.Activate command and determining if a SystemInfoBlock is received within T | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213790 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A MULTI-CODE WORD ASSIGNMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for processing a Multi-code word assignment is provided, comprising receiving a MCW-FLAB | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213791 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING IN AN IDLE STATE BY AN ACCESS TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for processing an Idle state by an access terminal in a wireless communication system is described. An IdleState.Activate command, ActiveSetManagement.Activate command is issued. It is determined if a queued OpenConnection command is present. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213792 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING A DEFAULT GATEWAY ADDRESS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for setting a default gateway address of a mobile terminal (MT). In the method, address configuration information is received from a network device. An address different from a Packet Data Protocol (PDP) included in the address configuration information is configured as a network address of the default gateway. Filtering is performed on a packet received by the mobile terminal. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213793 | Radio base station apparatus - A media access control unit of a radio base station apparatus includes: a resource table for storing resource block numbers in order to reserve resource blocks for the packet data; a system information memory unit for storing a parameter used to determine whether to update information stored in the resource table; and a scheduler. When the parameter indicates update, the scheduler selects resource blocks spaced apart from each other in frequency and having a good radio quality, updates the resource table by using resource block numbers corresponding to the selected resource blocks, and performs persistent scheduling and distributed transmission scheduling on the packet data by using the resource blocks corresponding to the resource block numbers stored in the resource table. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213794 | Multiplexing media components of different sessions reference to related applications - An apparatus and a method are provided for multiplexing different sessions using the same authorized contexts for media. The method includes distinguishing different control plane sessions by a user equipment, and identifying media flows of a same application among the different control plane sessions by the user equipment by setting a service identifier. The method further includes sending the service identifier by the user equipment to a call state control function including a policy decision function, and authorizing quality of service for a user plane context by the policy decision function. Furthermore, the method includes enabling, by the policy decision function based on the service identifier, the different control plane sessions with media flows of the same application to share the same user plane context with the authorized quality of service to multiplex the different control plane sessions with media flows of the same application. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213795 | Communication of Access Information in Wireless Communication System - System and method for providing wireless communications is provided. Communications are established between a mobile station and a base station, and the mobile station is provided a list of network providers that can be accessed via the base station. The list of network providers may include identifiers of the available network service providers or both identifiers and names of the available network service providers, and may be provided as a result of a broadcast message or in response to a request. The mobile station may further request the realm of a visited network service provider in order to properly decorate an EAP authentication information request. By transmitting a properly decorated EAP authentication request, the mobile station can determine the type of authentication to be performed and provide it to the visited network service provider. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213796 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATION - A system for enabling at least a first mobile communication device and a second mobile communication device to establish communication, the system including a server adapted to receive from the first device an ID string associated with the second device, the ID string being obtained from the second device over a local communication link between the first and second devices, the server being adapted to program a switch or router so as to cause the switch or router to bridge communication between the first and second devices. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213797 | METHOD FOR BINDING UPDATE IN MOBILE IPV6 AND MOBILE IPV6 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for binding update in the mobile IPv6 is provided. After a binding management key is obtained in a return routability procedure, a home address (HoA) in a binding update (BU) packet is sent in a form of an encrypted option. In the BU process, an HoA index may also be bound. A corresponding mobile IPv6 communication system and a mobile node (MN), a correspondent node (CN), and a home agent (HA) in the communication system are also provided. Thus, the HoA appears only once in an encrypted form in a packet sent to the CN in the BU process, thereby improving the security of the HoA in the BU process. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213798 | METHOD, SYSTEM, MOBILE NODE, COMMUNICATION NODE AND HOME AGENT FOR COMMUNICATION IN MOBILE IPV6 NETWORKS - A method for communication in IPv6 networks is provided. In this method, first, a destination node in communication is notified about an association relation between a home address (HoA) index and an HoA. Then, in a packet, an HoA option and a Type-2 routing header are substituted by an HoA index option or a binding index extension header carrying the HoA index according to the association relation stored in the destination node. Further, a system corresponding to the above method is also provided. Through the present invention, an overhead of a mobile IPv6 packet is effectively reduced. Besides, the HoA index is simple in content and is not relevant to any privacy parameter in content, thus ensuring the security of communication. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213799 | METHOD FOR SETTING USER EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIER IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is directed to a method for setting a user equipment identifier as user equipment identification information used when data received through a dedicated logical channel is transmitted through a common transport channel. The method includes transmitting data and a message type indicator as user equipment identification information from a RRC layer to an RLC layer; setting a user equipment identifier indicator according to the received message type indicator in the RLC layer and transmitting it with the data to a MAC layer; and selecting a user equipment identifier type and a user equipment identifier according to the set user equipment indication identifier, adding it to a header of a MAC SDU in the MAC layer and transmitting it to a corresponding MAC layer in a receiving device. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090219855 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD OF DOWNLINK PACKET COMMUNICATION AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - A wireless base station for transmitting a data packet to a plurality of mobile stations through a downlink shared channel determines two powers to be allocated to the downlink shared channel using two large and small transmission power margins. The wireless base station carries out a step of relating a first transmission format, which applies a phase modulation or a phase-amplitude modulation to a data packet to be transmitted by an allocation power corresponding to the larger margin, to the mobile stations and a step of relating a second transmission format, which applies only the phase modulation to the data packet to be transmitted using the allocation power corresponding to the other margin, to the mobile stations, compares the total numbers of bits to be transmitted by the respective transmission formats, and transmits the data packet by the transmission format corresponding to a larger value. With this operation, the communication fault of an HSDPA due to the transmission power margins can be prevented. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219856 | METHOD OF ASSIGNING TRAFFIC RESOURCE - A communication system receives attributes associated with access terminals within a cell and groups them in accordance with similarities between the received attributes. Resource assignment messages customized to their respective attributes are transmitted to the groups, thereby ensuring that all groups receive these messages. These groups are formed dynamically as the attributes of the access terminals vary when they traverse through a cell. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219857 | METHOD OF SERVING SECTOR MAINTENANCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An apparatus and method for serving sector maintenance in a wireless communication system is described. A forward link shared signaling Change (FLSS) command is received and it is determined if a FLSS in the ChangeFLSS command is a member of a NonSynchronousSubset. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219858 | Method and System for Transmitting a Signal to a Communication Device in a Cellular Communication System - A method for transmitting a signal to a communication device in a cellular communication system is provided. The method comprises transmitting a signal using a first antenna being provided in a first sector of the cellular communication system, and transmitting another signal using a second antenna being provided in a second sector of the cellular communication system, wherein the first sector at least partially overlaps the second sector, wherein the signal transmitted by the second antenna is a cyclic delayed version of the signal transmitted by the first antenna. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219859 | Radio Communication Terminal - A radio communication terminal according to the present invention comprises: a call request transmitter configured to transmit a call request for a destination terminal to a call control server; an input information acquisition unit configured to acquire inputted information; a message creation unit configured to create a message for the destination terminal on the basis of the information acquired by the input information acquisition unit; a starting unit configured to start the message creation unit during a period from when the call request transmitter transmits the call request until the communication path is set; and a message transmitter configured to transmit the message created by the message creation unit to the destination terminal. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219860 | BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention relates to a base station for generating and transmitting system information to a mobile station. The present invention also relates to a communication method of communicating system information in a communication system including the base station and the mobile station. The base station generates system information; categorizes the system information into multiple pieces of system information; multiplexes the categorized multiple pieces of system information into multiple channels or multiple blocks; and transmits the system information on the multiple channels or the multiple blocks. The mobile station receives system information included in a portion of the multiple channels or the multiple blocks. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090219861 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND PAGING INFORMATION RECEPTION METHOD - A disclosed transmitting apparatus includes a paging indicator information generating unit generating paging indicator information including a group ID of users who are to receive a paging channel and information indicating a radio resource in which the paging channel is transmitted; and a multiplexing unit multiplexing the paging indicator information. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090232047 | SYSTEMS FOR CONNECTING AD HOC PICONETS TO WIDE AREA NETWORKS - A hyper-scatternet includes a first ad hoc piconet, a second ad hoc piconet and a wide area network, wherein the first and second ad hoc piconets are configured to communicate with one another via the wide area network. Each ad hoc piconet can include an application server that includes an ad hoc piconet interface that is configured to communicate with an ad hoc piconet using an ad hoc piconet protocol, and a wide area network interface that is configured to communicate with a wide area network using a wide area network protocol. The application server also includes a service manifest that is configured to determine ad hoc piconet services that are available from the ad hoc piconet via the ad hoc piconet interface, and to advertise the ad hoc piconet services to the wide area network as wide area network services via the wide area network interface. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232048 | Computer Program Products for Connecting Ad Hoc Piconets to Wide Area Networks - A hyper-scatternet includes a first ad hoc piconet, a second ad hoc piconet and a wide area network, wherein the first and second ad hoc piconets are configured to communicate with one another via the wide area network. Each ad hoc piconet can include an application server that includes an ad hoc piconet interface that is configured to communicate with an ad hoc piconet using an ad hoc piconet protocol, and a wide area network interface that is configured to communicate with a wide area network using a wide area network protocol. The application server also includes a service manifest that is configured to determine ad hoc piconet services that are available from the ad hoc piconet via the ad hoc piconet interface, and to advertise the ad hoc piconet services to the wide area network as wide area network services via the wide area network interface. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232049 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A MULTIPLE HOP WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method for wireless communication over a multi-hop network are disclosed. One embodiment of the system includes an access point and a plurality of wireless devices. Each of the access point and the plurality of wireless devices includes a high-rate module to send or receive data over a high-rate wireless channel having a first frequency; and a low-rate module to send or receive one or more control signals over a low-rate wireless channel having a second frequency lower than the first frequency. The low-rate modules of the wireless devices are configured to send information for establishing a multi-hop data route to the access point via the low-rate wireless channel. The access point is further configured to broadcast the information over the multi-hop wireless network via the low-rate wireless channel. This configuration efficiently disseminates the information over the network. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232050 | Method And System For Determining Limited Soft Buffer Size On Transport Blocks For Rate Matching - Aspects of a method and system for determining a limited soft buffer size on transport blocks for rate matching are provided. A data stream may be processed for transmission between a base station (eNodeB) and a UE via HARQ procedures. A two-stage rate-matching algorithm may be used in the HARQ procedures. A limited virtual soft buffer size at the UE in the two-stage rate-matching algorithm may be calculated on site based on channel condition information, available channel bandwidth, number of layers in spatial multiplexing, and the capacity of the UE, respectively. The data stream may be first rate-matched to the calculated limited soft buffer size available at the UE, and forwarded for second stage rate-matching to an actual physical channel size determined by the base station. The amount of bits forwarded for second stage rate-matching may equal to the calculated limited virtual soft buffer size of the virtual soft buffer. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232051 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE EXTENSION OF FREQUENCY OFFSET ESTIMATION RANGE BASED ON CORRELATION OF COMPLEX SEQUENCES - Aspects of a method and system for the extension of frequency offset estimation range based on correlation of complex sequences may include partitioning each of a received sample sequence and a local replica sample sequence into three or more similar length contiguous sample sub-sequences. For each of the three or more similar length contiguous sample sub-sequences, a correlation coefficient may be determined between corresponding sample sub-sequences of the partitioned received sample sequence and the local replica sample sequence. A plurality of phase differences may be determined based on adjacent ones of the determined correlation coefficients, and the determined plurality of phase differences may be averaged to generate a phase increment estimate. The communication system may be compliant with a wireless standard, comprising UMTS EUTRA (LTE), WiMAX (IEEE 802.16), and/or WLAN (IEEE 802.11). | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232052 | FRAME TERMINATION - Techniques to increase capacity in a wireless communications system. In an aspect, systematic non-transmission, or “blanking,” of minimal-rate frames transmitted in a communications system is provided. In an exemplary embodiment, eighth rate frames in a cdma2000 voice communications system are systematically substituted with null-rate frames carrying zero traffic bits. Provisions are nevertheless made for the transmission of certain designated as “critical” by, e.g., a vocoder. The receiver detects the presence of null rate or non-null rate transmissions and processes the received frames accordingly, including updating an outer loop power control only in response to non-null rate frames. Further techniques for changing the pilot transmission gating pattern to assist the receiver in detecting null rate frames are provided. In another aspect, early termination of a signal transmission over a wireless communications link is provided. In an exemplary embodiment, a base station (BS) transmits power control groups (PCG's) for a frame over a forward link (FL) to a mobile station (MS) until accurate reception of the frame is acknowledged by the MS over a reverse link (RL), possibly before all PCG's of the frame are received over the FL. Possible ACK signaling methods are defined for channels associated with a cdma2000 wireless communications system. In another exemplary embodiment, techniques for reverse link early termination are also provided. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232053 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS HAVING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FUNCTION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus includes a reception unit, an information management unit, and a transmission unit. The reception unit receives data including a plurality of data frames. The data frames are transmitted from an identical data source and managed by an identical traffic identifier. The information management unit retains acknowledgement information to perform an acknowledgement. The information management unit discards an already-retaining acknowledgement information when the data is newly received. The transmission unit performs the acknowledgement to the data source of the data using the acknowledgement information. The transmission unit performs the acknowledgement to the data corresponding to the acknowledgement information irrespective of a request of the acknowledgement from the data source when the information management unit discards the acknowledgement information or when a prediction on the discard of the acknowledgement information is made. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232054 | BEHAVIOR FOR WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNIT AND MAC CONTROL ELEMENTS FOR LTE DRX OPERATIONS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) stops discontinuous reception (DRX) timers that are running and that are related to uplink and/or downlink transmissions during a DRX time period. The WTRU stops the DRX timers in response to receiving a medium access control (MAC) control element signal from an eNode-B. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232055 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING UNSOLICITED TRAFFIC DESTINED TO A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - An apparatus and method of controlling unsolicited traffic are disclosed herein. The apparatus and method can be applied to wireless communication networks such as CDMA2000, UMTS, GPRS and the like so that traffic which is not solicited by wireless communication devices operating on those networks is not sent over the air needlessly. The present application provides techniques to block unsolicited traffic based on the identity of a user (for example based on International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI), Network Access Identifier (NAI), Mobile Station Internet Services Digital Network Number (MSISDN), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Universal Resource Locator (url)) as opposed to techniques that are based on a session or IP address, such as a traditional firewall. In accordance to this application, user identity based techniques are applied to block unsolicited traffic whenever a user has established a data session. Further in accordance with this application, user identity based techniques are persisted across changes in IP address and/or session. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232056 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A beacon slot position control section of a radio communication apparatus constituting a radio network system which detects whether empty beacon slots are present in a beacon period. When an empty beacon slot is present before the period in which the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon, a movable counter starts counting a specified number of super frames. When the count is completed, the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon of the radio communication apparatus at the earlier empty beacon slot. Consequently, since the empty beacon slots are eliminated and the beacon period is compacted, even if the number of radio communication apparatuses joining the radio network system fluctuates dynamically, the radio communication apparatus can perform radio communication with high efficiency and less waste of consumed electricity. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232057 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A beacon slot position control section of a radio communication apparatus constituting a radio network system which detects whether empty beacon slots are present in a beacon period. When an empty beacon slot is present before the period in which the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon, a movable counter starts counting a specified number of super frames. When the count is completed, the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon of the radio communication apparatus at the earlier empty beacon slot. Consequently, since the empty beacon slots are eliminated and the beacon period is compacted, even if the number of radio communication apparatuses joining the radio network system fluctuates dynamically, the radio communication apparatus can perform radio communication with high efficiency and less waste of consumed electricity. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232058 | METHOD FOR SIGNALING BACK-OFF INFORMATION IN RANDOM ACCESS - A method for performing random access in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting a preamble for random access in uplink, receiving a random access response message including back-off information as a response to the preamble, and performing back-off using the back-off information when the random access has failed. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090238109 | METHOD FOR QUALIFIED ROUTE BUILDING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of establishing a qualified route in a mesh network includes transmitting a route-discovery request from a source node such that transmitting includes transmitting the route-discovery request from the source node to at least one intermediate node that is a neighbor node to the source node, receiving the route-discovery request from an intermediate node at the destination node, and updating a route-discovery table for the intermediate node such that the route between the source node and the destination node is the only qualified route. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238110 | Base Station Apparatus and Method for Controlling Base Station Apparatus - In a base station apparatus ( | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238111 | APPARATUS FOR FLOW CONTROL - Disclosed is a technique which enables a mobile node (MN) connected to a mobile router (MR) to carry out flow filtering in a mobile network. This technique allows an MN | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238112 | Apparatus and method for location information service of terminal in broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus and a method for a location information service of a terminal in a broadband wireless communication system re provided. The method includes receiving a first location information request message requesting location information of the MS from an Internet Service Provider (ISP) server; forwarding the first location information request message to a DataBase (DB) which stores the location information of the MS; receiving a first location information response message comprising the location information of the MS from the DB; and forwarding the received first location information response message to the ISP server. Hence, the location information service of various requirements based on the accuracy or the time can be provided. Further, new services or various values added can be created. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238113 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS - A preamble for use in a packet based communication system is defined on the basis of a preamble for use in a legacy packet based communication system. The preamble is constructed by extracting from the legacy preamble a pilot symbol sequence in frequency of the legacy preamble, replicating the pilot symbol sequence, and concatenating the pilot symbol sequence and the replicated pilot symbol sequence. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238114 | CELL SELECTION AND RESELECTION IN DEPLOYMENTS WITH HOME NODEBS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate cell search, selection, and reselection within a wireless communication network that includes a home node base station (home nodeB). A user equipment (UE) can detect a home nodeB and communicate such identification to a macro network that includes at least one node base station (nodeB). The detected home nodeB and nodeB can be hierarchically structured in order to prioritize connectivity with the home nodeB over the nodeB. Such prioritization can be implemented by broadcasting home nodeB parameters and macro nodeB parameters having identification information therewith. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238115 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus provides a first transfer unit for transferring a first packet received from a base station to a second home agent, the first packet to be sent from a first mobile station to a second mobile station as a destination, the first terminal and the second terminal being managed by a first home agent and the second home agent respectively, a second transfer unit for transferring the first packet sent back from the second home agent to the base station, and a return instruction unit for issuing to the base station an instruction for directly transferring a second packet to the second mobile station when a predetermined condition is satisfied. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238116 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL -BASED FAST CELL SWITCHING FOR HIGH-SPEED PACKET ACCESS - Methods and apparatuses for facilitating switching HSPA (high speed packet access) serving cells from each of an RNC (radio network controller), base station, and access terminal are provided. The RNC pre-configures an access terminal and each base station in an active set for HS-DSCH operation by providing identification codes identifying each of the base stations. The RNC transmits data packets tagged with sequence numbers to each base station where they are synchronously buffered. The access terminal initiates a handover by transmitting a PDU (protocol data unit) to each of the base stations. The PDU is encoded with the identification code of a target base station and a sequence number of a subsequent packet. The target receives the PDU and directly completes the handover with the access terminal. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238117 | CELL SELECTION AND RESELECTION FOR CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELLS - A method for applying a priority of a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell, including receiving priority information for each of a plurality of communication frequencies over which the CSG cell can communicate; storing the priority information at a wireless transmit/receive unit; and applying the priority information to at least one of: taking measurements on a communication frequency, selecting to a CSG cell in the communication frequency, or reselecting to a CSG cell in the communication frequency. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238118 | REDUCING COST OF CELLULAR BACKHAUL - Methods and systems for reducing the cost of cellular backhaul are disclosed. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238119 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING MOBILITY-BASED CONTENT DELIVERY - A portable subscriber access unit includes a wireless transceiver and a processor. The processor controls the transceiver, determines a mobility state of the access unit, and determines a data packet content type. The transceiver transmits the mobility state, receives service rights based on the mobility state, and transmits the data packet on a condition that the content type is allowed by the service rights. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090245168 | Server for Enhancing Communication Between a Content Provider and a Radio Communication Device and Method therefor - The present invention relates to a server ( | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245169 | System and method for multiplexing on an LTE uplink control channel - A wireless communication network comprising a plurality of base stations capable of wireless communication with a plurality of subscriber stations within a coverage area of the network, wherein at least one of the plurality of base stations is capable of: determining a multiplexing scheme for multiplexing a frequency- selective channel quality information/precoding matrix index (FS CQI/PMI) feedback report with a wideband channel quality information/precoding matrix index (WB CQI/PMI) feedback report and a rank information (RI) report on a physical uplink control channel; transmitting the multiplexing scheme to a subscriber station; and receiving, from the subscriber station, an FS CQI/PMI feedback report multiplexed with a WB CQI/PMI feedback report and a RI report on the physical uplink control channel according to the multiplexing scheme. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245170 | System and method for the placement of rank information in a physical uplink shared channel - A wireless communication network comprising a plurality of base stations capable of wireless communication with a plurality of subscriber stations within a coverage area of the network, wherein at least one of the plurality of base stations is capable of selecting two or more orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols in a subframe of a physical uplink shared channel, the two or more OFDM symbols are selected starting from the bottom of the physical uplink shared channel in a bottom-up manner, and repeating one or more rank information (RI) coded bits in each of the selected two or more OFDM symbols. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245171 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication system and a wireless communication device capable of performing communication by each transmission signal without mutual interference, when a plurality of transmission signals of different communication systems or the same communication systems exist within the same frequency band. The system includes a first wireless communication device, a second wireless communication device, a third wireless communication device, and a fixed band-pass filter and a variable band-pass filter in the third wireless communication device. The first wireless communication signal includes control information indicating a variable pass band in the variable band-pass filter, and the control information is given to the variable band-pass filter, thereby allowing the first wireless communication signal to be selectively passed through the variable band-pass filter, while removing the second wireless communication signal. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245172 | BASE STATION AND SCHEDULING METHOD - A base station performing wireless communications with terminals includes: a scheduler scheduling data transmitted to the terminal; a desynchronization determining unit acquiring synchronization information on synchronization between the base station and a neighboring base station to the base station and determining, based on the synchronization information acquired, whether the desynchronization occurs in the base station or not; and a changing unit changing, when the desynchronization determining unit determines that the desynchronization occurs in the base station, the scheduling by the scheduler so as to restrain radio waves transmitted from the base station and radio waves transmitted from the neighboring base station from interfering with each other. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245173 | Radio Communication Terminal, Radio Base Station, And Packet Communication Method - A radio communication terminal according to the present invention transmits and receives multiple types of packets including a RTP packet to and from a communication destination device. The radio communication terminal sets an auxiliary service instance used for transmitting the RTP packet and a main service instance used for transmitting another type of packet between the radio communication terminal and the communication destination device. Depending on radio quality information, the radio communication terminal selects any one of a mode in which a service instance flow ID to identify a service instance is added to the RTP packet and a mode in which the addition of the service instance flow ID is omitted. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245174 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DATA TRANSFER IN A PACKET-SWITCHED DATA NETWORK - Apparatus for and methods of enabling a gateway node of a first packet-switched data network to select a first channel for transferring a data packet to a destination packet data protocol address of a correspondent node provided service in the first network are disclosed. The gateway node is configured to select the first channel from a plurality of channels configured to transfer data packets to the destination packet data protocol address of the correspondent node, wherein the data packet is sent from a mobile node of a second packet-switched data network external to the first network, and wherein the mobile node has been in a communication session with the correspondent node while provided service in a third packet-switched data network different to the second network. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245175 | MOBILE RADIO TERMINAL - A mobile radio terminal has a first radio communication unit and a second radio communication unit adopting mutually different communication systems, first starts the first radio communication unit and connects to a content server CS, obtains meta-data of a desired content, and a control unit determines a communication system to be applied to downloading on the basis of the meta-data, and downloads the content data with one of the first radio communication unit and that second radio communication unit that corresponds to the determination. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245176 | DEVICE MANAGED ACCESS POINT LISTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate device-side access point list management. Blacklists of access points unsuitable for providing network access to a related mobile device can be maintained as well as whitelists of suitable access points. The lists can be managed using an interface provided at the mobile device. In addition, lists can be modified according to provisioned network updates. Also, the lists can be of maximum size such that older entries can be purged upon insertion of newer entries based on a number of factors; timed entry deletion is provided as well. Access points in the lists can be stored and presented according to various identifiers related to the access points. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245177 | System and Method for Multiple Packet Data Network Connectivity Detachment - A system is provided that includes a component configured to promote detachment of a user equipment (UE) from a plurality of packet data network (PDN) gateways by sending a message to the plurality of PDN gateways to detach multiple PDN connections associated with the UE. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245178 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO REPORT AND MANAGE CELLS IN A MULTI CARRIER SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses for facilitating managing cells in a multi-carrier system from an access terminal and base station are provided. The base station and access terminal communicate via an anchor carrier and a supplementary carrier. A triggering algorithm generated by the base station is transmitted to the access terminal. The triggering algorithm includes instructions for the access terminal to report downlink measurements as a function of trigger events detected over the anchor carrier and/or the supplementary carrier. Downlink measurements taken by the access terminal are provided to the base station. Cell management instructions based in part on the downlink measurements are then provided to the access terminal by the base station. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245179 | Method and System for Processing International Calls Using a Voice Over IP Process - A method for processing an multi-country international phone call, free from an international toll charge, using a voice over IP (VoIP) call from a first mobile handset to a second handset. The method includes transferring destination number information associated with a destination number within a first country code from the first mobile handset to a data network, which is coupled to a world wide network of computers. In a preferred embodiment, the handset is coupled via cellular network through a data network to the world wide network of computers. The method includes transferring caller number information associated with a caller number within a second country code from the first mobile handset to the data network. In a preferred embodiment, the second country code is different from the second country code. The method includes receiving the destination information at a call server process, which is coupled to the world wide network of computers. The method also includes receiving the caller number information at the call server process. The method initiates a first VoIP phone call using the caller number information from the server process to the first mobile handset. The method initiates a second VoIP phone call using the destination number information from the server process to the second handset. The method also connects the first VoIP phone call to the first mobile handset to the second VoIP phone call to the second handset through the server process. The method also includes exchanging voice information between the first mobile handset and the second handset free from an international toll charge. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245180 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTIMEDIA CALL CONTINUITY - A system, method, and apparatus for implementing multimedia call continuity solve the problem that when a domain transfer happens, part of a media flow in a multimedia session cannot be transfer between bearers of different access modes. Besides a remote UE, the system further includes a multi-mode terminal MTF UE that supports media flow transfer between multiple modes and carries media flow transfer context information in an initiated media stream transfer request, and a media transfer function (MTF) that acts as an agent to initiate and perform a media renegotiation with the remote UE, according to the media flow transfer context information carried in the request. After the media renegotiation, the MTF UE or the MTF is adapted to release the media flow that needs to be transferred before the media renegotiation. Therefore, when a domain transfer happens, the media stream can be transferred between the bearers of different access modes that the MTF UE supports. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245181 | REAL-TIME RATE CONTROL MECHANISM FOR MULTI-RATE DATA TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Wireless networks are becoming increasingly heterogeneous in terms of the processing capabilities of network users' receiving equipment. According to embodiments of the invention, in a communications network comprising a plurality of receivers with different data reception rate capabilities, data frames targeted to respective receivers may be transmitted to the receivers in accordance with the respective data reception rate capabilities of the receivers. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090252084 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BROADCASTING PUSH-TO-TALK GROUP SESSIONS - The present invention relates to a method of communicating a push-to data packet within a communications system, where the push-to packet originates from a push-to client participating in a push-to user group comprising at least two push-to clients. The method comprises receiving the push-to data packet from a push-to server and broadcasting the push-to data packet over a broadcast distribution network to broadcasting clients which are not part of the push-to user group. A communications interface arranged to communicate push-to data packets, originating from a push-to client participating in a push-to user group comprising at least two push-to clients, from a push-to server to a broadcast node arranged to broadcast the push-to data packets to broadcasting clients which are not part of the push-to user group is also disclosed. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252085 | ROBUST WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS THEREOF - A wireless communication system includes an access point and first and second stations. The first station transmits a first message that includes an address of a second station as a destination address and an address of the first station as a source address. The access point forwards the message including the address of the second station address as the destination address and the address of the first station as the source address. The second station receives the message from the first station during a first time interval and receives the first message from the access point during a second time interval. The second station processes the duplicate received message to produce inbound data. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252086 | FRONT-END GATEWAY UNIT FOR REMOTE ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT MONITORING SYSTEM - A front-end gateway unit is designed for integration to a remote ecological environment monitoring system that is equipped with a wireless sensor network (WSN) system installed at a remote site, such as a farmland or a garden, for the purpose of allowing the WSN system to exchange data with a back-end host server via a wireless communication system. The front-end gateway unit is characterized by the capability of using either the WSN system or a built-in sensing module for collecting ecological data, and the capability of combining geographical location data in the ecological data. This feature allows the collection of a comprehensive set of ecological data (including geographical location, temperature, humidity, sunlight data, wind speed, and pest number) for transfer to the back-end host server, such that research/management personnel at the local site can conveniently browse these ecological data and learn the ecological conditions of the remotely monitored area. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252087 | Wireless-linked remote ecological environment monitoring system - A wireless-linked remote ecological environment monitoring system is proposed, which is characterized by the use of a sensor network such as WSN (wireless sensor network) installed at the remote site for collecting ecological data, and the use of a public wireless communication system such as GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) for transferring all the collected ecological data to a back-end host server unit where the ecological data are compiled into webpages for posting on a website. This feature allows the research/management personnel to browse the ecological data simply by linking a network workstation via a network system such as the Internet to the website, without having to travel to the remote site and collect ecological data by human labor. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252088 | Method for routing via access terminals - An access-terminal routing methodology is provided that may be used to enable a wireless, meshed backhaul between base stations using existing wireless-access resources (time, bandwidth, code-space, power), protocols, and base station infrastructure. Accordingly, the invention provides a means to extend the coverage of existing networks by adding standalone base stations without wired or specialized wireless backhaul. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252089 | PACKET RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING METHOD - An embodiment of the invention provides a method of receiving packets from a transmitting station at a receiving station in a mobile communication system. The packet receiving method includes receiving a radio resource including a data packet and a packet indicator related to the data packet, identifying the packet indicator, and processing the data packet according to the content of the packet indicator. Another embodiment of the invention provides a method of transmitting packets from a transmitting station to a receiving station in a mobile communication system. The packet transmitting method includes receiving a response signal of a first data packet from the receiving station, allocating a second data packet to a radio resource according to the response signal, allocating a packet indicator related to the second data packet to the radio resource, and transmitting the second data packet and the packet indicator to the receiving station. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252090 | Apparatus and method of 3G mobile communication capable of implementing a multi-channel protocol - This invention discloses an apparatus and a method of 3G mobile communication capable of implementing a multi-channel protocol. The 3G mobile communication apparatus includes: an application layer, for providing applications to transmit voice data; a multi-channel processing layer, for simulating at least one physical communication port of the 3G mobile communication apparatus into virtual logical data channels by software according to priority of the data transmitted, and each virtual logical data channel is connected to the data processing layer, and a multi-channel protocol layer is provided for transmitting the data received by the 3G mobile communication apparatus to the data processing layer according to the priority of the data; and a 3G wireless communication module, which is a wireless communication interface, for connecting the bus interface and achieving a signal connection of the 3G mobile communication apparatus with a base station. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252091 | System and Method for Multi-Stage Zero Forcing Beamforming in a Wireless Communications System - A system and method for multi-stage zero forcing beamforming in a wireless communications system is provided. A method includes receiving feedback information from each mobile station (MS) in a first plurality of mobile stations (MSs), selecting a first MS from the first plurality of MSs, and broadcasting information related to the first MS to the first plurality of MSs. The first MS having a largest value of a first metric based on the feedback information received from the first plurality of MSs. The method also includes receiving feedback information from each MS in a second plurality of MSs, selecting a second MS from the second plurality of MSs, and creating a precoding matrix from feedback information from the first MS and the second MS. The second MS having a largest value of a second metric based on the feedback information received from the second plurality of MSs. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090257372 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED DECODING OF HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST TRANSMISSIONS - A method for improved decoding of hybrid automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) transmissions may include attempting to verify a physical layer (PHY) cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for a candidate H-ARQ encoder packet. If the PHY CRC is not verified, medium access control layer protocol data units (MPDUs) may be identified in the candidate H-ARQ encoder packet, and attempts may be made to verify a medium access control layer (MAC) CRC for each MPDU in the candidate H-ARQ encoder packet. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257373 | Methods and Apparatus for Coverage Verification in a Wireless Sensor Network - Methods and apparatus are provided for improved coverage verification schemes in a wireless sensor network that do not require information about the location of sensor nodes in the wireless sensor network. Coverage holes are detected by a first node in a wireless sensor network by obtaining an estimate of a distance to each of a plurality of additional nodes in a transmission radius of the first node; determining a relative location of each of the plurality of additional nodes in the coordinate system of the first node; identifying border segments of a sensing border of the first node, where each of the border segments comprises a section of a sensing border of the first node that is covered by a sensing radius of at least one of the additional nodes; and determining if a coverage hole exists for the first node by determining if a plurality of the border segments comprise a cyclic segment sequence. The coordinate system comprises r-map coordinates of the first node and the additional nodes, where r is based on a transmission radius of the first node | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257374 | MOBILE MULTIMEDIA TERMINAL FOR A CALM SYSTEM AND A METHOD FOR OFFERING CONTINUOUS MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS - A mobile multimedia terminal for a CALM (Continuous Air interface for Long and Medium range) system includes, a wireless multimedia communications transceiver for transmitting and receiving signals over at least two wireless media; a communications link determination and management unit for acquiring interface IDs of the wireless media over which the wireless multimedia communications transceiver receives wireless multimedia signals and establishing communications channels for each of the wireless media whose interface IDs are acquired; and a wireless communications control unit for controlling the communications link determination and management unit to acquire the interface IDs and establish the communications channels, and for controlling data transmission and receipt via the established channels. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257375 | ACCESS GATEWAY APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication control system capable of reducing the traffic amount, CPU's processing load and channel bands related to a location registering process. In this system, a paging part ( | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257376 | INTELLIGENT ACCESS POINT FOR DELIVERING LOCATION BASED INFORMATION - A method for delivering location based information in wireless zone is disclosed. All the location based information is stored in the access point itself thus eliminating the need for backend server. Access point has the intelligence to deliver information in customized to each requesting device's display capability. To provide seamless access to local information the user will get a default web page once the device connects to access point and tries to access internet. This web page will act as a gateway to all the location based information available in the access point. Along with location based information advertisements can also be delivered to the end user in a very cost effective and targeted manner. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257377 | REDUCING BUFFER SIZE FOR REPEAT TRANSMISSION PROTOCOLS - A wireless communication device includes a receive buffer and control logic coupled to the receive buffer. The control logic implements an algorithm to selectively drop data blocks in the receive buffer once a predetermined fill threshold for the receive buffer is reached. The receive buffer is sized so that a drop activity level for the algorithm is within a predetermined range. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257378 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - A real-time media session is established between user equipment and a media communication server via a serving access network. According to the Invention, dummy data (e.g. a dummy message) is sent in order to maintain a dedicated channel during the inactive periods of a real-time media session or to trigger an early setup of a dedicated channel in the access network. In this manner, user equipment logged on to a real-time media (e.g. PoC) session are prevented from going to a radio resource idle state, thus avoiding potential long extra delays during real-time media (e.g. PoC) service usage. The invention further allows the sending and receiving user equipment to set up dedicated channels (DCH) already during the start-to-talk procedure of the transmitting user equipment, which in turn potentially reduces end-to-end delays during the conversation. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090262679 | BROADCASTING SIGNAL RECEIVER AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING BROADCASTING SIGNAL - A broadcasting signal receiver and a method for transmitting/receiving a broadcasting signal are disclosed. An identifier of a cell is set in the broadcasting signal and, if the cell is changed, channel information of the changed cell can be obtained from program table information having the channel information of the cell. Accordingly, the broadcasting signal receiver can continuously output a program although the cell is changed. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262680 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AN UPLINK TRANSMISSION CONTROL MESSAGE, METHOD FOR RECEIVING AN UPLINK TRANSMISSION CONTROL MESSAGE - In an embodiment, a communication device is provided. The communication device may include a scheduling message generating circuit configured to generate a scheduling message such that the scheduling message includes a receiving scheduling information specifying when to receive an uplink transmission control message, the receiving scheduling information being defined depending on a configuration of an uplink transmission channel, an uplink transmission control message generating circuit configured to generate an uplink transmission control message to control an uplink transmission from another communication device via the uplink transmission channel, and a transmitter circuit configured to transmit the uplink transmission control message in accordance with the receiving scheduling information such that the uplink transmission control message is transmitted via an uplink transmission control downlink channel. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262681 | METHOD OF PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing a random access procedure in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a random access preamble, receiving a random access response from a network as a response to the random access preamble, transmitting a connection request message comprising information on a temporary identifier, and receiving a contention resolution message from the network. The temporary identifier is randomly generated and the contention resolution message is addressed to the temporary identifier. Contentions between user equipments can be resolved through a temporary identifier occupying less radio resources in a random access procedure. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262682 | Method and Apparatus for Transport of RANAP Messages over the Iuh Interface in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method covers communication from the user equipment to an access point or from the core network to a network controller. The method sends of a radio access network application part (RANAP) message by identifying the RANAP message with a first header and encapsulating that message with a second header. The method passes the encapsulated message to its destination using information from the second header. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262683 | Method and Apparatus for Setup and Release of User Equipment Context Identifiers in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method covers the sending of a registration request for a user equipment from an access point to the network controller and receiving a registration accept response with a unique identifier for the user equipment allocated by the network controller. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262684 | Method and Apparatus for Home Node B Registration using HNBAP - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method sends a registration request from an access point to a network controller with location information and an identifier for the access point. The method receives at the access point a response when the access point is permitted to access the services of the network controller. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262685 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE IP ROUTE OPTIMIZATION - The current application concerns a method, mobile node, home agent and system for route optimisation between a mobile node and at least one correspondent node in a packet switched network, wherein a route via a first home agent is redirected via a second home agent. The mobile node sends an extended home test initiation message comprising following information: authentication data, an address of the correspondent node, a first home address and a second home address. The first home agent receives the extended home test initiation message and sends an extended home test message to the second home agent, the extended home test message comprising the information from the extended home test initiation message. The second home agent receives the extended home test message and a communication is routed between the mobile node and the at least one correspondent node via the second home agent. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262686 | SESSION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND SESSION CLEAR-OUT METHOD - Session management means holds session information concerning sessions for fixed terminals and sessions for mobile terminals including type information indicating a terminal type and status information indicating the status of communication. Session clear-out means disconnects a session the type information for which indicates a mobile terminal and in which communication has not been performed for a time period longer than or equal to a first monitoring time period, on the basis of the session information held in the session management means. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262687 | Wireless Communications Control Method, Wireless Base Station, And Wireless Terminal - The wireless base station sends control data relating to the processing, belonging to the upper layer (the second layer) of the first layer, to the wireless terminal through the downlink channel. Upon reception of the control data through the downlink data channel, the wireless terminal sends the response data, as a response to the control data, to the wireless base station through the control channel. The wireless base station detects the response data from the received data through the control channel, and then controls the processing belonging to the upper layer based on the response data. The above processing eliminates establishing a data channel to the wireless base station only for the response data as a response to the processing belonging to the upper layer. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090268661 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND ROAMING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile communication terminal apparatus and a control method thereof wherein a smooth handoff can be quickly achieved in a seamless manner during a roaming between data communication networks of different packet exchange systems. A mobile communication terminal apparatus ( | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268662 | Method and Arrangement for Bi-Directional Relating in Wireless Communication Systems - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in a relaying radio node and/or in a sending/receiving radio node, adapted for use in a relaying communication system. The relaying node is in bidirectional communication with at least a first and a second sending/receiving radio node, and the relaying radio node receives at least a first signal carrying at least first data and a second signal carrying at least second data. The relaying node generates a reduced representation of at least the first and second signal, with a reduced information content as compared to the first and second data, by a joint non-linearly encoding operation, and transmits the reduced representation to at least the first and the second communication node. The first and second sending/receiving node can extract data from the reduced representation by a non-linear decoding operation using stored a priori information. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268663 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus is provided. The wireless communication apparatus includes: detection means that detects that there is another wireless communication apparatus around the wireless communication apparatus; comparison means that compares a first reference value managed in the wireless communication apparatus with a second reference value managed in the another wireless communication apparatus; means that corrects the first reference value based on the comparison result; and means that announces the first reference value to the another wireless communication apparatus. Frequencies are set such that a frequency of the wireless communication apparatus becomes same as a frequency of still another wireless communication apparatus to which a radio wave of the wireless communication apparatus does not reach but a radio wave of the another wireless communication apparatus reaches. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268664 | COMMUNICATION ROUTE OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION ROUTE OPTIMIZATION CONTROL DEVICE - The present invention provides a technique to optimize communication route when two end nodes separated away from own home perform data communication with each other. According to this technique, a communication node (the initiator node | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268665 | Method and Apparatus for Locating MediaFLO Capable Wireless Devices - Estimating a current location of a receiver in a MediaFLO™ (Forward Link Only) mobile multimedia multicast system comprises receiving digital signals comprising a MediaFLO™ superframe comprising orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols; performing slot | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268666 | RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL PREAMBLE SELECTION - The present invention provides a method of selecting a random access preamble in a radio communication system operable at least on a physical layer and a medium access control layer. Random access preambles are divided into at least two groups, the groups depending on at least one of the following: radio conditions and a size of a message to be transmitted by user equipment. The method comprising: (a) the medium access control layer selecting one of the preamble groups; (b) the medium access control layer randomly selecting one random access preamble within the selected group; (c) the medium access control layer signaling the selected random access preamble to the physical layer; and (d) the physical layer generating and transmitting the generated random access preamble. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268667 | Header compression mechanism for transmitting RTP packets over wireless links - This disclosure describes a new a header compression method for a MAC protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols into a heterogeneous MAC protocol used for forwarding VoIP traffic in VoIP systems on wireless networks using multiple base stations that reduces packet overhead thus allowing for transmission of high bit-rate data to multiple users over wired and wireless means. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268668 | LOCAL IP ACCESS SCHEME - Local IP access is provided in a wireless network to facilitate access to one or more local services. In some implementations, different IP interfaces are used for accessing different services (e.g., local services and operator network services). A list that maps packet destinations to IP interfaces may be employed to determine which IP interface is to be used for sending a given packet. In some implementations an access point provides a proxy function (e.g., a proxy ARP function) for an access terminal. In some implementations an access point provides an agent function (e.g., a DHCP function) for an access terminal. NAT operations may be performed at an access point to enable the access terminal to access local services. In some aspects, an access point may determine whether to send a packet from an access terminal via a protocol tunnel based on the destination of the packet. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268669 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND TERMINAL DEVICE - Disclosed are a base station device and a terminal device. The base station device includes a signal generator to generate a synchronization channel signal based on the cell type of a cell that the base station device manages, and a transmitter to transmit the synchronization channel signal via a synchronization channel established between at least one terminal device and the base station device, wherein the cell type is classified based on the information of the scale of the cell and whether the cell selectively allows access. The terminal may quickly recognize the cell type in a cellular wireless communication system having a hierarchical cell structure. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268670 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION AND PACKET DATA IN DOWNLINK - Provided are a method and apparatus for transmitting control information and packet data. The method includes generating control channels which transmit the control information; generating control indication channel which indicates whether the control channels are transmitted or not; generating data channels in order to transmit the packet data based on the control information; multiplexing the control channels, the control indication channels, and the data channels; and transmitting the control channels, the control indication channels, and the data channels. According to the present invention, when control information and packet data are transmitted in downlink, by transmitting additional information indicating whether control channels are transmitted or not, resources not actually allocated to control channels can be allocated to data channel and the mobile station can receive data channel using the control indication information. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268671 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING ACCESS POINT STARTUP AND INITIAL CHANNEL SELECTION PROCESSES - A startup process of an access point (AP) includes a discovery phase and an announcement phase. During the discovery phase, the AP detects neighboring APs from its own extended service set (ESS), neighboring APs from different ESSs, and external sources of interference. During the announcement phase, the AP transmits its beacon signals at maximum power in order to accelerate recognition by neighboring APs running the discovery phase. An automatic initialization channel selection process of an AP scans channels the AP will use to communicate. Information of each scanned channel is recorded and a best performance channel is determined for use by the AP. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268672 | System and Method for Pushing Data to a Mobile Device - A system for handling information requests from mobile devices includes a memory, a state prediction module, and a push module. The memory is operable to store data requests received from the mobile devices. The state prediction module is operable to access the memory to predict forecasted data requests for a mobile device based on the stored data requests. The push module is operable to receive the forecasted data requests from the state prediction module and in response request and receive response data related to the forecasted data requests and prepare the response data for transmission to the mobile device over a wireless network. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090274090 | Push-To-Talk Optimization - A push to talk message protocol operating on a communication network between an originating and terminating communication device operates to transmit compressed message formats to initiate the push to talk message protocol. Four compressed session protocol message formats are used in the preferred embodiment. A compressed originating session initiation invite message is transmitted from the originating mobile station. A compressed terminating session initiation invite message is received by the terminating mobile station. A compressed session initiation protocol ping message is transmitted from the originating mobile station and received by the terminating mobile station. A compressed 200 OK session initiation protocol message is transmitted from the terminating mobile station and received by the originating mobile station. Finally, the originating mobile decompresses the 200 OK session initiation protocol message. These compressed massages are used to initiate the push to talk communication session. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274091 | SYSTEM FOR INTERCONNECTING BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORK WITH WIRED NETWORK - A system for interconnecting a broadband wireless network with a wired network comprises: as for a broadband wireless network required to be interconnected with a wired network, in equipment selected in the corresponding broadband wireless access (BWA) network, setting an interface communicating with at least one kind of wired network; through communicating with equipment of the at least one kind of wired network by the interface, transmitting information required to be transferred between the BWA network and the wired network; and then implementing the interconnection between the broadband wireless network and the wired network. For example, it can implement the interconnection between the worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) network and the multi-service operator (MSO) network and/or the digital subscriber line (DSL) network as the wired network. Therefore, the implementation of the present invention enables subscribers of the broadband wireless network and subscribers of the wired network to inter-utilize the corresponding access network and to acquire the corresponding access services, and thus the services are developed for the subscribers more smartly and conveniently. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274092 | Transmission of internet packets according to a priority - A telecommunications system is operable to provide a facility for a communications session to a mobile node using an internet protocol. When changing affiliation from one of a first and second packet data network to the other of the first and second packet data network, a mobile node is operable to generate a service level identifier representing a requested priority to be afforded to the internet packets communicated to and from the mobile node with respect to other internet packets communicated to and from other nodes. The mobile node is also operable to generate a binding update internet packet providing a care of address of the mobile and an indication of the service level identifier in the binding update internet packet and to communicate the binding update internet data packets to a home agent of the mobile node. The home agent is operable in response to the binding update to identify the service level identifier and to communicate the internet packets in accordance with the requested priority represented by the service level identifier. The telecommunications system can prioritise the transmission of internet packets according to a priority requested by the mobile node represented by the service level identifier thus reducing a likelihood that mobile node will experience delays or interruptions in the transmission of data. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274093 | Process for Routing Data Packets in a Mobile Node Network and Associated Terminal - A method of routing data packets (P) between a source node (S) and a target node (C) in an ad hoc network comprising mobile nodes ( | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274094 | ADVERTISING SUPPORT FOR A PLURALITY OF SERVICE NETWORKS BY A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - To advertise capabilities of a wireless access point, the wireless access point communicates, to a mobile station, messages at plural levels of detail to advertise that the wireless access point supports a plurality of service networks. The messages at the plural levels of detail include a first message indicating that the wireless access point supports multiple service networks, and a second message containing information identifying the plurality of service networks. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274095 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - A mobile wireless communication system includes: a wireless base station that controls, for each timing, a transmission state of a radio wave repeatedly transmitted at timings that respectively differ; and a plurality of wireless mobile devices that are respectively allocated one of the timings, receive the radio wave at the timing allocated, and based on the radio wave received, respectively detect a connection destination. The wireless base station controls the transmission state of the radio wave transmitted at an arbitrary timing to be any one of a complete suspension state of continuously suspending transmission, a discontinuous suspension state of discontinuously suspending transmission, and an invalid information transmission state of transmitting invalid information. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274096 | Method of network entry in OFDM multi-carrier wireless communications systems - A unified two-stage network entry procedure is provided for OFDM multi-carrier wireless communications systems. During a first stage, a mobile station performs a common network entry procedure using a primary radio frequency carrier and then exchanges multi-carrier capability information with a base station. In one embodiment, the base station transmits a network entry allowance indicator to assist the mobile station in selecting the primary carrier. The network entry allowance indicator comprises information of preference of one or more available carriers. During a second stage, the mobile station enables multi-carrier transmission over multiple frequency channels if both the mobile station and the base station support multi-carrier capability. Before enabling multi-carrier transmission, the mobile station may optionally perform additional ranging by transmitting a ranging request for a secondary carrier. In one embodiment, the base station replies with a ranging response in response to the ranging request through the primary carrier. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274097 | INFORMATION TRANSMISSION TO AN AIRCRAFT - A system and a method for information transmission to an aircraft and for the subsequent provision of the information, which includes an information system for an aircraft including a receiver for receiving a message in a mobile communication standard from a ground system. The message contains a message header and a message body including information prepared with a further header. An interpreter analyses the further header of the message and separates the information, and at least one display device is provided for presenting the information. The receiver is connected to the display device by way of the interpreter so as to be able to communicate. The messages transmitted are, for example, SMS messages or MMS messages. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274098 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DATA RETRANSMISSION METHOD - A method which can reduce loss in data transmission is provided. A data block is prepared in a high-level layer and the data block is transmitted in a low-level layer. Status report information associated with reception or non-reception of the data block is received through the low-level layer. When a receiver fails to receive data transmitted from a transmitter, the transmitter can rapidly recognize the reception failure and can retransmit the data. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274099 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING TRANSMITTER INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for communicating transmitter information in a communication network are disclosed. The methods and apparatus communicate transmitter specific information, in particular, which includes location information about network transmitters for use in location or positioning type services. The disclosed methods and apparatus include inserting such transmitter specific information within either a data flow of at least one transmission frame or a control channel in the at least one transmission frame. In addition, a transmitter identifier is encoded in a positioning pilot channel (PPC) within the at least one transmission frame, and the configured transmission frame transmitted to a user device. The user device may use the transmitter specific information of numerous transmitters along with the transmitter identifiers to measure how far it is from the transmitters, and then triangulate to determine position. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274100 | UPLINK RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Management of uplink resources in a wireless communication is presented. In one embodiment, management of uplink resources comprises receiving a multi-bit acknowledge (multi-bit A/N) that is available for uplink transmission and receiving other information that is available for uplink transmission along with the multi-bit A/N. Next, it is determined whether a condition has been met. If the condition has been met, an uplink message is created comprising the multi-bit A/N but dropping the other information. If the condition has not been met, an uplink message is created which jointly codes the multi-bit A/N and the other information. The uplink message is then transmitted to a receiver. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274101 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Access control based on CSMA is favorably carried out with the RTS/CTS method used together. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274102 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING MOBILE IP - Methods and apparatus for extending Mobile IP to enable a Mobile IP Home Agent to forward to a default proxy MN server when it does not have a current binding for a MN home address. This can be used to route traffic when the MN is absent and to add processes onto the Proxy MN server that enables application intelligence at the Proxy MN server to act on behalf of the MN when the MN so wishes, e.g., substituting for the MN while the MN is in sleep mode or otherwise unavailable. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090279476 | FREQUENCY CORRECTION IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and systems for correction of frequency errors in multi-carrier communication systems. The composite frequency error associated with the downlink signals are used to infer or derive the composite frequency error associated with the uplink signals, which are used to pre-compensate the uplink signals. Special signal components are transmitted by multiple base stations to facilitate frequency-error estimation and other system control functionalities at a mobile device. The mobile device carries out temporal, spatial, or spatial-temporal processing of the composite frequency errors associated with one or more base stations to determine the clock frequency error and the Doppler shift with respect to its serving base station. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279477 | MOBILE STATION, WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station, a radio access network apparatus and a mobile communication system that can decrease signal amount of each message to decrease connection delay are provided. The mobile station is provided with storing means configured to store a conversion table between a combination of a plurality of parameters defined beforehand and an identifier representing the combination of the plurality of parameters; uplink transmission signal generation means configured to generate an uplink transmission signal including the identifier when performing uplink transmission; transmission means configured to transmit the uplink transmission signal to the radio access network apparatus; reception means configured to receive a downlink transmission signal transmitted by the radio access network apparatus; and parameter setting means configured to detect the identifier from the received downlink transmission signal, read and set a parameter based on the identifier. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279478 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING DYNAMIC COOPERATIVE INTERFERENCE REDUCTION - Various embodiments are described for potentially improving coverage and/or the cell-edge outage rate and thereby the system capacity. Logic flow diagrams | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279479 | Wireless communication system and method of wireless communication - A wireless communication system is provided that includes a network and a plurality of access terminals. The plurality of access terminals includes a first group of access terminals configured to receive control information at a first data rate and send a response to the received control information, as well as a second group of access terminals configured to receive the control information at a second data rate and send a response to the received control information. The second data rate is higher than the first data rate. The network is configured to send the control information via a control channel at the first data rate and the second data rate, receive responses from the access terminals, and establish a traffic channel with at least one of the access terminals based on the control information and associated response from at least one of the access terminals. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279480 | Method and Apparatus for Retransmission Scheduling and Control in Multi-Carrier Wireless Communication Networks - In one embodiment, a method of scheduling transmissions for a base station in a multi-carrier wireless communication network comprises scheduling initial transmissions of data packets for one or more users on a first carrier, without reserving scheduling capacity on the first carrier for retransmissions. Doing so increases the scheduled capacity of the first carrier for initial transmissions. The method further includes scheduling retransmissions, as needed, for given ones of the data packets on one or more second carriers. The method allows more traffic to be scheduled on the first carrier, meaning that multi-carrier transmissions are less frequently needed to convey all of the traffic targeted to one or more receivers. Those receivers therefore spend more time operating with a reduced receiver bandwidth (as compared to the bandwidth required for receiving more than one carrier), which reduces operating power. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279481 | System and method for routing a data packet in a wireless network, computing system in a system for routing a data packet in a wireless network, and method for routing a data packet in a computing system - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method and system for detecting the inability of the designated intermediate node (A | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279482 | TECHNIQUES FOR ENHANCED BACKHAUL FLOW CONTROL - Techniques for enhanced backhaul flow control are provided. In an exemplary embodiment, a backhaul control system is described that comprises a base station controller (BSC), a backhaul network, and a base transceiver station (BTS). Each is responsive to data and messaging transmitted and received. In one aspect, the BTS includes a queue and a controller. The amount of data in a queue is adjusted by a controller based upon calculating a target queue size value. The controller non-uniformly adjusts the amount of data in a queue based upon a target queue size value which is based upon communication system parameters. The target queue size and amount of data in a queue is adjusted so as to reduce buffer underrun, decrease system latency, and increase communication system throughput. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279483 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MANAGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS OF HIGH-OCCUPANCY VEHICLES - A system and method for managing wireless communications for a plurality of devices in a high occupancy vehicle is presented. The method comprises steps of creating a global bandwidth usage map across all vehicles, routes, and passengers, transmitting the global bandwidth usage map to a vehicle controller, interpreting the global bandwidth usage map and creating a local usage map, and commanding a wireless concentrator to manage the wireless communications for the devices in accordance with the local usage map. Further, the global map can be created by gathering ticket and route information, obtaining customer productivity data from a network, and parsing obtained data into canonical form. A step of inputting the ticketing information by one of the user, and a ticketing agent can be included. A step of displaying messages using a wireless access application residing on the device can be included. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279484 | LOCATION INFORMATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING NOTIFICATION BASED UPON LOCATION - According to an embodiment, a location based notification method in a SLP (SUPL Location Platform) includes transmitting, by the SLP, a session initialization message including a notification mode parameter indicating one or more of notification and verification based upon the location of the terminal to the terminal; receiving a positioning initialization message from the terminal; calculating the location of the terminal by performing a positioning process with the terminal; transmitting a session notification message including a notification element to the terminal when the location of the terminal is calculated; receiving a session notification response message including a notification response by the user of the terminal from the terminal; and transmitting the location of the terminal to a client who has requested the location of the terminal when the session notification response message is received. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279485 | Method and Apparatus for Network Imposed Packet Data Flow Control - A method and apparatus provide network-based flow control for mobile station having data connections to the network. In an exemplary embodiment, a Packet Control Function (PCF) in a Radio Access Network (RAN) requests that a Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN) in a Packet Core Network (PCN) turn flow control on and off as needed for mobile station data connections. That is, if the PCF receives data from the PDSN for delivery to a mobile station that the PCF determines to be unavailable, the PCF requests that data transfers from the PDSN be suspended for that mobile station. Such suspension avoids needless continued transfer of undeliverable data to the PCF. The PCF monitors or otherwise determines whether a flow-controlled mobile station has become available again and, if so, notifies the PDSN so that it can lift the suspension and resume data transfers as needed. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090285156 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SCHEDULING SDMA CODEBOOKS - A method for scheduling an SDMA codebook includes: selecting, by a user, a most matching precoding matrix and a minimally interfering cluster in the SDMA codebook according to Channel State Information, CSI, of the user; calculating a data transmission rate supportable when the user undergoes interference caused by the minimally interfering cluster; and feeding back an index of the most matching precoding matrix, an index of the minimally interfering cluster, and the data transmission rate to a base station. An apparatus and system for scheduling an SDMA codebook is also provided. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285157 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A system is provided that provides a voice call service over a Circuit Switching (CS) domain to a User Equipment (UE) that was receiving a service in a Packet Switching (PS) domain. A Mobile Management Entity (MME) sends a paging message to the UE to provide a service in the CS domain. The MME sends a suspend request message requesting suspension of the service being provided to the UE in the PS domain, upon receiving a report message indicating that the UE has switched to the CS domain. A gateway suspends the service in the PS domain upon receiving the suspend request message from the MME. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285158 | DYNAMIC COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for dynamically varying coverage in a multi-carrier communication system are described. A sector may operate on multiple carriers. The sector may vary coverage on a given carrier k based on its load, so that less interference may be caused to other sectors when the sector load is light. In one design, the sector may communicate on a first carrier at a first transmit power level and on a second carrier at a second transmit power level equal to or lower than the first transmit power level. The sector may vary the second transmit power level based on its load to vary the coverage of the second carrier. The sector may reduce the second transmit power level to zero or a low level if the sector load is light. The sector may also vary the second transmit power level based on a function of sector load or a switching pattern. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285159 | LOAD BALANCING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for selecting a serving sector for a terminal based on server selection information in order to balance the load of sectors in a wireless communication system are described. The server selection information for each sector may be set based on the load of the sector and may be used to rank the sector for selection as a serving sector. In one design, a terminal may receive server selection information for multiple sectors. The server selection information for each sector may include an offset used to adjust a measurement made by the terminal for the sector, a priority of the sector for selection as a serving sector, a DRCLock set based on the load of the sector, etc. The terminal may determine received signal qualities of the sectors. The terminal may then select one of the sectors as a serving sector based on the server selection information and the received signal qualities of the sectors. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285160 | INCREASING RELIABILITY OF HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PROTOCOL - In a communication system using HARQ, the problem of false ACK detection when no ACK/NACK feedback is transmitted is solved sent by varying the reliability of the scheduling information transmitted to the user terminal on a downlink control channel depending on whether the user terminal is expected to use a first or second uplink channel for sending ACK/NACK feedback. When the user terminal is expected to use the first channel to send ACK/NACK feedback, the base station transmits scheduling information to the user terminal with normal reliability. When the user terminal is expected to send ACK/NACK feedback on the second uplink channel, the base station transmits the signaling information to the user terminal with enhanced reliability. The reliability of the signaling information can be increased, for example, by increasing the transmit power on the downlink control channel, increasing the aggregation level, or a combination thereof. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285161 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REPORTING EVENTS IN TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Methods and systems are provided for reporting to subscribers, wireless network events in a plurality of formats and languages depending upon the particular subscriber group to which a wireless subscriber belongs. When a subscriber requests a call, a switching node in the network invokes a trigger that identifies a location register for routing the call and sends a route request to the location register While processing the route request, if the location register detects an event that would prevent the call from being routed, the location register identifies the subscriber group of the wireless subscriber and determines a directory number associated with the identified subscriber group and the detected event. The location register then returns the determined directory number to the switching node Using the determined directory number, the switching node establishes the call to a message node, where a message associated with the determined directory number is executed. Accordingly, the wireless network reports the detected event in a format and language that the wireless subscriber, or an entity attempting to communicate with the wireless subscriber, can recognize. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285162 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND TERMINAL FOR LOCATING - A locating method is provided. The serving ASN-GW sends locating measurement information to a WiMAX terminal; the WiMAX terminal measures the locating data, and sends the locating data measurement result to the entity capable of calculating locating information; and the entity capable of calculating locating information calculates the locating information according to the locating data measurement result. A locating system, a locating data measurement entity, an LCF, and a calculation entity are also disclosed herein. The provided method, system and entity may provide a Locating Service (LCS) for the users in a WiMAX network. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090290537 | Providing station context and mobility in a wireless local area network having a split MAC architecture - A method includes receiving a first frame at a wireless access node, the first frame being received through a first communication network and having a source address; applying a function (e.g., a hash function) to the source address to derive a destination address; encapsulating the first frame in a second frame that includes the destination address and a source address identifying the wireless access node; and sending the second frame to a second communication network for receipt by a destination node having the destination address. The destination node is an access controller that maintains state for a station that sends the first frame. The first communication network may be an IEEE 802.11 network, and the second communication network may be an IEEE 802.3 network. The address of the access controller is one of potentially many virtual MAC addresses associated with the access controller that enables an N:M relationship between a particular access node and a plurality of access controllers that may be clustered, and a N:1 relationship between a Station and a virtual access controller. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290538 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a control signal in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes acquiring a resource index, the number of cyclic shifts (CSs) and a CS interval, wherein the number of CSs is an integer multiple of the CS interval, determining a CS index based on the number of CSs and the CS interval, generating a cyclically shifted sequence by cyclically shifting a base sequence by a CS amount obtained from the CS index, generating a modulated sequence based on the cyclically shifted sequence and a symbol for a control signal and transmitting the modulated sequence after mapping the modulated sequence to a resource block obtained from the resource index. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290539 | Method and apparatus for home agent address acquisition for IPv4 mobile nodes - A method and apparatus for home agent address acquisition for IPv4 mobile nodes is provided. A method for device operation includes sending a request message to an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server, and receiving a reply message from the AAA server. The reply message contains an assigned Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) address of a home agent and the home agent is deployed with a dual stack mobile Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) function. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290540 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIPLEXING MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS IN MOBILE IP NETWORK - Disclosed are systems, methods and computer program products for facilitating multiplexing of simultaneous multiple connections between a mobile device and its IP mobility anchors, such as mobile IP home agents or proxy mobile IP local mobility anchors. An example method comprises assigning a unique IP mobility anchor identifier to each IP mobility anchor associated with the mobile device. The method further comprises negotiating an IP flow reservation for each IP mobility anchor identifier and signaling a request to associate each negotiated IP flow with an IP tunnel to a particular IP mobility anchor. The method further comprises sending packets through each negotiated IP flow and associated IP tunnel to each IP mobility anchor. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290541 | RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE AND CONTROL CHANNEL MCS CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a radio communication base station device capable of reducing a communication overhead by a control channel such as SCCH (Shared Control Channel). In this device, each encoding unit ( | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290542 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A BEARER FOR A GSM NETWORK - A method for establishing a bearer for a GSM network is disclosed in embodiments of the present invention. The method includes: receiving, by a Media Gateway, a message for adding a wireless side end point, assigning an IP address and a port number for a call and transmitting a response message containing the IP address and the port number assigned for the call; acquiring, by the Media Gateway, the IP address and the port number assigned for the call by the Base Station Controller via the Mobile Switching Center Server and establishing an IP bearer with the Base Station Controller. A device and a system for establishing a bearer for a GSM network are also disclosed in embodiments of the present invention. With the present invention, a full or part path transcoder-free operation may be realized, which can avoid quality reduction and transmission delay. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290543 | Transmit and Receive Method for a Data Service - A method includes receiving a plurality of radio frequency (RF) channels in parallel at a receive site, and demodulating the RF channels using a plurality of demodulators of the receive site to generate a plurality of streams of packets, each stream of packets having a first address space. The method also includes combining the plurality of streams of packets at a tunneling destination of the receive site to generate a first stream of packets having a second address space. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090296630 | Packet radio network and method - A packet radio network provides a facility for communicating internet packets to and/or from a mobile user equipment. The packet radio network comprises a gateway support node, a serving support node and a radio network part. The gateway support node is operable to provide a packet data protocol context for controlling the communication of the internet packets to and/or from the packet radio network from and/or to the mobile user equipment via a packet communications bearer. The serving support node is connected to the gateway support node and is operable to control communications of the internet packets to and from the gateway support node to and/or from mobile user equipment to form the packet communications bearer. The radio network part is operable to provide a radio access bearer for communicating the internet packets via a radio access interface to and/or from the mobile user equipment. In response to a packet data protocol activation request message requesting a common packet data protocol context, the serving support node is operable in combination with the gateway support node to establish a common packet data protocol context in association with a packet communications bearer. The common packet data protocol context is established to communicate internet protocol packets via the packet communications bearer according to an internet protocol version specified by the mobile user equipment for one or more communications sessions. The common packet data protocol context therefore provides more flexibility, because a mobile user equipment can send both IPv4 internet packets and IPv6 internet packets as specified by the mobile user equipment. Furthermore a packet radio network according to example embodiments is provided with an arrangement for sharing the same GPRS/UMTS session, using a common packet communications bearer including the high-speed broadband radio bearers. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296631 | SYNCHRONOUS DELIVERY METHOD - An aggregation device performs a synchronous processing so that a synchronous delivery may be made from a plurality of base stations through a broadcasting channel. A BSN ( | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296632 | NOVEL DISTRIBUTED BASE STATION ARCHITECTURE - A novel distributed base station architecture having a multiplexer. The base station transmits base station controller interface data over an internet protocol (IP) communication channel. The multiplexer receives the data and combines it with other base station controller interface data to form a single base station controller interface data signal. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296633 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, DISTRIBUTION SERVER, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER AND MOBILE STATION - In a mobile communication system, a radio device is configured to transmit notification information transmitted from a distribution server, to a mobile station, by use of broadcast communication. The distribution server | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296634 | Open and extensible framework for ubiquitous radio management and services in heterogeneous wireless networks - An open and extensible framework for ubiquitous radio management and services in heterogeneous wireless networks is disclosed. A radio interface manager abstracts interface attributes of multiple heterogeneous network interfaces into a set of abstracted attributes for access by one or more applications. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296635 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BASE STATIONS AND THEIR PROVISIONING, MANAGEMENT, AND NETWORKING - In wireless system, a group of Base station (BTSs) with smaller footprints have the capability to communicate with each other as well as with the BTSs with relatively larger footprints via wireless air-interfaces. One of such example is coordinated cell systems. A coordinated cell system comprises a group of coordinated cell base stations that have the capability to communicate with each other as well as with relevant macro cell or Pico cell base stations via wireless air-interfaces. Each coordinated cell BTS consists of an over the air control unit in addition to the conventional coordinated cell BTS system. A set of protocols in the form of messages and database are also defined to enable the networking capability. This enables enhancement in performing a variety of tasks by coordinated cell systems, including interference management and coordination, registration and authentication, quality of service coordination, installation and maintenance, location services, etc. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296636 | TRANSCEIVING APPARATUS AND DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION BASE STATIONS - A base station apparatus adaptive for antenna arrays including at least one radio frequency (RF) header module, at least one data processing apparatus, and transceiving apparatus for transceiving data between the at least one radio frequency (RF) header module and the at least one data processing apparatus. The transceiving apparatus includes an uplink module to group data received by the RF header module according to grouping configuration information, and to transfer the grouped data to the data processing apparatus; and a downlink module to degroup the data from the data processing apparatus according to the grouping configuration information, and to transfer the degrouped data to the RF header module. Also provided are methods of receiving and sending data, and a computer readable article of manufacture tangibly embodying computer readable instructions for executing a computer implemented method of sending and receiving data for a base station. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296637 | WIRELESS DEVICE AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA AND BUFFER STATUS REPORTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The method provides buffer status reporting for the transmission of uplink data from a wireless device to a base station. Uncompressed data is stored in a first buffer of the wireless device. A buffer status report is transmitted from the wireless device to the base station, where the buffer status report contains information indicating an amount of the uncompressed data to be transmitted from the wireless device. The information is dependent on the amount of the uncompressed data stored in the first buffer. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090303921 | LOW COST MESH NETWORK CAPABILITY - A wireless device that utilizes a single network interface to simultaneously connect to an infrastructure network and a mesh network. The device has a driver layer with a media access control module for each network type. A multiplexing module and transceiver module within the driver can direct received information associated with one of the networks to an appropriate media access control and then to an appropriate network adapter. For transmitted data, the multiplexing module can receive data from the application layer through an appropriate network adapter and route it to an appropriate media access control module for processing. The processed data can be interleaved by the transceiver for transmission. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303922 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING A PLURALITY OF PACKETS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for communicating a plurality of packets in a communication network is provided. The method includes suppressing one or more portions of the plurality of packets based on a suppression rule in a central controller. Thereafter, each packet is transmitted from the central controller to one or more Mobile Stations (MSs) through one or more Base Stations (BSs). | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303923 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERRUPTING A TRANSMITTING DEVICE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for interrupting a transmitting device during a call. In the system, calls are transmitted from a first device on a communication channel as a series of channel frames. At predetermined times during the transmission, the transmitting device is configured to drop channel frames, resulting in open channel frame periods where the transmitting device is not transmitting on the communication channel. During these open channel frame periods, the transmitting device is also configured to switch to a receiving mode. Other devices in the system are capable of switching into a transmitting mode during the open channel frame periods and, when applicable, sending an interrupt request on the communication channel to the transmitting device in order to request access to the channel. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303924 | PACKET DATA NETWORK SELECTION - According to an example embodiment, a method may include sending, by a mobile station in a wireless network, a dynamic service addition (DSA) message to a base station, the DSA message identifying a packet data network (PDN) by access point name (APN). The method may further include exchanging data with the indicated packet data network via the base station. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303925 | Method and Node for Providing a Quality of Service Support in Multihop Communication Systems - A method and apparatus according to the technique wherein support of a quality of service is provided for transmissions between at least one node (N) and at least one mobile station (MS | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303926 | Proxy-bridge for connecting different types of devices - A proxy-bridge for connecting Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) compliant devices with Bluetooth (BT) compliant devices, and includes SSDP support for discovery of available UPnP compliant devices and services; a Bluetooth SDP client for discovery of available Bluetooth devices and available Bluetooth services and a Bluetooth SDP server for communicating with Bluetooth SDP clients in the available Bluetooth devices. The proxy-bridge has a converter for converting the discovered Bluetooth devices and services into associated UPnP device and service information, and the discovered UPnP compliant devices and services into associated Bluetooth device, service, and/or profile information. A device and service announcer advertises device availability at regular intervals. A UPnP adapter represents the Bluetooth devices towards the UPnP devices and a Bluetooth adapter represents the UPnP compliant devices towards the Bluetooth compliant devices. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303927 | Method and System for Controlling Discontinuous Reception/Transmission - A method, a network element, an apparatus and a system for controlling discontinuous reception/transmission during a discontinuous reception/transmission on-period in communication between a transmitter and a receiver, are provided. The control is based on certain well-defined measurements including at least one of the following: the number of bits that are currently in the buffer of the transmitter, the currently supported transport block set for the receiver and the average supported transport block set for the receiver. The measurements are performed at the transmitter in each predefined time interval. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303928 | Method for transmitting channel information in wireless communication system - A method for transmitting uplink channel information in a wireless communication system is provided. The method comprises transmitting an adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) band bitmap indicating at least one AMC band selected from a plurality of AMC bands with a first transmission period through a plurality of uplink control channels and transmitting a channel quality indicator (CQI) based on transmission of the AMC band bitmap with a second transmission period through any one of the plurality of uplink control channels. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303929 | Wireless Terminal Apparatus and Wireless Base Station Apparatus - Both a wireless terminal apparatus and wireless base station apparatus are provided that can, in an operation of encoding the control signals of the upstream link transmitted from the multiple terminal stations while encoding with regard to each of the terminal stations, increase a number of the terminal stations to which different codes are respectively assigned. A wireless terminal apparatus includes: an encoding information receiving portion receiving encoding information which is used at the wireless terminal apparatus from the base station; a phase-shifting unit which conducts a phase-shifting operation on a predetermined first code based on the encoding information; a code selection unit which, based on the received encoding information, selects a second code from multiple codes orthogonally crossing each other; and a control signal encoding portion which conducts an encoding operation on the control signal that is going to be transmitted to the base station by using both the first code on which the phase-shifting operation has been conducted and the second code. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303930 | WIRELESS NETWORKING SYSTEM AND METHOD - In a system comprising a first access point serving a first wireless network; and a neighbouring access point serving a neighbouring wireless network having coverage overlapping with the first wireless network, where the first access point and the neighbouring access point transmit beacon messages at beacon times that are temporally separated by predetermined beacon periods, a method of operating the system is disclosed, the method comprising: the first access point sending a first offer to the neighbouring access point, the first offer offering a period of silent time to the neighbouring access point during which period of silent time the first access point silences the first wireless network, the period of silent time being independent of the beacon times and the beacon periods. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303931 | Wireless communications connection control method - A wireless communications connection control method that enables flexible reconstruction of a wireless communications network system structure. The wireless communications connection control method comprising the steps of retaining in advance a node registration table in which the inter-node distance and node types are associated with each node; issuing a joining notification, together with the inter-node distance, in response to when a new node joins the wireless communications system; refreshing the node registration table according to the joining notification, determining whether it is necessary to change the node type based on the inter-node distance stored in the node registration table, and changing the node type stored in the node registration table when it is determined that the type needs to be refreshed. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303932 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING NETWORK-BASED CONTROL OF A FORWARDING POLICY USED BY A MOBILE NODE - A mobile node receives access network-specific signaling that is related to an Internet Protocol (IP) flow. The mobile node decides which of multiple access networks to use to send the IP flow based on the access network-specific signaling. The access network-specific signaling may be received from an access network, and the mobile node may interpret the access network-specific signaling as a command to send the IP flow over that access network. The mobile node may update a forwarding policy at the mobile node to indicate that the IP flow should be sent over that access network. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303933 | METHOD AND A TRANSCEIVER FOR TRANSMITTING DATA - The present invention provides a method for transmitting data and a transceiver. In one embodiment, the method includes: (1) generating data blocks of a data package in a first transceiver to transmit to a second transceiver, the first transceiver including a micro-controller coupled to a digital signal processor, (2) generating identification data in the first transceiver for the data blocks, wherein the identification data is an index of a list of the data blocks to be transmitted and each of the data blocks is transmitted with the index and (3) identifying the data blocks to be transmitted to the second transceiver based on the identification data, wherein the microcontroller employs the index to manage transmission of the data blocks. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303934 | DIRECT WIRELESS CLIENT TO CLIENT COMMUNICATION - A wireless station is connected to a wireless network through an access point and can establish a direct client-to-client connection to a second wireless station. The wireless station can communicate directly with the second wireless station without involving the access point. The wireless station communicates with the wired network and with other wireless stations through the access point. The second wireless station may have an infrastructure connection to the access point or may be independent. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303935 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF USING SMART ANTENNAS FOR BACKHAULING - A method and system for utilizing smart antenna in transmission of messages between nodes are disclosed. A wireless communication system includes a plurality of nodes, and each node is capable of being connected to each other node. At least a portion of the nodes are provided with a smart antenna configured to generate a plurality of directional beams. Each node maintains a list of other nodes and beam configuration information to be used in transmission of messages to other nodes. When a source node is required to transmit to a target node, the source node retrieves the beam configuration information and transmits with a directional beam directed to the target node. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303936 | MOBILE TERMINAL, CONTROL APPARATUS, HOME AGENT AND PACKET COMMUNICATIONS METHOD - In a packet communications system, a control apparatus implements routing control of a received packet directed for the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal includes a plurality of network interface cards; a communication manager configured to select at least one network interface card among from the plurality of network interface cards, in accordance with information regarding the network interface card; and an upper layer manager configured to receive the packet transmitted from the control apparatus, with using a selected network interface card. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090310532 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING AN ADDRESS ASSOCIATED WITH A NEIGHBOURING CELL OF A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network element ( | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310533 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT OVERHEAD IMPROVEMENTS - An apparatus comprising a controller configured to pack a plurality of Service Data Units (SDUs) from a plurality of connections associated with a Mobile Station (MS) into a single Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (PDU). In various embodiments, the controller may be further configured to generate a Generic MAC Header (GMH) that indicates that a plurality of Service Data Units (SDUs) from a plurality of connections associated with a Mobile Station (MS) have been packed into the MAC PDU. In some embodiments, the controller may be further configured to generate, for each SDU, an associated Extended Packing Sub-Header (EPSH). The apparatus further comprising a memory configured to store MAC PDU. The apparatus also comprising a wireless transceiver configured to transmit the MAC PDU. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310534 | Medium Access Control Discard Notification - A method is provided for a base station set (NODE B) adapted for RLC and MAC-hs signaling in acknowledged mode (AM), the base station set at least forwarding protocol data units (MAC-d PDU) from a Radio Network controller (RNC) to a user entity (UE), the method comprising the steps of monitoring ( | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310535 | Unifying Virtualizations in a Core Network and a Wireless Access Network - To unify virtualizations in a core network and a wireless access network a virtual wireless network is mapped to a virtual network in the core network. Based on the mapping, data associated with a communications session can be communicated through the virtual wireless network and core virtual network. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310536 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CHANNEL ERROR CONTROL OF NON-EXCLUSIVE MULTIPLEXING FOR CONTROL CHANNELS - An apparatus and method for non-exclusive multiplexing of at least one active control channel comprising preparing the at least one active control channel for transmission in a next frame using a transmitter data processor; assessing channel robustness of the at least one active control channel based on a channel robustness threshold; and if the channel robustness threshold is not met, performing constellation control or power control on the at least one active control channel which is active prior to transmitting the at least one active control channel; or if the channel robustness threshold is met, transmitting the at least one active control channel using a transmitter. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310537 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE SIZE ALLOCATED TO A FIELD IN THE HEADER OF A PACKET BASED ON THE LENGTH OF THE PACKET PAYLOAD - The invention relates to a method of transmitting a data signal in a wireless communication system fro m a primary station to a secondary station, said data signal comprising a medium access control header (MAC-hs header) and a protocol data unit associated with said medium access control header, said medium access control header comprising a set of fields (TSN, SEG, LI, LCid), wherein said method comprises determining a size allocated to at least one field of the set on the basis of a length of the protocol data unit. For example, the size allocated to a segmentation indication field (SEG) determined for a first length of the protocol data unit is lower than the one determined for a second length of the protocol data unit, said second length being higher than said first length, said segmentation indication indicating in how many segments the protocol data unit is subdivided. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310538 | METHOD FOR CONSTRUCTING DATA FORMAT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND TERMINAL THEREOF - A method for transmitting downlink data to a mobile terminal is disclosed. The mobile terminal receives a particular common H-RNTI (HS-DSCH Radio Network Identifier) via an HS-SCCH (High Speed-Shared Control Channel) associated with an HS-DSCH (High Speed-Downlink Shared Channel), recognizes whether a header of a MAC (Medium Access Control) PDU (Packet Data Unit) transmitted by the HS-DSCH includes a terminal-exclusive identifier, acquires the terminal-exclusive identifier, and processes the MAC PDU as its own if the acquired terminal-exclusive identifier is intended for the terminal itself. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310539 | ESTABLISHING A SESSION IN A PACKET SWITCHED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A packet-switched wireless communications network includes a mobile station and a radio network controller that are able to establish a radio connection therebetween. Messages are exchanges over one or more traffic channels to establish a packet-switched services session between the mobile station and the radio network controller. The radio connection is not closed until all messages for establishing the packet-switched services session have been exchanged between the mobile station and the radio network controller. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310540 | INTERLEAVING DATA OVER FRAMES COMMUNICATED IN A WIRELESS CHANNEL - A mobile communications system includes a radio access network, such as an Enhanced General Packet Radio Service (EGPRS) network, in which mobile stations are able to enter into a discontinuous transmission (DTX) mode. During DTX mode of a first mobile station that is allocated a channel portion (e.g., a time slot of a frame), the radio access network is able to multiplex traffic from another mobile station onto the same channel portion. A mechanism is provided to enable the first mobile station to send a request for re-allocation of the channel portion. The request includes a real-time fast access associated control channel (RTFACCH) resource request message (RTRRM). In response to the RTRRM, the radio access network sends an RTFACCH resource assignment message (RTUAM). An interleaving scheme is also provided for half-rate mobile stations, in which one set of traffic frames are interleaved over plural bursts according to a first algorithm and a second set of traffic frames are interleaved over plural bursts according to a second algorithm. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310541 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RELAY DEVICE - A communication system, including: a first mobile station; a first node; a first QoS server; a second mobile station; and a second QoS server, wherein the first node includes a first transfer unit which receives a QoS request for requesting to set a QoS channel from the first mobile station and transfers the QoS request to the first QoS server; and a management unit which instructs the first QoS server to transfer the QoS request if it is judged that the second mobile station is accommodated, the first transfer unit transfers the QoS request to the second QoS server based on the instruction from the management unit, and the second QoS server includes a QoS setting message output unit which outputs a QoS setting message to instruct setting of a QoS channel to said second mobile station based on the QoS request. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090316622 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING PACKET FORWARDING, AND COMMUNICATION MODE - A technology is disclosed for reducing the number of encapsulations required when MAP forwards a packet to a mobile node which is layered within mobile networks, with mobile networks nested and multiple mobile routers chained behind MAP (Mobility Anchor Point). When a node | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316623 | METHODS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND MOBILE ROUTERS FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS FROM A MOVING NETWORK TO A HOME NETWORK OF THE MOVING NETWORK - The present invention aims at making it possible for a data packet originating from a mobile network node ( | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316624 | Monitoring and influencing the behavior and status of wireless sensor networks - Monitoring the status and behavior in a wireless network is provided. In a wireless network of operational nodes, one or more monitoring nodes are embedded in the network to monitor the status and behavior of the network without unintentionally disturbing the network. The monitoring nodes receive state information from the operational nodes. The operational nodes can be nodes in a wireless sensor network or a broadcast-only distributed wireless network. State information is sent in small state messages during the idle period of the communication frame of the operational node to be received by monitoring nodes. Transmission of state messages in the idle period for monitoring purposes does not disturb communication between operational nodes and can be energy efficient. The monitoring nodes can also intercept communications between operational nodes. Providing feedback to and influencing operational nodes are also provided. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316625 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING ADAPTIVE MOBILE CLUSTER NETWORK - The invention discloses a method of establishing an adaptive mobile cluster network. The method comprises the steps of: (a) determining a network service requested by a mobile communication device; (b) according to the requested network service, determining at least one communication parameter needed by the mobile communication device; (c) according to the needed communication parameter, selecting a header device from a plurality of wireless communication devices by the communication device; (d) selecting a plurality of agent devices from the remaining wireless communication devices by the header device; and (e) selecting a plurality of normal devices from the remaining wireless communication devices by the agent devices, so as to establish the adaptive mobile cluster network. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316626 | Method for transmitting uplink signals - A method of transmitting uplink signals is disclosed. The method includes transmitting, by a user equipment, periodic control information on a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) at a predetermined period, dropping the periodic control information and multiplexing uplink signals except the periodic control information when the user equipment is operating in subframe bundling transmission mode where the uplink signals are transmitted in a plurality of consecutive subframes, and transmitting the multiplexed uplink signals on a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH). | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316627 | Uplink modulation and receiver structures for asymmetric OFDMA systems - The present invention centers upon uplink communication protocols for use primarily with orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) communication systems. Aspects of the invention relate to narrow band frequency division multiplexed (NBFDM) modulation protocols primarily for uplink usage in asymmetric OFDMA communication systems. In particular, NBFDM uplinks that use quadrature multiplexed continuous phase modulation are detailed and noncoherent detection schemes are developed to process the uplink channel signals without the need to transmit uplink phase reference signals. Other aspects of the invention relate to burst mode uplink communications in OFDMA systems such as those involving opportunistic beamforming. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316628 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS PROCESS COMMUNICATION OVER DISTINCT NETWORKS - A dual-mode router for conveying process communication packets across a plurality of distinct wireless process communication networks is provided. The router includes wireless communication circuitry and a controller coupled to the wireless communication circuitry. The wireless communication circuitry is configured to interact with signals from each of the plurality of distinct wireless process communication networks. The controller is configured to adapt process communication packets from a first distinct wireless process communication network for transmission over a second distinct wireless process communication network. Methods for configuring the distinct wireless process communication networks and relaying process packets over the distinct wireless process communication networks are also provided. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316629 | CONCENTRATOR FOR MULTIPLEXING ACCESS POINT TO WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate multiplexing communications from multiple downstream access points to one or more mobility management entities (MME). In particular, a concentrator component is provided that can establish a single transport layer connection with an MME along with multiple application layer connections over the single transport layer connection for each of multiple downstream access points and/or related mobile devices. The downstream access points and/or mobile devices can provide identifiers, such as tracking identifiers, to the concentrator component, which can utilize the identifiers to track communications with the MME. In this regard, the MME can send paging messages, and the concentrator component can determine downstream access points related to the paging messages based on a stored association with a tracking identifier in the paging message. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316630 | RADIO COMMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - A mobile station device transmits a random access preamble to a base station device and performs uplink timing alignment based on the synchronization timing deviation information included in a random access response which the base station device transmits in response to the transmitted random access preamble, wherein in an uplink synchronous status, the mobile station device does not perform uplink timing alignment based on synchronization timing deviation information included in a random access response, which is a response to a random access preamble whose preamble ID is randomly selected by the mobile station device. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316631 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - To prevent a collision from occurring at the time of random access in cases such as handover, response to paging and the like where a mobile station apparatus performs random access in response to directions from a base station apparatus. In a mobile communication system in which a mobile station apparatus | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090323584 | Method and Apparatus for Parallel Processing Protocol Data Units - An apparatus for processing a protocol data unit (PDU) includes a transmit (TX) module, a physical layer controller (PHY), and a reception (RX) module. The TX module is configured to receive a transmit descriptor that comprises a plurality of fields, wherein the fields contain information for preparing a first PDU. The PHY is configured to receive at least a portion of a second PDU into a reception (RX) physical-layer queue, the second PDU having a header. The RX module is configured to receive a receive descriptor, wherein the receive descriptor includes a plurality of fields having information for processing the second PDU. The RX module is further configured to process the second PDU according to the receive descriptor in parallel with the TX module processing the first PDU based on the transmit descriptor. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323585 | Concurrent Processing of Multiple Bursts - An apparatus includes a physical layer controller (PHY) and a media access control coprocessor (MPC). The PHY includes a plurality of physical-layer queues, wherein each of the plurality of physical-layer queues is associated with one of a plurality of bursts, wherein each of the plurality of bursts includes one or more protocol data units (PDUs). The MPC is configured to receive a first PDU associated with a first burst of the plurality of bursts and write the first PDU of the first burst to a first physical-layer queue of the plurality of physical-layer queues. The MPC is further configured to receive a second PDU and determine that the second PDU is associated with a second burst of the plurality of bursts. The MPC also being configured to write the second PDU to a second physical-layer queue, wherein the second physical-layer queue is associated with the second burst. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323586 | USER INTERFACE BASED ON MAGNETIC INDUCTION - A receiving and transmitting node for a wireless data network, and a wireless data network based on magnetic induction. The receiving node includes an antenna receive module for receiving one or more data signals emitted from the transmitting node and a calculation module adapted to calculate one or more distances between the receiving node and the transmitting node, and/or adapted to calculate the position of the transmitting node in relation to the position of the receiving node, and/or adapted to calculate the orientation of the transmitting node in relation to the orientation of the receiving node. The reception of the data signal is based on magnetic induction and the calculation of the one or more distances, and the position of the transmitting node and/or the orientation of the transmitting node is based on the one or more data signals. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323587 | Method and System for Dual Mode Operation in Wireless Networks - Aspects of a method and system for dual mode operation in wireless networks are presented. Aspects of the system include a communicating device that selects an RF channel and a physical layer type. The communicating device may process signals received via the selected RF channel based on the selected physical layer type. The communicating device may determine whether a beacon frame has been detected base on the signals that were received via the selected RF channel and processed based on the selected physical layer type. When a frame is not detected, the communicating device may determine a signal energy level for the received signals. The communicating device may establish an association with an existing network based on detection of the beacon frame or the communicating device may transmit an originating beacon frame based on the determined signal energy level. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323588 | SIGNALING FOR MULTI-USER REUSING ONE SLOT (MUROS) OPERATION IN GSM - Methods and apparatus for improved Multiple Users Reusing One Slot (MUROS) operation include two or more wireless transmit/receive units (WTRU) multiplexed onto multiple sub-channels in a single timeslot. Addressing information included in layer two headers, Radio Resource Control (RRC) messages, and layer one parameters in a SACCH/FACCH transmission indicate that the transmission is intended for a particular WTRU. A FACCH transmission may be sent on a sub-channel reserved for another WTRU. Stealing bits in a voice frame may be set to indicate that the FACCH transmission is intended for a WTRU on the sub-channel reserved for another WTRU. Different WTRUs in a multiplexed group may be configured to decode layer one parameters in a SAACH according to alternating patterns. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323589 | RADIO FREQUENCY LOCAL AREA NETWORK - An apparatus and a method for routing data in a radio data communication system having one or more host computers, one or more intermediate base stations, and one or more RF terminals organizes the intermediate base stations into an optimal spanning-tree network to control the routing of data to and from the RF terminals and the host computer efficiently and dynamically. Communication between the host computer and the RF terminals is achieved by using the network of intermediate base stations to transmit the data. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323590 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system includes a plurality of base stations and a management server. Each base station includes: a carrier sensing unit which performs carrier sensing for other base stations; a list generating unit which generates a monitor list including a difference in frame timing between the base station and each other base station; and a base station transmitter which transmits the monitor list. The management server includes: a management receiver which receives the monitor lists; a calculation unit which calculates a shift amount by which the frame timing of a target base station is to be shifted, based on the monitor lists; and a shift instructing unit which instructs to shift the frame timing of the target base station by the shift amount if the differences in frame timing among the base stations when reflecting the shift amount is improved from those before reflecting the shift amount. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323591 | Receiving Apparatus, Receiving Method and Wireless Communication System - A receiving apparatus is provided which includes a receiving unit to receive a radio signal, a transfer function estimation unit to estimate a transfer function of a communication path of the radio signal, and a cross-correlation calculation unit to calculate cross-correlation between a synchronous signal contained in a radio signal received by the receiving unit and a known synchronous signal multiplied by the transfer function estimated by the transfer function estimation unit. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323592 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING DATA TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS AND CONTROLLING H-ARQ PROCESSES - In a wireless communication system including a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) which transfers data to a Node-B, data transmission parameters such as modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and transport block set (TBS) size are dynamically adjusted on a transmission time interval (TTI) basis, and hybrid-automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) processes used to control the transfer of data between the WTRU and the Node-B are initiated and released, as required. The WTRU transmits and retransmits data to the Node-B through an enhanced uplink (EU) dedicated channel (E-DCH) in accordance with data feedback information received from the Node-B. The WTRU queues data for transmission, and determines a transmission status of the data. The transmission status is set to one of “new transmission,” “successful transmission,” “retransmission” and “restarted transmission.” For each TTI, the WTRU initiates an EU transmission to the Node-B which identifies the assigned H-ARQ process, TBS size and MCS. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323593 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OVER-THE-AIR SUBSCRIPTIONS - Methods and apparatus for over-the-air (OTA) subscriptions. A method is provided for performing over-the-air subscriptions in a data network. The method comprises establishing an overhead notification mechanism, and transmitting a package database to a device using the overhead notification mechanism, wherein the package database identifies one or more service packages. The method also comprises receiving a request from the device to subscribe to one or more selected service packages. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323594 | WIRELESS MAC LAYER THROUGHPUT IMPROVEMENTS - Methods, apparatuses, and systems are presented for transmitting data packets in a wireless network over a multi-access channel involving sequentially sending a plurality of medium access control (MAC) data packets from a transmitter over the multi-access channel, using a physical layer protocol based on a standard physical layer protocol having a short interframe spacing (SIFS), wherein the plurality of MAC data packets includes at least a first data packet and a second data packet separated by a reduced interframe spacing that is less than SIFS, attempting to receive the plurality of MAC data packets at a receiver using the physical layer protocol, including the first data packet and the second data packet separated by the reduced interframe spacing, and sending from the receiver a single acknowledgement packet associated with attempting to receive the plurality of MAC data packets. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090323595 | Wireless Switched Network - An access point in a wireless network includes an external indication of the access point's proximity to another access point. The external indication can be a LED that blinks at a rate that is related to the proximity of the access point to the other access point. An access point is also capable of producing a network map that indicates the access point's proximity relative to other access points that are coupled to the network. The access point is further capable of monitoring wireless network traffic to ascertain whether wireless network traffic has exceeded a threshold, and if so, releasing some client devices so that wireless network traffic no longer exceeds the threshold. The access point is also capable of automatically choosing one of a plurality of radio frequencies on which to operate. The access point chooses a frequency after evaluating frequencies on which other access points may be operating. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20100002624 | Wireless Communication Network System and Method - A system for wireless communication network is disclosed. The system includes several nodes and at least a gateway. Each of the nodes includes several first wireless network interface. Each of the first interfaces utilizes one of channels to send, receive or forward signals. Wherein the first interfaces of the same node utilize different and non-overlapping channels to send, receive or forward the signals at the same time. Each of the gateways includes a network interface and several second wireless network interfaces. The network interface connects to the Internet to receive or forward the signals. Each of the second wireless network interfaces utilizes one of the channels to receive or forward the signals. Wherein the second wireless network interfaces of the same gateway utilize different and non-overlapping channels to receive or forward the signals at the same time. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002625 | METHOD OF CONNECTING A CLIENT ON A MOVING CARRIER WIRELESSLY TO ONE OR MORE ACCESS POINTS - A method of connecting a client on a moving carrier wirelessly to any stationary access point in a list of stationary access points in a predetermined order. The method includes authenticating the client to a first stationary access point in the list of stationary access points. The method includes identifying the client as an authenticated client and informing other access points in the list of stationary access points with respect to the authenticated client. The method includes bypassing an authenticating process when establishing network connections between the authenticated client and one of the other stationary access points. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002626 | ENTERPRISE MOBILE NETWORK FOR PROVIDING CELLULAR WIRELESS SERVICE USING LICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND INTERNET PROTOCOL BACKHAUL - One embodiment is directed to an enterprise mobile network for providing wireless service within a coverage area associated with an enterprise using licensed radio frequency spectrum. The enterprise mobile network includes a base station subsystem deployed on a premises of the enterprise to provide wireless capacity within the coverage area using the licensed radio frequency spectrum. The enterprise mobile network further includes a mobile switching subsystem deployed in an office of a service provider that operates a public land mobile network. The mobile switching subsystem is communicatively coupled to the public land mobile network. The base station subsystem is communicatively coupled to the mobile switching subsystem using an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The mobile switching subsystem is configured to function as a mobile switching center (MSC) and visitor location register (VLR) for roaming subscribers and local subscribers of the enterprise. The mobile switching subsystem is configured to function as a home location register (HLR) and gateway mobile switching center (GMSC) for local subscribers of the enterprise. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002627 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE OF A SHORT BEACON IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for use of a short beacon in a wireless communication network is disclosed. In one embodiment, the method comprises generating a short beacon comprising PHY information, wherein the short beacon excludes MAC information and transmitting the short beacon via the wireless network. In general, three types of short beacons are disclosed, a first type consisting only of a PHY preamble, a second type also including a PHY header, and a third type also including a MAC header. In addition, the scheme of common beacons and individual beacons is described. Common beacons are broadcast omni-directional at the beginning of each superframe with low data rate and individual beacons are unicast to individual devices directionally with high data rate. A common beacon contains information intended for all of the devices of the network. An individual beacon contains information intended for one particular device. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002628 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF DATA - A method of transmitting packets ( | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002629 | System and Method for Mobility Restriction in Wireless Communications Systems - A system and method for mobility restriction in wireless communications systems is provided. A method for base station operations includes receiving a request for service from a terminal, sending a request for authorization of the terminal to a controller, receiving in response to the request for authorization, an indication that the terminal is authorized, and granting access to the terminal. The indication includes a mobility restriction classification associated with the terminal. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002630 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING NDI IN RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE AND A METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A SIGNAL USING THE SAME - A method for processing NDI in a random access procedure and a method for transmitting and receiving a signal using the same are disclosed. The method for transmitting an uplink signal from a user equipment (UE) to a base station comprises receiving a first uplink (UL) grant signal through a message identified by a temporary cell identifier (Temporary C-RNTI) from a base station, the first uplink grant signal including a new data indicator (NDI) toggled if the base station indicates new transmission; receiving a second uplink grant signal through a downlink control channel identified by a cell identifier (C-RNTI) from the base station, the second uplink grant signal including a new data indicator (NDI) with a predetermined value; and determining uplink signal retransmission of the user equipment depending on whether the NDI of the second uplink grant signal has been toggled, wherein the UE ignores the NDI received using the temporary cell identifier. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002631 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR NOTIFYING CHANGE OF SYSTEM CONTROL INFORMATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for notifying a change of system control information in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes, changing a Group Configuration Change Counter (GCCC) and upon change of a Secondary-Super Frame Header/Sub-Packet1 (S-SFH/SP1) whose transmission period is changeable within a range of one or more super frames, changing the GCCC and information representing the change of the common control message upon change of at least one common control message, and transmitting the GCCC and the information representing the change of the at least one common control message. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002632 | PACKET SCHEDULER AND PACKET SCHEDULING METHOD - A method for scheduling packets from a plurality of radio bearers by a scheduler of a first layer includes calculating a virtual scheduling time for the radio bearers by using a packet delay variation of the radio bearers, and transmitting the packet of the radio bearer having the greatest virtual scheduling time from among the plurality of radio bearers to a second layer. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002633 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, ACCESS DEVICE, AND GATEWAY INFORMATION STORAGE DEVICE - A gateway information storage device ( | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002634 | Mobile IP Communication System, Mobile IP Communication Apparatus, And Mobile IP Communication Method - A communication system includes mobile IP communication apparatuses in an access service network and having proxy mobile IP client functioning units, foreign agent functioning units, and DHCP proxy functioning units, which have a common IP address. The DHCP proxy functioning unit of a first mobile IP communication apparatus, connected with a mobile station before movement, reports information about the mobile station to a second mobile IP communication apparatus connected with the mobile station after movement. The DHCP proxy functioning unit of the second mobile IP communication apparatus receives the information about the mobile station and further receives from the mobile station, an update message addressed to the common IP address, executes an IP address update process based on the information about the mobile station, and reports an update result to the proxy mobile IP client functioning unit and the foreign agent functioning unit in the second mobile IP communication apparatus. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100008290 | CELL SITE CONTENT CACHING - Systems, apparatus, methods, and manufactures for caching content at a communications services cell site which include caching previously provided content and/or predictively caching content. Content may be transmitted to cell sites for caching via primary or ancillary channels. Ancillary channels may be provided through a broadcast medium such as the ancillary or supplementary services spectrum of the digital television (DTV) spectrum. Content may also be broadcast to multiple cell sites simultaneously. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008291 | Cognitive wireless system - A cognitive mobile wireless system is disclosed that enhances connectivity of a mobile device moving among heterogeneous networks, by selecting advantangeous links. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008292 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING A TRAFFIC FLOW TEMPLATE - A system and method for configuring a Traffic Flow Template, TFT, in real time. The present invention dynamically adapts the TFT to control the routing of downlink data packets from a GGSN to an MS. When the MS sends an uplink data packet on a premium bearer channel, a TFT controller extracts from the uplink data packet, parameters which include at least the destination address of the uplink data packet. A downlink packet filter subset for filtering downlink data packets is then defined as a function of the extracted parameters. For example, the downlink packet filter subset may identify downlink data packets having a source address that matches the destination address of the uplink data packet. The TFT is then modified as a function of the downlink packet filter subset to route the identified downlink packets through the premium bearer channel to the MS, and to route differently, downlink data packets having source addresses that do not match the destination address of the uplink data packet. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008293 | X2 INTERFACES FOR ACCESS POINT BASE STATIONS IN SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORKS (SON) - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate leveraging an X2-AP interface for data exchange between an access terminal and a Home access terminal. Based upon a received request from a Home access terminal, the access terminal can activate an X2-AP interface connection on demand over Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) based upon a maximum number of connections not being met and/or a timer evaluation that indicates the request is within an allowed time period. The capacity of the access terminal related to the amount of X2-AP connections can be managed based upon at least one of a timer evaluation, or a maximum number of X2-AP connections. The systems and methodologies provide an optimal and efficient technique in order to enable data to be exchanged between an access terminal and a Home access terminal utilizing an X2-AP interface. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008294 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION FOR INTER-CELL DECODING AND INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - Techniques for supporting data transmission on the uplink in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, a user equipment (UE) may send a data transmission to a serving base station and may send uplink control information (UCI) to a non-serving base station. The UCI may include pertinent information to allow the non-serving base station to process the data transmission from the UE. In one design, the UCI may allow the non-serving base station to estimate the interference due to the data transmission from the UE and to cancel the interference at the non-serving base station. The interference cancellation may improve the received signal quality at the non-serving base station. After the interference cancellation, the non-serving base station may process a data transmission from another UE served by the base station. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008295 | CANDIDATE SET MANAGEMENT IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Techniques for managing candidate sets for a user equipment (UE) are described. In an aspect, multiple candidate sets of cells of different classes may be maintained for the UE. Each candidate set may include cells of a particular class. As some examples, the multiple candidate sets may be for cells of different transmit power levels, cells of different association types, cells associated with different resources, etc. The multiple candidate sets may be maintained separately based on applicable criteria and rules. The multiple candidate sets may be used to select a serving cell for the UE and/or for other communication purposes for the UE. In another aspect, one or more candidate sets may be maintained for the UE and may be used for multiple communication purposes for the UE. The multiple communication purposes may include server selection, interference management, measurement reporting, etc. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008296 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOWING DEVICE SUPPORTING MULTIPLE PHY COMMUNICATION MODE TO COMMUNICATE WITH DEVICE IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is an operation method of a wireless personal area network (WPAN) device. In the wireless personal area network (WPAN) device, the WPAN device supporting a plurality of physical layer (PHY) communication modes determines timing for changing a PHY communication mode, with reference to a beacon frame, in order to communicate with devices using various PHY communication modes, and transmits information indicating a PHY communication mode as a parameter of a primitive to a PHY layer, at the determined timing. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008297 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING COEXISTENCE BEACON PROTOCOL PACKET IN COGNITIVE RADIO BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of and apparatus for operating a Coexistence Beacon Protocol (CBP) packet transmitter in a Cognitive Radio (CR)-based wireless communication system is provided. The method includes, identifying a Self-Coexistence Window (SCW) regular pattern of neighbor Wireless Regional Area Networks (WRANs), if vacant SCW slots are not periodically occurring, selecting a WRAN as a contender among the neighbor WRANs, performing a contention for transmitting the CBP packet with the contender within SCW slots that are occupied by the WRAN, and configuring an SCW usage pattern so that an SCW usage period of the CBP packet sender is double that of an SCW usage period of the contender when winning in the contention. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008298 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS CONTROLLER, AND EXTENSION TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SERVER DEVICE SELECTING METHOD - An appropriate selection is controlled for selecting an extension transmitting/receiving server device for transmitting or receiving user data, to be transmitted or received between mobile station devices, to or from a radio base station device by employing extension transmission or reception of data, in a radio access network relaying data between a core network having a mobile switch station and the mobile station devices. While referring to a management table for managing statuses of extension transmitting/receiving server devices | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008299 | IP CONVERGED MOBILE ACCESS GATEWAY FOR 3G MOBILE SERVICE AND SERVICE METHOD USING THE SAME - Provided are an Internet protocol (IP) converged mobile access gateway for a 3rd generation (3G) mobile service and a service method using the same. The IP converged mobile access gateway including: an access controller adapted to exchange a control signal with the base station and perform mobility control for the terminal and session control for a service request; a transport controller adapted to perform routing database information management and routing protocol processing for packet routing; and a transport executor adapted to set a tunnel with the base station for user data transmission according to control information sent from the access controller, configure a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) for a logical connection with the terminal, and interwork with the transport controller to perform packet routing and forwarding. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008300 | ROUTING OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND MESSAGE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BASED ON PROXY MOBILE AGENT - A routing optimization method includes: establishing a routing optimization proxy binding relationship between a proxy mobile agent (PMA) of a mobile node and a PMA of a correspondent node; controlling, by the PMA of the mobile node, according to the established routing optimization proxy binding relationship, routing of a message to be transmitted. And a message transmission system based on a PMA is also provided, which includes: a proxy binding control unit, configured to establish a routing optimization proxy binding relationship with a PMA of a correspondent node; and a routing control unit, configured to control routing of a message to be transmitted based on the established routing optimization proxy binding relationship. With the present invention, it may raise the communication efficiency for various nodes in the proxy mobile IP architecture and improve the routing performance. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008301 | Radio Transmitting Apparatus, Radio Receiving Apparatus, and Radio Transmission Method - The degree of multiplexing of a code division multiplexed signal transmitted by subcarriers is selected on a subcarrier-by-subcarrier basis. As a result, inter-code interference on the propagation path and degradation on the propagation path are lower for a code division multiplexed signal allocated to subcarriers with a low degree of signal multiplexing (G | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008302 | System for mobile broadband networking using dynamic quality of service provisioning - A wireless networking system uses mobile and fixed transceivers to achieve a network with changing topology. A routing process includes quality-of-service considerations in the network to allow for features such as file or other data transfer, streaming audio and video, digital telephone communications, etc. The routing process adapts to transceiver units entering, leaving, or moving within, the network. Auxiliary networks such as the Internet, campus or corporate intranets, home networks, etc., can be accessed through the wireless network. Features, designs and user interfaces for the units are described. Security and access control of media content and other data is presented. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008303 | Method for setting user equipment identifier in radio communication system - The present invention is directed to a method for setting a user equipment identifier as user equipment identification information used when data received through a dedicated logical channel is transmitted through a common transport channel. The method includes transmitting data and a message type indicator as user equipment identification information from a RRC layer to an RLC layer; setting a user equipment identifier indicator according to the received message type indicator in the RLC layer and transmitting it with the data to a MAC layer; and selecting a user equipment identifier type and a user equipment identifier according to the set user equipment indication identifier, adding it to a header of a MAC SDU in the MAC layer and transmitting it to a corresponding MAC layer in a receiving device. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008304 | Method for setting user equipment identifier in radio communication system - The present invention is directed to a method for setting a user equipment identifier as user equipment identification information used when data received through a dedicated logical channel is transmitted through a common transport channel. The method includes transmitting data and a message type indicator as user equipment identification information from a RRC layer to an RLC layer; setting a user equipment identifier indicator according to the received message type indicator in the RLC layer and transmitting it with the data to a MAC layer; and selecting a user equipment identifier type and a user equipment identifier according to the set user equipment indication identifier, adding it to a header of a MAC SDU in the MAC layer and transmitting it to a corresponding MAC layer in a receiving device. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100014454 | Method of Cell Reselection in a Wireless Telecommunications Device Operative With a Plurality of Radio Access Networks - Apparatus and a method of cell reselection in a wireless telecommunications device operative with a plurality of radio access networks are disclosed. The method comprises, when the device is camped on a first radio access network: ranking cells in a neighbouring list according to cell reselection criteria; considering for cell reselection a cell in the neighbouring list; when the cell in the list is a cell of a second radio access network different from the first radio access network, applying an algorithm for cell reselection from the second radio access network to the first radio access network; and when the algorithm as applied would result in reselection to the first radio access network, considering for cell reselection another cell in the list. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014455 | ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION - A network, computer readable medium, and method for ranking a plurality of available access networks by a provider, the provider serving a user equipment and the user equipment being configured to connect to at least one of the plurality of available access networks. The method includes receiving a selection request at a selection entity of the provider, where the selection request includes a vector parameter P that includes required characteristics of a data flow for the user equipment, sending from the selection entity a capability request, including the vector parameter P, to the plurality of available access networks, receiving at the selection entity a capability response from the plurality of available access networks, wherein each capability response includes a normalized value expressing a capability of a corresponding available access network to provide the required characteristics of the data flow, and generating a ranking list of the available access networks based on the received normalized values. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014456 | Method and Apparatus for Use in a Communications Network - A method and apparatus in a gateway node of a telecommunications network for receiving frames from a source node such as a Radio Network Controller (RNC) and forwarding the frames with correct sequencing and timing to a destination node in an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. Upon determining that a potential or actual discontinuity in frame numbering has occurred, the apparatus sends a discontinuity indication toward the destination node. The indication may be included in the first frame subsequent to the discontinuity. The destination node is thus made aware that the frame numbering may not be reliable. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014457 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS WITH COLLSION AVOIDANCE (CSMA/CA) WITH DIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION - Aspects of a method and system for carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) with directional transmission are presented. Aspects of the system may include a communicating device (DEV), which transmits a portion of a PDU utilizing omnidirectionally transmitted signals and a subsequent portion of the PDU utilizing directionally transmitted signals. In an exemplary system the communicating DEV may transmit a frame, which represents a physical layer PDU. The frame may comprise a physical layer convergence procedure (PLCP) preamble that is transmitting utilizing omnidirectionally transmitted signals (omni preamble), a PLCP header that is transmitted utilizing omnidirectionally transmitted signals (omni header), a PLCP preamble that is transmitted utilizing directionally transmitted signals (directional preamble) and a physical layer service data unit (PSDU) field, or data, field, which is transmitted utilizing directionally transmitted signals (directional data). In another exemplary system, the communicating DEV may transmit PDUs utilizing directional signal transmission. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014458 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A DIRECT LINK ON THE HIGH THROUGHPUT CHANNEL OF A MULTI-RATE CHANNEL WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A system and method for wireless communication over multi-rate channels are disclosed. One embodiment of the system includes a first wireless device; a second wireless device; and an access point that can communicate over high-rate and low-rate channels. One or more of the first and second wireless devices and the access point can include neighbor information on the wireless stations in the wireless network. One or more of the first and second wireless devices and the access point may be configured to transmit a frame in an attempt to establish a direct link over the first channel between the first and second stations. Before transmitting the frame, the one or more of the first and second wireless devices and the access point may determine whether a direct link can be established over the first channel between the first and second stations, based at least partly on the neighbor information. This scheme can significantly reduce time wasted for unsuccessful direct link setup attempts for the high-rate channel transmissions. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014459 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING DATA SERVICES IN A MULTI-PROCESSOR COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate enhanced data service functionality for data services operating in a multi-processor computing environment. As described herein, respective processors and/or other components can be utilized to form a Smart Peripheral Subsystem (SPS). As further described herein, the SPS can operate in association with a modem processor and an application processor at a mobile computing device in order to reduce loading at the application processor and improve memory usage efficiency. In the case of a mobile computing device sharing a network connection with a tethered computing device, the SPS can couple a modem interface associated with the mobile computing device and an interface through which the disparate computing device is tethered to the mobile computing device such that operations such as Layer 2 (L2) framing and/or de-framing, Network Address Translation (NAT), or the like can be offloaded to the SPS under various circumstances. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014460 | SENSOR NETWORK MAC SYSTEM FOR MULTIHOP COMMUNICATION - Provided is a method of synchronizing time for a multihop sensor network. According to the method, receiving nodes accurately synchronize time by adding a delay transmission time value to a beacon frame in a beacon mode, or by using a time synchronization frame and time synchronization acknowledgement frame containing time information and superframe structure information in a non-beacon mode. Accordingly, a mesh topology is supported, and a media access control (MAC) structure having high reliability and low delay time is provided. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014461 | System and Method for Creating Multiple Mobility Profiles per Subscriber in Wireless Communications Systems - A system and method for creating multiple mobility profiles per subscriber in wireless communications systems is provided. A method includes receiving a request for service from a terminal, sending a request for authorization of the terminal to a server, receiving, in response to the request for authorization, an indication that the terminal is authorized, and granting access to the terminal. The indication includes a mobility classification associated with the terminal. The mobility classification is based on the terminal's operating conditions. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014462 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOGNIZING MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICE REGION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for recognizing a Multicast and Broadcast Service (MBS) region in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. In the method, whether a next MBS MAP message transmission point of a first frame and an MBS data burst transmission point indicated by MBS burst assignment information of a second frame match with each other in a third frame is determined. When matching with each other in the third frame, a control message including information for determining a starting point of an MBS region is generated. The generated control message is transmitted during one of the first and second frames. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014463 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL STATION, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A first wireless terminal station transmits beam transmission direction identification information in all directions. A second wireless terminal station receives the transmission direction identification information, combines reception direction identification information and the transmission direction identification information, and transmits directivity direction combination information to a wireless base station. The first and the second wireless terminal stations form directional beams in directions indicated by the directivity direction combination information to thereby perform a direct communication. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014464 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, AND MOBILE NODE - The present invention provides a technique to prevent the generation of a large number of binding update messages in an overlay network when a mobile node changes connection points. According to this technique, in a communication system where a home agent HA | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014465 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE - A mobility management method includes: notifying, at a mobile terminal, an edge node of a terminal function indicating that the mobile terminal has a Mobile IP client function; instructing, at the edge node, the mobile terminal to perform an operation for mobility management by using not an MIP function but an IP function when the edge node has a PMIP client function; performing, at the mobile terminal, the operation for mobility management by using the IP function in response to the instruction from the edge node; and performing, the edge node, the operation for mobility management by using the PMIP client function. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014466 | Method and a Device for Improved Status Reports - The invention discloses a method ( | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100020744 | METHOD FOR MANAGING VOICE CALLS DURING PACKET-SWITCHED SESSIONS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - A method of managing circuit-switched calls in a mobile communications network supporting packet-switched sessions is performed as follows: upon reception by the mobile communications network of a circuit-switched call for a user of the mobile communication network, the network ascertains whether the user is engaged in a packet-switched session. In the affirmative case, the network closes the packet-switched data exchange session prior to attempting to route the call to the user. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020745 | METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING MEDIA IN AN INFRASTRUCTURE BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication device acquires membership in a predefined group, joins an ad hoc network associated with the predefined group, and joins and participates in a first session established through an infrastructure device for distributing media to the predefined group. If the wireless communication device is a duplicator node for the ad hoc network, then it receives the media from the infrastructure device and distributes the media other nodes of the ad hoc network, otherwise it receives the media from the duplicator node. The infrastructure device identifies the duplicator node for each ad hoc network associated with the predefined group and each member of the predefined group that is not a node of any of the ad hoc networks and distributes the media only to these members of the predefined group. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020746 | ADVERTISEMENT OF MULTIPLE SECURITY PROFILES IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A novel and useful apparatus for and method of advertising multiple security profiles in wireless local area networks (WLANs). The security profile advertisement mechanism of the present invention advertises all configured security profiles by sending unsolicited 802.11 management probe response frames to the broadcast MAC address for available security profile. The access points sends these unsolicited probe response frames periodically, such as with the Beacon period. The conventional management application in the stations receives unsolicited advertisements of multiple SSIDs and perform a passive scanning process to obtain a list of BSSs available on the radio channel. The station can then display a list of all detected SSID advertisements to the user. The user of the station thus obtains information on all security profiles available on the access point without requiring any prior knowledge of specific SSIDs. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020747 | Method and Apparatus for Home Agent Redirect - A method and apparatus for home agent redirect is provided. A method for redirecting a device from a first home agent to a second home agent includes sending a first message to the first home agent, receiving a second message from the first home agent, and sending a third message to the second home agent. The first message includes a binding update, and the second message includes a binding acknowledgement and a redirect indication that the device is being redirected to the second home agent. The third message includes a binding update, and an address of the first home agent. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020748 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - A communication method in a gateway apparatus includes a transmission step of transmitting and receiving packets to and from a mobile station device, and transmitting and receiving packets to and from a home agent; and a setting step of establishing settings such that the packets from the mobile station device can be transmitted to at least a first and a second home agent, and the packets from at least the first and second home agents can be received. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020749 | METHOD OF DOWNLINK PACKET TRANSMISSION CONTROL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Provided is a method of downlink packet transmission control in a mobile communication system. The method includes the steps of: a) establishing a default bearer when a downlink packet is received; b) determining whether a downlink packet filter corresponding to a downlink packet exists or not; c) transferring the downlink packet through the default bearer if the corresponding downlink packet filter does not exist; and d) transferring the downlink packet through a dedicated bearer if the corresponding downlink packet filter exists. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020750 | METHOD FOR REMOTELY CONTROLLING A MOBILE TERMINAL - The invention relates to a method for controlling remotely a mobile terminal ( | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020751 | MITIGATION OF INTERFERENCE IN CELL SEARCH BY WIRELESS TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE UNITS - A wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) provides facilitation of cell search. In one embodiment, received samples are split into a plurality of sample sets for processing. Each of the sets is processed and an accumulated result is divided by an estimated noise value. In another embodiment, a code correlator correlates the received signal with a primary synchronization code and an auxiliary code correlator having a same length as the code correlator correlates the received signal with a code having a low cross correlation with the primary synchronization code. In another embodiment, a division of an accumulated result with a noise estimate is performed using indexes of the most significant bits. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020752 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING ADVERTISING AND/OR INFORMATION SERVICES OVER MOBILE AD HOC COOPERATIVE NETWORKS USING ELECTRONIC BILLBOARDS AND RELATED DEVICES - A method of operating an electronic billboard includes detecting a mobile electronic device within a predetermined distance of the electronic billboard, establishing an ad hoc wireless connection with the mobile electronic device, and transmitting location-specific data to the mobile electronic device over the ad hoc wireless connection. The location-specific data is associated with a geographic location of the electronic billboard. For example, the location-specific data may include advertising content, traffic and/or construction conditions, emergency information, and/or tourism information associated with the geographic location of the electronic billboard. Related methods, devices, and computer program products are also discussed. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100027462 | TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RANGING METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY CHANGING RANGING PERIOD THEREOF - A ranging method of an access terminal that requests a ranging to an access point through a wireless network and performs the ranging, the ranging method including a) initializing a ranging period, b) setting a timer with the ranging period and starting the timer, c) requesting a ranging by transmitting a given ranging code to the access point based on radio resource allocation information provided by the access point, d) receiving a ranging response message from the access point, and controlling transmission power, timing, and frequency offset of an access terminal according to transmission parameters included in the received ranging response message, e) estimating a downlink channel condition through which a signal from the access point is transmitted, f) resetting the ranging period according to the estimated downlink channel condition, and g) iteratively performing b) to f) according to the reset ranging period. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027463 | Personal Wireless Network User Behavior Based Topology - Point-to-point links making up a wireless network in which the point-to-point links connect at least personal portable devices are dynamically altered (i.e., new point-to-point links are established and/or other point-to-point links are removed) in response to recurring comparisons of the extents of interaction of each of the personal portable devices with the wireless network to increase the resiliency of the wireless network to the observed behavior of the user of the personal portable devices in changing which personal portable devices are within the network at any given time. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027464 | Method & apparatus for minimizing packet transmission loss in a wireless network - A wireless communication device, such as a wireless router or access point, transmits and receives signals according any one of several standard or proprietary wireless protocols and automatically adapts its transmission rate according to the condition of a link or channel over which it is sending and receiving signals. A packet delay value is used to calculate the maximum number of packet retransmissions that are acceptable given a particular application. The packet retransmission value is used to calculate a maximum acceptable packet loss value which is then compared against actual packet losses to determine whether or not to change the packet transmission rate. If it is determined that the actual packet losses are less than the maximum acceptable value, then the packet transmission rate can be changed to a higher rate and if it is determined that the actual packet losses are greater than the maximum acceptable value, then the packet transmission rate can be changed to be a lower rate. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027465 | Delegation based mobility management - A method of handling mobility-related signaling in a communications system comprising a mobile node, a mobile router, and a peer node. The method comprises providing the mobile router with a delegation certificate that is cryptographically signed by or on behalf of the mobile node. At the mobile router, a mobility-related signaling exchange is initiated with the peer node on behalf of the mobile node, the mobile router providing to the peer node within this exchange, said delegation certificate or an identification of the certificate, and a sequence number associated with the certificate. At the peer node, the received sequence number is compared with a sequence number maintained by the peer node in respect of the delegation certificate, and the exchange authorised in dependence upon the result of the comparison. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027466 | Signalling in mobile telecommunications - In a method for use in a base station of a mobile telecommunications system, primary system information is maintained and is periodically broadcast while secondary system information is broadcast in response to a trigger event. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027467 | METHODS FOR HANDLING PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TRANSMISSIONS BY MOBILE STATION WITH SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY CARDS AND SYSTEMS UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for handling packet-switched data transmissions by a mobile station with a first subscriber identity card coupled to a first radio frequency (RF) module and a second subscriber identity card coupled to a second RF module, executed by an adapter of the mobile station, is provided. An uplink Internet protocol (IP) packet is received. Information regarding at least one of the received packet and hardware status of the mobile station is collected. One subscriber identity card is determined from the first and second subscriber identity cards according to the collected information. The received packet is transmitted to an IP network via the RF module corresponding to the determined subscriber identity card. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027468 | Method and system for managing core network information - A method and system for managing information of a plurality of core networks associated with a network access provider is provided. The method includes identifying a core network type of each core network of the plurality of core networks. The method also includes broadcasting the core network type of each core network of the plurality of core networks along with a network identity of each core network. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027469 | POINT OF SALES AND CUSTOMER SUPPORT FOR FEMTOCELL SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT - System(s) and method(s) are provided for a femto cell service framework for purchase of femtocell equipment and service and customer support thereof. A point of sale (POS) platform enables purchase of femtocell equipment based on a set of eligibility criteria. POS also allows purchase of add-on services. Direct fulfillment and post-sale transactions such as returns and equipment replacement are also provided. An account management service enables femtocell equipment and service self-care or through customer representatives. Configuration of service account and monitoring of account status is provided. Customer care architecture also enables remote troubleshooting of purchased equipment. Remote troubleshooting includes diagnosis and related manipulation of purchased equipment. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027470 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK ELEMENTS AND COMMUNICATION METHODS THEREBETWEEN - In a communications network an arrangement for transmitting data between a network element of a first type (e.g. BSS) and a network element of a second type (e.g. MSC) is disclosed. A relationship initialisation message is transmitted from the first network element to the second network element, the message including an information element (e.g. BSC-SCL IE) defining one or more communication modes (e.g. CODECs) with which the first network element is configured to communicate. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027471 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MIMO) IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate distributed multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) or cooperative multipoint (CoMP) communication in a wireless communication system. As described herein, multiple cells, such as a serving cell and an auxiliary cell, can cooperate to conduct communication with one or more associated terminals. In one example described herein, an associated core network can exchange data and/or control signaling with a single cell communicating with a given terminal, which can then tunnel respective data and/or control signaling to other cell(s). By doing so, CoMP communication can be made transparent to the core network and can be achieved without requiring changes to the network. As further described herein, a terminal can exchange Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) assignments and/or other information exclusively with the serving cell in addition to or in place of other information exchanged with a serving cell and/or an auxiliary cell. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027472 | INTERNET PHONE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM THEREOF - An Internet phone communication method includes selecting a destination media access control address from a phone book, transmitting the destination media access control address to an address server having at least one valid media access control address stored therein, checking whether the destination media access control address matches the valid media access control address, communicating with a receiver having the destination media access control address or the valid media access control address via a wireless network system other than a cellular network system when the destination media access control address matches the valid media access control address. An Internet phone communication system is also disclosed herein. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027473 | METHOD OF GENERATING LOW PEAK-TO-AVERAGE POWER RATIO (PAPR) BINARY PREAMBLE SEQUENCES FOR OFDM SYSTEMS - A wireless system and method including a medium access control (MAC) layer adapted to generate low peak-to-average power ratio binary preamble sequences for orthogonal frequency division multiplexing systems described. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027474 | Packet Communication Device - A technique is disclosed, according to which a mobile node detects generation of redundant route optimization messages to an address owned by a node, which already recognizes and comprehends binding with a care-of address and a home address of the mobile node. According to this technique, a CN (correspondent node) | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027475 | Apparatus and Method for Radio Communication - A radio communication apparatus capable of alleviating a burden in setting a transmission format and suppressing increases in the scale of the apparatus. In this apparatus, space multiplexing adaptability detection section ( | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027476 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DOWNLINK MACRO-DIVERSITY IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - The invention described herein enables a form of downlink macro-diversity in packet-switched cellular networks. It allows packets to be selectively delivered from a network/internetwork to an end node, e.g., a wireless communication device or terminal, over a set of available link-layer connections to/from the end node, through one or more access nodes, e.g., base stations. Downlink macro-diversity is particularly important when the link-layer connections between the end node and the corresponding access node, e.g., the access links, are subject to independent or partially correlated time variations in signal strength and interference. In accordance with the invention, the end node dynamically selects the downlink to be used out of a set of available access links on a per packet basis subject to prevailing channel conditions, availability of air-link resources and other constraints. The invention improves the robustness and efficiency of communication, overall utilization of air-link resources, and quality of service experienced by the end node. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100027477 | Processing data units for transfer over the same channel - A radio communication scheme that newly defines a structure of a protocol data unit transmitted through a transport channel so as to avoid unnecessary redundant attachment of the terminal identifier (UE-ID) and the UE-ID type information. As only one terminal identifier (UE-ID) and UE-ID type exist in the header of protocol data unit being processed during one transmission time interval (TTI), the efficiency of overall data transmission is improved and waste of radio resources is remarkably reduced. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100034138 | Method and system for using dynamic throughput graphs for ensuring QoS in converged networks - Our invention is a method and system for a method of providing Quality of Service (QoS) over networks that do not provide any information and only serve to carry packets. Specifically, as Traffic traverses between various user networks via an opaque network, gateways at the edge of the user networks keep a record of the packets traversing into the opaque networks and packets traversing out of the opaque network. These gateways also know about the traffic classes that each of these packets belong to. The gateways at the ingress points (the user network where the packets originate) and the gateways at the egress points (the user network where the packets terminate) coordinate amongst themselves to exchange information about the number and latency of packets exchanged between the two. This information is used by the gateway at the ingress to estimate the state of the opaque network using dynamic throughput graphs. Admission control and | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034139 | Scheduling Grant Information Signaling in Wireless Communication System - A wireless communication infrastructure entity including a transceiver coupled to a controller configured to generate parity bits based on scheduling grant information and to encode the parity bits based on additional scheduling grant information not used to generate the parity bits, wherein the encoded parity bits combined with the scheduling grant information. The additional scheduling grant information may be transport block size or redundancy version information. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034140 | METHOD FOR MAPPING SIGNALING INFORMATION TO ANNOUNCEMENT INFORMATION AND BROADCAST RECEIVER - A method of providing a Non-Real-Time (NRT) service includes receiving a file configuring the NRT service, first signaling information, and second signaling information in a state of being IP-packetized and contained in a single ensemble, configuring and displaying a service guide using the first signaling information acquired from the ensemble, acquiring a first content identifier of content selected from the displayed service guide, accessing a FLUTE session using the second signaling information acquired from the ensemble and acquiring a second content identifier matched with the first content identifier from the accessed FLUTE session, and receiving and storing at least one file configuring the content based on the acquired second content identifier. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034141 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIATING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes receiving measurement gap information and receiving random access procedure information. The method also includes scheduling a random access procedure based on the measurement gap information and the random access procedure information. By scheduling random access procedures in view of the measurement gap information, network bandwidth can be conserved. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034142 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADJUSTING AN ON DURATION IN A DISCONTINUOUS RECEIVE TRANSMISSION MODE - A method and an apparatus that includes establishing a link ( | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034143 | INTER-CHANNEL COMMUNICATION METHODS IN MULTI-CHANNEL WIRELESS NETWORKS - A network information apparatus ( | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034144 | Wireless Communication Apparatus and Control Method Thereof - A wireless communication apparatus capable of using a plurality of different wireless communication systems includes a receiving unit ( | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034145 | METHOD FOR RECEIVING PACKET IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method of receiving a packet in a mobile communication system. According to a type of service provided in the present invention and activity of packet service, a mobile station operates in an operation level among DRX (discontinuous reception) operation levels that are based on operation parameters of different values and receives a packet. This results in performing efficient power consumption such that it is possible to minimize power consumption. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034146 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTI-USER AND SINGLE-USER MIMO IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for supporting distributed multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) transmissions are described. In one design, a user equipment (UE) determines channel estimates for multiple cells and reports the channel estimates. The UE thereafter receives a data transmission sent by the multiple cells to the UE based on the channel estimates. The data transmission may include at least one data stream, and each data stream may be sent by one cell or the multiple cells to the UE. In another design, a UE determines first and second channel estimates for first and second cells, respectively, and reports the channel estimates. The UE then receives a first data transmission sent by the first cell to the UE based on the first channel estimate. The UE also receives a second data transmission sent by the second cell to another UE and steered away from the UE based on the second channel estimate. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034147 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING BUFFER STATUS REPORT ROBUSTNESS - Systems, methods and apparatus for facilitating buffer status report robustness are provided. A method can include: transmitting a buffer status report, tracking an amount of time elapsed since transmitting the buffer status report; and determining, after a selected amount of time has elapsed, whether authorization to transmit buffered data has been received. The method can also include re-transmitting the buffer status report if the selected amount of time has elapsed and a data condition has been met. In some embodiments, the data condition is that information indicative of the authorization has not been received. In some embodiments, the method also includes determining, after the selected amount of time has elapsed, whether data is buffered for transmission, and the data condition is that information indicative of the authorization has not been received, and a determination has been made that data is buffered for transmission. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100034148 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF FLOW CONTROL IN MULTI-HOP WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORKS - A system, method and relay transceiver for multi-hop wireless communications. In the relay, there is a receiver for adapted to receive packets on a first wireless link collectively destined for at least one mobile terminal. The transmitter buffers them and then transmits the packets on a second wireless link. A flow control function is implemented to provide flow control over the first wireless link to limit an amount buffered in the relay transceiver for a given mobile terminal. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100039986 | WIRELESS RADIO AND NETWORK - In one aspect, a wireless radio may be used to connect to a wireless network, including a mesh network. For enhanced security, the radio may operate in silent mode whereby it does not advertise its presence until after it has detected another node. The radio may also provide its own subnetwork and provide network address translation to further enhance security and simplify network traffic. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039987 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING A BEARER PATH IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is provided that routes a bearer path of a communication session between an originating Node B and a terminating Node B via an X2 interface, bypassing an IMS core network, while continuing to route the signaling path to an IMS network, thereby allowing the IMS network to retain control of the bearer path while avoiding delay, potential for data loss and jitter to the bearer stream, and additional backhaul capacity requirements that result from routing the bearer path between the originating and terminating Node Bs via the IMS core network. In determining whether the bearer path may bypass the IMS core network, the communication system determines whether IMS core network bearer associated services are required for the communication session such that a bearer path of the call will need to be routed to the IMS core network in order to provide such services. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039988 | Preventing Misuse of Random Access Procedure in Wireless Communication System - A method for preventing misuse of a random access procedure in a mobile station including transmitting a random access preamble, receiving a random access response message addressed to an identifier that has a one-to-one association with the random access preamble transmitted by the mobile station, and decoding the random access response message. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039989 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A PLURALITY OF NETWORK ADDRESSES IN A MOBILE TERMINAL - Provided is a method and apparatus for processing a plurality of network addresses in a mobile terminal. The method for processing a plurality of network addresses in the mobile terminal includes: storing combinations of an HoA (home address), a plurality of CoAs (care-of addresses) and a plurality of network interfaces of the mobile terminal, through which the mobile terminal may be connected to a plurality of networks; when the mobile terminal transmits packets to a target node, selecting a network interface combination for connecting the mobile terminal to the target node from among the combinations, and setting a corresponding path; and transmitting the packets through the set path. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039990 | Method and Arrangement in a Wireless Communications System - A method for assisting the adaptation of a signal from a first node ( | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039991 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING ADDRESSES AND/OR SECURITY DATA BETWEEN ENBS OF AN LTE ACCESS NETWORK, AND ASSOCIATED MME AND ENB - A method is intended for automatically configuring address(es) between eNBs (NBi) of an LTE access network. This method comprises i) transmitting a chosen message to at least one Mobility Management Entity (MME) of a core network connected to the LTE access network, this chosen message including at least one transport layer address of a first eNB (NB | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039992 | ACQUISITION OF ACCESS POINT INFORMATION WITH ASSISTANCE FROM OTHER ACCESS POINTS - An access point acquires information about another access point from at least one other access point. For example, the access point may send a query to one or more neighbor access points to obtain information about the other access point. In some aspects these operations may be employed in conjunction with establishing neighbor relations in a network. For example, in the event a neighbor list of a given access point does not have certain information about another access point (e.g., an IP address), the given access point may query its neighbor access points to see whether those access points have information about the other access point in their neighbor lists. Upon receipt of this information, the given access point may use the information to establish neighbor relations with the other access point. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039993 | COMBINED GATEWAY FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - The functionalities of one or more of a mobility management entity (MME), serving gateway (SGW), and packet data network gateway (PGW) can be provided in a single device on the network. In the access gateway different functional elements are implemented as services and they can be configured on the same device. For example, the SGW and PGW can be configured on the same device. When user equipment UE connects from a home network, it is possible for the MME to choose the same SGW and PGW. This combined SGW and PGW can implement a single session for the UE, thereby capable of providing a savings in resources, allowing additional capacity, and allowing reduced latency and increased throughput because fewer hops are made on the network. This session acts as a SGW on the ingress side and a PGW on the egress side of the access gateway. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039994 | Processing data units for transfer over the same channel - A radio communication scheme that newly defines a structure of a protocol data unit transmitted through a transport channel so as to avoid unnecessary redundant attachment of the terminal identifier (UE-ID) and the UE-ID type information. As only one terminal identifier (UE-ID) and UE-ID type exist in the header of protocol data unit being processed during one transmission time interval (TTI), the efficiency of overall data transmission is improved and waste of radio resources is remarkably reduced. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039995 | Method for operating a mobile wireless network - A method of operating a mobile wireless network is described to ensure proper function of protocol entities during the transmission of data units between two wireless stations of the mobile wireless network. In this case, user data is assembled by a first convergence protocol layer of the first wireless station into at least one first data unit, particularly a packet data unit, before transmission to a second convergence protocol layer of a second wireless station, particularly on the same protocol level, with the user data being supplied to the first convergence protocol layer by at least one user in a network layer. At least one protocol entity of the first convergence protocol layer is configured as a function of a configuration request received by the second wireless station, in order to form the at least one first data unit from the data received from the at least one user and to transmit it through a carrier to a link control layer. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100039996 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A reordering method of sending packets, to which numbers indicating the packet order are added, to a mobile station from a base station, and rearranging the order of the packets at the mobile station, this includes forwarding from a source base station to a target base station, packets, not sent to the mobile station before a handover sequence, or packets, a confirmation response of proper reception has not been received from the mobile station, transmitting preferentially those packets from the target base station to the mobile base station and then transmitting packets received from a host station to the mobile station, giving packets information indicating that the packets are jump packets when transmitting the packets to the mobile station, received from the host station with the order jumped, deciding jump packets are not objects of reordering, and performing the reordering process for packets that are objects of reordering. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100046423 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REQUESTING SELECTED INTERLACE MODE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for requesting selected interlace mode with a particular sector is provided, comprising generating a SelectedInterlaceRequest message comprising an 8 bit MessageID field, a 12 bit PilotPN field wherein the PilotPN field indicates a value of PilotPN of the sector to which the message is directed and a 4 bit InterlacesRequested field wherein the InterlacesRequested field indicates a value of requested number of interlaces and transmitting the SelectedInterlaceRequest message over a communication link. A method and apparatus for receiving and processing the SelectedInterlaceRequest message is further provided. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046424 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING LOAD MATCHING IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method controls transmission of data packets in a radio communication system, with the radio communication system having at least one central node as well as at least one base station connected to it, and with the base station transmitting data packets, which have been received by the central node and have been provided with encryption by the latter, to at least one subscriber terminal via a radio interface. The base station rejects a first number of data packets, before transmission via the radio interface, as a function of the current or expected load state. A respective first information item is added to a second number of data packets to be transmitted to the subscriber terminal, in the central node after encryption, and the base station rejects or does not reject a respective data packet as a function of the first information item. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046425 | RANDOM ACCESS PREAMBLE SELECTION - The present invention relates to methods for establishing a connection between a user equipment and a wireless network. More particularly, the present invention relates to methods for selecting a preamble based on its power back-off metric in order to randomly access a wireless network while avoiding collisions with other user equipments attempting to access the network at the same time. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046426 | METHODS FOR PROVIDING AN AD HOC MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYSTEMS THEREOF - A method, computer readable medium, and system for providing a mobile communication network includes dynamically forming a plurality of mobile communication devices into one or more clusters based on one or more parameters, each of the one or more clusters having a tree structure. Each of the one or more clusters are at least partially meshed together. At least one virtual identifier is dynamically assigned to each of the plurality of mobile communication devices based on the tree structure of each of the one or more clusters. The virtual identifier provides address information for routing communications between two or more of the plurality of mobile communication devices. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046427 | MULTIPLE ANTENNA MODE CONTROL METHOD BASED ON ACCESS POINT - A multiple antenna mode control method based on an Access Point comprises the following steps: step 1, the Access Point periodically sends out a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by the Access Point (S | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046428 | Method and apparatus of performing cell re-search between heterogeneous networks - A method and apparatus of performing cell re-search between heterogeneous networks is provided. A mobile terminal (MT) accesses to a high rate packet data (HRPD) network. The MT receives a first message from the HRPD network. The first message includes neighbor radio access technology (RAT) indicator which indicates whether neighbor RAT information used to perform inter-RAT measurement is transmitted from the HRPD network. The MT receives a second message from the HRPD network if the neighbor RAT indicator indicates the transmission of the neighbor RAT information. The second message includes the neighbor RAT information. The MT performs cell re-search on the basis of the neighbor RAT information. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046429 | Wireless Communications System That Supports Multiple Modes Of Operation - A wireless communications adapts its mode of operation between spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing in response to transmission-specific variables. An embodiment of a wireless communications system for transmitting information between a base transceiver station and a subscriber unit includes mode determination logic. The mode determination logic is in communication with the base transceiver station and the subscriber unit. The mode determination logic determines, in response to a received signal, if a subscriber datastream should be transmitted between the base transceiver station and the subscriber unit utilizing spatial multiplexing or non-spatial multiplexing. In an embodiment, the mode determination logic has an input for receiving a measure of a transmission characteristic related to the received signal. In an embodiment, the mode determination logic includes logic for comparing the measured transmission characteristic to a transmission characteristic threshold and for selecting one of spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing in response to the comparison of the measured transmission characteristic to the transmission characteristic threshold. In an embodiment, the transmission characteristic includes at least one of delay spread, post-processing signal-to-noise ratio, cyclical redundancy check (CRC) failure, residual inter-symbol interference, mean square error, coherence time, and path loss. By adapting the mode of operation in response to transmission-specific variables, the use of spatial multiplexing can be discontinued in unfavorable conditions. Additionally, because the wireless communications system can adapt its mode of operation between spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing, the communications system is compatible with both subscriber units that support spatial multiplexing and subscriber units that do not support spatial multiplexing. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046430 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication device includes: a control unit configured to control communication data; and memory configured to store communication data; wherein the control unit performs processing of setting a re-order buffer corresponding to a source address, for storing received data in increments of source address in the memory, storing received packets from a single data source in the re-order buffer corresponding to a source address, and arraying the packet order following sequence numbers set to the received packets. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046431 | FAST UPLINK RANGING SYSTEM AND METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a fast uplink ranging system and method in a mobile communication system. According to the present invention, a fast uplink ranging system transmits two pairs of ranging codes having the same value at locations spaced by half of FFT pointers. The fast uplink ranging system calculates a correlation value using the received two pairs of ranging codes. An order in which complex exponential twiddle factors for removing complex exponential terms corresponding to a time delay are searched is determined using the correlation value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a time required for searching a timing error of a terminal using non-periodic symmetry of complex exponential twiddle factors corresponding to the timing error, compared with a known method of searching a complex exponential twiddle factor. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046432 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL AND INFORMATION ON ANTENNA, AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING THE NUMBER OF ANTENNAS - A base station applies frequency switching transmission diversity and a preceding vector to a synchronization channel and applies a space-frequency block coding and a preceding vector to a broadcast channel. The base station controls the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel to be positioned adjacent each other and then generates and transmits a downlink frame. The base station includes partial information on the number of antennas in the synchronization channel, and other information thereon in the broadcast channel. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046433 | LOGICAL INTERFACE ESTABLISHING METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - A plug-and-play radio base station autonomously establishes X2 logical interfaces and S1 logical interfaces with existing base stations and upper nodes. A new radio base station which is installed in a network advertises an IP address of the new radio base station over a transport network. An existing radio base station or an upper node which receives the IP address detects the number of hops from the new radio base station to the existing radio base station or the upper node. An initial logical interface with the new radio base station is established when the detected number of hops is below a predetermined threshold. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046434 | NETWORK-BASED AND HOST-BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN PACKET-BASED COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present invention describes a method for signalling to a mobility anchor point a position of a mobile node in a network using a network-based mobility management scheme for managing the mobility of the mobile node, said method comprising receiving, by a network element, from the mobile node, during or after network authentication of the mobile node, a sequence number used by a process implementing a mobile node-based mobility management scheme for managing the mobility of the mobile node, and transmitting, by the network element, to the mobility anchor point a message on a position of the mobile node in the network, wherein said message comprises the received sequence number. A common sequence number variable for BU and PBU messages is used, so that the HA is able to determine a correct transmission order of PBU/BU messages based on the sequence number in the message. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046435 | ROUTING TABLE GENERATION, DATA TRANSMISSION AND ROUTING ROUTE FORMATION METHOD FOR MULTI-HOP SERVICES IN HIGH RATE WIRELESS PERSONAL NETWORKS - Provided are a routing table generating method, a data transmission method, and a routing route formation method for multi-hop communication in high rate wireless personal networks. In a high rate WPAN environment including a plurality of piconets, a piconet controller (PNC), which performs a topology server function to provide the optimal route, collects link state information from the PNCs or DEVs (devices) belonging to a sub-tree that serves as a root and applies a minimum cost algorithm based on the collected link state information to calculate the optimal route for all pairs of originations and destinations existing within the sub-tree in consideration of QoS. The optimal route information is transmitted to the origination PNC via the destination PNC/DEV. During performing this, the optimal route between the pairs of originations and destinations is set. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046436 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INTELLIGENT ROUTING OF DATA BETWEEN A REMOTE DEVICE AND A HOST SYSTEM - An apparatus and method is provided for transparent communication between a remote or mobile device and a fixed communication host network. The apparatus and method may include a remote network controller that logically resides between the host network and the existing infrastructure(s) that are used to provide communications network contact with one or more remote devices. The remote network controller is connected to the host communication network as a protocol-appropriate communications controller so that remote devices are indistinguishable to the host network from the locally-attached devices. Each remote device may be provided with an asynchronous serial data interface to communicate with a mobile data controller. The mobile data controller, in combination with the remote network controller, provides end-to-end data communication such that incompatible protocols are transparent to the remote device and host communication network. A router may be provided which selects a communications network in accordance with user configured parameters. The router communicates over a plurality of incompatible networks and is capable of using a variety of different protocols. Switching between the plurality of incompatible networks is transparent to the remote device and host communication network. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046437 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus includes a receiving device configured to receive one physical frame in which a plurality of MAC frames are aggregated. This physical frame includes one acknowledgement request frame for the plurality of MAC frames. The apparatus includes an acknowledgement frame forming device configured to form an acknowledgement frame representing reception statuses of the plurality of MAC frames in response to the acknowledgement request frame. The apparatus also includes a transmitting device configured to transmit the acknowledgement frame. This acknowledgement frame includes a compressed acknowledgement frame representing an acknowledgement bitmap having a size equal to a maximum number of MSDUs (MAC Service Data Units) when one MPDU (MAC Protocol Data Unit) corresponds to one MSDU. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100046438 | Method and System for Implementing Data Routing of Roaming User - A method and system for implementing data routing of a roaming user are disclosed. The method comprises: configuring a roaming protocol between the home network and the roaming network; during the registering process of the user in the roaming network, performing an interactive negotiation between the home network and the roaming network, so as to determine one of the home network and the roaming network to allocate IP address according to the roaming protocol between the home network and the roaming network; and establishing the IP access bearer based on the IP address. A corresponding system is also provided. The routing of the roaming user data plane could be optimized under the control of the home network operator, and the IP address of the default IP bearer for the roaming user could be allocated by the roaming network as much as possible, while guaranteeing of the home network operator's interest and dominant position, so as to optimize the routing of the data plane for the roaming user, improve the performance of the data service and bring a better service experience to the roaming user. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100054178 | METHOD OF PARALLEL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A data communication method includes providing a sender node having a data packet of information. The data packet is sent to each of a plurality of heterogeneous transmitter devices. The data packet is wirelessly transmitted from each of the transmitter devices to a receiver node. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054179 | SELECTING AN ACCESS POINT FROM A PLURALITY OF ACCESS POINTS - Techniques are provided for selecting an access point (AP) to communicate with from a plurality of candidate access points (APs) when a wireless computing device (WCD) roams in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The WCD stores a pairwise master key (PMK) for each access point that the WCD has previously established a PMK with during authentication. The WCD a plurality of candidate access points and determines an AP statistic (APS) associated with each candidate AP. The WCD then determines an AP rating for each candidate AP based on the APS for the candidate AP and whether the wireless computing device has a pairwise master key stored for the candidate AP. The WCD then selects a particular one of the candidate APs having the highest AP rating as a desired AP of the wireless computing device. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054180 | Method and System for Adaptive Antenna Array Pairing - A method of pairing a first wireless access unit with a second wireless access unit in a mobile ad-hoc wireless pairing system includes determining that the second wireless access unit is available for pairing with the first wireless access unit and pairing the pairing the first wireless access unit with the second wireless access unit upon receiving an input from a user of the first wireless access unit. A location of the second wireless access unit is determined by adjusting a first wireless access unit weighting factor. The first wireless access unit weighting factor is adjusted until a threshold signal strength is received by the second wireless access unit. The first wireless access unit weighting factor is transmitted to the second wireless access unit, and feedback is received from the second wireless access unit. The feedback provides recommendations about the first wireless access unit weighting factor to the first wireless access unit. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054181 | Adaptive Block Sequence ARQ protocol for Wireless Communications - A method of performing wireless communications. The method receives at a receiving unit a sequence of data blocks from a transmitting unit. The method also identifies at the receiving unit a first number of invalid sequential data blocks in the sequence and a second number of valid sequential data blocks in the sequence. The method also communicates from the receiving unit a wireless message to the transmitting unit. The wireless message comprises a first field that specifies the first number and a second field that specifies the second number—the encoding of the first field is operable to specify a different maximum than an encoding of the second field. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054182 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION, EMITTER AND RECEIVER STATIONS AND ASSOCIATED COMPUTER PROGRAMS - Method of communication, on a radio channel, between at least two nodes ( | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054183 | SENSOR NETWORK CONTROL METHOD FOR DATA PATH ESTABLISHMENT AND RECOVERY AND SENSOR NETWORK THEREFOR - Disclosed herein are a sensor network control method for data path establishment and recovery and a sensor network therefor. The sensor network control method includes the steps of (a) the sink node or a first sensor node creating an interest message, including information about a hop count between itself and the sink node, and transmitting the interest message to one or more neighboring nodes; (b) a second sensor node, which has received the interest message, creating a routing table using the hop count information of the interest message and information about the node having transmitted the interest message, (c) the second sensor node determining a data transmission path for data transmission to the sink node using the routing table; and (d) the second sensor node transmitting an interest message, including information about a hop count between itself and the sink node to at least one neighboring node. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054184 | CELL SEARCH METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND BASE STATION - A cell search method performed by a mobile station for communication in an OFDM system includes a first step of detecting a timing and a carrier frequency of a primary synchronization channel based on correlation detection between a primary synchronization channel sequence and a received signal; a second step of determining a timing and a carrier frequency of a secondary synchronization channel based on the timing and the carrier frequency of the primary synchronization channel and detecting cell-specific control information including a frame timing and a cell ID group; and a third step of performing correlation detection on each cell ID in the cell ID group with a common pilot symbol on a common pilot channel and identifying a cell ID from the cell ID group. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054185 | Wireless Access Network, Communication Quality Management Apparatus, and Wireless Base Station - A communication quality management equipment connected via a control line to a plurality of wireless base stations within a wireless access network, acquires quality information of a wireless line at a present position of a mobile terminal, resource information as to a wireless line of each of the wireless base stations, and use information as to a network line of each of the wireless base stations from the respective wireless base stations in a periodic manner, or in response to an instruction issued from the communication quality management equipment, and then judges a communication quality at each of the present positions of the mobile terminal; forms communication quality map information in which the judged communication qualities have been defined in correspondence with the positional information, and transmits the formed communication quality map information to the mobile terminal in accordance with a request from the mobile terminal. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054186 | INITIAL ACCESS CONTROL METHOD BETWEEN PERSONAL SUBSCRIBER STATION AND RADIO ACCESS STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an initial access based control method between a personal subscriber station and a radio access station in a mobile communication system. The present invention includes: a) selecting an initial access method corresponding to a first field value of a first parameter included in a first downlink channel descript message received from the radio access station; b) generating a first ranging request message corresponding to the initial access method; and c) transmitting the first ranging request message to the radio access station. The present invention guarantees mutual compatibility with the existing broadband wireless access system and realizes various initial access methods between the subscriber station and the radio access station. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054187 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN SERVICES OVER A PACKET SWITCHED NETWORK - A method of determining a domain mode for a mobile station operating in either a circuit-switched domain or a packet-switched domain. A first domain mode is determined, and then a determination is made whether to rove from the first domain mode to a second domain mode. The determination may be made by a Packet Mobile Switching Center (PMSC) when, for example, the mobile station moves between Routing Areas. Alternatively, the mobile station may make the determination based, for example, on pre-provisioned selection criteria. The mobile station derives a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) based on a cell identifier of a current cell and uses the FQDN in a DNS query to obtain the IP address of the PMSC. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054188 | Wireless Communication Base Station Apparatus and Wireless Communication Method - A wireless communication base station apparatus capable of suppressing the waste of a signaling source in retransmittal signaling of group scheduling. In this apparatus, a multiplexing part ( | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054189 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GENERATING MAC PROTOCOL DATA UNIT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for generating a Media Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes reconstructing at least one MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) according to scheduling information of the MAC layer and generating at least one MPDU data portion, adding control information to each MPDU data portion and generating at least one MPDU payload, adding a General MAC Header (GMH) to each MPDU payload and generating at least one MPDU, and transmitting the MPDU to a receive end. The control information includes at least one piece of MSDU information constituting each MPDU data portion. The GMH includes length information on the MPDU and Connection IDentifier (CID) information. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054190 | MOBILE IP ADDRESSING - A system and method are provided for mobile Internet Protocol (IP) addressing, in a multi-mode wireless communications access terminal (AT). The method provides an AT with an IP address (ATA), and a care-of-address (CoA) in each of a plurality of networks. In one aspect, the AT selects a first network for transmission, from the plurality of networks. The AT sends an IP packet to a correspondent node (CN) via a first mobile node (MN) external device. Regardless of the network selected, the AT is able to use the ATA as a source address. Sending the IP packet to the CN may include creating a tunnel between the first MN and the HA. The IP packet is sent to the HA using the first CoA as a tunnel source address, and the HA sends the IP packet to the CN using the ATA as the source address. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100061294 | ENFORCING POLICIES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION USING EXCHANGED IDENTITIES - Techniques for facilitating the exchange of information and transactions between two entities associated with two wireless devices when the devices are in close proximity to each other. A first device uses a first short range wireless capability to detect an identifier transmitted from a second device in proximity, ideally using existing radio capabilities such as Bluetooth (IEEE802.15.1-2002) or Wi-Fi (IEEE802.11). The detected identifier, being associated with the device, is also associated with an entity. Rather than directly exchanging application data flow between the two devices using the short range wireless capability, a second wireless capability allows for one or more of the devices to communicate with a central server via the internet, and perform the exchange of application data flow. By using a central server to draw on stored information and content associated with the entities the server can broker the exchange of information between the entities and the devices. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061295 | TRANSFERRING DATA IN A DUAL TRANSFER MODE BETWEEN A MOBILE NETWORK AND MOBILE STATIONS - A circuit mobility management entity (CMM) is intended a mobile network adapted for transferring data in a dual transfer mode to and from mobile stations. The CMM is arranged, when it has established a circuit-switched (CS) connection between a mobile station and the mobile network and when it receives from a radio resource entity (RR) of the mobile network, a message informing that the CS procedure corresponding to this CS connection is ended, to determine if a GPRS Tunnelling Transport Protocol (GTTP) procedure is running for a packet-switched (PS) signalling procedure which concerns the mobile station, then either i) require release of the CS connection near the RR entity if the GTTP procedure is ended, or ii) maintain the CS connection as long as the GTTP procedure is running, and require release of the CS connection near the RR entity when the GTTP procedure is ended. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061296 | PACKET TRANSFER CONTROL METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL AND HOME AGENT USED IN ITS METHOD - A technology is disclosed for providing a packet transfer control method that can transmit a DU message to a specific CN or a specific flow to prompt a change in destination, while maintaining a transfer request to a CoA from a HA. In the technology, when a home agent receives a packet addressed to a mobile terminal from a predetermined communication terminal, the mobile terminal transmits a second message to the home agent, the second message including information required for the home agent to transmit a first message to the predetermined communication terminal. The first message states that a currently used address addressed to the mobile terminal cannot be used. The home agent generates the first message based on the information included in the second message and transmits the generated first message to the predetermined communication terminal. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061297 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS USING DIFFERENT FREQUENCY REUSE FACTORS - The method for transmitting a data signal including a plurality of data packets from a base station to a radio device comprises the steps of: subdividing each data packet into at least a first data sub-packet and a second data sub-packet; transmitting simultaneously the first data sub-packet on a first portion of total resources, having a first reuse frequency factor, and the second data sub-packet on at least one second portion of total resources having second reuse factor, said first reuse factor being different from said second reuse factor. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061298 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - To prevent a collision from occurring at the time of random access in cases such as handover, response to paging and the like where a mobile station apparatus performs random access in response to directions from a base station apparatus. In a mobile communication system in which a mobile station apparatus | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061299 | DYNAMIC NETWORKING SPECTRUM REUSE TRANSCEIVER - Systems and methods are disclosed for the operation of a network of cognitive radios in a dynamic network topology. The systems and methods make use cross-layer communications to input parameters required by network services into a reasoning engine, which in turns processes the parameter the parameter information and reports linguistic results to the network services. The cross-layer communications are leveraged to shift network service functionality to the MAC or PHY Layers. Route discovery functionality is shifted from routing services down to the MAC or PHY Layers. The route discovery functionality is implemented by a process to elect a relay node based on the number of available channels that each of the source node neighbors has available to communicate with other neighbors. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061300 | Method and Apparatus for Linking Mobile Communication Devices to Wireless Networks in Underground Edifices - An apparatus for linking mobile communication devices to wireless networks in underground edifices includes a plurality of base stations which are arranged at a spatial distance from one another inside tunnel systems, substantially in the direction of the tunnel axes, such that the reception areas of two adjacent base stations overlap as little as possible. All base stations operate on a single common channel. In a method used for the apparatus, the mobile station switches to an adjacent base station when a quality signal drops below a predetermined threshold value. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061301 | Automatic Distribution of Server and Gateway Information for Pool Configuration - A mobile communications network ( | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061302 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL METHOD - An out-of-synchronization determining section that determines uplink out of synchronization with the mobile station in accordance with a reception timing of the uplink signal is provided in a base station apparatus for carrying out communications with a mobile station, wherein the mobile station transmits an uplink signal by Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061303 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL CHANNEL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system using both a discontinuous transmission scheme and a compressed mode transmission scheme, if a preamble and/or a postamble of a channel including control information for transmitting a specific channel overlaps a compressed mode (CM) gap, an overall transmission unit is not transmitted or remaining signals of the transmission unit excluding the preamble and/or the postamble overlapping the CM gap are transmitted. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061304 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND POSITION MANAGING APPARATUS - A mobile node includes a plurality of transceivers, has a network conforming to network-based mobility as its home link and performs position registration to a positional managing apparatus and performs position registration to the position managing apparatus through a foreign network by position registration conforming to host-based mobility. In mobile node and position managing apparatus, a plurality of routes passing through the home link and the foreign link are established. Accordingly, when the mobile node has the plurality of transceivers, it can simultaneously connect to the home link and the foreign link through respective transceivers, to perform communication. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061305 | MOBILE RADIO TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION PROCESSING METHOD - A mobile radio terminal includes a radio transmission/reception unit and a control unit. The radio transmission/reception unit uses a radio signal to perform transmission and reception to and from a base station belonging to a circuit switching network, and also uses a radio signal to perform transmission and reception to and from a base station belonging to a mobile communication network. The mobile communication network is connected to the circuit switching network and forms an integrated communication network together with the circuit switching network. When the mobile radio terminal is on standby in a base station belonging to the mobile communication network, the control unit activates the radio transmission/reception unit and controls the radio transmission/reception unit so as to maintain synchronization with a base station belonging to the circuit switching network. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061306 | CELL SEARCH METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A cell search method and apparatus for an asynchronous mobile communication system are provided. A Secondary Synchronization Code (SSC) correlator despreads a signal at every slot boundary in accordance with a z-sequence to output a SSC correlation value. The signal is received over a first symbol duration. A Primary Synchronization Code (PSC) correlator despreads the received signal in accordance with a PSC to output a PSC correlation value. A dot product calculator performs dot product calculation between the SSC correlation value and the PSC correlation value to output a correlation result of the SSC. A frame synchronization detector extracts frame synchronization information from the correlation result. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061307 | Method and apparatus for supporting multiple MAC versions in broadband wireless communication system - A method and an apparatus are configured to support a plurality of Media Access Control (MAC) versions in a broadband wireless communication system. An operating method of a terminal to support the multiple MAC versions in the broadband wireless communication system includes receiving a message comprising information of one or more MAC versions supported by a base station, from the base station; and sending information of one or more MAC versions supported by the terminal, to the base station using a message. Thus, in the wireless environment where the multiple MAC versions are mixed, the MAC version can be matched. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061308 | MANAGEMENT OF MOBILE TERMINALS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ALLOWING FOR MULTIPLE-TRACKING AREA REGISTRATION - The invention relates to a method and network control node for detecting the point of attachment of mobile terminals moving within a mobile communication network in idle mode, wherein the mobile communication system can be logically divided into plural tracking areas to which the mobile terminals register. Further, the invention relates to a method for enabling management of mobile terminals in idle mode receiving a service within such mobile communication system. Moreover, the invention relates to a method and mobile terminal for updating the mobile terminal's tracking area registration in a mobile communication system being logically divided into plural tracking areas, wherein mobile terminal is in idle mode and is registered to plural tracking areas simultaneously. The invention suggests different mechanism how to detect terminals registering to plural tracking area, how to verify their current location in the network and how to use these information, for example for resource management. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061309 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILITY ACROSS HETEROGENEOUS ADDRESS SPACES - A mobile node includes a processor, a network interface, and a storage device having computer program code for execution by the processor. The computer program code includes a network layer for transmitting and receiving packets and an intermediate driver that transmits packets to the network layer and receives packets from the network layer using a virtual interne protocol (IP) address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver transmits packets to the network interface and receives packets from the network interface using a routable actual IP address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver permits the actual IP address to change when the mobile node moves from a first subnet to a second subnet without a corresponding change in the virtual IP address. A corresponding NAT associates the virtual IP address with a second actual IP address when the NAT is notified that the mobile node is in the second subnet. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061310 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PROVIDING EXTENSIBLE PROTOCOL TRANSLATION FEATURES AND RELATED METHODS - A communications system may include a plurality of data storage devices each using at least one of a plurality of different operating protocols, and a plurality of mobile wireless communications devices for accessing the plurality of data storage devices. Each mobile wireless communications device may also use at least one of the plurality of different operating protocols. The system may further include a protocol interface device. In particular, the protocol interface device may include a protocol engine module for communicating with the plurality of data storage devices using respective operating protocols, and a front-end proxy module coupled to the protocol engine. The front-end proxy module may include a respective proxy module for communicating with the plurality of mobile wireless communications devices using each different operating protocol, and at least one common core service module connected to the proxy modules. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100067434 | QUICK SYSTEM SELECTION AND ACQUISITION FOR MULTI-MODE MOBILE DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for using network topology and coverage information from one radio access technology (RAT) network to assist acquisition of another different RAT network for a multi-mode mobile station (MS), such as acquiring a WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) network based on topology and coverage information about a 3G (Third Generation) network and vice versa, are provided. Base station (BS) acquisition assisted in this manner may provide for quick restoration of a previously interrupted or deactivated network service, while decreasing the power consumption of the multi-mode MS during a power savings state because periodic scanning and registration need not occur. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067435 | ARCHITECTURE TO SUPPORT NETWORK-WIDE MULTIPLE-IN-MULTIPLE-OUT WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OVER AN UPLINK - The present invention provides a method of coordinating the uplink transmissions from at least one mobile unit to a plurality of base stations. The method is implemented in a control and data plane entity and includes scheduling, at the control plane function, uplink signals for transmission from the mobile unit(s) to the plurality of base stations. The method also includes receiving, at the data plane function from the plurality of base stations, signals including scheduled uplink signals transmitted from the mobile unit(s) to the plurality of base stations. The method further includes estimating, at the data plane function, information bits transmitted in the scheduled uplink signals using the received signals and channel state information indicative of a plurality of wireless communication links between the mobile unit(s) and the plurality of base stations. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067436 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF, AND TRANSMITTING NODE - A mobile communication system includes a base station control apparatus, and first and second type base stations having a receiving unit that receives a predetermined signal transmitted from the base station control apparatus. The base station control apparatus includes a type determining unit that determines whether a type of the base station is the second type base station, a transmission period setting unit that sets a transmission period of the predetermined signal for the base station determined to be the second type base stations by the type determining unit, to be longer than a transmission period of the predetermined signal for the base station not determined to be the second type base station, and a transmitting unit that periodically transmits the predetermined signal to the base stations, based on a transmission period set for each of the base stations by the transmission period setting unit. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067437 | Telecommunication System for Controlling Media Gateways - A telecommunication system and method for controlling the establishment of payload connections through media gateways. The system receives and aggregates control orders from a plurality of telecommunication nodes such as media gateway controllers. The system uses knowledge of resources in the network to optimize the path of the payload connection. The system also sends control orders to a given media gateway in order to establish the payload connection. The system may be connected to a plurality of other instances of the same type of system in a hierarchical manner. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067438 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND, TERMINAL APPARATUS AND BASE STATION APPARATUS USING THE METHOD - When a control unit receives an authentication request from a terminal apparatus, the control unit transmits an authentication response to the terminal apparatus. When it receives a connection request from the terminal apparatus to which the authentication response has been transmitted, the control unit transmits a connection response to the terminal apparatus. The control unit carries out data communication with the terminal apparatus to which the connection response has been transmitted. When it receives a notification indicating that a connection has already been granted by another base station apparatus, in substitution for the authentication request, the control unit carries out data communication with the terminal apparatus. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067439 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING USING AN IN-VEHICLE SYSTEM - A system and method for communicating wirelessly from a mobile device to a remote receiver station is disclosed. The system includes a controller configured to monitor a status of the mobile device and, upon an initiation event, initiate a data transfer process to wirelessly communicate data to the remote receiver station. The system also includes a voice-band modem that, upon initiation of the data transfer process. The voice-band modem is configured to receive data for transfer to the remote receiver station, encode the data to form a series of encoded packets, and transmit the encoded packets to the remote receiver station using a first modulation scheme. Thereafter, unless an indication that the series of packets has been received by at the receiving station is provided, the voice-band modem automatically retransmit the encoded packets to the remote receiver station using a second modulation scheme. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067440 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROL CHANNEL OPERATION IN GERAN - A method and apparatus to improve the quality of control signaling based on signaling messages controlling speech or data transmission over an air interface between at least two Multi-User-Reusing-One-Slot/Voice Services Over Adaptive Multiuser Channels On One Slot (MUROS/VAMOS) capable wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs). The WTRUs communicate with each other at the physical layer via signaling messages transmitted in control channels such as Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH) and Fast Associated Control Channel (FACCH). Speech services are provided simultaneously over the same physical channel, and the Timing Advance (TA) and Power Command (PC) parameters of a WTRU are multiplexed in several occurrences of the SACCH or FACCH to increase the number of channel bits available for channel coding. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067441 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more particularly, to a method of transmitting and receiving frame in a wireless communication system. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067442 | Communication System and Method For Wirelessly Exchanging User Data With a User Terminal - The invention relates to a communication system including a first wireless access station with a first data connection for transferring user data and a second wireless access station with a second data connection for transferring user data. The first wireless access station and second wireless access station are located at distant positions from each other. The first wireless access station has one or more antennas for wirelessly transmitting user data that are received over the first data connection to a user terminal. The second wireless access station is configured to receive user data over the second data connection and to transmit the user data directly to the first wireless access station for transmission to the user terminal. The communication system further includes a controller configured for controlling at least a part of the user data for the user terminal to flow over the second data connection. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067443 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH FEMTO NODES - Systems and methods for performing a handoff of an access terminal from a macro node to a femto node are disclosed. In one embodiment, the femto node is configured to transmit a predetermined signal for determining signal quality and an identifier that uniquely identifies the femto node to the access terminal. The access terminal is configured to transmit the identifier to the macro node. The femto node is identified as a hand in target based on the transmitted identifier and the macro node is configured to hand in the access terminal to the femto node. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067444 | TELEPHONY SERVICES IN MOBILE IP NETWORKS - An emergency telephone call is supported and routed to a Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) in an IP based packet switched wireless communications network. An activate PDP context request is sent from a user equipment to the network. A parameter in said activate PDP context request indicates that the PDP context will be used to transfer an emergency call. An activate PDP context accept message is returned from said support node to said user equipment. Said activate PDP context accept message acknowledges said activate PDP context request message and provides the address of a call state control function. A call setup request transferred to the call state control function includes the Service Area Identity (SAI). The call state control function selects a PSAP based, at least in part, on the SAI included in the call setup request and forwards the emergency call to the selected PSAP. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100074168 | METHOD OF GENERATING A BUFFER STATUS FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED DEVICE - A method of generating a buffer state of a packet data convergence protocol, hereinafter called PDCP, layer for a user equipment in a wireless communication system includes including volume information of packets, which have been submitted to a layer lower than the PDCP layer and have not been confirmed by the layer or by a PDCP status report, in a buffer state report of the PDCP layer, where the packets have not been confirmed by the layer due to buffer clearing of the layer. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074169 | PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD, PACKET UPDATE METHOD, HOST APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREOF FOR THE PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A packet transmission system, a packet transmission method, a packet update method, a host apparatus, and a computer program product thereof for the packet transmission system are provided. The packet transmission method comprises the following steps: transmitting a first positioning packet that has a first message serial number; receiving the first positioning packet; generating a temporary packet that has a second message serial number; determining that the first message serial number is smaller than the second message serial number; transmitting the temporary packet; receiving the temporary packet and updating the first message serial as the second message serial number; and transmitting a second positioning packet that has the second message serial number. Thereby, the system not only prevents repeat transmission, but also enhances positioning reliability by using two-way transmission. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074170 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLEVIATING BARRED ACCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment for alleviating barred access while reselecting from a first cell to a second cell in a mobile communication system is provided. A wireless module detects receives system information broadcasted in the first cell. A storage unit stores the system information. A controller reselects from the first cell to the second cell, determines whether a first barred access timer is running, and stops the first barred access timer and informs the upper layer of an RRC protocol that the access of the first service is allowed in response of that the first barred access timer is running. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074171 | PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A packet communication method of the present invention includes a step of: receiving, at a mobile station (UE), restriction information for accepting an incoming call and restricting an outgoing call; establishing, at the mobile station (UE), a control path with a packet exchange (SGSN) in response to incoming of paging for the mobile station (UE); sending, the packet exchange (SGSN), a message instructing to establish the data path via the control path; and establishing, at the mobile station (UE), the data path by calling to the packet exchange (SGSN), when the mobile station (UE) receives the message after the mobile station (UE) has received the restriction information. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074172 | METHOD FOR RECEPTION OF DATA PACKETS AND CORRESPPONDING TRANSMISSION METHOD - the method is implemented in a first station, data packets being transmitted by at least two second stations intended for the first station, said second stations belonging to a set comprising more than one second stations, the method comprising a transmission of at least one acknowledgement of each data packet received at least once correctly, said acknowledgement(s) being transmitted to each second station of said set. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074173 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR UPDATING SCRIPT IMAGES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for updating script images in wireless sensor networks. In one exemplary embodiment, a system has logic that is configured to display a list of nodes of a wireless sensor network. The logic is further configured to display a script source of a first script image stored at one of the nodes in response to a selection of the one node from the displayed list of nodes. The logic is also configured to modify the script source based on user input and to convert the modified script source to a second script image. The logic is configured to transmit at least one remote procedure call through the wireless sensor network to the one node. The one node is configured to write the second script image in memory of the one node in response to the at least one remote procedure call. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074174 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SWITCHING DATA AT NODES OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for switching data at nodes of a wireless networks. In one exemplary embodiment, a node comprises memory, a first port, a second port, a virtual machine, and logic. The memory is configured to store port settings, and the virtual machine is configured to execute a remote procedure call wirelessly transmitted to the node through the wireless network. In executing the remote procedure call, the virtual machine is configured to set the port settings. The logic is configured to receive data from the first port and to transmit the data to the second port based on the port settings without processing of the data by the virtual machine such that the data streams unchanged through the node from the first port to the second port. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074175 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESSLY COMMUNICATING MULTIDROP PACKETS VIA WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for wirelessly communicating multidrop packets via wireless networks. In one exemplary embodiment, communication devices of a multidrop system are respectively coupled to nodes of a wireless network. At least one of the nodes stores data for mapping multidrop addresses to network addresses. Upon receiving a multidrop packet, such node maps the multidrop address of the received packet to a network address identifying the packet's destination communication device within the multidrop system. The receiving node then inserts the multidrop packet into a unicast message and wirelessly transmits the unicast message through the wireless network to the remote node. The remote node depacketizes the unicast message to recover the multidrop packet and provides the multidrop packet to its destination. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074176 | MESHED NETWORKING OF ACCESS POINTS IN A UTILITY NETWORK - A meshed networking of access points in a utility network provides a more efficient and cost effective arrangement for communicating data between meters and the utility by linking the access points of multiple subnetworks for purposes of communicating with the utility. As a result, each individual subnetwork is not required to directly communicate with the utility. For those access points that are relieved of the need to directly communicate with the utility, the communication mechanism, e.g., cellular modem, can be eliminated, or deactivated, to thereby reduce capital expenditures and/or operational costs. Additionally, links to a WAN can be selectively activated or disabled to provision bandwidth, for example, on demand, to react to changing conditions in the subnetworks. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074177 | Exchange of Information in a Communication Network - A portable node capable of forming ad hoc networks with other nodes is disclosed, as well as a method of transferring at least a first and a second information entity (e.g. files) from a first node to other nodes in an ad hoc network. At least the first and the second information entities are jointly encoded, in the first node, into a composite information entity) in a manner so that the composite information entity can be decoded by use of at least the first information entity or the second information entity. The composite information entity is subsequently transmitted. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074178 | Method for Indication of Consecutive Data Units in a RAN - An object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for improving the performance of a radio access network. The object is achieved by a data packet ( | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074179 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, MOBILE TERMINAL MANAGEMENT METHOD USED FOR THEM, AND ITS PROGRAM - A mobility management system manages mobility of any one mobile terminal with a different mobility protocol depending on an access method. The system comprises an anchor node haying a function of managing a CMIP (Client Mobile Internet Protocol) SA (Security Association) and a PMIP (Proxy MIP) SA used to authenticate a location registration message of said mobile terminal. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074180 | SYNCHRONIZING A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for synchronizing a wireless communication system is disclosed. A silence duration for a base station is determined based on the time required for a neighbor base station to obtain or maintain synchronization. All transmissions from the base station are ceased for the silence duration. Multiple base stations level may cease transmissions at the same time, thus mitigating interference. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074181 | APPARATUS AND MESSAGES FOR INTERWORKING BETWEEN UNLICENSED ACCESS NETWORK AND GPRS NETWORK FOR DATA SERVICES - Methods for performing various operations via unlicensed mobile access (UMA) radio link control (URLC) messages in an unlicensed mobile access network (UMAN). The UMAN comprises a first radio access network that may be employed for accessing data services provided by a core network comprising a second radio access network. URLC messages are exchanged between mobile stations (MSs) and UMA network controllers (UNCs) to perform various operations associated with the UMAN. An MS may access the UMAN via a wireless access point (AP) that is communicatively coupled to a UNC via an IP network. The URLC messages are sent between MSs and UNCs using an Up interface comprising a set of layered protocols over an underlying IP transport. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074182 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SUSPENDING DATA - The present invention relates to telecommunication technologies, and provides a method and a device for suspending data to perform effective data suspension in an Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) system. In the method, the lower layer performs re-establishment; the upper layer sends data to the lower layer after completion of the re-establishment; and the upper layer suspends the data of the data link or instructs the lower layer to suspend the data of the data link after a data suspension is triggered. The technical solution under the present invention is widely applicable to the EUTRAN system, in which data suspension can be performed according to characters of different protocol layers, and sending of data control can be effectively. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074183 | MODE SWITCHING FOR A DOWNLINK COORDINATED MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION - A mode-switching network transmitter is for use with a network MIMO super cell and includes a super cell control unit configured to orchestrate a transmission from the network MIMO super cell, wherein the transmission is supplied from a portion of super cell transmission points. The mode-switching network transmitter also includes a transmission unit configured to provide the transmission. Additionally, a transmission mode-switching receiver is for use with user equipment in a network MIMO super cell and includes a reception unit configured to receive a transmission for the user equipment within the network MIMO super cell. The transmission mode-switching receiver also includes a processing unit configured to process the transmission, wherein the transmission is supplied from a portion of super cell transmission points. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074184 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method of communication between a mobile station and a base station in a mobile communication system of IMT-2000 communication network basis, which is suitable for effective transmission of various multimedia information within a given channel capacity, the method including the steps of (1) when a mobile station receives a data transmission request, providing one portion of a period of a data frame with regular number and arrangement of down link slots and up link slots and the other portion of the data frame with irregular number and arrangement of down link slots or/and up link slots depending on characteristics and amount of subscriber data to be transmitted, (2) determining a transmission type according to which a communication is executed using a competition period for determining priorities of the subscriber data, a reservation period for making a reservation for time slots for use in transmission of the subscriber data, and an assignment period for assigning a memory period according to an amount of the subscriber data, which periods are selectively and respectively included in the one portion of the data frame and in the other portion of the data frame, and (3) providing the data frame according to the transmission type and transmitting to the base station. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074185 | MOBILE NETWORK DEVICE MULTI-LINK OPTIMIZATIONS - Methods and apparatus for performing optimizations for a mobile network device such as a Mobile Node or Mobile Router supporting multiple links to a Home Agent (or Correspondent Node in a Mobile IPv6 environment) are disclosed. During the registration process, link characteristics are transmitted in the registration request. From the link characteristics, it is possible to determine whether the mobile network device has roamed from a high to a low bandwidth link, or vice versa. A first set of optimizations may be performed when the mobile network device has roamed from a high to a low bandwidth link, while a second set of optimizations may be performed when the mobile network device has roamed from a low to a high bandwidth link. Some optimizations may be performed during the establishment of a TCP session, while others may be performed during or upon completion of the Mobile IP registration process. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074186 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING ROUTING OF DATA IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING A MOBILE NODE CAPABLE OF ROAMING MOVEMENT - Apparatus, and an associated method, for providing routing information to a mobile node operable in a radio communication system. The routing information is used by the mobile node to address data messages that are to be communicated to a relay host, or other, device. The routing information that is provided to the mobile node includes a plurality of separate routing sequences. Different ones of the routing sequences are used by the mobile node, depending upon at what location that the mobile node is positioned when the data message is sent. A registration server is used by which to create the routing information, responsive to indications of a home network associated with the mobile node and a current location of the mobile node. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100080167 | HANDSHAKING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OFDM SYSTEMS WITH UNKNOWN SUB-CHANNEL AVAILABILITY - A method and device for determining available communication sub-channels in an OFDM communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of transmitting, on at least one first sub-channel ( | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080168 | PROBABILISTIC ROUTING FOR VEHICULAR AD HOC NETWORK - A probabilistic method of determining a second vehicle in the VANET to which a packet is to be forwarded from a first vehicle is provided. The method includes determining the second vehicle to forward the packet from the first vehicle based on pre-calculated expected latency data corresponding to the second vehicle, and forwarding the packet from the first vehicle to the determined second vehicle. The expected latency data is indicative of the latency expected for communication of the packet from the first vehicle to the destination if the packet is forwarded from the first vehicle to the second vehicle, and is calculated in advance of the step of the determining the second vehicle to forward the packet. The second vehicle to forward the packet may also be determined based on pre-calculated communication probability data corresponding to the second vehicle in addition to the pre-calculated expected latency. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080169 | HIERARCHICAL MOBILITY LABEL-BASED NETWORK - A system includes a label edge router associated with a geographical region, an area label edge router associated with an area that includes the region, and a route reflector associated with the area. The label edge router registers a first mobile node, creates a mobility binding for the first mobile node, and sends a first internal update message that includes the mobility binding. The area label edge router receives a second internal update message that carries contents of the first internal update message, updates a forwarding information base based on the second internal update message to establish a first label switched path, and sends an external update message. The route reflector receives the first internal update message, sends the second internal update message to the area label edge router, and receives the external update message from the area label edge router. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080170 | Improved MAC-D Multiplexing in UTRAN HSDPA Wireless Networks - UTRAN MAC-d multiplexing of data from multiple logical channels to a single MAC-d flow is supported while reducing overhead and achieving octet alignment in MAC-d PDU length. In one embodiment, the C/T field of a multiplexed MAC-d PDU is eliminated, and the logical channels multiplexed into the MAC-d flow are mapped to a MAC-hs PQ in at least the NodeB (and preferably in the UE as well). In other embodiments, the C/T field is retained, and an octet-aligned length indicator is transmitted from the RNC to the UE. In one embodiment, the length indicator is octet-aligned by padding the MAC-d PDUs. In another embodiment, transmitters and receivers in the path from RNC to UE are configured with an offset to add to the length indicator to achieve octet alignment. The padding or offset is (8−n) bits, where n=the number of bits in C/T field. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080171 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in mobile radio telecommunications for enabling access to Circuit Switched (CS) services for a user equipment (UE) that is connected to a LTE/SAE (Long Term Evolution/System Architecture Evolution) network. The UE's current position is stored in a LTE position format in the LTE network or in the SAE network. The invention provides steps and means for transforming the UE's position in LTE format to position information in CS format for the UE, steps and means for registering the UE in the CS network using said transformed position information, and steps and means for establishing access to CS services provided by said CS network. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080172 | PROXY MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL (PMIP) IN A MULTI-INTERFACE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - A communication entity (such as a User Equipment (UE), an Access Gateway (AGW), a Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW), a Policy Charging Rule Function (PCRF), and so forth) notifies another communication entity that the UE intends to use a single Internet Protocol (IP) address for connections to multiple AGWs. The communication entity also sends information that is related to at least one of the UE's IP flows to another communication entity. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080173 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A first storage stores a first number of streams which are capable of being demultiplexed by the wireless communication apparatus. A first acquisition unit acquires a second number of streams which are capable of being demultiplexed by a first wireless communication apparatus. A second acquisition unit acquires a third number of sum of streams of communications performed by the wireless communication apparatus and the first wireless communication apparatus. A second storage stores, if the first number of streams exceeds the third number of streams, a difference between the first and third numbers of streams as an allowable number of streams. A determination unit determines that a wireless medium is idle, in the case where a number of streams required for perform a new communication is not more than the allowable number of streams. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080174 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT SERVER, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND NETWORK SELECTION METHOD - A wireless terminal that can connect to a plurality of networks makes a request for a connection to a management server. The management server holds network information about unchanging service characteristics of a plurality of networks constituting a wireless communication area. The management server selects networks satisfying a request condition of a wireless terminal that has requested a connection based on the network information and notifies the selected networks, as candidates for connection, to the wireless terminal. The wireless terminal measures changing service characteristics of the candidates for connection notified from the management server, selects a network from the candidates for connection based on a measurement result, and connects to the selected network. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080175 | WEB BASED SMART SENSOR NETWORK TRACKING AND MONITORING SYSTEM - A wireless sensor network including a plurality of Smart Sensors coupled to a wide area network such as the Internet via a Wireless Sensor Coordinator. Each wireless sensor network comprises a plurality of Smart Sensors, each operable to measure one or more physical quantities. Each wireless sensor communicates the measured data to a Wireless Sensor Coordinator which then stores the collected data in memory. The Wireless Sensor Coordinator further includes a web server operable to post a web site on a network that is accessible by a common web browser. Upon receiving a request for sensed data via the web site, the Wireless Sensor Coordinator retrieves the appropriate measured and stored data and converts it into HTML format pages which are then posted on the web site for review by the requestor. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100085910 | ALLOCATING COMMUNICATION FREQUENCIES TO CLUSTERS OF ACCESS POINTS - A system is used in a wireless communication system made up of cells, at least one of which includes at least one sector. The system includes first access points in a first area of a sector of a cell. The first access points are prohibited from communicating over a first frequency. The system also includes second access points in a second area of the sector of the cell. The second access points are prohibited from communicating over a second frequency that is different from the first frequency. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085911 | Base Station Device and Signal Processing Method - A base station device of the present invention includes a base-station main body and multiple antenna units connected in series to the base-station main body. Each of the antenna units includes: a wireless communication unit that includes an antenna for wirelessly transmitting and receiving a signal to and from a mobile terminal; a multiplexer that multiplexes a reception signal received by another antenna unit and a reception signal received by the wireless communication unit, and outputs the multiplexed reception signals to the base-station main body; and a demultiplexer that separates a transmission signal to be transmitted by the wireless communication unit from among multiplexed transmission signals input from the base-station main body, and outputs a transmission signal to be transmitted from the other antenna unit thereto. The base-station main body includes: a demultiplexer that demultiplexes the multiplexed reception signals into reception signals received by wireless communication units of the antenna units; and a multiplexer that multiplexes transmission signals output from the network and to be transmitted from the antenna units and outputs the multiplexed transmission signals to the antenna units. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085912 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION - There is provided a method for enabling a user equipment to transmit feedback information. The method includes generating feedback data representing the feedback information, the feedback data expressed by a binary number having N bits, where N is an integer, the N bits comprising 2 levels, the feedback information represented by one of the 2 levels, wherein different types of the feedback information are assigned to different levels and transmitting the feedback data. Overheads incurred by transmission of feedback information can be reduced. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085913 | SYSTEM ACQUISITION WITH INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION IN THE PRESENCE OF FEMTOCELLS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate acquisition of a cell in the presence of interfering cells. An undesired cell in close proximity to a user equipment unit (UE) can inhibit detection of a desired cell. For instance, a femto cell near the UE can interfere with detection and acquisition of a macro cell. The UE can detect the undesired cell and reconstruct an estimate of signals transmitted by the undesired cell. The estimate can be employed to cancel interference from received signals to facilitate acquisition of a desired cell. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085914 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING IMS SESSION CONTINUITY TO A USER EQUIPMENT ACROSS A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method and system for providing IP Multi-media Subsystem (IMS) session continuity to a User Equipment (UE) across a plurality of communication networks is provided. The UE traverses from a first communication network to a second communication network. A public user identity associated with a private user identity of the UE is registered with the first communication network by using a first address. The method includes generating ( | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085915 | Overlay Network Node - A technology is disclosed for actualizing route optimization on a network base, even when privacy-sensitive information, such as a position of a mobile node, is not revealed between two different networks. In the technology, a pHA | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085916 | Systems and Methods for Hybrid Wired and Wireless Universal Access Networks - A method for operating a network having one or more nodes wherein each of the nodes having one or more resources, comprising the steps of: forming the network using one or more nodes, wherein certain one or more of the nodes is a gateway connecting to two or more different network connection types; and managing the one or more nodes of the network; wherein the nodes are segregated into one or more cells each having one or more of the nodes and one or more supernodes; wherein the nodes within the same cell are interconnected; and wherein the supernodes are interconnected. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085917 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATION STRATEGY SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate cooperation strategy selection for a network multiple-in-multiple-out (N-MIMO) communication system. As described herein, one or more nodes in a communication system capable of N-MIMO communication can calculate marginal utilities, projected per-user rates, and/or other parameters corresponding to respective associated users. Based on these calculations, respective network nodes can perform user scheduling and selection, cell scheduling and selection, selection of a cooperation strategy (e.g., coordinated silencing, joint transmission, coordinated beamforming, etc.), and/or other operations to provide cooperative communication for respective users. As further described herein, projected rate calculation for a given user can be adjusted based on processing or channel implementation loss associated with the user, interference nulling capability of the user, or other factors. As additionally described herein, these and/or other parameters can be fed back by respective users to a serving network node and/or mandated via system performance requirements. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085918 | Method and Apparatus Pertaining to Updating a High-Bandwidth Hardware-Based Packet-Processing Platform Local Session Context State Database - These various embodiments comprise or are suitable for implementation by a high-bandwidth hardware-based packet-processing platform that is configured to be installed at a traffic-aggregation point for a communications network having a plurality of attachment points at its edge. These teachings provide for receiving (via, for example, a packet-receiving interface) at least substantially all data packets as pass through the traffic-aggregation point and then extracting session context state data from at least a majority of these data packets. By one approach, this session context state data comprises, at least in part, information pertaining to a location as pertains to a calling party (such as the point of network attachment for that calling party). This session context state data is then used to update a local session context state database. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085919 | AMBLE MODULATION SERIES - A base station in a multi-hop network wirelessly transmits a preamble series to be received by a subscriber station in the network, and wirelessly transmits a reverse version of the preamble series to be received by a relay station in the network. The relay station receives the transmitted reverse version of the preamble series. The subscriber station receives the transmitted the preamble series. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085920 | Method of Subnet Roaming within a Network - Disclosed is an apparatus and method of client device roaming from a home subnet to a foreign subnet of a network. The method includes the client device accessing the network through a first access node of the home subnet, and the client device roaming to a second access node of the foreign subnet, the client device accessing the network through the second access node, the client device maintaining a fixed client IP address, default gateway IP address and IP subnet attachment as the client device roams from the first access node to the second access node. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100091700 | AD-HOC NETWORK ACQUISITION USING CHAOTIC SEQUENCE SPREAD WAVEFORM - Method and system for identifying neighbor nodes in an ad-hoc wireless network including two or more nodes. The method involves generating a beacon signal at a first node of the network for alerting other nodes in the network of the presence of the first node. A digitally generated first spreading sequence is also generated at the first node. Thereafter, the beacon signal is modulated with the first spreading sequence to produce a spread spectrum signal which is then transmitted. The spreading sequence is selected to be a chaotic sequence. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091701 | METHOD FOR COGNITIVE RADIO BASED COMMUNICATION AND METHOD FOR BROADCASTING POLICY INFORMATION FOR THE SAME - A method of broadcasting frequency policy information in a cognitive radio based communication system, apparatus therefore and a communication method using the same are disclosed. In particular, a policy broadcaster is provided as a subject performing a broadcast of frequency policy information in cognitive radio communication. A method of broadcasting frequency policy information using the same and a method of performing cognitive radio communication by obtaining frequency policy information using the same are provided. Moreover, an enhanced superframe structure, which is capable of providing a seamless service in case that a narrowband terminal is introduced in the middle of a superframe, is provided. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091702 | Cell search based on beacon in a wireless communication system - Techniques for transmitting beacon signals to assist user equipments (UEs) perform cell search and techniques for detecting for beacon signals are described. In an aspect, cells may be assigned beacon patterns defined based on orthogonal grouping of subcarriers. U subcarriers usable for beacon may be arranged into G orthogonal groups, with each group including S subcarriers. different beacon patterns may be defined based on the G groups of S subcarriers. In another aspect, the cells may transmit their beacon signals at configurable transmit power levels, which may be determined based on target beacon detection performance. In yet another aspect, a UE may perform overlapping DFTs in order to capture more received power when symbol timing at the UE is not aligned with symbol timing of cells being detected. In yet another aspect, the UE may perform beacon detection with maximal likelihood decoding. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091703 | BINDING UPDATE METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL, HOME AGENT, AND BINDING UPDATE SYSTEM - Disclosed in a technique for providing a binding update method and the like capable of resolving such a situation that a BA message keeps reciprocating between HAs. According to the technique, there is provided a binding update method, in which a mobile terminal transmits, to a home agent of the mobile terminal, a first message containing an address that is the destination to that the home agent forwards, and the home agent of the mobile terminal updates, based on the first message, a cache in which a home address of the mobile terminal is associated with an address that is the destination to that the home agent forwards, and transmits a second message as a reply to the first message to the mobile terminal, wherein when receiving the second message, the mobile terminal transmits, to the home agent of the mobile terminal, a third message notifying that the second message has been received, and after receiving the third message, the home agent of the mobile terminal updates the cache. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091704 | Mobile telecommunications and random access preamble content - The present invention provides for a mobile radio communications device of a mobile radio communications network arranged for delivering a non-synchronized random access preamble message such that the non-synchronized random access preamble message comprises a multi-bit message including Cause ID bits and selective bits comprising at least signature bits for collision avoidance, and in which the inclusion of CQI bits is determined responsive to signaling received from the network and indicative of cell characteristics or parameters. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091705 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING TCP DATA OVER ASYMMETRIC LINKS - In a method and device the TCP load offered in the uplink is manipulated such that an offered load asymmetry is achieved. Using such an arrangement it is possible to compensate for a link asymmetry when uplink and downlink connections are sharing the same uplink buffer in order to increase performance of the downlink. The method and device are capable of increasing the download performance both in the case when TCP connections are terminated in a different device than the terminal where the link layer is terminated, as well as when the TCP connections are terminated in the same device as the link-layer. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091706 | SCP-CONTROLLED OVERLAY BETWEEN GSM AND IMS - The invention relates to method of executing a service in a Media Gateway Control Function ( | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091707 | METHOD FOR ROUTE OPTIMIZATION BETWEEN MOBILE ENTITIES - A communication network ( | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091708 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - In a radio communication system including a mobile station and a base station apparatus for communicating with the mobile station according to a SC-FDMA scheme in uplink, the mobile station includes a transmitting unit configured to transmit at least one of a first signal and a second signal; and a Sounding RS transmitting unit configured to determine a transmission band for a Sounding Reference Signal (Sounding RS) based on mapping information of at least one of the first signal and the second signal. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091709 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING RADIO PROTOCOL IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND TRANSMITTER OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - An apparatus and method for performing procedures (protocols) of a PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) layer and an RLC (Radio layer in an E-UMTS (Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) which has evolved from UMTS, among radio protocols of a mobile communication system. The PDCP layer performs ciphering on data (i.e., PDCP SDU) received from an upper layer, generates an indicator discriminating ciphered data and non-ciphered data (i.e., an ROHC feedback packet directly generated by the PDCP layer), and transmits the same to a lower layer (i.e., MAC layer). A PDCP SN (Sequence Number) is defined as an algorithm for ciphering the data in the PDCP layer to perform ciphering in the PDCP layer. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091710 | METHOD OF PROVIDING IP MOBILITY USING SCTP SIGNALING IN 3GPP BASED NEXT GENERATION MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Provided is a method of providing IP mobility using SCTP (Stream Control Transmission Protocol) signaling in a 3GPP (3 | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091711 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication method is provided which includes the steps of selecting, by a wireless communication device belonging to a communication system operating on a certain communication protocol, a communication protocol among a plurality of communication protocols, exchanging, among a plurality of wireless communication devices including the wireless communication device, information including peripheral communication status of each wireless communication device by using the selected communication protocol, and changing the communication protocol to be used for exchanging the information. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091712 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS UTILIZING A SINGLE ANTENNA WITH MULTIPLE CHANNELS AND THE DEVICES THEREOF - The present invention provides wireless communication methods utilizing a single antenna with multiple channels and the devices thereof. The method includes providing a plurality of communication channels within the single antenna. The plurality of communication channels may include a probe channel and a data channel. The single antenna may selectively switch between the probe channel and the data channel based on a probe signal transmitted in the probe channel so as to facilitate data transmission. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091713 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION - In a method of transmitting a logical channel by using a downlink transport channel, a plurality of transmission configurations are limited into a limited set of the transmission configurations. Control information relating to the limited set of the transmission configurations of the downlink transport channel is transmitted and at least a part of data of the logical channel is transmitted over the downlink transport channel. Thus, an amount of the control information is reduced. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091714 | ACCESS POINT MULTI-LEVEL TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL SUPPORTING PERIODIC HIGH POWER LEVEL TRANSMISSIONS - A wireless access point selects its own transmission power for different types of the transmissions. The access point transmits to client devices at reduced power levels, however, periodic beacons and other selected non-beacon transmissions can be transmitted at a high power level to facilitate association by other client devices | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100097981 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING MULTIPLE MEDIA STREAMS IN A HYBRID WIRELESS NETWORK - A hybrid cellular and IWLAN network having an access gateway providing a user with simultaneous access to GGSN base packet data services and PDG based broadband multi-media services with one IP address. The system further comprises an authentication center retrieving the user's subscription profile information from an operator network to check the user's subscription to simultaneous GGSN and PDG services, wherein said access gateway multiplexes and de-multiplexes the service sessions without any change to said user. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097982 | DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE, IN AUTOMATIC DATA COLLECTION ENVIRONMENT - Dynamic configuration of a wireless environment, for example a wireless automatic data collection environment adjust various thresholds that trigger searching or scanning for new wireless access points (WAPs) and/or roaming. Thresholds may be increased or decreased based on various outcomes. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097983 | CONNECTION BASED LOCAL IP-MOBILITY - The invention relates to a method for packet switched data transmission in a local network, the local network comprising a mobile node and a plurality of interconnected connection anchor points each with a link at which the mobile node can attach. The method comprises the steps of detecting a movement of the mobile node from a first connection anchor point to a second connection anchor point, the mobile node communicating via a tunnelled connection between the first and second connection anchor point, maintaining the existing tunnelled connections between the second connection anchor point and the first connection anchor point, and enabling new connections between the mobile node and correspondent nodes using addresses that are topologically correct. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097984 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EFFICIENT CONNECTION SETUP PROCEDURE FOR MOBILE TERMINATED (MT) CALLS - The invention relates to telecommunication systems and in particular to a method and system for efficient connection setup procedure for mobile terminated calls. A method of connection setup for mobile terminated calls is proposed in which a page message originating from the access network contains one access sequence along with access terminal identity or unicast access terminal identifier (UATI) of the paged access terminal. When more than one access terminal uses the same access sequence for sending their access probe at the same time a collision may occur. Access network selects access sequences from a reserved pool to direct the paged access terminal for performing access attempt to avoid collisions during access attempts. With this resource pooling, there is no need to send bind request and hence connection setup time reduces. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097985 | Method for Randomly Accessing a Wireless Network - In a wireless network including a base station (BS) and a set of mobile stations (MS), a MS transmits a ranging request message to the BS, using random access, when the MS enters the cell. The ranging request message includes request MS specific information for identifying the MS. The MS receives a ranging response message broadcast from the BS, which includes response MS specific information, request and response specific information to determine whether the BS received the request, or whether a collision occurred. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097986 | Loop-Detection in Moving Networks - A method of generating network identifiers for use by mobile routers of a moving network is provided which enables fast and efficient routing loop avoidance and detection. The method comprises receiving at a mobile router of a sub-network chain, a beacon from a preceding mobile router in the chain, the beacon containing a network identifier of the preceding mobile router, generating a new network identifier by applying a pre-defined function to the received network identifier, and including the new network identifier in beacons broadcast by the receiving mobile router. When preparing for a handover, a mobile router compares the network identifier contained in a received beacon with values generated by applying said function against its own network identifier. This allows the mobile router to identify beacons originating from mobile routers that are downstream in the same chain. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097987 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING DATA RETRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for controlling data retransmission at a transmitting side in a wireless communication system is provided. In the method, the transmitting side transmits a new transmission packet to a receiving side. The transmitting side then transmits reason indication information, indicating a reason why the transmitting side has initiated the transmission of the new transmission packet, to the receiving side. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097988 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK WITH LINEAR STRUCTURE BEING CAPABLE OF BIDIRECTIONAL COMMUNICATION AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a wireless sensor network with a linear structure capable of bidirectional communication. The wireless sensor network includes a plurality of nodes linearly connected from a sink node to a terminal node by connecting each node to a single upper-level node and a single lower-level node, each node has an active period for transmitting/receiving data to/from its upper-level node and lower-level node, the active period includes a downstream duration for transmitting data/commands from the sink node to the terminal node and an upstream duration for transmitting data/commands from the terminal node to the sink node, and each of the upstream and downstream durations sequentially includes RX, TX, and ACK intervals, so that bidirectional communication between the sink node and the terminal node can be performed within a single active period. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097989 | Communication system and communication method for assisting user retrieving geography-associated multimedia information - The invention discloses a communication system for assisting a user for retrieving geography-associated multimedia information, and the communication system comprises a data processing device and several mobile communication devices. The data processing device receives a first request information including a location term and a time term from a terminal device of the user, and broadcasting a second request information, based on the time term, to the mobile communication devices located within a region relative to the location term. The data processing device receives responding messages and captured audio and/or video data from the mobile communication devices accepting the second request information, and transmitting a location-related information to the terminal device based on the responding messages. The user transmits responding information responsive to the location-related information to the data processing device via the terminal device. The data processing device transmits the captured audio and/or video data (representative of the retrieved geography-associated multimedia information) relative to the responding information to the terminal device. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097990 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN SERVICES OVER A PACKET SWITCHED NETWORK - A method and Packet Mobile Switching Center (PMSC) for providing MSC-based services over a packet-switched network. An interface between a mobile station and the PMSC is used to transfer control plane and user plane information between the mobile station and the PMSC over the packet-switched network. In one embodiment, the PMSC includes a network controller for handling control plane information from a packet-switched core network and an interworking unit for handling user plane information from the packet-switched core network. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097991 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND DESTINATION PARTNER COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A technology is disclosed for performing route optimization on only a one-way direct route when communication is performed between a mobile node and a correspondent node on a direct route without passing through a home agent of the mobile node. In the technology, (1) the MN transmits a HoTi message to the CN via the HA, (2) the CN transmits a HoT message to the MN via the HA in response to the HoTi message, (3) the MN transmits a CoTiα message directly to the CN, (4) the CN authenticates the CoTiα message and transmits a CoTiα message to the MN via the HA, (5) the MN transmits a BUα message directly to the CN, and (6) the CN authenticates the BUα message and transmits a BAα message to the MN via the HA. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097992 | NETWORK CONTROLLED OVERHEAD REDUCTION OF DATA PACKETS BY ROUTE OPTIMIZATION PROCEDURE - The invention relates to a method for reducing the header size of data packets exchanged between a Mobile Node (MN) and a gateway that is located between the MN and a Corresponding Node (CN). Different sort of headers are utilized between the MN and the gateway, and between the gateway and the CN. The sort of header, obtained by an optimizing procedure, allows to reduce the header size of exchanged packets on said data path section. To achieve this, a modified route optimization (RO) process is performed between the MN and the gateway, wherein the gateway acts on behalf of the CN. After completing the first RO process, the MN initiates and performs a second RO process with the gateway acting as CN. After completing both route optimization processes, data packet transmission is performed between the CN and the gateway after switching from IPsec tunnel mode to IPsec transport mode. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097993 | System for Effective Position Management Signaling Associated with Mobile Node Moving in Mobile Network, Router, Mobile Node, and Mobile Router - The present invention provides a system and method for achieving fast and efficient location management signaling between a mobile node, which is nested in a mobile network for possibly long periods of time, and a plurality of correspondent nodes and home agents associated with the said mobile node. More particularly, the present invention relates to attaining fast and efficient location management signaling by means of secure delegation of signaling rights to some trusted signaling proxy server in the fixed domain, which does the location management signaling for the mobile node as a signaling proxy for the mobile node. This signaling proxy server discovered is such that it is in the natural path of the care-of test packets and also be able to send the care-of test init packets using MN's care-of address overcoming ingress filtering. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097994 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE IP - Network system for communicating between a mobile node and a correspondent node via a first IP edge-IP network-second IP edge connectivity, comprising a user IP addressing space and a network IP addressing space, wherein a locator identifier space is inserted between the user IP and network IP addressing space, wherein the first and second IP edges are associated with first and second locator identifiers, and wherein the system is further arranged for associating a mobile node with one or more IP network addresses and an IP user address decoupled from the one or more IP network addresses via the first locator identifier. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097995 | PACKET ROUTING METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access controller is coupled to an access point and receives data packets from connected user equipment. The access controller is configured to perform packet inspection techniques on the received packets to determine if they should be locally switched. In some embodiments, packets destined for a local intranet services may be locally switched to avoid congesting a core network link. In further embodiments, a local connection to the Internet may be used so that locally switched packets can also be directed to the Internet without the use of a core network link. In still further embodiment, in addition to packet inspection techniques, the access controller maintains a state table for the states of connected user equipment. The access controller may use the information in this table to further decide whether to perform local switching techniques. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097996 | BASE STATION ALMANAC ASSISTED POSITIONING - A database provides base station almanac information pertaining to more than one network mode of communication. A wireless device accesses this database through a centralized server or network, or via the base station, base station controller or the like, with which it is currently communicating. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097997 | MIMO TRANSMITTER AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING OFDM SYMBOLS WITH CYCLIC-DELAY DIVERSITY - A multiple-input multiple output (MIMO) transmitter and methods for transmitting orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) symbols with cyclic-delay diversity (CDD) are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a base station uses a number of antennas for MIMO transmission of OFDM symbols. For the number of antennas, quadrature-amplitude modulated (QAM) symbols are distributed across a group of OFDM tones of a block comprising the group of tones and a group of OFDM symbols. An incremented cyclic delay is applied to the QAM symbols of the block associated with each subsequent of the antennas for CDD transmission. Each blocks is transmitted by an associated one of the antennas. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097998 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In order to reduce interference between cells through hopping and use frequencies in a good propagation situation, a scheduler section | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100097999 | Method and apparatus to enable multiple receivers - Briefly, a wireless communication device that includes a processor to enable a determined number of receivers of a MIMO system according to a value provided with a request to enable the receivers is provided. A method for enabling the receivers of MIMO system is also provided. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098000 | Hybrid fiber twisted pair local loop network service architecture - A new architecture capable of utilizing the existing twisted pair interface between customer premises equipment and an associated serving local switching office is used to provide a vast array of new services to customers. Using an intelligent services director (ISD) at the customer services equipment as an interface for the equipment to an existing twisted cable pair and a facilities management platform (FMP) at the serving local switching office as an interface to various networks and service opportunities, new services such as simultaneous, multiple calls (voice analog or digital), facsimile, Internet traffic and other data can be transmitted and received over the twisted cable pair by using digital subscriber loop transmission schemes. The new services include but are not limited to videophone, utility meter reading and monitoring, broadcasting and multicasting. The architecture provides for fault-tolerant, transparent interaction of components and services and supports a variety of standards for each level of the open systems interconnection layers and layers of TCP/IP. The FMP connects electronically or optically to the public switched telephone network, Internet backbone, a private Intranet as well as other possible network connections. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100103868 | METHOD FOR MODELING WIRELESS NETWORK COVERAGE UNDER LINE-OF-SIGHT CONDITIONS - A line-of-sight (LOS) wireless communications network uses an initial coverage map to indicate expected performance of at least a portion of the network. Man-made structures, terrain and vegetative barriers may degrade system performance. The initial coverage map is updated using techniques, such as the automatic searching of construction database information, satellite imaging, actual system performance measurements, and failed installation attempts to generate a revised coverage map. The measurement techniques may be used alone or in combination to generate the revised coverage map. Other information regarding additions to the LOS wireless network or the introduction of other wireless networks within the area may be used to generate the revised coverage map. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103869 | TRANSFERRING DATA IN A MOBILE TELEPHONY NETWORK - A mobile telephony network comprises base stations operating according to a predetermined standard. A transfer node allows the transfer of data from a first base station to a second base station in the mobile telephone network. Data is sent from the first base station to a data receiver of the data transfer node via a first wireless communications channel complying with the said standard. The received data is transferred via an interface within the transfer node to a data sender of the data transfer node. The data sender sends the transferred data to the second base station via a second wireless communications channel complying with the said standard. The interface within the transfer node does not comply with the operating standard because it transfers data only within the node. Data may be sent from the second base station to the first base station via the node in similar manner. Preferably, the receiver appears to the first base station to be a relay and the sender appears to the second base station to be a user terminal. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103870 | CONTEXT-AWARE PACKET SWITCHING - Embodiments of a communication system, a method, and a device for use with the communication system are described. Communication between the devices in the communication system may be enabled by the method. In particular, nodes or devices (henceforth referred to as devices) in a network (such as an ad-hoc network) in the communication system may exchange a dynamic network context via communication with neighboring devices. These devices may use the dynamic network context to determine how network resources are shared during the communication, including performing context-aware packet switching of packets (including data packets) in an information flow. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103871 | Methods and systems for providing user information in telecommunications networks - Example embodiments and methods are directed to providing and otherwise handling user information within telecommunications networks, including wireless telecommunications networks. Example embodiments may include wireless networks having a Correlation Data Records Store (CDRS) that may store and update all user data needed by applications and services operating in example networks. Example methods may provide for collection and handling in the CDRS of all user information relied upon by applications and services operating in wireless networks, so as to reduce resource consumption by such applications and services. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103872 | Method and system of managing QOS-guarenteed multimode fast mobility in wireless networks - Disclosed herein is a method and system for managing QoS-guaranteed multimode fast mobility in wireless networks. The method includes the steps of (a) in response to a request for call establishment, registering a user ID, the unique IP address of a user, a currently used temporary IP address and the current location of the mobile host; (b) completing the call establishment; (c) establishing a tunnel between the OMS and the mobile host; (d) in response to the provision of a new temporary IP address and the wireless network information of a newly activated wireless communication interface, establishing a new tunnel using the unique IP address of the OMS and the new temporary IP address of the mobile host, and then transmitting data packets in parallel; and (e) in response to a request for the removal of a tunnel, removing the corresponding tunnel. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103873 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING CONNECTION OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL TO A RADIO COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for enabling connection of a mobile communication terminal ( | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103874 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT, NODE AND ARTICLE FOR OPTIMIZED PS DOMAIN IN GAN - A method and arrangement for optimizing a packet-switched (PS) domain of a Generic Access Network (GAN) that communicates with a Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) in the PS domain. The SGSN detects that a GAN access is being attempted by a mobile station. In response, communications between the mobile station and the SGSN are conducted using a light-weight version of a communication protocol in which functionality that is unnecessary in the GAN mode of operation is decreased. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103875 | Establishing Parallel Tunnels for Higher Bit Rate - An object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for an improved network capacity when using fixed wireless terminal. The object is achieved by a method in a radio access network node for establishing at least two packet data tunnels for packet transmission, from a fixed wireless terminal in a local area network through a set of cells in a radio access network. The set of cells comprises at least two cells. The fixed wireless terminal is a radio access network node comprised in the radio access network. The radio access network comprises a plurality of potential cells to which the packet data tunnels may be established, whereof said set of cells are part of the potential cells. The method comprising the steps of: Selecting the set of cells to use for a packet transmission, based on radio link quality between the fixed wireless terminal and each of the respective potential cells and establishing the at least two packet data tunnels, one individual packet data tunnel from the fixed wireless terminal through each of the respective cells in the selected set of cells. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103876 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A technology is disclosed for actualizing flow filtering associated with a packet destined for a mobile terminal while minimizing processes performed by the mobile terminal in a network environment in which a network-based mobility protocol is operating. In the technology, a mobile node | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103877 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS PROVIDING MOBILE TRANSMIT DIVERSITY - A method for use by a remote unit in an Evolution Data Optimized (EVDO) network includes sending transmissions to a base station, each of the transmissions corresponding to a respective one of multiple hypotheses of multiple antenna usage. The method also includes receiving feedback from the base station in response to the transmissions, the feedback being uninformed of multiple antenna usage and using the feedback to select at least one of the hypotheses. The method further includes transmitting data using a multiple-antenna scheme associated with the selected hypotheses. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103878 | WIRELESS SENSOR-NETWORK SYSTEM, SENSING TERMINAL NODE, AND BASE STATION - To correct a sensor data acquisition time with a simple hardware configuration, provided is a wireless sensor-network system including: a base station; and a plurality of sensing terminal nodes, the base station transmitting a beacon at predetermined intervals to the plurality of sensing terminal nodes, the plurality of sensing terminal nodes measuring data and transmitting, based on a reception of the beacon transmitted from the base station, the sensor data thus obtained to the base station, in which the plurality of sensing terminal nodes obtain, based on an internal clock, a time at which the beacon is received and transmit the time to the base station, and the base station corrects, based on the reception time transmitted from each of the plurality of sensing terminal nodes, the sensor data acquisition time. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103879 | Systems and Methods for Providing Wireless Communications for Data and Voice Communications - A wireless communications system that provides communication for a plurality of communication devices. The wireless communications system includes an interface including a local exchange carrier (LEC) connection port, a subscriber connection port and a wireless connection port. The wireless communications system includes a wireless terminal connected to the interface that provides wireless data and voice connectivity over a wireless network. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103880 | DATA TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE - The embodiments relate to the wireless communication field, and a data transmission control method and a data transmission device are provided. The method includes: receiving from a sender and buffering data in a buffer, and then forwarding the buffered data to a receiver; receiving an acknowledgement (ACK) returned by the receiver, where the ACK indicates that the data is received; adding or reducing the ACK returned by the receiver according to a volume of data unsent in the buffer; and sending the processed ACK to the sender. The data sending rate of the sender is controlled by the processed ACK. This makes the data transmission be reliable and highly efficient. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103881 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL CHANNEL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system using both a discontinuous transmission scheme and a compressed mode transmission scheme, if a preamble and/or a postamble of a channel including control information for transmitting a specific channel overlaps a compressed mode (CM) gap, an overall transmission unit is not transmitted or remaining signals of the transmission unit excluding the preamble and/or the postamble overlapping the CM gap are transmitted. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100103882 | EARLY TERMINATION OF LOW DATA RATE TRAFFIC IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and techniques are disclosed relating to wireless communications, and more specifically, to various systems and techniques for early termination of low rate traffic in a wireless network. A physical layer packet (PLP) grouping factor K configures the PLP into K groups and an ACK/NACK is received on each group. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100110975 | MAPPING AN ORIGINAL MAC ADDRESS OF A TERMINAL TO A UNIQUE LOCALLY ADMINISTRATED VIRTUAL MAC ADDRESS - In a network terminals communicate wirelessly through gateway devices with an access node. In the access node an original media access control (MAC) address of a terminal is mapped to a unique, locally administered virtual MAC address for the terminal. This virtual MAC address has a particular portion indicating a unit-specific use including fields that indicate a port index for the gateway device through which the respective terminal communicates with the access node, and an MAC index for the original media access control address of the terminal. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110976 | A METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A SECTORPARAMETERS MESSAGE IN AN ACTIVE STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving a SectorParameters message in an Active state is provided. The method comprises transmitting a SectorParameters message over a Forward Traffic Channel Medium Access Control(MAC) in superframe number wherein the superframe number is divisible by N | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110977 | MANAGEMENT UNIT NETWORK FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A management unit network manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a plurality of local management units, each of the plurality of local management units engaging in bidirectional data communication with at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to the at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices. A first regional management unit processes the inbound data to produce the outbound data and for sending the outbound data to the at least one of the plurality of local management units and on to the multiservice communication devices. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110978 | IMS Device Reconfiguration - A method and arrangement in a telecommunication system for facilitating communications between a first terminal A configured to use a first session model and a second terminal B configured to use a second session model for media transportation. The first terminal A initiates a service capability check and in response, receives capability features of the second terminal B. Upon determining that the second terminal B uses the second session model, the first terminal A is reconfigured to use the second session model. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110979 | System And Method For Incorporating A Low Power Mode In Wireless Communication - According to one embodiment, a method for wireless communication comprises providing, at a base station, a plurality of endpoints with access to a wireless network. The method also comprises the base station entering a low power mode, wherein the base station ceases to provide the plurality of endpoints with access to the wireless network while in the low power mode. In addition, the method comprises the base station transitioning to an active mode from the low power mode during a first predetermined time, wherein the first predetermined time is identified by the base station and at least one endpoint before the base station transitions to the active mode. Further, if the base station receives a request to access the wireless network from at least one endpoint after transitioning to the active mode during a second predetermined time, the method comprises the base station remaining in the active mode. If the base station does not receive a request to access the wireless network from at least one endpoint after transitioning to the active mode during the second predetermined time, the method comprises the base station transitioning to the low power mode. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110980 | Technique for controlling establishment of a tandem-free transcoder operation - The invention relates to a technique for controlling establishment of a tandem free operation (TFO) for transfer of TFO frames including content frames between a first and a second transcoder unit without transcoding of the content frames. A method aspect of the technique comprises the steps of transmitting, in case a remotely used codec does not meet a codec compatibility condition, a first transparent mode message indicating to in-path equipment a transparent mode for subsequent transparent TFO negotiation, and transmitting, in the transparent mode, a TFO configuration frame indicating a local TFO codec list. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110981 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR STATION-TO-STATION DIRECTIONAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Method and system for directional wireless communication, is provided. One implementation involves directionally transmitting a request for access to a shared wireless communication medium, for directional communication between two wireless stations, and receiving a broadcast response indicating a time period during which the wireless stations may perform directional communication therebetween via the wireless communication medium by setting their antenna directions to each other. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110982 | Method for transmitting channel quality information based on differential scheme - A method for transmitting channel quality information based on a differential scheme is disclosed. When channel quality information of a predetermined number of sub-bands selected by a receiver in a frequency selective channel is transmitted, total average channel information is transmitted. Channel information of the selected sub-bands is transmitted as sub-band differential information associated with average channel information. In this case, the sub-band differential information may be denoted by a specific value contained positive (+) values. If at least two channel quality information is transmitted by a MIMO system, channel quality information of one channel is transmitted, then channel quality information of the other channel is transmitted as spatial differential information. In this case, the spatial differential information is denoted by a specific value contained in a differential-value range asymmetrical on the basis of “ | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110983 | Downlink network synchronization mechanism for femtocell in cellular OFDM systems - A method of downlink synchronization for a femto base station in a cellular orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) system is provided. The femto base station first scans one or more received reference signals transmitted from a plurality of neighboring macro base stations. The femto base station then determines a desired reference signal from the received one or more reference signals based on the scanning result. Finally, the femto base station configures its downlink radio signal transmission time based on the desired reference signal such that the femto base station is synchronized with the plurality of neighboring macro base stations. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110984 | RETRANSMISSION REQUEST TRANSMISSION METHOD, TRANSMITTING- SIDE APPARATUS AND RECEIVING-SIDE APPARATUS - In a retransmission request transmission method, a receiving-side apparatus notifies identification information of an RLC-data-PDU and a retransmission start position and a retransmission end position in the RLC-data-PDU, through a STATUS-PDU; and a transmitting-side apparatus retransmits a portion from the retransmission start position to the last portion in the RLC-data-PDU, when a predetermined value is notified as the retransmission end position by the STATUS-PDU (NACK). | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110985 | WINDOW CONTROL AND RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND TRANSMITTING-SIDE APPARATUS - In a retransmission control method, a transmitting-side apparatus manages an acknowledgement information reception window; and the transmitting-side apparatus does not perform the window control processing and the retransmission control processing of a packet on the basis of the acknowledgement information for a sequence number of the packet which is included in the acknowledgement information received from the receiving-side apparatus, when the sequence number takes a value outside a range of the acknowledgement information reception window. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110986 | BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station device performs communication with terminal devices, and includes a load information acquisition section which acquires load information which shows a load on the base station device, a reporting method selection section which selects a reporting method for the terminal devices to report reception state information to the base station device based on load information acquired by the load information acquisition section, and a reporting section which reports the reporting method selected by the reporting method selection section to the terminal devices. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110987 | SELECTION OF WIRELESS NETWORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH SELECTION OF A WIRELESS CELL SET - An access terminal may switch to a different mode of wireless network selection as a result of manual selection of a wireless cell set (e.g., a closed subscriber group) associated with one or more wireless cells. For example, if the user of an access terminal selects a closed subscriber group in a wireless network that is different than the current wireless network, the access terminal may enter a manual mode of wireless network selection, select the wireless network corresponding to the closed subscriber group, and register on a closed subscriber group cell in the selected wireless network. In addition, an access terminal may automatically switch to a different mode of wireless network selection (e.g., the prior mode) upon losing coverage of a wireless cell set. An access terminal may also automatically select a cell of a wireless cell set if the access terminal returns to a cell of the cell set within a defined period of time after losing coverage of the cell set. Furthermore, an access terminal may return to a prior wireless network upon losing coverage of a wireless cell set. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110988 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING MULTIPLE CARRIERS IN HIGH SPEED PACKET ACCESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and an apparatus for utilizing multiple carriers are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) capable of receiving on a single downlink carrier at a time may tune the receiver to one downlink carrier and switch the downlink carrier in accordance with a configured pattern. The WTRU may switch the carrier from an anchor carrier to a non-anchor carrier at a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) sub-frame boundary, and switches back at an end of a subsequent high speed physical downlink shared channel (HS-PDSCH) subframe. The WTRU may switch the carrier at an HS-PDSCH sub-frame boundary. A WTRU capable of receiving on multiple downlink carriers simultaneously may tune the receiver to an anchor carrier and a supplementary carrier, and switch the supplementary carrier to another carrier based on a carrier switching order. The carrier switching order may be received via an HS-SCCH or via layer 2 signaling. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110989 | Transport Protocol Performance Using Network Bit Rate Information - A method for communicating in a telecommunications system is provided. The method comprises conveying a downlink bit rate and an uplink bit rate associated with an access point name to a user agent. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110990 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FORWARDING DATA TRANSPORT FRAMES - In a data communication system according to the invention the functionality of the gateway device is distributed in a data communication network thereby reducing the need to direct the data traffic from and to terminals ( | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110991 | USER EQUIPMENT FOR PHYSICAL LAYER AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST - A user equipment for physical layer automatic repeat request is disclosed. The user equipment comprises a higher layer automatic repeat request (ARQ) mechanism, a physical layer transmitter, a physical layer receiver, an acknowledgment (ACK) transmitter and an adaptive modulation and control unit (AMC). A higher layer ARQ mechanism generates data for transmission. A physical layer transmitter receives the data for transmission from the higher layer ARQ mechanism, to format the received data into packets for transmission. A physical layer receiver receives and demodulates received packets and retransmission statistics. An ACK transmitter transmits a corresponding acknowledgment for a given packet at the physical layer receiver. An AMC unit adjusts a particular encoding/data modulation of each packet using collected retransmission statistics. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110992 | CALL PROCESSING METHOD AND INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE CONTROL DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING ONE NUMBER MULTIPLE TERMINALS SERVICE - A call processing method for implementing “one number multiple terminals” service is disclosed. A service control point (SCP) in a first network exercises control to route a call that is triggered to a “one number multiple terminals” user in a local network to a second network; and an SCP in a second network controls the call connection to multiple called terminals. An intelligent network service control device is also provided. The call control function that the SCP in the first network generally has is used to route the call out of the network, which does not conflict with the existing service features. In addition, the core component of the first network only needs to undergo a simple routing configuration according to the related control instruction, which does not affect other calls and requires only few network changes. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100110993 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-NETWORK COVERAGE - A system and method are provided for a multi-network wireless communications access terminal (AT) to access multi-network coverage. The method registers a multi-network AT in a first communications network. In response to registering with the first network, the AT receives information via the first network that is required for accessing a second communications network (e.g., an IEEE 802.20 or 1xEV-DO network). The AT obtains services accessed via the second network, in response to the access information received via the first network. For example, the second network access information may be system information, channel information, or access point parameters. The AT retains the option of obtaining services accessed via the first network if the second network cannot be accessing the second network. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100118770 | System and method for transferring data using variance based messaging - A system and method for providing data transfer from a source node to a destination node in a network using variance based messaging is provided. The method comprises the steps of receiving one or more messages by the source node; selecting a plurality of messages to be grouped from the one or more messages, wherein the plurality of messages comprise data with minimum deviation in content; creating an integrated message from the plurality of messages; sending the integrated message from the source node to the destination node; and recreating each message of the plurality of messages at the destination node. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118771 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING PROTOCOL MESSAGE FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of transmitting a media independent handover (MIH) protocol message in a wireless access system. A method for a mobile node to transmit an MIH message in a wireless access system includes receiving a primitive including prescribed information from a first entity, generating the MIH message by mapping a transport address to the primitive, and transmitting the MIH message to one or more network nodes. According to the present invention, transmission defects of the message are effectively reduced by accurately mapping an MIHF ID and a transport address. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118772 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR EXTENSIBLE EXTENDED INFORMATION ELEMENT MAPPING - Methods and apparatus for expressing two or more extended information elements (IEs) of a MAP message using a single Extended or Extended-2 Downlink Interval Usage Code (DIUC) or Uplink Interval Usage Code (UIUC) in an orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) or orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) frame are provided. This enhancement, called extensible Extended IE mapping, allows the WiMAX network to include more IEs into the DL-MAP and UL-MAP messages as the IEEE 802.16 family of standards evolves. Without this enhancement, all of the new IEs may most likely have to be included in the data bursts, and a user terminal (e.g., a mobile station) cannot decode these data-burst IEs unless the user terminal receives the Downlink Channel Descriptor (DCD) message(s). | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118773 | USER DEVICE, BASE STATION, AND METHOD - A disclosed user device generates an uplink control channel including at least one of acknowledgement information and a channel quality indicator regarding downlink and transmits the uplink control channel via a dedicated frequency band when no resource is allocated for transmission of an uplink data channel. The uplink control channel includes multiple unit blocks constituting a subframe and each of the unit blocks includes a sequence generated by multiplying all chips of an orthogonal code sequence assigned to the user device by the same factor. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118774 | METHOD FOR CHANGING RADIO CHANNELS, COMPOSED NETWORK AND ACCESS ROUTER - A method and apparatus for changing radio channels includes transmission of first data between a first user device and a second device via a first network element and via a first radio channel. A transmitting channel between the first network element and a second network element is used to transmit second data between the first user device and the second device. Transmission of third data between the first user device and the second device occurs via the second network element and the second radio channel. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118775 | Wireless mesh network system and control method thereof, and wireless device - A wireless mesh network system includes a plurality of wireless devices adapted to forward a message packet. Each of the wireless devices includes a transmitting unit, receiving unit, a communications controller, and a RAM. Further, the communications controller controls such that an original source address contained in a message packet forwarded by a wireless device, which is an address of the wireless device that has firstly transmitted the message packet, and a packet number that identifies the message packet are stored in the RAM, and controls such that a message packet received is forwarded if information contained in the message packet received is not consistent with information of the original source address and the packet number stored in the RAM. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118776 | Wireless mesh network system and control method thereof, and wireless device - A wireless mesh network system having a plurality of wireless devices is adapted to forward a message packet. Each of the wireless devices includes a transmitting unit, a receiving unit, a communications controller, and a RAM. Further, if a message packet received is an acknowledgement signal, the communications controller controls such that an original source address, a destination address, and a packet number contained in the acknowledgement signal are stored in the RAM, and, in case the message packet received is a data signal, if information contained in the message packet received is consistent with the original source address, the destination address, and the packet number contained in the acknowledgement signal stored in the RAM, the communications controller controls such that the acknowledgement signal is forwarded to a original source wireless device. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118777 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATTION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - When a mobile station | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118778 | Improvements in Mobile Technology - Apparatus for enabling interworking of CS (Circuit Switched) video calls with video calls using IP multimedia protocols, comprising: a MGW ( | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118779 | RETRANSMISSION REQUEST TRANSMITTING METHOD AND RECEIVING-SIDE APPARATUS - In a retransmission request transmitting method, an RLC sublayer of a receiving-side apparatus determines whether or not an RLC-PDU-data (or an RLC-data-Sub-PDU) not received yet is under retransmission control processing in a MAC sublayer; and generates and transmits a STATUS-PDU (NACK) including only a RLC-data-PDU which has neither been received yet nor is under the retransmission control processing in the MAC sublayer, on the basis of the determination result, at a timing when the STATUS-PDU is generated. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118780 | PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RECEIVING-SIDE APPARATUS - A packet communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: starting, at a predetermined sublayer of a receiving-side apparatus, a reordering timer, when receiving a second packet before receiving a first packet in a case where a sequence number of the first packet is smaller than a sequence number of the second packet; and transmitting, at the predetermined sublayer of the receiving-side apparatus, a retransmission request for the first packet, when not receiving the first packet until the reordering timer expires. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118781 | Transmission Scheme of Protocol Data Units During a Procedure That Comprises the Reset of the Protocol Layer - The invention relates to a method for transmitting data via a protocol sublayer of the mobile node during e.g. a handover that comprises the re-establishment of the protocol sublayer. The mobile node anticipates the handover, and has therefore more time to empty its transmission buffer of the protocol sublayer. Also, the segmentation of service data units (SDUs) into protocol data units (PDUs) is halted upon detecting the upcoming handover. The remaining unacknowledged PDUs in the buffer are then re-transmitted to the source base station such that the source base station can reassemble the corresponding SDUs. Also, the UE may prioritize the re-transmission of the unacknowledged PDUs depending on the priorities of the respective radio bearers. Therefore, after performing the handover to the target base station, the previously transmitted PDUs do not have to be transmitted again, as would be the case when no retransmission of unacknowledged PDUs takes place. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118782 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A MIMO CONTEXT - The present invention relates to a method for communicating from a primary station with an array of transmit antennas to a secondary station on a downlink channel, said method comprising steps of, at the primary station, (a) configuring the downlink channel, step (a) being subdivided into steps of: (a2) computing a precoding to be applied during a corresponding transmission from the primary station to the secondary station for each of an array of transmit antennas; (a3) applying a reversible transform N to the precoding, thus ascertaining a set of precoding coefficients substantially representative of the precoding in a transform domain; (a4) computing a set of parameters comprising at least one parameter, said parameter being substantially representative of the coefficients obtained at step (a3); (a5) signaling the set of parameters to the secondary station; (b) transmitting data to the secondary station substantially according to the precoding computed at step (a2). | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118783 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING PRECODING INFORMATION IN A MULTI-USER MIMO SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for communicating in a network having a primary station and a plurality of secondary stations, said method comprising a step of, at the primary station, (a) configuring at least one downlink channel from the base station to a first secondary station, step (a) comprising (a1) signalling a first set of at least one parameter indicative of precoding applied to a first transmission from the base station to the first secondary station; (a2) signalling a second set of at least one parameter indicative of precoding applied to a second transmission from the base station to at least one second secondary station, wherein said step (a2) is carried out so that the second set of parameters contains less information than the first set of parameters. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118784 | Recommending a Transmission Mode for a MIMO-Supporting UE - The present invention relates to methods, a network controller unit ( | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118785 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device includes: a reception portion that receives a transmission request signal addressed to the wireless communication device that is transmitted from a counterpart communication device; a determination portion that, when the reception portion receives the transmission request signal, determines whether data transmission from the counterpart communication device is possible, based on an availability of a wireless transmission path; a suspension control portion that, when it is determined that the data transmission from the counterpart communication device is not possible, performs transmission control of a suspension request signal that requests suspension of the data transmission; and a response control portion that, when the determination portion determines that the data transmission from the counterpart communication device is possible after the transmission control of the suspension request signal, performs transmission control of a response signal in response to the transmission request signal addressed to the wireless communication device. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118786 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COLLABORATIVE SENSING BASED ON AN ALLOWED ERROR RANGE OF A SENSOR IN A WIRELESS SENSOR NODE - A method and an apparatus for transmitting sensor data by using AER sensing and collaborative sensing in order to increase the energy efficiency in a wireless sensor network. The method includes calculating an AER for each of said at least one sensor using sensor data measured from said at least one sensor and sensor profile information corresponding to said at least one sensor, and determining sensor data to be transmitted to a higher node from among sensor data provided by the sensor module based on the AER. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118787 | RADIO BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - An error detection coding processing section of the radio base station performs an error detection coding process with data including both first control data to be used for receiving a downlink signal and second control data to be used for sending an uplink signal as a unit. A sending section sends data on which the error detection coding process has been performed by the error detection coding processing section to the mobile station. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118788 | METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION UNIT - In the event of detecting first information used for first random access and second information used for second random access, the second information being received from the base station unit, a wireless terminal selects one between the first information and the second information. Thereby, either one of the random accesses can be selectively performed, efficiently using resources such as signatures used for random access. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118789 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND INDIVIDUAL CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION METHOD - A communication system that transmits individual control information to a plurality of respective user terminals using a shared control channel, wherein when transmitting individual control information and prescribed control information to the user terminals, a base station device divides user terminals into groups according to the contents of the prescribed control information for the respective user terminals, arranges the individual control information for each user terminal in a specified group order, creates number-in-group information wherein the number of user terminals belonging to each group is arranged in the group order, and transmits the number-in-group information together with the individual control information for each user terminal in the group order. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118790 | METHOD OF BEARER DELETION, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - A method of bearer deletion is provided to improve the universality of the bearer deletion process. The method includes: receiving, by the original intermediate NE, the cancellation type indication parameter sent by the HSS, and deleting the bearer between the serving gateway (S-GW) and a packet data network gateway (P-GW), if the original intermediate network element obtains an attach type according to the cancellation type indication parameter indicating an attach type and a corresponding bearer exists on the original intermediate NE. This method helps efficiently improve the universality of the bearer deletion flow. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118791 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND HANDOVER COMMUNICATION METHOD - When a downlink transmission is performed in the handover state in a mobile communication system having a mobile station, base stations and a base station controller, user data from the base station controller is transmitted from a first base station to the mobile station and error correction code for the user data from the base station controller is transmitted from a second base station to the mobile station. The mobile station subjects the received user data to error correction processing using the received error correction code and decodes the user data. Also, at the time of an uplink transmission in the handover state, user data and error correction code are transmitted from the mobile station to the base station controller via separate transmission paths. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118792 | DUAL MAC ARBITRATION - A network appliance includes a first media access controller with a first transmit queue storing one or more data packets to be transmitted to a first wireless device. A second media access controller includes a second transmit queue storing one or more data packets to be transmitted to a second wireless device. A baseband processor communicates with the first and the second media access controllers. An arbitration module arbitrates access of the first and second media access controllers to the baseband processor based on whether the first and second transmit queues have data packets to be transmitted to the first and second wireless devices, respectively. When both have data packets to be transmitted, the arbitration module instructs the first or second media access controller to flush any data packets stored in the first or second transmit queue so that transmission of a flushed data packet can be re-tried. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100124188 | METHODS UTILIZED IN MOBILE DEVICES AND BASE STATIONS, AND THE MOBILE DEVICES AND BASE STATIONS THEREOF - A method utilized in a mobile device includes: transmitting a broadcasted random access (RA) preamble to a base station for initiating a first RA procedure; receiving a dedicated RA preamble from the base station after the first RA procedure is initiated; and transmitting the dedicated RA preamble to the base station for initiating a second RA procedure. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124189 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS AND CONRREPONDING RECEPTION METHOD - In order to guarantee a quality of service, the method, implemented in a first station, each first packet being transmitted by said first station intended for at least two second stations, the said second stations belonging to a set comprising several second stations, comprises:
| 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124190 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A WIRELESS INTERCONNECTED DATA NETWORK WITH A PLURALITY OF NETWORK NODES, AND NETWORK NODES - A method is described for operating a wireless interconnected data network with a plurality of network nodes (MP | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124191 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING PUSH COMMUNICATION ACROSS A NETWORK BOUNDARY - Provided is a method and apparatus for facilitating push communication from a first network to a target device of a second network, the second network comprising a packet service network such as a GPRS core network. A private IP address, usable for addressing the target device when the packet service network is in an activated state with respect thereto, is retained. Upon receipt of a first message from the first network, indicative of a push communication for the target device, the packet service network is disposed into the activated state, and a second message, addressed to the private IP address, is transmitted. The second message may be generated by a NAT configured to implement micro-port forwarding. The second message may be generated by a representative device of the second network, configured to receive the first message via a NAT in response to a query generated by the representative device. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124192 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING RADIO OPERATIONS ON A WIRELESS COMPUTING DEVICE - Embodiments of the invention provide for a wireless computing device that comprises a set of one or more radio components to transmit and receive wireless communications on the device. Additionally, the wireless computing device includes processing and memory resources that individually or in combination provide multiple wireless applications, a radio object, and an arbitration component. The multiple wireless applications are each capable of generating a user-interface for enabling user-input in connection with wireless activities performed with that wireless application. The radio object interfaces the multiple applications with the set of one or more radio components. The arbitration component is configured to arbitrate at least one of (i) requests made by each of the wireless applications to the radio object for access to one or more of the radio components in the set, or (ii) responses from the radio object to requests made by each of the wireless applications. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124193 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS PARAMETERS - A system and method are provided for distributing wireless network access parameters in a multi-mode communications user terminal (UT). The method includes: establishing a link between a UT and a first communications network (i.e., a cellular network); accessing a parameters server via the first network; downloading access parameters for a wireless, second communications network (i.e., a Wireless Local Area Network); and, using the downloaded access parameters to establish a wireless link between the UT and the second communications network. The downloaded access parameters may include information such as a security key, Service Set IDentifier (SSID), traffic channel allocation, and optimization parameters including transmit power, quality of service (QoS) settings, and operational mode. Alternately, the database may cross-reference UT ID to parameters such as QoS, IP address, gateway information, subnet mask, Domain Name Server (DNS) information, or geographical location. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100128663 | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND BASE STATION - When an RG received from a base station is UP, a mobile station compares E-TFC currently used by a HARQ process for transmitting a signal to the base station from the mobile station with E-TFC previously used for transmission by the same HARQ process. When they are identical, the accumulation information is incremented by one. When selecting E-TFC used for transmission, the HARQ process of the mobile station tales the accumulation information into consideration. Thus, when the accumulation is incremented, the HARQ process selects E-TFC of a level incremented by one and accordingly, the transfer rate of the mobile station is increased and the user throughput is improved. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128664 | CELL-TO-WIFI SWITCHER - Systems and methods that enable a user to seamlessly switch between networks and/or devices, during a content delivery session. The system comprises a network change detection component that can determine when the user switches from one network to another. Further, a context management component is employed that stores a context state of the content delivery session on the first network when a change in network is detected. The context state is employed to seamlessly resume content delivery on the newly connected network and continue the content delivery session. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128665 | Method for providing signaling between a core network and a radio access network - Example embodiments provide methods for providing signaling between a core network and a radio access network (RAN). One example embodiment includes receiving an IP packet at the core network; inserting information into a destination options extension header of the IP packet at the core network; and sending the IP packet from the core network to the RAN. Another example embodiment includes receiving an IP packet at the RAN from the core network; extracting information from a destination options extension header of the IP packet at the RAN; and sending the IP packet from the RAN to a terminal. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128666 | METHOD FOR ADVERTISING IN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM AND SERVER AND TERMINAL THEREOF - Disclosure may be to allow a Service Provider (or operator) to intercept SIP messages (e.g., SIP INVITE method, or SIP MESSAGE method) in the path of the IMS signaling link and insert advertising information therein, thereby delivering the advertising information inserted in the SIP messages to one or more end users (i.e., originating end or terminating end, or all of them). | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128667 | METHOD OF OPERATING A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT FOR PROVIDING ACCESS TO A NETWORK - A method of operating a wireless access point | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128668 | Radio Base Station Apparatus and Radio Terminal Apparatus - A radio base station apparatus of the invention includes a scramble code-generating part that generates a different scramble code for each sector, at least for adjacent sectors, and a scrambling part that uses a scramble code generated by said scramble code-generating part to scramble a scrambling-target portion in said downlink sub-frame. This contributes to increasing extraction precision when extracting a desired signal from a signal that was affected by interference between/among sectors. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128669 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND PROCESSING DATA BLOCK OF SPECIFIC PROTOCOL LAYER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a data block at a transmitting side in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The present invention generates a data block including polling information but no upper layer data, the polling information requesting a transmission of acknowledgement information (status report) on at least one data block transmitted to a receiving side and then transmits the data block to the receiving side, thereby it is possible to raise efficiency in wireless transmission. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128670 | Base station interference-free antenna module and WiFi base station mesh network system using the antenna module - A base station interference-free antenna module includes a plurality of high frequency transceivers respectively facing different directions, and an antenna controller electrically coupled to the high frequency transceivers. The antenna controller is electrically coupled to a signal processor in order to receive a signal transmitting/receiving request output by the signal processor to accordingly select a high frequency transceiver to transmit or receive a circularly polarized high frequency signal. The system includes two WiFi base stations, each having the base station interference-free antenna module and a signal processor, and the high frequency signals wirelessly transmitted between the WiFi base stations in the system are circularly polarized. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128671 | Interference-free antenna module and WiFi network system using the antenna module - An interference-free antenna module includes a WiFi interference-free antenna module having a plurality of high frequency transceivers respectively facing different directions, and an antenna controller electrically coupled to the high frequency transceivers respectively. The antenna controller receives a signal transmitting/receiving request output by a signal processor to accordingly select one of the high frequency transceivers to transmit or receive a circularly polarized high frequency signal. The antenna module also includes a consumer equipment interference-free antenna module having a circular polarization antenna unit. The WiFi network system includes a WiFi base station and a consumer equipment. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128672 | TRANSMITTER APPARATUS, RECEIVER APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A transmitter apparatus ( | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128673 | Communication Control Method, Communication System, Communication Control Apparatus and Wireless Base Station - A communication control method for a communication system including a plurality of wireless base stations | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128674 | Method of Responding DeletePersonalityRequest Message in Ultra Mobile Broadband - A method of responding a Delete Personality Request message in Ultra Mobile Broadband is disclosed. The Delete Personality Request message is sent to the access terminal by the access network through an air interface in Ultra Mobile Broadband. When the access network requests to delete one or more personalities, the access terminal sends a Delete Personality Accept message to the access network with the following information: Message ID, Transaction ID, Personality Count and Personality Index, wherein, Personality Count is determined by the access terminal according to the number of the personalities which the access terminal agrees to delete, and the information of Personality Index is one or more personalities that the access terminal agrees to delete. Compared with the prior art, the present invention enhances the personality management mechanism in the UMB system and saves the signaling interaction overhead of the air interface and the air interface resource. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128675 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station apparatus in a mobile communication system allowing for user equipment terminals having different numbers of receiving antennas is disclosed. The base station apparatus includes a mapping unit mapping a reference signal, a primary broadcasting signal, a synchronization signal, and an L1/L2 control signal onto a predetermined signal format; and a transmission unit transmitting the mapped signals, in which, within a sub-frame, the mapping unit maps the L1/L2 control signal and the primary broadcasting signal so as to be time-domain multiplexed, maps the primary broadcasting signal and the synchronization signal within a predetermined bandwidth in a middle of a system bandwidth, maps a reference signal included in a predetermined transmission stream within the predetermined bandwidth, but does not map a reference signal included in a transmission stream other than the predetermined transmission stream within the predetermined bandwidth. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128676 | Carrier Channel Distribution System - Carrier channel distribution systems are presented. Wireless carrier channels can be split from their respective bands and can be allocated among remote transceiver units to ensure proper coverage for wireless services. Carrier channels can be allocated or routed individually or as a group according to reconfigurable routing policy. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128677 | SERVICE CONTINUITY DURING LOCAL BREAKOUT IN A FEMTOCELL - A system and methodology that facilitates service continuity when a user equipment (UE), employing local breakout mechanisms at a femto access point (FAP) for a communication session, moves out of the femto coverage area is provided. In particular, a network change detection component can be employed to detect when the UE, attached to the FAP, changes its connection from the femto network to the macro network. Further, an active communication session can exist between the UE and a device/service/application on a local Area network (LAN) connected to a FAP, and/or the Internet, which utilizes local breakout at the FAP. When the UE moves out of the femto network, a context management component can be employed to seamlessly resume the communication session, via the macro network. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100128678 | ADAPTIVE CODING AND MODULATION FOR BROADBAND DATA TRANSMISSION - A process is described to build physical layer frames with a modcode adapted to the signal quality of a destination terminal. Data packets assigned to the same modcode may be sent in the same frame, although packets associated with higher modcodes may be used to complete a frame before switching to the applicable higher modcode for construction of subsequent frames. After an interval, the order of progression is restarted with an out of order packet above a threshold age. Flow control filtering mechanisms and a variable reliability margin may be used to adapt dynamically to the current data traffic conditions. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100135199 | METHOD AND A COMMUNICATION PLATFORM FOR PACKET COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A SERVICE PROVIDER IN A FIRST NETWORK AND A RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN A SECOND NETWORK - The present invention relates to a communication platform for packet communication between at least one service provider in a first network and a radio communication device in a second network, the second network comprises a first network node provided to, at least partly, handle communication between the radio communication device and a gateway located in the second network. The gateway is provided to handle communication between the second network and the communication platform, and the communication platform comprises an application programming interface provided to handle two-way communication between the service provider and the radio communication device. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135200 | PROVIDING USER-SPOT (U-SPOT) SERVICES IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication device may be utilized to establish a localized user network that is accessible by client devices when the client devices are communicatively coupled to the mobile communication device. The mobile communication device is then operable to determine services that may be provided in the user network to the client devices, and to advertise these services within the user network. The services comprise network and/or data accessibility, and bandwidth availability. Mobile communication devices are also operable to provide, directly or via local and/or remote resources, additional services, comprising audio/video processing capability, storage, and/or processing. Offering of services in user networks is incentivized to the mobile communication devices and/or to client devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the mobile communication devices. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed in U-Spot networks, based on incentives and/or availability of resources. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135201 | REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION FOR MOBILE DEVICE MANAGEMENT - System(s) and method(s) are provided for notification of registration of a mobile device with femto coverage for firmware content management. An attachment component that administers location of mobile devices or a femto access point (AP) conveys a notification to a network platform that manages firmware content updates when a mobile device for which firmware update is available hands off from wireless macro coverage onto femto coverage through the femto AP. The notification is triggered in response to firmware update notification received by the attachment component, or an update flag received by the femto AP. Upon reception of the notification, to exploit wireline bandwidth, the network platform delivers firmware content(s) update through backhaul link to the femto AP to which the mobile device is registered. Femto APs not provisioned to serve a mobile device can be incentivized to authorize the mobile device for coverage and thus facilitate firmware updates. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135202 | METHOD FOR QOS GUARANTEES IN A MULTILAYER STRUCTURE - A method in which a user equipment processes data in a wireless mobile communication system is provided. The method includes the steps of receiving a first data block from an upper layer, transferring a second data block including the first data block to a lower layer at a particular protocol layer, discarding the first and second data blocks present in the particular protocol layer if a certain period of time has passed, and transferring information associated with the discard of the second data block to the lower layer. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135203 | MIMO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING DETERMINISTIC COMMUNICATION PATH AND ANTENNA ARRANGEMENT METHOD THERFOR - A MIMO communication system having deterministic channels the orthogonality of which can be ensured even if a reflected wave other than the direct wave is present during line-of-sight communication is provided. The MIMO communication system is used in a line-of-sight environment and has deterministic channels between the transmission side where a plurality of transmission antennas are arranged and the reception side where a plurality of reception antennas are arranged. The transmission side, the reception side, or both transmission and reception sides of the MIMO communication system have a channel matrix calculation processing means for calculating a channel matrix for establishing an orthogonal channel as a communication channel. The transmission and reception antennas forming the channel matrix are horizontally arranged with respect to the ground. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135204 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR ROUTING A CALL FROM A CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN TO A UNIFIED SERVICE DOMAIN - A technique for routing a call to a unified service domain using one or more client applications providing call routing support from a circuit-switch access domain to unified service domain is described. A first one of the client applications will be provided on a network side and a second one of the client applications may potentially be provided on a terminal side. A method implementation of this technique comprises, on the network side, the steps of receiving a message from the terminal side, detecting, in response to the message, the client application that is to provide the routing functionalities, and controlling an activation state of at least one of the two client applications dependent on a result of this detection. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135205 | EMERGENCY AND PRIORITY CALLING SUPPORT IN WIMAX - The present invention provides methods, apparatuses, and systems for supporting emergency calls on a WiMAX access network. According to an embodiment of the invention, a method of providing emergency calling in a WiMAX network is provided. The method includes determining whether a call from a subscriber station (SS) is an emergency call. To enable making an emergency call, the minimum bandwidth required to enable SIP signaling is reserved and required resources are allocated from the access service network gateway (ASN-GW) via a base station (BS). | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135206 | Radio Access Technology Interworking - Radio access interworking technologies allow a target network to notify a source network that a mobile device has moved from source network to target network, wherein mobile device does not need to perform notification to source network. Further, source network can provide a first subset of overhead information to mobile device and, after moving to target network, mobile device can receive a second subset of overhead information from target network. Further, mobile device can perform prehashing prior to moving to target network based on a channel list received from source network. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135207 | Method, System, and Wireless Frame Structure for Supporting Different Mode of Multiple Access - A method, system, and wireless frame structure for supporting different modes of multiple radio access. The described system comprises base stations and terminals. There is a group of base stations at the same location, which include at least two synchronized base stations on the same frequency band, supporting different multiple access techniques in downlink or uplink. The base stations in the described group transmit downlink frames in a negotiated downlink zone and receive uplink frames in a negotiated uplink zone respectively, and the zones of the base stations are not overlapped. Each terminal accesses to one of the base stations according to the downlink multiple access technique that it supports, and receives/transmits signals in the downlink zone/uplink zone allocated to the base station. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135208 | USER EQUIPMENT TERMINAL, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment terminal capable of communicating with a base station apparatus in a mobile communication system includes a transmitting unit configured to transmit to the base station apparatus a first signal concerning a capability of the user equipment terminal; a receiving unit configured to receive from the base station apparatus a second signal concerning the capability of the user equipment terminal; and a communication processing unit configured to perform communication processing based on the capability of the user equipment terminal specified in the second signal. A base station apparatus capable of communicating with a user equipment terminal in a mobile communication system includes a receiving unit configured to receive from the user equipment terminal the first signal concerning the capability of the user equipment terminal; a transmitting unit configured to transmit to the user equipment terminal the second signal concerning the capability of the user equipment terminal; and a communication processing unit configured to perform communication processing based on the capability of the user equipment terminal specified in the second signal. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135209 | RECEPTION CYCLE CONTROL METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A radio base station (eNB) starts a transmitting-side timer upon transmission of downlink data; and changes a reception cycle of downlink data in a mobile station (UE), when transmitting no downlink data during a period from start to expiration of the transmitting-side timer. The mobile station (UE) starts a receiving-side timer upon receipt of downlink data transmitted; and changes a reception cycle of downlink data in the mobile station (UE), when receiving no downlink data during a period from start to expiration of the receiving-side timer. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135210 | METHOD OF RANDOM ACCESS AND A METHOD OF TRANSPORTING INFORMATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method of performing random access in a broadband wireless access system is disclosed. The method includes performing first random access through at least one of a plurality of random access channels, receiving information about the number of access-failed channels among the plurality of random access channels from a base station, when the first random access fails, and performing second random access according to a probability value calculated based on the received information. The present invention increases utilization of random access channels and can effectively schedule an uplink bandwidth, thereby providing an efficient ranging method. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135211 | UBIQUITOUS SENSOR NETWORK-BASED SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY MANAGING FOOD SANITATION - The present invention relates to a ubiquitous sensor network-based system and method for automatically managing food sanitation. The system includes at least one sensor node ( | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135212 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING THE LARGE SERVICE DATA UNIT (SDU) - Systems and methodologies are described that segment or concatenate radio link control (RLC) service data units (SDUs) into RLC protocol data units (PDUs). In accordance with various aspects set forth herein, systems and/or methods are provided that receive a first RLC SDU, partition the first RLC SDU into a first RLC PDU and a second RLC PDU, set a length indicator (LI) field associated with the second RLC PDU to indicate the size of information contained in the second RLC PDU, concatenate the second RLC PDU with a third RLC PDU associated with a second RLC SDU to form a concatenated RLC PDU, and dispatch the first RLC PDU, the concatenated RLC PDU, and a fourth RLC PDU associated with the second RLC SDU. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135213 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING REVERSE LINK INTERFERENCE AMONG ACCESS TERMINALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - In a wireless communication system, an apparatus and a method are provided for controlling reverse link interference among access terminals that are power controlled by a sector of a base station. In an embodiment, the maximum effective noise power spectral density is used as a parameter for controlling the level of reverse link loading, by setting a reverse activity bit (RAB) to signal the access terminals to reduce their data rates in order to minimize interference between the access terminals if the maximum effective noise power spectral density is above a predetermined threshold. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135214 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A technique that can effectively utilize unused wireless link and realize high-quality wireless communication between a communication terminal and a base station and enables efficient distribution of radio resources over an entire wireless communication system is provided. A wireless communication system in which a base station and a communication terminal can conduct wireless communication by detecting a usable wireless link and changing a wireless link used for the connection is also provided. On the communication network side, in addition to a plurality of wireless communication networks and a base station, a server device is provided. Connection-method reconstruction management means for determining a connection method of the wireless communication on the basis of communication condition information including information on usable wireless link at current locations of the base station and the communication terminal and connection-method reconstruction control means for controlling the connection method of the wireless communication for the corresponding base station are provided. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135215 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR BEARING CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN SERVICE DATA OVER RADIO BEARER - A method for bearing CS-domain service data over radio bearer is disclosed. The method includes: letting CS-domain service data be borne over a radio high-speed packet data access channel according to a channel mapping relation between CS-domain service data and the radio high-speed packet data access channel. An apparatus and a system are also provided herein. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135216 | Method for transmitting packet data in communication system - A method and apparatus for a transmitter having a radio protocol with an upper layer and a lower layer therein used for management of full header packet transmission when transmitting data packets to a receiver are provided. If the upper layer receives from the lower layer, information of a successful transmission of a full header packet, the upper layer decides to stop sending any additional full header packet that contains the same full header as the previously successfully transmitted full header packet. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135217 | System and Method for Broadband Digital Broadcasting - A system and method are disclosed for providing streaming data information to a receiver. The system accesses one or more information service providers for providing respective information signals, input buffers for storing portions of the streaming information, a digital broadcast transmitter for broadcasting the contents of the input buffers as transmission bursts, a digital broadcast receiver for receiving the transmission bursts for storage in a receiver input buffer, and an application processor for converting the transmission bursts to an information transmission stream. The digital broadcast receiver is synchronized with the transmitter broadcasts to allow for powering down between selected transmission bursts. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135218 | Method and Apparatus for Sequentially Conducting Independent Data Contexts Using a Mobile Communications Device - A mobile communications device including a processor operable to conduct with a wireless packet data service network a PDP context associated with a first application running on the mobile communications device. The processor is further operable to release the PDP context associated with the first application and establish with the wireless packet data service network a PDP context associated with a second application running on the mobile communications device responsive to the second application requesting a PDP context. The processor is further operable to reestablish the PDP context associated with the first application responsive to one of the second application releasing the second PDP context, data transmission within the second PDP context ceasing for a first time period, and a second time period. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135219 | PERSONAL AREA NETWORK WITH AUTOMATIC ATTACHMENT AND DETACHMENT - A network ( | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100142438 | MESSAGE BROADCASTING OVER WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate broadcasting and receiving messages in a wireless media broadcast network. Mobile devices are equipped to receive media over a broadcast network where presentation of the data can be enabled through a content policy. Broadcast messages can be provisioned and delivered over the network such that mobile devices can receive the message regardless of the level or existence of purchased content. The messages can be broadcast for multiple purposes, including emergency messages, which can come from an emergency or amber alert system, venue and/or location specific messages, etc. The messages can be broadcast at a regional level as well by leveraging such functionality of the media broadcast network. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142439 | REAL-TIME POSITIONING SYSTEM, METHOD THEREFOR, AND DEVICE CONTAINING COMPUTER SOFTWARE - A real-time positioning system, a real-time positioning method, and a device containing computer software are provided. The system includes a coordinator and at least one router. The coordinator carries out a signal interconnection with each router of a first layer via an omni-directional antenna, and calculates an initial distance according to the strength of the signal interconnection. Then, the coordinator carries out a signal interconnection with the router via a plurality of directional antennas respectively to analyze an initial direction of the router of the first layer according to the strength of the signal interconnection with each of the directional antennas and corrects the initial direction according to the slope angle of the coordinator, so as to position the router of the first layer according to the initial distance and the initial direction. Each router positions each router of the next layer in the same manner as the coordinator. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142440 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication method and a wireless communication apparatus capable of efficiently improving communication throughput of a second wireless communication system while securing a capturing capability of informative information in a first wireless communication system are provided. A transmitting/receiving unit ( | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142441 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND BASE STATION - Provided is a radio communication method employed in a base station having plural antenna elements. The method includes the steps of: setting an inner zone and an outer zone by dividing a cell formed by the base station into two; determining whether a mobile station is located in the inner zone or the outer zone on the basis of a predetermined criterion; notifying the mobile station located in the inner zone of control information, including information on channel allocation and a communication method, through a broadcast channel; and notifying the mobile station located in the outer zone of control information through a dedicated channel by beamforming using the plural antenna elements. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142442 | PROCESSING OF AN EMERGENCY SESSION IN A WIMAX NETWORK - In a system for processing an emergency session in a WiMAX (worldwide interoperability for microwave access) network system including a home network, at least one roaming network and at least one mobile station, an emergency call is established between the mobile station and the home network in case the mobile station is located in the home network, or between the mobile station and a roaming network (visited network) in case the mobile station is located in the roaming network. In a different embodiment, the location of a mobile station is determined in response to an emergency location request and the location (geographic) coordinates are provided in order to establish an emergency call setup. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142443 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MERGING BEACON TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - A method and wireless device merge multiple unsynchronized beacon groups in a wireless network, each beacon group including at least one wireless device. A first beacon is received from at least one first wireless device in a first beacon group (S | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142444 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING USING AN IN-VEHICLE SYSTEM - A system and method for communicating wirelessly from a mobile device to a remote receiver station is disclosed. The system includes a controller configured to monitor a status of the mobile device and, upon an initiation event, initiate a data transfer process to wirelessly communicate data to the remote receiver station. The system also includes a voice-band modem that, upon initiation of the data transfer process. The voice-band modem is configured to receive data for transfer to the remote receiver station, encode the data using a fountain code encoding protocol to form a series encoded packets, and repeatedly transmit the encoded packets until receiving an indication that the series of packets has been received at the receiving station. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142445 | ENVIRONMENTS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet in an environment, in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain environments may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142446 | BUSINESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet utilized by a management system, in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain management systems may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142447 | WEB APPLICATIONS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for providing a mobile, broadband, routable internet, in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as sending and receiving nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual devices independent of fixed infrastructure elements, and where the mobile, broadband, routable internet enables the use of web applications. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142448 | DEVICES FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet that may enable devices in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain devices may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142449 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF SYNCHRONIZATION IN DUAL-BEACON WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless device ( | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142450 | LOCALLY ADMINSTERED MAC ADDRESS BASED METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY AND EFFICIENTLY IDENTIFYING ENHANCED VERSION NODES OF STANDARDS - Embodiments of the invention provide a method for selectively identifying nodes implemented enhanced version of a protocol standard by creating a random locally administered MAC address and advertising said random locally administered MAC address as the address that implies a particular protocol amendment of a protocol standard. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142451 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal used in a mobile communication system complying with a carrier sense multiple access scheme is disclosed. The communication terminal includes: a receiving unit configured to receive a wireless packet transmitted by another communication terminal or a base station; a determination unit configured to determine periodic transmission timing of the communication terminal based on determination criterion information included in the wireless packet; and a transmission unit configured to periodically transmit wireless packets to the base station based on the transmission timing. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100150055 | AGGREGATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, AGGREGATE NODE, AND DEAGGREGATE NODE - A technology is disclosed that provides an aggregation management method, an aggregate node, and a deaggregate node that can quickly and efficiently manage aggregation. The technology includes a step at which, when an aggregate node | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150056 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND RACH DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD - A mobile station capable of reducing the probability of collision of RACH data in a random access. In this mobile station, a moving speed determining part ( | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150057 | Method of Controlling Packet Data Traffic - The application relates to a method of controlling packet data traffic of a packet service in a communication network | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150058 | Ofdm communication system with fast frequency hops - A method for operating a radio communication system involves the use of OFDM and involves a first sending station modulating a first OFDM symbol onto a first carrier frequency and sending the first OFDM symbol to a first receiving station via a first transmission channel using an air interface. The first sending station changes the first carrier frequency during a time used for sending the first OFDM symbol, the change in the first carrier frequency being made independently of a change in transmission characteristics of the first transmission channel over time. A fast frequency hopping system is disclosed. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150059 | STATIC ADDRESSING OF DEVICES IN A DYNAMICALLY ROUTED NETWORK - A method of routing in a network includes dividing a time corresponding to a predetermined maximum registration age of a first node registered with a second node into a number of first time intervals and second time intervals. The first time intervals each have a predetermined duration and the second time intervals each have a duration greater than the predetermined duration of the first time intervals. Each of the first and second time intervals are assigned a metric designating a cost associated with a path between the first node and the second node. The metric increases in value for each of the first and second time intervals as registration age increases. The second node sends a message including the metric associated with the time interval during which it is transmitted. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150060 | SENSING DEVICE ORIENTATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Sensing installed orientation of an antenna or access node in a wireless digital network. According to one aspect of the invention, an orientation sensor such as a 2 or 3 axis accelerometer is provided in the access node. The orientation sensor may be attached to the access node housing, directly or through a substrate, attached to the main logic board of the access node, or may be mounted to an antenna. The orientation sensor may be mounted to the same substrate as is used to form an antenna, or may be mounted on a separate substrate. When associated with an antenna, such as the orientation sensor on the same substrate as the antenna, or co-located with the antenna such as inside the same package, the orientation of the antenna may be sensed. Orientation data on the access node and/or antenna may be transmitted to the controller for the access node, and/or to clients of the access node. This orientation information may be used for example to verify or validate installation and positioning, for example comparing the actual orientation to the desired orientation as stored in a database. The orientation information may be used in modeling and/or displaying access node coverage. In access nodes with selectable antennas, the orientation information may be used to switch antennas. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150061 | Device and method for arranging access point in wireless location - Provided are an access point arrangement device and a method for wireless location determination. An access point is arranged on a numerical map, received signal strength of a signal received from the access point for each grid point is calculated, and DOP and position error per grid point are calculated by using the received signal strength per grid point. It is determined whether to rearrange the currently arranged access point based on a ratio of a grid point with DOP less than a threshold value for entire grid points on the numerical map and a ratio of a grid point with a position error that is less than a threshold value. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150062 | Packet Indicator for RLC Protocol - In a communication terminal implementing a radio link control (RLC) protocol, error propagation to higher layer protocols is mitigated by use of an additional length indicator, referred to herein as a new packet indicator, in the RLC data blocks to indicate the beginning of a new higher layer packet in addition to a conventional length indicator to indicate the last segment of a higher layer packet. The new packet indicator prevents the LLC data segment at the beginning of an RLC data block from being concatenated with an LLC data segment in the previous data block even when length indicators in the previous data block are not received. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150063 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A NODE TO JOIN A WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORK - A method for a new node to join an ad-hoc network is provided. The method includes two basic functions. When the new node is allowed to join the network, the indicating device of the node being joined generates an indication. When the new node joins the network, the indicating device of the new node also generates an indication. The method further includes two commands, the join-rejection command and the joined-rejection command, to cancel the join procedure when the indicating device of the new node and the node being joined do not indicate correspondingly. Accordingly, the method efficiently reduces the possibility of joining an unanticipated node. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150064 | IP TUNNELING OPTIMISATION - A node arranged in use to communicate over an IP network, the node comprising means for receiving an IP packet either from a peer node or from a higher protocol layer within the node, means for XORing a header of the packet or part thereof with a pad to translate the header or part thereof, and means for sending the packet to a peer node or for delivering the packet to a higher protocol layer within the node. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150065 | MULTIPLE PANS CONFLICT RESOLUTION METHOD IN ZIGBEE - Disclosed is a method of preventing overlap of multiple PANs in a ZigBee network. According to the method of preventing overlap of multiple personal area networks (PANs) in the ZigBee network, a first node included in a first PAN of the ZigBee network verifies whether overlap of the multiple PANs occurs by verifying packets received from neighbor nodes, identifies beacon information of a neighbor node that causes the overlap of the multiple PANs by gradually adjusting radio frequency (RF) transmission wave, and adjusts a communication range based on the beacon information. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150066 | Method For Communicating Data, A Transmitting Unit And A Computer Program Product - The invention relates to a method for communicating data via a shared wifeless channel. The method comprises the steps of preparing a data packet for transmission via the shared wireless channel ( | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150067 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A WIDEBAND WIRELESS NETWORK AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A device for transmitting data in a wideband wireless network. The device may include a transmitter for transmitting data via a channel of the wideband wireless network, the transmitter is arranged to start the transmitting in response to a start signal. A first transmission controller is connected to the transmitter, for controlling transmission of data by the transmitter. The transmission controller includes an energy detector for detecting the amount of energy in the channel. The energy detector is arranged to repeat the detecting in response to a repeat signal. A comparator is connected to an output of the energy detector and to a control input of the transmitter. The comparator is arranged to compare the detected amount of energy with an energy threshold, to output the repeat signal to the energy detector in case the detected amount of energy exceeds the energy threshold; and to output the start signal to the transmitter when the detected amount of energy is below the energy threshold. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150068 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system includes sector units composing base stations, and mobile subscriber stations each being in sectors corresponding to the sector units. The mobile subscriber stations transmit channel estimation signals to the sector units corresponding to the sector and sector units corresponding to sectors contiguous to the sectors. A sector unit that corresponds to the sector forms, based on a channel estimation signal received from the mobile subscriber station in the sector corresponding to the sector unit and channel estimation signals received from the adjacent mobile subscriber stations in the sectors contiguous to the sector, a transmission beam that is directed to the mobile subscriber station but is not directed to the adjacent mobile subscriber stations to transmit data to the mobile subscriber station. By configuring the system in such a manner, interference from contiguous sectors can be avoided. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150069 | Reverse Link Acknowledgment Signaling - Techniques, apparatuses, and systems can include mechanisms for transmitting and receiving data on one or more reverse link acknowledgement channels. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150070 | SENSOR NODE HAVING SELF LOCALIZATION FUNCTION AND SELF LOCALIZATION METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a sensor node having a self localization function and a self localization method of the sensor node. The sensor node calculates a location thereof by receiving location information measured at each of two mobile nodes at different times and using four location information of the received location information. Additional cost and power consumption required for installing additional equipment such as an anchor node, a ultrasonic transceiver and a signal amplifier are reduced. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150071 | RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM - The radio network system includes a plurality of mobile stations, a radio network controller operable to receive first location registration information for a location registration request from the mobile station, operable to transmit second location registration information including a femtocell identifier used to identify that the radio network controller is a device for a femtocell in the first location registration information to a first core network device, a first core network device operable to receive the second location registration information transmitted from the radio network controller, operable to transmit location registration rejection information used to indicate a rejection of storing location information to the radio network controller, and a second core network device operable to receive the second location registration information transmitted from the radio network controller that have received the location registration rejection information transmitted from the first core network device. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150072 | GATEWAY DEVICES AND WIRELESS CONTROL NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM USING THE SAME - An object of the invention is to improve the reliability of a wireless control network management system. Gateway devices for relaying data communication between a monitoring/controlling host connected thereto via a wired network and a plurality of wireless nodes connected thereto via wireless circuit and constituting a wireless network, wherein the gateway device comprises wireless communication means for sending data from the host to at least any one of the wireless nodes, and redirect means for causing the wireless communication means to send the data to one of the wireless nodes and to transfer the data to the other gateway device connected to the wired network. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150073 | MOBILE STATION AND LOCATION INFORMATION ACQUISITION METHOD - A mobile station comprises: a memory; a location acquisition unit that acquires location information of the mobile station; a detecting unit that detects a communication-ready network; a determining unit that, when the detecting unit detects the communication-ready network and determines whether the memory stores the location information in association with the network; and a control unit that, when the determining unit determines that the memory stores the location information in association with the network, performs a predetermined process using the stored location information, and when the determining unit determines that the memory does not store the location information in association with the network, instructs the location acquisition unit to acquire the location information of the mobile station, performs the predetermined process using the location information acquired by the location acquisition unit, and causes the memory to store the location information in association with the network detected by the detecting unit. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150074 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal used in a mobile communication system complying with a carrier sense multiple access scheme is disclosed. The communication terminal includes: a receiving unit configured to receive a wireless packet transmitted by another communication terminal or a base station; a determination unit configured to determine periodic transmission timing of the communication terminal based on determination criterion information included in the wireless packet; and a transmission unit configured to periodically transmit wireless packets to the base station based on the transmission timing. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150075 | FILTER, DEMULTIPLEXER, AND MODULE INCLUDING DEMULTIPLEXER, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A demultiplexer has a common terminal, a transmission terminal, and a reception terminal, and furthermore includes a transmission filter connected between the common terminal and the transmission terminal, a reception filter connected between the common terminal and the reception terminal, and a phase shift circuit connected in series to the reception filter connected between the common terminal and the reception terminal. A node on the line from the phase shift circuit to the common terminal or the transmission terminal, and a node on the line from the phase shift circuit to the reception terminal are coupled via a reactance. Accordingly, it is possible to fundamentally reduce or eliminate the situation in which transmission signals from the transmission filter arrive at the reception circuit, and improve isolation. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150076 | Communication System, Base Station Apparatus, Server Apparatus, Mobile Station Apparatus, and Transmission Data Amount Determining Method - It is advantageous for present invention to suitably determine amounts of transmission data for links in a multilink communication. In a mobile communication system ( | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150077 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION VIA AT LEAST ONE OF DIRECTIONAL AND OMNI-DIRECTION ANTENNAS - Techniques for using at least one of omni-directional and directional antennas for communication are described. A station may be equipped antenna elements selectable for use as an omni-directional antenna or one or more directional antennas. The station may select the omni-directional antenna or a directional antenna for use for communication based on various factors such as, e.g., whether the location or direction of a target station for communication is known, whether control frames or data frames are being exchanged, etc. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150078 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DECODING ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL ABSOLUTE GRANT CHANNEL TRANSMISSIONS - A method of decoding enhanced uplink absolute grant channel (E-AGCH) transmissions in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). E-AGCH data is received, the E-AGCH data including a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) part and a data part, the CRC part having been masked with a WTRU identity (ID). The CRC part and the data part are demultiplexed and the CRC part is demasked with a first WTRU ID. A first CRC is performed with the data part and the CRC part demasked with the first WTRU ID. The data part is decoded on a condition that the first CRC passes. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100157882 | Communication Network Control System, Communication Terminal, and Communication Network Control Method | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157883 | VOICE OVER IP CELL PHONE - A cellular telephone is disclosed that allows a user to access a VoIP service provider using the WAP protocol to send and receive telephone calls to other users via the internet or other data network. The cellular telephone includes a cellular portion that formats messages to be sent to and from a cellular base station, a WAP portion that interfaces with the internet to send, receive, and display data therefrom. The cellular telephone also includes an audio gateway to sample, analog to digital convert, compress, and packetize an audio signal to prepare the audio signal to be transmitted via the internet to the second user, | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157884 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - A base station device and a mobile station device both enabling improvement of the reception quality of transmission data at a mobile station by preventing a sequence for establishing synchronism and the transmission data from interfering with each other. In the base station device ( | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157885 | SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM AND SYNCHRONIZING METHOD FOR PLURALITY OF BASE STATIONS AND MOBILE STATION IN A FORWARD LINK WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - There is provided a radio communication system in which a mobile station which has decided to switch a base station can immediately be synchronized with the base station to which switching is to be made. Each of the base stations creates a synchronization signal for the mobile station to synchronize with the base station from an upstream pilot signal received from the mobile station, creates upstream propagation quality information from the upstream pilot signal, and creates a downstream control signal including the synchronization information and the upstream propagation quality information, and transmits them. The mobile stations creates an upstream pilot signal, transmits the signal, receives a signal including a downstream control signal from each of the base stations, extracts the upstream propagation quality and information on synchronization with the base stations from the received downstream control signal, and selects an optimal base station from the received upstream propagation quality as a new current base station. If the selected base station is different from the current base station, the transmission timing of the upstream pilot signal is modified to the transmission timing based on the synchronization information extracted from the downstream control signal of the selected base station and transmitted. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157886 | PREAMBLE CAPTURE AND MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL - An apparatus and method for wireless communications configured to receive simultaneous transmissions from a plurality of wireless devices, with each of the transmissions having a reference signal, acquire the reference signals and, based on information obtained from the acquisition of the reference signals, select the transmission from one of the wireless devices for timing synchronization and decoding. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157887 | System, Arrangements And Method Relating To Access Handling - The present invention relates to a system comprising a core network access packet data node ( | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157888 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING EFFICIENCY AND RELIABILITY OF BROADCAST COMMUNICATIONS IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for improving efficiency and reliability of broadcast transmission in a multi-hop wireless mesh communication network. In some implementations, systems and methods are provided for a leaf mesh node to acknowledge reception of a broadcast packet broadcast by an Intelligent Access Point (IAP), and for allowing the IAP to determine whether to re-communicate the broadcast packet that it had previously re-transmitted when no acknowledgment is received from a leaf mesh node. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157889 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING EFFICIENCY OF BROADCAST COMMUNICATIONS IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for improving efficiency and reliability of broadcast transmission in a multi-hop wireless mesh communication network. When an intelligent access point (IAP) receives a broadcast packet (BP), the IAP can determine a list of downlink child mesh nodes (DLCMNs) of the IAP based on route information provided in its routing table. After the IAP knows its DLCMNs, the IAP can determine a first lowest data rate (LDR) between the IAP and each of its DLCMNs, and then re-transmit the BP at the first LDR. The BP is then received by at least one “parent” mesh node, which can then perform similar processing, and can then re-transmit the BP to its DLCMNs. This process repeats until the BP reaches a leaf mesh node. In other words, each mesh node can determine its DLCMNs, determine the LDR between itself and each of its DLCMNs, and can then re-transmit the BP at this LDR. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157890 | METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION USING AUTHENTICATION INFORMATION - A data communication method includes providing a sender node having a data packet of information. The data packet includes at least one first field and a second field. The second field has content that is dependent upon actual content of the at least one first field. The content of the second field of the data packet is transmitted from the sender node to a receiver node. The receiver node is used to predict the actual content of the first field of the data packet. The receiver node is used to calculate the content of the second field of the data packet based upon the predicted content of the first field. The predicted content of the first field is confirmed to be equivalent to the actual content of the first field. The confirming step includes comparing the calculated content of the second field to the transmitted content of the second field. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157891 | FEMTOCELL CALL MANAGEMENT - When a call is received for a device within a femtocell area of coverage, all devices within the femtocell area of coverage are rung. The call is connected to the first device that picks up. All devices can be rung at the same time or in a predetermined order. The first device rung can be the device that was most recently moved or the device that was most recently active. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157892 | MOBILITY SUPPORTING METHOD - Provided is a mobility supporting method of a mobile router. The method includes generating an area identifier to identify an open shortest path first area; and transmitting routing information including the area identifier to an access router. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157893 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is an apparatus and method for transmitting data in a wireless communication system. The apparatus for transmitting a packet data in a wireless communication system includes a Media Access Control (MAC) layer for determining the number of the number of preambles to be inserted based on a feed-back reply signal from a receiver, and generating a multi-preamble aggregation packet by inserting the determined number of preambles into packets received from an upper layer and a physical layer for forming the multi-preamble aggregation packet generated in a data processing unit, by using a physical layer packet, and transmitting the formed multi-preamble aggregation packet. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157894 | METHOD OF OPERATING TUNNEL POINT SUPPORTING ROUTING SCALABILITY AND MOBILITY - Provided is a method of operating a tunnel point that provides a tunnel between a router group including at least one router and a mobile node. The method includes: providing a tunnel between the mobile node and the router group by authenticating the mobile node; receiving a packet including an identifier (ID) of a target node from the mobile node; converting the ID of the target node in the packet into a locator corresponding to the ID of the target node; transmitting a packet including the converted locator to the router group; and maintaining the ID of the mobile node by authenticating the mobile node through the router group when the mobile node is connected to another external terminal node. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157895 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING UPLINK TRANSMISSIONS USING MULTIPLE UPLINK CARRIERS - A method and an apparatus for uplink transmission using multiple uplink carriers are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) selects a dedicated channel medium access control (MAC-d) flow with highest priority data to be transmitted and performs uplink carrier selection and enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transport format combination (E-TFC) restriction and selection to select a carrier among a plurality of carriers and select an E-TFC based on a maximum supported payload, a remaining scheduled grant payload of the selected carrier and a remaining non-scheduled grant payload. The WTRU then generates a medium access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU) for E-DCH transmission via the selected carrier based on the selected E-TFC. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157896 | METHOD FOR GENERATING FRAME AND TRANSMITTING FRAME INFORMATION - The present invention relates to a frame generation and transmission method of a wireless communication system. The frame generation method includes dividing a frame into a plurality of subframes, allocating the respective subframes as one of a plurality of predefined modes, and allocating mode allocation information of the respective subframes to the frame information. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157897 | MOBILE GATEWAY APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONNECTING IP BASED SERVICES USING THE SAME - Disclosed are a mobile gateway apparatus and a method of connecting IP based services using the same. The mobile gateway apparatus assigns identifiers to user terminals that have accessed the mobile gateway apparatus through multiple internal interfaces based on various network access standards, and selects an appropriate external interface from multiple external interfaces based on various network access standards, thereby providing IP based services Even if the user terminals and the external networks operate based on various network access standards, the mobile gateway apparatus allows IP based services to be effectively provided to the user terminals by supporting more various network access standards while ensuring higher bandwidth. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157898 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - To control the communication quality on the terminal basis without making the base station more complicated, it is provided a communication system, comprising at least one computer and a gateway that is connected to the at least one computer through a first network. The gateway is connected to at least one terminal through a second network. The at least one terminal performs communications with the at least one computer via the gateway. The gateway estimates quality of the communications between the gateway and the at least one computer in the first network; and determines a priority for the communications between the gateway and the at least one terminal in the second network according to the estimated quality of the communications in the first network. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157899 | DISTRIBUTED GEOSPATIAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method on a first mobile node for facilitating exchange of pertinent data between mobile nodes over a wireless communications network can be provided. The method can include establishing, by the first mobile node, a wireless network connection with at least one other mobile node inside a predefined geospatial area, wherein the wireless network connection is established over the wireless communications network. The method can further include determining that a future position of the first mobile node is outside the predefined geospatial area and transmitting pertinent data residing on the first mobile node over the wireless communications network exclusively to the at least one other mobile node inside the predefined geo spatial area, wherein the pertinent data is associated with the predefined geospatial area. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157900 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING LOCAL ROUTING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and a system for establishing a local routing in a mobile communication network, and for allowing different mobile stations connected with the same Access Service Network GateWay (ASN GW) to transmit and receive traffic without delivering such traffic to a Home Agent (HA) are provided. In the method, a session server determines whether first and second mobile stations are connected with the same ASN GW by using their location information. In case of a connection with the same ASN GW, the session server establishes a local routing in the ASN GW so that traffic between the first and second mobile stations is directly routed to each other at the ASN GW. Then the ASN GW receiving the traffic from one of both mobile stations transmits the traffic to the other according to the local routing. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157901 | WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE AND METHOD FOR BASE STATION UTILIZATION - Wireless network system including a plurality of base stations each configured to manage active links to mobile stations within a range; and a controller configured to control the base stations to provide at least two of the active links from two different base stations simultaneously to a given mobile station in integral manner for joint processing. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157902 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF PROVIDING MULTIMEDIA SERVICE IN IP NETWORK - Provided are a method and system of providing a multimedia service in an information provider (IP) network, wherein the method is performed by a system of providing an IP-based mobile service. The method includes: detecting whether a user, who is being provided with the multimedia service, changed from a first terminal to a second terminal; obtaining characteristic information of the second terminal; and providing the multimedia service after changing the multimedia service according to the obtained characteristic information. When only a terminal changes and an access network does not change, or when only an access network changes and a terminal does not change, a network automatically recognizes characteristics of the terminal and the access network and automatically changes media according to the recognized characteristics. Accordingly, a multimedia service without quality deterioration is received, and moreover, a service that can satisfy characteristics (capacity, size of display, etc.) of a terminal of a user and a corresponding service level agreement (SLA) of the user are provided in various terminal environments. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157903 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION FOR SUBSCRIBER UNIT INITIALIZATION AND SYNCHRONIZATION IN A TIME-SYNCHRONIZED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A bandwidth efficient subscriber unit initialization and synchronization method and apparatus is described. The inventive subscriber unit initialization and synchronization method and apparatus uses a combination of an access burst format and a data transportation technique to efficiently use bandwidth when initializing and synchronizing subscriber units in a time-synchronized communication system. Advantageously, the present invention provides a mechanism for a base station to receive multiple access bursts from multiple subscriber units in a single contiguous time period. In the preferred embodiment of the present invention, bandwidth is efficiently utilized by searching for multiple initial access bursts from multiple mobile stations during a single time period known as a new access opportunity. The preferred embodiment of the present invention initializes and synchronizes subscriber units in a “contention-based” manner. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157904 | OPTIMIZED HEADER FOR EFFICIENT PROCESSING OF DATA PACKETS - Methods, apparatus, and computer program products for processing an RLC PDU having an RLC payload and an RLC header, wherein the RLC payload comprises a plurality of at least partially ciphered SDUs, each of the SDUs being either a partial or complete SDU, and wherein the RLC header comprises a separate count for each of the SDUs, each of the counts being configured to support deciphering of the corresponding SDU. Each SDU is a PDCP PDU having a PDCP payload and a PDCP header, wherein the PDCP payload comprises a plurality of IP packets, and wherein the PDCP header comprises a length indicator for at least one of the IP packets. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157905 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING ROUTE OF MOBILE NODE IN SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided for searching a route of a mobile node in a short-range communication environment. A first router to which a mobile node belongs acquires a unique address of the mobile node for communication with the mobile node. The first router determines whether the mobile node travels during communication. When the mobile node travels, the first router broadcasts the unique address of the mobile node to one or more neighboring routers and determines whether the one or more neighboring routers include the mobile node. If a second router, which is one of the one or more neighboring routers, includes the mobile node, the second router performs communication using the unique address without an additional address acquisition process. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157906 | Techniques for femto cell synchronization in wireless networks - Techniques are disclosed that provide for femto base stations to become synchronized with other base stations in a wireless network. For instance, a macro base station may instruct a mobile station to engage in a synchronization operation that synchronizes one or more timings (e.g., OFDM timings) of a femto base station with one or more corresponding timings of the macro base station. This may involve the mobile station having timing references of the macro base station. Further, this may involve the mobile station performing scanning operations and/or handover ranging operations with the femto base station. The mobile device may determine timing offsets between the femto BS and the macro BS. These offsets may be sent to the macro base station or to the femto base station. Also, the femto base station may adopt timings employed by the mobile station. The macro base station or a femto base station may direct a femto base station to achieve synchronization either directly with timing adjustment offset, or with a list of already synchronized femto base station as synchronization reference. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157907 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A wireless network uses an improved frame structure to increase timing acquisition capabilities as well as reduction of spectral lines. In one aspect, the frame packet can be used to communicate the different modes of operation under which the packet was created. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100165912 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR WIRELESSLY TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CEC MESSAGE - In a wireless communication system including a source device and a sink device for wirelessly transmitting and receiving a CEC message specified in an HDMI standard, a CEC controller of the source device generates and outputs a CEC frame including the CEC message. A controller generates a wireless data packet including the CEC message in the generated CEC frame. A wireless transceiver circuit wirelessly transmits a wireless signal including the generated wireless data packet to the sink device, and receives a wireless signal including a wireless ACK packet and wirelessly transmitted from the sink device in response to the wireless data packet in the wirelessly-transmitted wireless signal. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165913 | METHODS OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA - A method of transmitting data from a first communication device to a second communication device, comprising receiving a first signal on a first frequency channel from the second communication device, generating data, wherein the data comprises a reception status indicating whether there is interference on the first frequency channel due to a second signal transmitted by a third communication device, transmitting a third signal on a second frequency channel to the second communication device, wherein the transmission is carried out for a predetermined duration, receiving a fourth signal on the second frequency channel from the second communication device; and transmitting the data generated on the second frequency channel to the second communication device. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165914 | BEAM DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is related to a beam division multiple access system and a method thereof. The base station according to the present invention comprises a initial mobile station information receiver for receiving initial mobile station information that a mobile station omnidirectionally transmits in an initial communication step, a mobile station location and speed detector for detecting a location and a moving speed of the mobile station from the initial mobile station information, a downlink beam generator for generating a downlink beam based on the location and the moving speed of the mobile station transferred from the mobile station location and speed detector, and adjusting at least one of a width and a direction of each the downlink beam, and a downlink beam transmitter for transmitting the downlink beam generated by the downlink beam generator to the mobile station through a phase array antenna. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165915 | Baseband Recovery in Wireless Networks, Base Transceiver Stations, and Wireless Networking Devices - Baseband recovery in wireless networks, base transceiver stations, and wireless networking devices may be implemented to minimize the number of timing symbols while at the same time enabling wireless devices to use a relatively low per-symbol sampling rate, so that minimal processing is required to implement the timing recovery. In one embodiment, a relatively low number of samples is taken per expected symbol interval during the training sequence. A subset of the samples is selected and processed to determine error signals for each of the samples. The error signals are multiplied by the expected symbol and summed to form an error signal. The error signal is used to adjust the set of samples that will be used and processed in connection with subsequent symbols. The error signal is also used to interpolate between available samples to infinitesimally approach the point of maximum eye opening. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165916 | Wireless Star Network with Standby Central Node - A wireless network with a star topology includes a first central node, a second central node, wherein the first and second nodes are functionally equivalent. A set of leaf nodes are configured to communicate with either the first central node or the second central node via wireless links, depending whether the central nodes are active or inactive. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165917 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, ACCESS GATEWAY APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication control system capable of reducing the traffic amount, CPU's processing load and channel bands related to a location registering process. In this system, a transmitting/receiving part ( | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165918 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER, CELLULAR AND LOCATING CELL DISPLAY METHOD FOR USE THEREWITH - The present invention provides a mobile communication system in which a cellular is capable of notifying the user of correct information of an event that the cellular is locating in a cell supporting HSDPA and an event that the cellular is locating in a cell supporting E-DCH. There are notified reconfiguration messages each of which includes “HSDPA cell indicator” and “E-DCH cell indicator” from a cellular base station apparatus | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165919 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data transmission method for a mobile communication system is disclosed. A data transmission method at a specific protocol layer of a reception end of a mobile communication system includes receiving at least one data block of a specific protocol layer from a transmission end, and transmitting reception status indication information to the transmission end according to a reception status of the data block of the specific protocol layer. As a result, data can be more quickly and effectively transmitted to a destination. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165920 | METHOD FOR BOOSTING DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION TO MOBILE STATION AND SYSTEM UTILIZING THE SAME - The invention discloses a method for boosting the downlink transmission rate to a mobile station by a processing unit thereof, including the steps of requesting a base station for a bandwidth amount for transmission of at least one un-generated acknowledgement (ACK) packet, generating the ACK packet or packets, and instructing an RF module to transmit the ACK packet or packets to the base station following a notification from the base station indicating that the requested bandwidth amount has been allocated. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165921 | Mobile Station Handover in a Localized Base Station Environment - According to one general aspect, a method of operating a indoor cellular access point (ICAP) may comprise constructing a neighbor list of neighboring indoor cellular access points (NICAPs). The method may also include detecting at least one overlay macro base stations (OMBSs). In one embodiment, the method may further comprise associating the overlay macro base stations with the indoor cellular access point. The method may also include transmitting a message to a mobile station (MS) wherein the message includes the neighbor list. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165922 | DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A communication system for use in a wireless network includes: an audio module configured to provide packets indicative of audio for a part of a communication between the communication system and another communication system, the communication spanning packet times, the packets including at least critical packets indicative of critical audio; and a transceiver coupled to the audio module and configured to cause: the critical packets to be conveyed for transmission; and first non-critical packets, indicative of non-critical audio, to be conveyed for transmission such that (1) the first non-critical packets represent less than all of a time between transmission of critical packets and (2) no more than a threshold number of packet times will pass without one of the critical packets or one of the first non-critical packets being conveyed by the transceiver for transmission. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165923 | WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network is provided. The wireless network includes a predetermined wireless router and a plurality of wireless routers. The predetermined wireless router has gateway functionality for accessing an external network. Each wireless router of the wireless routers has a single transceiver, and the wireless routers include at least a wireless router which communicates with other wireless router(s) in the wireless network for forwarding network packets by using a single fixed channel and at least a wireless router which communicates with other wireless router(s) in the wireless network for forwarding network packets by using a plurality of channels. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100165924 | RADIO INTEROPERABILITY SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method, system and memory are provided for enabling interoperability. A communication session between different communication systems, such as radio systems, operating using different protocols is initiated by receiving a scenario identifier from one of the user devices. An interoperability server receives the scenario identifier and accesses interoperability data to obtain the connection information corresponding the scenario matching the scenario identifier. The data includes scenarios for communication sessions and the connections required for each scenario. Once the interoperability server obtains the connection information, the communication session is initiated. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100172286 | RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION APPARATUS AND PILOT TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided is a base station capable of giving a pilot appropriate for both of multicast data and unicast data which are frequency-multiplexed. In a pilot generation unit ( | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172287 | TEMPORAL NETWORK SERVER CONNECTED DEVICES WITH OFF-LINE AD HOC UPDATE AND INTERACTION CAPABILITY - A system and method for using mobile network devices that are periodically connected to a network server are disclosed. The devices exchange data in an ad hoc manner when not connected to the server. In the preferred embodiment, independent mobile wireless network devices are connected to a network server through a client computing device acting as a gateway to the server. The presence of the mobile network device and the client computing device cause both devices to become users. The server pairs both the network device and the client computing device with a unique identity contained on the network device. Paired and independent identities that have presence on the server then interact with each other in such a manner that data on the connected mobile network devices is changed and stored in concordance with this community interaction. Unconnected mobile network devices search for other unconnected mobile network devices within range to form an ad hoc network. This allows the mobile network devices to exchange and store data related to their last community server interaction. This data is context specific in terms of the specific services used by the by the users that had presence on the community server. User interaction directly with mobile network devices can change this information locally even when not connected to a client computer. This information will also be exchanged and affect data stored on mobile devices that are part of an independent ad hoc network according to the context of the previous server data stored on the mobile devices. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172288 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDIRECTING MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - A cellular communication system is capable of supporting local access points with shorter communication ranges than macro cells within which they are positioned. When a user wishes to send a communication a request is sent to an access point. At the access point a determination is made as to whether or not the maximum capacity of the access point has been reached. If maximum capacity has been reached then a rejection signal is sent to the user equipment and the communication is redirected into the macro cell in which the access point is positioned. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172289 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR UTILIZING A CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICE IN A PACKET SWITCHED DOMAIN AND COMNUNICATION SYSTEM COMPRISING SUCH DEVICE - A method and a device for utilizing a circuit switched service in a packet switched domain are provided, wherein a mobile terminal is connected to a first network, said first network comprises a first service and a second service, wherein the mobile terminal is connected to the first service of the first network via a first MAC-d flow, said method comprises the steps of (i) at least one second MAC-d flow is set up between the mobile terminal and the second service of the first network; and (ii) at least a connection is set up via the at least one second MAC-d flow. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172290 | System and method for an uplink acknowledgement transmission in carrier-aggregated wireless communication systems - A system and method of uplink acknowledgement transmission. The wireless network implements carrier aggregation wherein a subscriber station may be allocated downlink resource blocks distributed over multiple downlink carriers. The subscriber station receives control channel elements from at least one base station on at least two downlink carriers. The subscriber station derives uplink acknowledgement signal cyclic shift resource indices for respective carriers from functions of the index of the control channel elements that have carried a downlink grant the respective downlink carrier. The subscriber station transmits N number of ACK/NACK symbols in at least one physical uplink channel resource. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172291 | Dual Base Stations for Wireless Communications Systems - A network apparatus comprises a controller to determine a first base station for transmitting data and to determine a second different base station for receiving data. In one embodiment, the network apparatus further comprises a transceiver to transmit data to the first base station while associated with the second base station. The transceiver is operable to receive data from the second base station while associated with the first base station. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172292 | Wireless Network Connectivity in Data Centers - A method for wireless network connectivity in a data center includes communicating between nodes in a data center across a wireless interconnectivity through artificially created paths between nodes in the data center, the nodes being at least one of a server, router, switch, and other such components in the data center that require connectivity; and managing the wireless interconnectivity by a control and management entity. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172293 | Lightweight Mobility Architecture - Mobility between access domains in an Internet Protocol (IP) network can be supported by introducing a so-called Mobility Manager (MM) that maintains a database of currently attached devices and their current access domain location. The mobility manager may then detect, for a device registered in the database, a change of access domain from a first access domain to a second access domain by monitoring connection maintenance signaling related to the considered device. The mobility manager should at least obtain an indication of such a change of access domain. In response to a detected change of access domain, the mobility manager arranges for a reconfiguration of the network to forward traffic destined to an IP address of the device in the first access domain to a new location in the second access domain. In this way, the mobility manager allows the device to keep its IP address when moving between access domains. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172294 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS AND ROUTER USING NETWORK-BASED IP MOBILITY PROTOCOL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR THE SAME - When a delivery of packets is made between LMA and MN, an options header that enables identification of MN is added between the router (MAG), located between LMA and MN, and LMA so as to achieve appropriate routing. When MN moved, buffer transfer from previous access MAGa to new access MAGb is performed also by adding an options header to make delivery to MN. In this way, in network-based IP mobility protocol, when the mobile terminal (MN) or the control apparatus (LMA) serves as a compressor or decompressor to compress packets, fast handover can be realized when the MN moved, whereby it is possible to save the band for the last one hop, which is the narrowest band. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172295 | Technique for Uplink Data Transmissions in Communication Networks - The invention relates to a technique for uplink data transmissions in, e.g., mobile networks. A method embodiment for performing the technique in a transmitter ( | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172296 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTENTION-BASED CHANNEL ACCESS FOR PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system and method for wireless communication is disclosed. One aspect of the system includes wireless devices, wherein the wireless devices are capable of establishing a peer-to-peer link by contention-based channel access, and wherein the wireless devices are free to contend any time for accessing a wireless channel. The system may include first and second wireless devices, each of which has a directional antenna system. The first wireless device can determine whether the wireless channel is available for establishing a peer-to-peer link, by repeating sensing whether the channel is idle in different directions each during different slot time periods. The first wireless device can also sequentially transmit multiple requests each in different directions for establishing a link with the second wireless device. The second wireless device can sequentially transmit multiple replies each in different directions for establishing the link with the first wireless device. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172297 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL BARRING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate cell barring based on erroneous messages received within a wireless communication system. As described herein, in the event that a device fails to receive and/or decode respective messages transmitted from a network cell over a common communication channel, the device can implement one or more error handling procedures as described herein to reselect away from the network cell and/or a frequency associated with the network cell (e.g., as if the network cell was explicitly barred). Cell barring can be triggered as described herein based on a count of erroneous messages (e.g., consecutive messages, messages received within a predetermined time window, etc.), elapsed time between erroneous messages, or the like. Further, cell barring can be performed as described herein based on failure to acquire pre-scheduled system information, common system information determined to have invalid abstract syntax, or the like. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172298 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF SENSOR NODE IN IP-BASED SENSOR NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for managing mobility of a sensor node in an Internet Protocol (IP)-based sensor network including a plurality of personal area networks (PANs) is provided. The apparatus for managing mobility of a sensor node in a personal area network (PAN), the apparatus including: a sensor node sensing unit to sense a sensor node moving into the PAN from another PAN; a proxy binding update (PBU) message generation unit to generate location change information of the sensed sensor node; and a PBU message transmission unit to transmit the location change information. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172299 | ENHANCEMENT OF LTE RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE - A method and apparatus for enhancement of the random access procedure of a Long-Term Evolution (LTE) system are provided. Enhancements include modeling one cycle in the random access procedure since only one counter is necessary and controlling the delay prior to the preamble transmission in order to reduce conflicts by multiple mobile terminals using the random access channel. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172300 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING REVERSE GAIN - A method for improving reverse coverage is disclosed, comprising: A, when a base station requests a terminal to enable the reverse repetition, under the condition that the service quality requirement and the transmission speed of the terminal are persistent, then step B is executed; B, if the reverse gain still cannot be improved after repetition, the reverse repetition will not be enabled; or, the reverse repetition will be enabled. The method of the present invention can take account of subchannelization gain, repetition gain and the interaction of both as an integration, to ensure that the whole gain of reverse link increases after the enabled repetition, and to prevent the system from sacrificing the bandwidth without improving but deteriorating the reverse coverage capability in certain circumstances after the enabled repetition occurs. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172301 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CANCELING A CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK - A method and apparatus may be used to cancel a communication session. The apparatus may transmit a first message to initiate a communication session and then transmit a second message that indicates a request to cancel the communication session. If the apparatus determines that there is an ongoing Packet Switched (PS) session, the apparatus may continue the ongoing PS session on a current Radio Access Technology (RAT) without performing an intersystem change. If the apparatus receives a handover (HO) command, the apparatus may transmit a message to reject the HO command, or it may ignore the HO command. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172302 | IPv4-to-IPv6 Address Transitioning Methods And Apparatus For Systems That Push Information To Wireless Communication Devices - A front end of an IPv6 communication network includes a network entry point device and a plurality of tunnel servers which facilitate the communication of user information between a host computer of an IPv4 communication network and an IPv6 wireless communication device. The network entry point device is configured to direct a tunnel request from the host computer to a selected tunnel server, which establishes a tunnel connection with the host computer. The tunnel server facilitates the communication of user information between the host and the wireless device through the tunnel connection. The tunnel server also performs a dynamic routing protocol (DRP). In accordance with the DRP, the tunnel server updates a local routing table to reflect the newly established tunnel connection and broadcasts updated routing table information to the other tunnel servers. In another related technical aspect, a back end of the IPv6 communication network facilitates communication with the IPv6 wireless device when it operates in an IPv4 wireless communication network. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172303 | System and Method for Downlink Signaling for High Speed Uplink Packet Access - A wireless communication system ( | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172304 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DIVERSITY PROCESSING INCLUDING USING DEDICATED PILOT METHOD FOR OPEN LOOP - Methods and systems for diversity processing including using dedicated pilot method for open loop may include combining a plurality of received WCDMA/HSDPA multipath signals for each diversity transmit antenna to at least one processed diversity signal. The received WCDMA/HSDPA multipath signals may originate from diversity transmit antennas at a base station that may be transmitting information via a closed loop or open loop diversity transmission mode. Open loop symbols may be estimated using information from at least one common pilot channel. At least a portion of the at least one processed diversity signal may be despread from the at least one common pilot channel. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100177679 | ROUTE DETERMINING METHODS FOR A NETWORK - An invitation message ( | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177680 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DELIVERING CONTENT USING NETWORKED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UNITS - A wireless network comprises a plurality of areas of interest and a core network coupled to each of the plurality of areas of interest to route real-time data from each of the plurality of areas of interest. Each of the plurality of areas of interest includes a plurality of wireless communication units. Each wireless communication unit comprises a local cache to store non-real-time data; and a gateway to process non-real-time data requests and provide an interface to a packet network. The plurality of wireless communication units in each of the plurality of areas of interest are networked together such that each wireless communication unit has access to data stored on the local cache of another of the plurality of wireless communication units, wherein the gateway in each of the plurality of wireless communication units is operable to provide the requested non-real-time data, if available, from one of its local cache and the cache of other wireless communication units prior to passing the non-real-time data request to the packet network. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177681 | Method and System for Target Positioning and Tracking in Cooperative Relay Networks - A method and system locates a position of a transceiver in a cooperative relay network of nodes. A primary node broadcasts a range request (RREQ) message. A target node, in response to receiving the RREQ message, broadcasts a range reply (RREP) message, wherein the RREP message includes a time difference between receiving the RREQ message and broadcasting the RREP message. A secondary node, in response to receiving the RREQ message and the RREP message, broadcasts a range data (RDAT) message, wherein the RDAT message includes a time difference between receiving the RREQ message and the RREP message. Then, a position solver can determine a location of the target node based on the time differences in the RREP message and the RDAT message. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177682 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVING RESPONSE MESSAGE TRANSMISSION RELIABILITY - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure improve a robustness of some critical MAC management response massages transmitted from a base station (BS) to a mobile station (MS). In this way, a reliability of transmission can be increased and a messaging failure that results in out of sync state between the MS and the BS can be avoided. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177683 | Method and Apparatus for Cell Searching - A cell searching procedure is modified to enable a user terminal to determine whether a detected signal originates in a known cell or a new cell having the same cell identifier as the known cell. When a signal is detected, the user terminal determines the cell identifier and timing of the detected signal. If the cell identifier matches a known cell and the timing is outside the timing window of the known cell, the user terminal compares detected signal with a corresponding received signal received from the known cell having the same cell identifier as the detected signal source. The user terminal determines, based on said comparison, whether the detected signal is from the known cell or a new cell. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177684 | WIRELESS MONITORING AND ALARM SYSTEM - A monitoring system includes a multi-hop time division multiple access communication system to link a control unit wirelessly and redundantly with a plurality of modules. Communications to modules occur during predetermined time slots in a first portion of a selected frame. Communications from the modules occur during corresponding time slots during a second portion of the frame. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177685 | TRANSFER OF MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CONTEXT IN CELLULAR NETWORKS USING EXTENDED ROUTING PROTOCOL - A new architecture provides network-based mobility in cellular networks that is built on Internet Protocol (IP)/Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technologies, such as Virtual Private Local Area Network (LAN) Service (VPLS), the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and BGP MPLS Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). The architecture consists of several building blocks that provide functionality for different aspects of cellular network mobility. One building block is network-based macro mobility in IP/MPLS networks. The macro mobility techniques described herein are built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block relates to transferring subscriber context between network devices while preserving the IP address of the subscriber. The techniques described herein provide a subscriber context transfer mechanism for mobile subscriber management that is built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block of the mobility architecture is network-based micro mobility based on VPLS. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177686 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING ROUTE OPTIMIZATION BETWEEN TWO NODES IN NETWORK BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method for performing route optimization between two nodes in network based mobility management, wherein each of the two nodes is associated with an access network via attachment to an access router, the access routers having directly or indirectly assigned a Mobility Access Gateway (MAG) that signals the node's presence to a Mobility Anchor (MA) which maintains the current IP address information along with location information of the node, is characterized in that some specific control for setting up a route optimized path for data packet exchange between the two nodes is assigned to the Mobility Anchors (MA). | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177687 | Communication method using statistical multiplexing and apparatus for performing the same - A communication method using statistical multiplexing in which pre-determined hopping patterns are respectively allocated to two or more users who communicate with a base station using orthogonal resources, the communication method includes: receiving a transmission signal transmitted using the orthogonal resources; and acquiring data from the received transmission signal, wherein each of the users belongs to one of two or more groups and the pre-determined hopping patterns are allocated to prevent collision between the users belonging to the same group. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177688 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER APPARATUS AND METHOD - A base station apparatus for use in a mobile communication system includes: a unit configured to generate a reference signal; a unit configured to generate a transmission symbol including the reference signal; a unit configured to transmit the transmission symbol for each sector; and a unit configured to monitor a radio propagation state. The reference signal is generated by multiplying a first sequence formed by a non-orthogonal code sequence which is different at least between an adjacent cell and an own cell, by a second sequence. Whether to form the second sequence by using an orthogonal code sequence which is different among sectors or by using a non-orthogonal code sequence is determined according to the radio propagation state. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177689 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS AND ROUTER USING NETWORK-BASED IP MOBILITY PROTOCOL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR THE SAME - When an MN | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177690 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UNIT - A wireless communication unit includes a baseband module and a radiofrequency module. A communication interface connects the baseband module to the radiofrequency module. Data can be communicated from the baseband module to the radiofrequency module and/or vice versa via the interface. The communication interface includes one or more data compression arrangement, for compressing original data to be transmitted over the communication interface, from a transmitting side of the communication interface to a receiving side of the communication interface, into compressed data and decompressing the compressed data after transmission and restoring the original data. The data compression arrangement may include a data compression unit at the transmitting side of the communication interface, and a data decompression unit at the receiving side of the communication interface. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177691 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING CAPABILITY OF A SERVING SYSTEM FOR ANCHORING A CALL USING AN INTELLIGENT NETWORK PROTOCOL | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177692 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION SESSION - A method and device for managing a communication session via a plurality of wireless carriers in a wireless communication network ( | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177693 | METHOD OF MAC HEADER GENERATION AND DATA TRANSMITTING - A method of generating MAC header and a method of transmitting data using the generated MAC header are disclosed. A mobile station can receive a message from a base station, the message including an indicator for identifying a service flow (SF). If the mobile station is connected with the base station to generate the service flow, the mobile station and the base station can map the service flow with the indicator. Accordingly, the base station can generate MAC header, which includes the indicator and a parameter representing whether the MAC header has been compressed. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177694 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION - A method for a user equipment to transmit uplink control information to a base station, the base station being configured to receive uplink control information on a plurality of groups of subcarriers. The method includes: randomly determining one of the groups of subcarriers; and transmitting uplink control information on the randomly determined group of subcarriers. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177695 | TECHNIQUE FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION USING MOBILE STATION SIGNALING - A Mobile Station (MS) and a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) Femtocell Base Station (FBS) for Interference Mitigation (IM) in a wireless communication system, and methods for their operation, are provided. A method for operating the MS includes determining if the MS cannot access a first CSG FBS due to interference from a second CSG FBS, the first CSG FBS being a CSG FBS that the MS is authorized to receive service from and the second CSG FBS being a CSG FBS that the MS is not authorized to receive service from, and if it is determined that the MS cannot access the first CSG FBS due to interference received from the second CSG FBS, transmitting an IM-Signal to the second CSG FBS requesting that the second CSG FBS mitigate the interference to the MS. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177696 | Apparatus and method for sharing information through presence service in a communication network - An apparatus is capable of sharing information through a presence service in a communication network and capable of providing presence information of a Mobile Station (MS). The apparatus extracts at least one of application information and contents indication information from an application in execution. Presence information is generated that includes at least one of the application information and the contents indication information, and transmitting the presence information to a presence server. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177697 | BASE STATION AND BROADCAST CHANNEL TRANSMISSION METHOD - A disclosed base station transmits a broadcast channel to a user device a predefined number of times in a predetermined cycle for communication with the user device. The base station includes a repetition unit configured to repeat the broadcast channel, after the broadcast channel is channel-coded, for the predefined number of times to generate multiple broadcast channels; and a signal waveform changing unit configured to process the generated broadcast channels such that the processed broadcast channels have different signal waveforms. Positions of the broadcast channels in the order of transmission in the predetermined cycle are associated with the signal waveforms of the broadcast channels. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177698 | Network Based Local Mobility Management - A network comprises a NetLMM domain having at least one Host Identity Protocol proxy coupled to one or more Access Points for communicating with a Mobile Node and acting, in use, as an Access Router for the NetLMM domain. Use of an HIP proxy as an Access Router allows the Access Router itself to be mobile. Furthermore, the Access Router can reside in IPv4 networks, and can even be behind NAT boxes located between the Access Router and a Local Mobility Anchor to which the Access Router is registered. The invention may be applied using a hierarchical architecture in which each domain comprises a respective Local Mobility Anchor coupled to each HIP proxy acting as an Access Router in the domain. The Local Mobility Anchor of a domain may itself be an HIP Local Mobility Anchor. Alternatively, the HIP proxies in a domain may be arranged in a distributed manner. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177699 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT AND EFFICIENT INFORMATION RETRIEVAL IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and apparatus of forming a generic overlay network for efficient information retrieval in a communications network, comprising receiving in a domain router a register request from a mobile communications apparatus, the register request including an identification of said mobile communications apparatus; looking-up an address to a next-hop router associated with the identification; sending the register request to the next-hop router; receiving a reply from the next-hop router; and if the reply includes an address to a home router, sending a reply to the mobile communications apparatus including the address of the home router, said reply initiating the establishment of a connection between the mobile communications apparatus and the home router. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177700 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION MODES BASED ON MULTIPLE SEARCH SPACES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for enabling multiple transmission modes based on control information of different formats. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177701 | TIMER POLL RETRANSMISSION EXPIRY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Providing for improved acknowledgment and retransmission protocols for wireless communication is described herein. By way of example, the acknowledgment and retransmission protocols can comprise including a poll element, or reply command, within a data unit that is part of a wireless transmission. A timer is set following sending the wireless transmission, and if a reply is not received within expiration of the timer, retransmission is triggered. According to specific aspects, retransmission comprises resending the data unit that includes the poll element or reply command. In this manner, redundant retransmission can be mitigated, whether because a receiver fails to successfully receive one or more subsets of the wireless transmission, or because the transmitter fails to obtain a reply to the wireless transmission. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177702 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND INSTALLATION FOR FORWARDING DATA TRANSMISSION FRAMES - In a system, the functionality is decentralized in a data transmission network so that the need of communications produced by and addressed to data terminals to pass by way of a single point in the data transmission network is diminished. A first data transmission installation is adapted to signal second data transmission installations, each of which is part of a ring-shaped data transmission topology, to be capable of building logical data transmission tunnels directed to the data terminals. Thereby, all the logical data transmission tunnels need not commence or, depending on the direction, terminate at the same point of a data transmission network. In addition, the data transmission installations present in a ring-shaped data transmission topology need not necessarily be taught routing information in order to enable each of these data transmission installations to send data transmission frames to be transmitted to another one of these data transmission installations. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177703 | Persistent Mesh for Isolated Mobile and Temporal Networking - A structured wireless mesh network is disclosed where a tree-like connection topology is formed. In one embodiment, each node has separate uplink and downlink radios operating on different channels. When a cluster of such nodes becomes isolated as in the case of a mobile mesh application, a node in the cluster according to this invention acts as a root node thus enabling the tree structure to persist, even in isolation. Example methods of joining sub networks are disclosed that guide the joining of mesh networks and channel management. Nodes that may operate in isolation also support a distributed DHCP capability such that IP addresses are assigned to clients even when a connection to a central DHCP server is unavailable. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177704 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING CROSS-LAYER QUALITY-OF-SERVICE FUNCTIONALITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for providing cross-layer quality-of-service (QoS) functionality in a wireless network is provided. The method includes obtaining QoS data from each layer of an application stack for a particular application. A QoS matrix is generated based on the obtained QoS data. Packet distribution for the particular application may then be prioritized based on the QoS matrix. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177705 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDLING SIMPLE IP TO MOBILE IP TRANSITION - Methods are provided for transitioning between SIP and MIP. Mobile devices, upon detecting a new system, automatically attempt a MIP session to avoid the default position of SIP. A history is maintained of systems visited, and for systems that did not support MIP in the past, a MIP session is not attempted, but rather SIP is initiated from the start. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100182948 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL APPARATUS USING THE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless unit | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182949 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING AND READING AN AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (ARQ) STATUS FEEDBACK MESSAGE - An automatic repeat request (ARQ) receiver is provided. The ARQ receiver comprises a receiver configured to receive a plurality of ARQ blocks. The ARQ receiver further comprises a processor configured to generate a feedback message configured to provide status of the plurality of ARQ blocks. The feedback message comprises an acknowledgement sequence number (ACK_SN) field and a flag field. The processor is configured to provide a first value in the flag field if the feedback message contains only the ACK_SN field and the flag field. The processor is also configured to provide a second value in the flag field if the feedback message contains one or more fields in addition to the ACK_SN field and the flag field. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182950 | SENSOR-BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS USING COMPRESSIVE SAMPLING - Methods, devices and systems for sensor-based wireless communication systems using compressive sampling are provided. In one embodiment, the method for sampling signals comprises receiving, over a wireless channel, a user equipment transmission based on an S-sparse combination of a set of vectors; down converting and discretizing the received transmission to create a discretized signal; correlating the discretized signal with a set of sense waveforms to create a set of samples, wherein a total number of samples in the set is equal to a total number of sense waveforms in the set, wherein the set of sense waveforms does not match the set of vectors, and wherein the total number of sense waveforms in the set of sense waveforms is fewer than a total number of vectors in the set of vectors; and transmitting at least one sample of the set of samples to a remote central processor. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182951 | Apparatus and method for rate control in broadband wireless communication system - A method for rate control in a wireless communication system includes feedback information indicating whether a packet is received, is received from a receiver. A channel state value measured by the receiver is received. It is determined whether the same feedback information is received from the receiver successively more than a predetermined frequency. A target error rate is controlled if the same feedback information is received successively more than the predetermined frequency. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182952 | RRC message transmission method in wireless communication system - A Radio Resource Control (RRC) message transmission method and apparatus for a wireless communication system operating in TTI and acknowledge mode is configured to reduce interruption time by minimizing retransmission times of RRC message. The message transmission method for a wireless communication system includes generating, at a transmitter, a message; transmitting the message two or more times consecutively from the transmitter to a receiver; analyzing, at a receiver, the message transmitted by the transmitter; transmitting an acknowledge message or a negative-acknowledge from the receiver to the transmitter depending on the analysis result; and terminating, at the transmitter, a retransmission process of the message upon receipt of the acknowledgement message. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182953 | METHOD FOR INFORMING HOME SUBSCRIBER SERVER OF STORING PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY ADDRESS INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a method for informing Home Subscriber Server (HSS) of Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN GW) address information to be stored in the HSS in the System Architecture Evolution. The method comprises: the Mobility Management Node acquires that the PDN GW address information is not stored in the HSS, or the Mobility Management Node selects another PDN GW; the Mobility Management Node informs the HSS of the PDN GW address information to store. According to the present invention, the HSS can obtain the PDN GW address information directly from the MME without the help of the 3GPP AAA Server and the roaming interface between the PDN GW and the HSS. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182954 | Private Base Station and Radio Network Entity - There is provided a private base station including a processing unit configured to scan data of overlaying macro cells of a public radio network in order to report the location of the private base station; a communication unit configured to request a connectivity service from the public radio network by using identification data of the private base station and the location of the private base station; and a communication unit configured to receive grant to utilize the re-quested connectivity service once the identification data has been verified by the public radio network. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182955 | Matching Used and Allowed Radio Access Technology Types - The present invention provides methods, an application node ( | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182956 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR SETTING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS OF THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A device capability attribute regarding a setting on communication parameters, and provision attribute information indicative of whether or not a communication terminal is in a state that it can provide communication parameters to another communication terminal are stored in advance. The communication terminal, where the device capability attribute has at least a provision capability of the communication parameters, is selected as a provision device. In a case where there are plural communication terminals where the device capability attribute has a communication parameter provision capability, a communication terminal where the device capability attribute has the communication parameter provision capability only is preferentially selected. In a case where the device capability attributes of respective communication terminals are equal, a communication terminal storing the provision attribute information indicative of the state that it can provide the communication parameters is selected as a provision device. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182957 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR MANAGING REVERSE LINK COMMUNICATION - An apparatus, system, and method efficiently manage reverse link resources by allowing a mobile station to select between transmitting a payload at a standard power level and transmitting a smaller payload at a boosted power level. The mobile station, therefore, can autonomously select a QoS (Quality of Service) level for physical layer packets. Based on reverse link transmission information received from a base station, the mobile station derives a reverse link transmission guideline defining the power levels and associated payloads for at least a standard service and boosted service. The mobile station selects a reverse link transmission power level from a plurality of power levels including at least a standard reverse link transmission power level associated with a standard payload size and a boosted reverse link transmission power level associated with a boosted payload size where the standard payload size is greater than the boosted payload size. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100189029 | DISTRIBUTED IP ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT PROTOCOL FOR A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK WITH COLLISION DETECTION - An apparatus and method for a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The method may include formation of a wireless home networking environment comprising a collection of nodes that operate as a decentralized, wireless network with multiple sub-networks or tiers that are responsible for different functions within the network. Each node of the multi-tier network is configured to forward data to other nodes and is assigned to a particular tier based on the node's performance capabilities. The method may include the automatic establishment of a unique Internet protocol (IP) address within a multi-hop wireless home mesh network with the ability to do automatic collision detection and correction. Once established as either a mobile node or a stationary node of the wireless home mesh network, a new node (the home electronics device) may wirelessly communicate with one or more existing nodes of the wireless home mesh network. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189030 | MULTIPLE ANTENNA MODE CONTROL METHOD BASED ON STATION - The present invention provides a multiple antenna mode control method based on Station, including the steps: step 1 the Station reports a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by the Station to the Access Point; step 2, the Access Point returns a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by the Access Point to the Station, or returns directly a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by both the Station and the Access Point to the Station; and step 3, a multiple antenna mode is chosen from a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by both the Station and the Access Point for communicating between the Station and the Access Point. Thereby, a best transmission quality can be achieved during data transmission, and furthermore, the retransmission times and the error frame rate are reduced, and the network throughput is decreased. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189031 | Wireless Communication Apparatus - In a wireless communication device, a switching section ( | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189032 | FREQUENCY HOPPING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for performing frequency hopping in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, frequency hopping may be performed based on both cell identity (ID) and system time information. In one design, a user equipment (UE) may determine a cell ID of a cell and may obtain system time information for the cell. The UE may determine resources to use for transmission with frequency hopping based on the cell ID and the system time information. In one design, the UE may initialize a PN generator in each radio frame with an initial value determined based on the cell ID and a system frame number (SFN) for the radio frame. The UE may determine the resources to use for transmission based on a hopping function, a mirroring function, and a PN sequence from the PN generator. The UE may send a transmission on the resources to the cell. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189033 | Method and System for Operating a Communication Network - A network node, a coordination node, a management node, a communication system and method for operating a communication system having a first type of communication network and a second type of communication network, wherein a request message identifying a network node in the first type of communication network is sent to the coordination node in the first type of communication network by the management node in the second type of communication network, the network node is removed from the first type of communication network by the coordination node, the removed network node is included in the second type of communication network by the management node, and a data interchange is performed between the management node and the network node inserted in the second type of communication network. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189034 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND SERVER APPARATUS - Each of wireless communication terminals UA | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189035 | Service Areas In CS Domain Services - The invention provides a method of enabling the service level networks (e.g. CSoLTE or IMS CN) to provide location-dependent services based on a circuit switched domain from a service level network to a mobile station communicating with a cell in a radio access network that utilises a packet switched domain. The method includes providing cell location information relating to the location of the cell; determining a Service Area Identifier based on the cell location information; and providing the Service Area Identifier to the service level network. The Service Area Identifier is then used for different location based services and applications in the service level network nodes. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189036 | METHOD FOR NEGOTIATING AND TRANSMITTING LENGTH INFORMATION OF LOCATION UPDATE TIME - A method for negotiating and transmitting location update time length information, applied in a Wimax network architecture, comprises: a mobile station initiating a request for initially accessing a network, a request for entering an idle mode, or a request for a location update to a services access service network gateway; when receiving said request, said services access service network gateway negotiating an idle mode timer length, and notifying said mobile station of the negotiated idle mode timer length. The present invention can implement the negotiation and transmission of location update time length information between access service network gateways as well as between an access service network gateway and a mobile station in a Wimax network so that the location update time lengths of the network side and the mobile station maintain consistent. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189037 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MOBILE ROUTER IN PROXY MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL VERSION 6 DOMAIN - A system for managing mobile routers connected to a PMIP6 (proxy mobile interne protocol version 6) domain is provided with a plurality of MAGs (mobility access gateways) to which the mobile routers are to be connected, an LMA (local mobility anchor), connected to the plurality of MAGs, for managing location information of the mobile routers and packet forwarding information of the mobile routers, and a profile server in which profile information of the mobile routers is registered. Further, the plurality of MAGs and the LMA set up forwarding information of a home prefix of a mobile router that is connected to the PMIP6 domain and a mobile network prefix managed by the connected mobile router, based on the profile information of the mobile routers registered in the profile server. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189038 | CIRCUIT AND METHOD FOR MAPPING DATA SYMBOLS AND REFERENCE SIGNALS FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT SYSTEMS - A method of mapping data in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes forming a first frame ( | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189039 | DERIVATION OF LTE SYSTEM INFORMATION RETRANSMISSION REDUNDANCY VERSIONS - A method and apparatus for transmitting system information in an e Node B includes a processor configured to map system information to a plurality of subframes, determine that at least one of the plurality of subframes includes non-SI information, and assign a redundancy version to all of the plurality of subframes except the at least one subframe including non-SI information such that the redundancy versions are assigned in a particular pattern and the at least one subframe including non-SI information does not effect the particular pattern. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189040 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION VIA UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL IN OFDMA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus is capable of transmitting information via an uplink control channel in an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) communication system. Uplink control information is encoded to obtain a predetermined bit string. A signal sequence corresponding to the predetermined bit string is generated. The signal sequence is cyclic-shifted according to a predetermined rule. The cyclic-shifted signal sequence is controlled according to a subframe length. Therefore, reception performance deterioration of an uplink control channel allocated to an irregular subframe can be minimized. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189041 | UTILIZATION OF THE INTERNET PROTOCOL TO FACILITATE COMMUNICATION INVOLVING MOBILE DEVICES - A data communication system capable of forwarding IP-addressed data to devices as such devices move among networks having different IP addresses is dislcosed herein. The system includes first and second networks containing first and second pluralities of nodes. At least one of the first plurality of nodes is adapted to receive data transmissions from an external IP-based network. Upon joining the first network, this device is assigned an IP address which remains with it irrespective of whether it moves beyond the range of the first network. When this device roams into the vicinity of the second network, data addressed to the device which is received at the first network is forwarded via at least one node of the second network to the roaming device. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189042 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER COMPENSATION - Aspects of compensating for transmitter output power may comprise sampling an on-chip transmitter circuit temperature at various time instants and determining a feedback temperature compensation value. At least one digital-to-analog converter may be adjusted by utilizing the feedback temperature compensation value, which may correspond to the sampled temperature. The digital-to-analog converter may be an I-component digital-to-analog converter and/or a Q-component digital-to-analog converter. At least a portion of the on-chip transmitter circuit may be characterized to determine power output dependence of the on-chip transmitter circuit on temperature variation of the on-chip transmitter circuit. Based on this characterization, a feedback temperature compensation value that may correspond to the sampled temperature may be used to adjust the digital-to-analog converter. The feedback temperature compensation value may be, for example, from a lookup table or an algorithm. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189043 | Seamless Wireless Mobility - Seamless wireless mobility is described. In one embodiment, a mobility manager can query a subscriber catalog for a current registration status of handset. The mobility manager can then use the registration status to send a first signal to the handset over either a wireless network or an Internet protocol-based network. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189044 | MULTI-NODE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF REQUESTING, REPORTING AND COLLECTING DESTINATION-NODE-BASED MEASUREMENTS AND ROUTE-BASED MEASUREMENTS - A multi-node communication system and method used to request, report and collect destination-node-based measurements and route-based measurements is disclosed. The communication system may be a mesh network including a plurality of mesh points (MPs). In one embodiment, a destination-node-based measurement request is sent to one or more destination nodes via destination-unicast, destination-multicast, or destination-broadcast, using routes specified via next-hop-unicast, next-hop-multicast, or next-hop-broadcast addressing. In another embodiment, a source node sends a measurement request message to a final destination node, whereby each node along the route individually sends a measurement report message to the source node. Alternatively, measurement results of each node are combined and appended to the measurement request message, and a measurement report message including the combined measurement results is sent to the source node. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100195566 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AND PROCESSING A POSITIONING REFERENCE SIGNAL BASED ON IDENTIFIER ASSOCIATED WITH A BASE STATION - A base station communicates a positioning reference signal (PRS) to wireless communication devices over a downlink in a wireless communication system by encoding a PRS into a first set of transmission resources, encoding other information into a second set of transmission resources, multiplexing the two sets of resources into a subframe such that the first set of resources is multiplexed into at least a portion of a first set of orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) symbols based on an identifier associated with the base station and the second set of resources is multiplexed into a second set of OFDM symbols, and transmitting the subframe. Upon receiving the subframe, a wireless device determines which set of transmission resources contains the PRS based on the identifier associated with the base station that transmitted the subframe and processes the set of resources containing the PRS to estimate timing (e.g., time of arrival) information. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195567 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS - Method for transmission of data packets by a first station, the packets being intended for a destination node belonging to a network comprising a second station, said packets being transmitted by said first station to said destination node via said second station. In order to simplify the transmission, the method comprises:
| 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195568 | MOBILE RADIO TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile radio terminal UE performs starting PNG, detecting a best cell, and starting generation of Long Code and receives various types of messages from a 1×RTT CS Access on the basis of System Information supplied from an E-UTRAN. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195569 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a communication terminal device that reduces, in a network using a power line, the percentage of bands consumed for transmission of control packets in the bands consumed for all the communication, so as to ensure transmission of data intended to be transmitted. A PLC terminal F | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195570 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER - A communication control system connects a call using a local service number valid within a local service area within which a user equipment is positioned, and forwards data via an internet protocol network, including a local number converter and a session controller group. The local number converter is located in each local service area, in response to a query specifying a local service number, accesses a database of correspondence between a local service number valid within the local service area and a global routable number, and determines a global routable number corresponding to the specified local service number. The session controller group accepts a call request including the local service number from the user equipment, queries the local number converter in the local service area to convert the local service number into a global routable number, and routes the internet protocol network using the global routable number. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195571 | Wireless Communication Device and Retransmission Judging Method - It is an object to provide a wireless communication device configured to reduce a communication resource necessary for retransmission, so that data transmission efficiency can be improved. In this device, when an NACK signal is input from an error detecting unit ( | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195572 | DISTRIBUTED PRIORITIZED CONTENTION FOR SPECTRUM SHARING - Techniques for use in contending for a portion of a television channel spectrum are disclosed. In some instances, a back-off value is used to decide whether a contender's contention number will be transmitted when the contention channel is free, and the back-off value is determined based on the contention number. In some instances, a contender monitors the contention channel and withdraws from contention if it detects from the contention channel that a higher priority contender is in contention. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195573 | SELECTIVELY INCLUDING ALLOWED CSG LIST IN PAGE MESSAGE - Problems caused by interaction between paging optimization and synchronizing CSG information are mitigated by setting a network indication indicating, for example, that a subscriber is no longer a member of a CSG, but the network has not yet received confirmation that an access terminal associated with the subscriber has been informed of this. A timer-based scheme may be employed for removing a CSG ID from the subscriber information for a subscriber once it is determined that the subscriber is no longer a member of the CSG. In addition, a temporary member of a CSG may determine whether it is still a member of a CSG upon expiration of a CSG timer. Also, the frequency with which an access terminal registers may be changed based on various criteria. Furthermore, an allowed CSG list may be selectively included in a page message depending on the destination of the page message. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195574 | Other Protocol Message Routing Over a Wireless Network of Metering Devices - Methods and apparatus are provided for routing DNP (or other) protocol messages over a network of an advanced metering infrastructure (AMI) system that employs a different communications protocol. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195575 | TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION OVER A DATA CHANNEL OR OVER A CONTROL CHANNEL - Methods and apparatus are described for a User Equipment (UE) to concurrently transmit Uplink Control Information (UCI) and data information to a Node B. The Node B can configure the UE whether to transmit UCI together with data information in a Physical Uplink Shared CHannel (PUSCH) or, separate from data information, in a Physical Uplink Control CHannel (PUCCH). The UE may also determine whether to transmit UCI together with data information in the PUSCH or, separate from data information, in the PUCCH based on criteria involving either a ratio of PUSCH resources for UCI transmission over the total PUSCH resources, a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) for the data information, an absolute power difference between PUCCH and PUSCH transmissions, whether the PUSCH transmission uses frequency hopping, or whether spatial multiplexing is used for the data transmission. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195576 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MESSAGE PUSH SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and a system for providing a push service in a wireless communication system adopting an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) scheme or an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) scheme are provided. The method includes when receiving a message from another network or another messaging server, transmitting, at a messaging server, a push service request message to a push server; when a Mobile Station (MS) of which the push service is requested using the push service request message of the messaging server, operates in an awake mode, transmitting, at the push server, a first push deliver message comprising a message designated for the MS, to a Base Station (BS), and when receiving the first push deliver message, transmitting, at the BS, a second push deliver message based on a Media Access Control (MAC) layer comprising the message designated for the MS, to the MS. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195577 | METHOD OF GENERATING AN INDEX VALUE - A method of generating an index value associated with a primary synchronization code within a communication signal includes splitting a sampled communication signal into even and odd samples. The even and odd samples are correlated with a primary synchronization code of the communication signal and complex values of the even and odd samples are generated. Signal strength values for the even and odd samples are approximated and the approximate signal strength values within a frame of the communication signal are accumulated. A highest accumulated signal strength value is assigned as an index value. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195578 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING VOIP DATA PACKETS IN GROUP COMMUNICATIONS AMONG WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICES - In group wireless telecommunication, such as push-to-talk (PTT) calls, a voice communication is broadcast through Internet protocol data packets to other member devices of the PTT group. At least one communication server receives a single communication stream from a communicating wireless device, such as a PTT call, and creates a group communication to all wireless telecommunication devices of the designated group with the broadcast of Internet protocol data packets containing the voice data of the communication stream to one or more wireless telecommunication devices of the receiving group that can receive and handle the packets. Other wireless network infrastructure can be used to assist the communication server in generation and broadcast of the Internet protocol data packets to the receiving wireless telecommunication devices. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100202344 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, DATA COMMUNICATION DEVICE, MOBILE BASE STATION, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - Disclosed is a technique which reduces the packet loss and the band consumption for data transfer when a mobile terminal conducts the handover between a fixed base station and a mobile base station for group movement. According to this technique, when an MH (mobile terminal) | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202345 | WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK BRIDGING ADAPTOR - A network bridging adaptor and method for enabling nodes to access a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The network bridging adaptor is adapted to operate in an ad hoc network having access restricted to only wireless nodes that are provided from a common entity. According to one embodiment of the invention, the network bridging adaptor comprises a housing; one or more ports positioned along a side of the housing to receive data from an electronic device; a first radio logic unit contained within the housing and adapted to transmit and receive messages in order to detect a presence of the ad hoc network; and a second radio logic unit contained within the housing and adapted to operate as an access point by establishing communications with nodes that are provided by an entity different than the common entity. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202346 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Provided in some embodiments is a method of wireless inter-vehicle communication. The method includes storing a message packet in a shared memory location of a first communication device. The shared memory location is wirelessly accessible by one or more other communication devices. The method also includes assessing, at a second communication device, whether or not the message packet stored in the shared memory location of the first communication device is intended to be received at the second communication device and assessing, at the second communication device, whether or not to accept the message packet from the shared memory location of the first communication device. Further, the method includes receiving at least a portion of the message packet at the second communication device if it is determined that the message packet should be accepted from the shared memory location of the first communication device. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202347 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACKNOWLEDGING SUCCESSFUL RECEPTION OF A DATA TRANSMISSION FOR MULTI-ACCESS COMPATIBILITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of wireless communication for acknowledging receipt of a packet is disclosed that includes determining that the packet has been received successfully; and, generating an acknowledgment (ACK) message upon the determination that the packet is received successfully, wherein the ACK message includes a unique identifier associated with a receiver used to receive the packet. An apparatus for performing the method is also disclosed herein. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202348 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PACKET ACKNOWLEDGMENT - Systems and methods for packet acknowledgement are disclosed. In one embodiment, codewords are redundantly used in order to decrease the total number of bits required for feeding back acknowledgment information or in order to increase the Euclidean space between codewords. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202349 | METHOD FOR USING AN EXTENDING SUPER-FRAME TO TRANSFER DATA IN A SHORT DISTANCE WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - A method for using an extending super-frame to transfer data in a short distance wireless personal network is provided. Firstly, the super-frame segments, which are in an active period of a network coordinator are continuously copied to a whole inactive period of a current device, and an extending super-frame segments are obtained. Then, information is broadcasted to all general devices. The general device with a quality of service requirement send a service guarantee time slot bandwidth application to the network coordinator, and indicates in the application that the extending super-frame is required. When the application is granted, the super-frame segments, which are in the active period of the current device are copied to the whole inactive period, and the extending super-frame segments are obtained. Then, data is transmitted to the network coordinator with the extending super-frame segments. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202350 | PROXY MOBILE IP SYSTEM, ACCESS GATEWAY AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE ORDER OF REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION MESSAGES USED THEREFOR - A proxy mobile IP system comprises: a mobile terminal including a time management/notification unit; the time management/notification unit alerting time information, managed by the mobile terminal itself, to an access gateway at the time of access authentication in proxy mobile IP (Internet Protocol) communication; the access gateway; the access gateway including a time information acquisition/management unit alerting the time information, received from the mobile terminal, to a mobility anchor, at the time of performing proxy mobile IP registration in the proxy mobile IP communication, as the time information received from the mobile terminal is carried on a registration notification message; and the mobility anchor; the mobility anchor including a time information acquisition/management unit alerting the registration notification message including the time information to a proxy mobile IP registration unit responsible for performing proxy mobile IP registration. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202351 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING ADDRESSING BY USER STATIC IP ADDRESS IN LTE SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, system and relevant apparatuses for supporting addressing by a user static Internet Protocol (IP) address in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. The method includes: when a user attaches to a network, downloading, by a Home Subscriber Server (HSS), user subscription data including a user static IP address and information of a corresponding Access Point Name (APN) to a Mobility Management Entity (MME); sending, by the MME, the user static IP address and the information of the corresponding APN to a Serving Gateway (S-GW) through a Create Default Bearer Request message; sending, by the S-GW, the user static IP address, the information of the corresponding APN and an address of an S-GW serving the user to a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW) corresponding to the APN which corresponds to the user static IP address; and establishing, by the P-GW, a default bearer according to the user static IP address, the information of the corresponding APN and the address of the S-GW serving the user. The present invention solves the packet data addressing problem of the user static IP address in a simple manner. The procedure is simple and convenient for use and has better applicability. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202352 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTE-OPTIMIZED COMMUNICATION FOR A MOBILE NODE NESTED IN A MOBILE NETWORK - In a future scenario where end to end route optimization protocol such as the Access Router Option protocol and Hierarchical Mobility Management protocol are implemented in the visiting mobile nodes, mobile routers and the mobility anchor points, routing sub-optimality may occur when visiting mobile node that is nested is trying to communicate with the correspondent node. To overcome such routing sub-optimality arising in this heterogeneous protocol scenario, this invention presents a primary mechanism where the registration at the mobility anchor point is such that the local care-of address associated with visiting mobile node and local care-of addresses associated with upstream mobile routers of the visiting mobile node can be obtained using a single access router option protocol type of recursive tracing mechanism. Such tracing is achieved by embedding a different type of address in the access router option based binding registration at the mobility anchor point. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202353 | WIRELESS ACCESS MODULE WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA - An integrated wireless antenna/transceiver module that has particular application for use on a vehicle. The module includes a plurality of antenna radiating elements integrated on a circuit board where a separate radiating element is typically provided for each wireless application desirable for the particular vehicle. The module further includes a separate transceiver integrated on the circuit board where each transceiver is electrically coupled to a particular radiating element. Each of the transceivers is also electrically coupled to a local area network hub that receives signals from the transceiver, where the hub multiplexes the signals onto a digital interface to be sent to the particular application in the vehicle. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202354 | Frame Structure for Medium Access in Body Area Networks (BAN) - A system and method for providing a variety of medium access and power management methods are disclosed. A defined frame structure allows a hub and a node to use said methods for secured or unsecured communications with each other. Contended access is available during a random access phase. The node uses an alternate doubling of a backoff counter to reduce interference and resolve collisions with other nodes attempting to communicate with the hub in the random access phase. Non-contended access is also available, and the hub may schedule reoccurring or one-time allocation intervals for the node. The hub and the node may also establish polled and posted allocation intervals on an as needed basis. The node manages power usage by being at active mode at times during the beacon period when the node is expected to transmit or receive frames. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202355 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING ROUTE OPTIMIZATION IN 6LoWPAN BASED MANEMO ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided for registering a mobile router in an Internet Protocol version 6 over Low power Wireless Personal Area Network (6LoWPAN) network. The mobile router detects movement into a wireless network through the reception of a beacon message, and sends a Router Solicitation (RS) message requesting registration in the wireless network to a gateway. The gateway acquires an address of the mobile router from the RS message, stores the acquired address, assigns a new address to be used in the wireless network to the mobile router, and sends a Router Advertisement (RA) message with assigned address information and gateway address information, to the mobile router. The mobile router acquires the assigned address information and the gateway address information from the RA message. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202356 | BACKFIRE DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM (DAS) WITH DELAYED TRANSPORT - A distributed antenna system (DAS) is provided, comprising a host unit and a plurality of remote placed to define a common coverage area. Each of the plurality of remote units is communicatively coupled to the host unit, points at least partially towards the common coverage area, and simulcasts data from the host unit. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202357 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF A MOBILE NODE IN A MULTI-HOP IP NETWORK AND A NETWORK SYSTEM THEREFOR - A method is provided for supporting mobility of a Mobile Node (MN) in a multi-hop Internet Protocol (IP) network, in which an MN that has moved from a source Personal Area Network (PAN) to a target PAN, sends a Router Solicitation (RS) message with an option for requesting its profile to a gateway of the target PAN, and receives a Router Advertisement (RA) message from the gateway in response to the RS message. The RA message includes a home prefix of the MN as the requested profile. The method supports mobility of MNs, enables unicast communication, and facilitates efficient use of the network. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202358 | PROCESSING APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - The invention discloses an apparatus and transmission method thereof. The apparatus combines a wired network transmission unit with a wireless network transmission unit. A control unit distributes and controls the packet to achieve the purpose of link aggregation and fail-over function. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202359 | RADAR DETECTION AND DYNAMIC FREQUENCY SELECTION - A wireless network device includes a correlation module, an automatic gain control module, and a control module. The correlation module correlates a predetermined portion of a radio frequency (RF) signal and generates a correlation signal based thereon. The automatic gain control (AGC) module generates a gain control signal based on said RF signal. The control module selectively determines whether said RF signal is a radar signal based on said correlation signal and said gain control signal. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202360 | MAC MULTIPLEXING AND TFC SELECTION FOR ENHANCED UPLINK - A method and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) for multiplexing data for an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) is disclosed. The WTRU receives at least one serving grant and at least one non-scheduled grant, wherein the at least one serving grant is a grant for scheduled data transmission and the at least one non-scheduled grant is a grant for non-scheduled data transmission. The WTRU determines supported enhanced dedicated channel transport format combinations (E-TFCs). The WTRU determines an enhanced uplink medium access control (MAC-e) protocol data unit (PDU) payload amount. For each logical channel, in order of priority, the WTRU multiplexes data from MAC-d flows associated with each logical channel into a MAC-e PDU, wherein each MAC-d flow is configured as either a scheduled MAC-d flow or a non-scheduled MAC-d flow, wherein on a condition that the MAC-e PDU payload amount is not equal to a supported E-TFC size, reducing the amount of data from a scheduled MAC-d flow to multiplex into the MAC-e PDU, based on a next smaller E-TFC size relative to the MAC-e PDU payload amount. The WTRU selects an E-TFC for transmission of the MAC-e PDU, wherein the selected E-TFC is a smallest E-TFC that supports the MAC-e PDU. The WTRU transmit the MAC-e PDU over the E-DCH processed in accordance with the selected E-TFC. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202361 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING IP MOBILITY WITH HIGH SPEED ACCESS AND NETWORK INTELLIGENCE IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - An architecture for network layer mobility support, using always on broadband high speed access and a network-based mobility manager, termed as a network server or gateway is disclosed. The present invention obviates the need of MIP for IP mobility. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202362 | Network-Initiated Session Recovery - Techniques for network-initiated session recovery are described. A relationship is maintained between two identifiers both associated with a session between a first device and an access terminal in a wireless network. The first identifier is associated with the first device, and the second identifier is associated with a second device in communication with the first device. After a breach of the session, communications associated with the session are preserved based on the relationship between the first and second identifiers. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202363 | METHOD OF SCHEDULING FOR ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL (E-DCH) - A method of scheduling for an Enhanced Dedicated Channel (E-DCH) in a user equipment (UE) is disclosed. More specifically, a method of receiving an information indicating an allowable transmit power range from a base station and updating a group of Transport Format Combinations (TFCs) allowed by the base station by selecting the TFCs that can be used within the allowable transmit power range. Furthermore, the method comprises transmitting the E-DCH by at least one TFC selected from the group of TFCs. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202364 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATIONS OF DATA FROM MULTIPLE BASE STATIONS TO A MOBILE STATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method provides for controlling communications from multiple base stations to a mobile station in a communication system. A mobile station transmitter transmits from the mobile station channel quality indicator data of a first base station. The data is covered with Walsh code assigned to the first base station. A base station receiver receives the transmission of the channel quality indicator data of the first base station. The mobile station transmitter punctures the transmission of the channel quality indicator data of the first base station with null channel quality indicator data, and covers the null channel quality data with Walsh code assigned to a second base station of the multiple base stations to indicate a desire to switch a source of transmission of traffic data from the first base station to the second base station. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202365 | MODULAR COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD - A modular device for providing wireless services and a network of such devices. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100208648 | LOCATION-BASED IMS SERVER SELECTION - A user location is estimated based on an IP address assigned to the user's device/equipment during registration for multimedia application services that are provided over the IP multimedia subsystems (IMS) network. The latitude and longitude information of the user location is obtained based on the IP address assigned to the user device/equipment. Such information is used to determine an appropriate server(s) for establishing an IP multimedia service session. In some embodiments, a closely located IMS server(s) is selected for proxying, interrogating, providing or delivering IP multimedia services. In this manner, each user device/equipment communicates with IMS servers that are located close to the user and thus, the geographically distributed load among the IMS gateway servers can be achieved. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208649 | METHOD FOR POSITIONING USER EQUIPMENT ACCESSING MULTIPLE MOBILE NETWORKS - The invention provides a method for positioning a user equipment. First, a plurality of wireless links between the user equipment and a plurality of mobile networks are established. A plurality of first location information sets describing a location of the user equipment are then obtained from the mobile networks through the wireless links. The first location information sets are then converted to a plurality of second location information sets with a predetermined format. The second location information sets are then combined to estimate a third location information set describing the location of the user equipment. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208650 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING OR RECEIVING DATA UNIT USING HEADER FIELD EXISTENCE INDICATOR - A method for transmitting and receiving data between a base station and a terminal in an E-UMTS (Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) or an LTE (Long Term Evolution) system is disclosed. A header overhead of data transmitted from a wireless end can be minimized by adding a header field existence indicator indicating presence or absence of a header in an upper data block to a data block of a lower layer, to thus effectively use radio resources. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208651 | Out of Sequence Delivery of Status Reports on a Separate Channel - In a method and a system Radio Link Control (RLC) Status Reports in a cellular radio system employing Acknowledge Mode (AM) RLC are not delivered in sequence, thereby obtaining an increased peak throughput. Thus, even when an in-sequence delivery exists, for example if the system uses HARQ transmission, it is not used for data related to the RLC status report. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208652 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, TELECOMMUNICATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention provides a wireless communication method. The method comprises launching an application which requires a network service for a data transmission and generating a connection request. Then, a wireless communication function is turned on to implement a channel scan according to the connection request. When at least an access point of at least a wireless network is available, a network connection with the wireless network is established for the data transmission through the access point. When there is no available access point, the wireless communication function is terminated and a connection control mechanism is initiated. The connection control mechanism comprises forbidding re-turning on the wireless communication function within a connection suspension time and re-turning on the wireless communication function when the connection request is received after the connection suspension time. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208653 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ACCESS GATEWAY HAVING PLURAL USER PLANE AGWs - In an access gateway (AGW) comprising a C-AGW for handling control messages and a plurality of U-AGWs for handling data packets, when a tunnel setup request is issued from one of base stations to hand over a mobile station, the C-AGW selects a new U-AGW being in the lowest load status out of the U-AGWs, estimates the load status of the new U-AGW in the case of changing the tunnel endpoint for the mobile station from a current U-AGW to the new U-AGW. The C-AGW designates the new U-AGW as the tunnel endpoint for the mobile station if the estimated load status satisfies a predetermined condition, but designates the current U-AGW as the tunnel endpoint if the estimated load status does not satisfy the predetermined condition. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208655 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING PACKET FOR REDUCING HEADER OVERHEAD - A method of transmitting a packet for reducing header overhead is disclosed. That is, a detailed method of transmitting a packet including a compressed header by omitting a header including the same information as a header of a packet which is previously transmitted or omitting information overlapping with the header of the packet which is previously transmitted is provided. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208656 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, PILOT CHANNEL GENERATION METHOD, SYNCHRONIZATION CHANNEL GENERATION METHOD, AND ANTENNA SELECTION METHOD - The present invention is to provide base station apparatuses and mobile station apparatuses suitable for a configuration of a distributed wireless communications system, configure the distributed wireless communications system, and provide a pilot channel generation method and synchronization generation method suitable for the distributed wireless communications system. Provided are a control signal generating section | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208657 | PROXY MOBILE IP SYSTEM, ACCESS GATEWAY AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE ORDER OF REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION MESSAGES USED THEREFOR - In a proxy mobile IP system, a mobility anchor comprises: a proxy mobile IP registration unit effectuating proxy mobile IP registration in proxy mobile IP (Internet Protocol) communication by one or more registration notification messages from an access gateway; and a last registration time recording/management unit effectuating recording and management of time of last registration by the registration notification message. The mobility anchor, on receipt of a new registration notification message, determines, in case a receipt time difference (or a receipt time interval) between the time of receipt of the new registration notification message and a registration notification message recorded last time in the last registration time recording/management unit is within a pre-set period of time, and the access gateway has changed by switching, possibility of order reversal of the new registration notification message and the registration notification message recorded last time. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208658 | Method, Radio System, and Base Station - There is provided a method including providing a local breakout service to an Internet protocol gateway while retaining user access control and a remote Internet protocol gateway of a packet core network of a radio network for a mobile terminal; providing information on neighboring macro cells in which the local breakout service can continue, the macro cells belonging to a network using another tracking area than that of the serving cell of the mobile terminal; executing a handover process of the mobile terminal from a source base station in the serving cell of the mobile terminal to a target base station in a neighboring macro cell; and providing session continuation of the mobile terminal local breakout service traffic in the neighboring macro cell by controlling user plane tunneling between the target base station and the local packet switched network from which an Internet protocol address for the local breakout service was assigned. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208659 | LOCAL BREAK OUT IN CASE OF WIMAX ROAMING - Architecture, in particular a home agent being placed in a visited connectivity service network in order to separate a data traffic path to a home connectivity service network and a data traffic path to the internet in order to minimise a number of hops and delay times. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208660 | METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED DRX OPERATION FOR EASE OF SCHEDULING AND EFFECTIVE POWER SAVING - A method for improving performance of a discontinuous reception (DRX) mode is provided. The method includes assigning a plurality of DRX Start Offsets to a plurality of mobile stations served by a base station. By assigning a plurality of DRX Start Offsets to mobile stations, the mobile stations will not wake up at the same time, thus preventing excessive signaling overhead as well as improving scheduling and improving the power saved by a mobile station while executing DRX. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208661 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR A MOBILE STATION CELL SYSTEM - This invention describes a method, apparatus and system for a mobile-station cell system, MSCell for short. An MSCell operates in a wireless network, more specifically in a cell of the wireless network. It interacts with the cell's BS the way a regular MS(s) do. The MSCell consists of an MSCell base and multiple MSCell terminals. The MSCell base simulates the regular MS(s) to set up one or more radio connections with the BS and simultaneously serves its own MSCell terminals. In other words, the MSCell behaves simultaneously as regular MS(s) to the BS and as the base to all its MSCell terminals. The MSCell terminals gain services from the wireless network through the MSCell base. The MSCell can also operate independently of any BS to be a self-contained standalone system where its MSCell terminals can call each other. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208662 | Systems and Methods for Creating, Managing and Communicating Users and Applications on Spontaneous Area Networks - A Spontaneous Area Network (SPAN) is formed by mobile and fixed nodes using wireless transmission links between nodes, usually in a nearby geographical area. Applications allow users to create, join, leave, and manage SPANs and groups in a SPAN. Automatic procedures allow nodes to join other SPANs. Transmission power of the wireless network interface is dynamic, varying depending on battery level, type of information to transmit, state and topology of the network. A delay tolerant object layer abstraction creates, modifies, deletes, publishes, and handles Delay Tolerant Distributed Objects (DTDOs). A Patient Transport Protocol (PTP) ensures a reliable transport of information through the network while avoiding congestion conditions. An aggressive and explosive network protocol (AGENET) has routing and forwarding capacities and uses datagrams to establish communication between different nodes of the SPAN. Cooperation and diversity are exploited to react to node mobility that causes frequent changes in network topology and disconnections. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208663 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND NETWORK NODE - The invention discloses a technique to efficiently realize a routing based on preference of a mobile terminal in case the mobile terminal is connected to a mobility management domain of network base different from a home network domain. According to this technique, a mobile terminal (mobile node; MN) | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100214975 | FAST DATA-LINK CONNECTION METHOD FOR SAVING CONNECTION TIME IN CDMA 2000 NETWORK - Disclosed herein is a fast data call connection method capable of reducing a connection time and increasing the probability of connection success in a CDMA 2000 network. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214976 | OPERATOR CLOUD FOR MOBILE INTERNET SERVICES - An “operator cloud” is interposed between mobile subscribers and the Internet. The operator cloud aggregates operators so as to comprise a single node. The operator cloud can provide services through such aggregation, including the tracking of subscriber usage. The operator cloud services can produce accurate metrics concerning mobile Web traffic while safeguarding subscriber personal information. Thus, the metrics and associated information can be valuable to publishers in the mobile Web. In this way, the operator cloud services can be monetized to produce a revenue stream. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214977 | FEMTO-CELL MANAGEMENT BASED ON COMMUNICATION NETWORK BACKHAUL CAPABILITY - A method and apparatus for managing femto-cells based on communication network backhaul capability includes a step | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214978 | System and Method for Reducing Overhead in a Wireless Network - A method for reducing overhead includes concatenating a plurality of packets into a single jumbo packet. Each packet of the plurality of packets comprises a header. The method also includes identifying a base header from among the plurality of headers. The method further includes determining a plurality of hamming distances that are each associated with a respective packet of the plurality of packets other than the base header and are indicative of a number of differences between the respective header and another header of the plurality of headers. The method further includes determining a plurality of encoded values that are each associated with a respective packet of the plurality of packets other than the base header and determined based on a difference between the respective header and at least one other header. The method additionally includes generating, and transmitting via a wireless connection, a jumbo header comprising the base header, the plurality of hamming distances, and the plurality of encoded values. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214979 | GATEWAY ADVERTISEMENT IN A WIRELESS MESH - A computing environment containing a mesh network that is adapted to provide a reliable transport mechanism over which services may be delivered. Nodes of the mesh can automatically select routable addresses without conflicts, which allows nodes of the mesh to be accessed, even as the mesh changes through the addition or deletion of nodes. Also, nodes communicate with a protocol that supports service advertisements. These advertisements can identify mesh nodes that supply services, such as file or print servers, for which devices that have not yet connected to the network may be searching. Advertisements can also identify services to be used by nodes in the network, allowing, for example, a node to select a gateway providing a reliable connection to an external network. The mesh network can be used as a transport for communication using protocols, such as TCP/IP, that generally exhibit poor performance when using unreliable transports. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214980 | ERRORLESS AND HITLESS VARIABLE DATA RATE COMMUNICATIONS - A variable data rate wireless transmitter configured to receive input of data from a plurality of input channels and transmit at least some of the data over a variable data rate wireless point-to-point communication link, wherein portions of the data are associated with priorities, and the wireless transmitter is configured to change transmission of at least some of the portions of the data, based, at least partly, on the priorities associated with the portions of the data, and on a data rate configured for transmitting the portions of the data over the variable data rate wireless communication link. A variable data rate wireless receiver configured to receive data over a variable data rate wireless point-to-point communication link, including a delay compensation buffer configured to maintain a substantially fixed delay between input of the data into a wireless transmitter transmitting the data and output of the data from the delay compensation buffer, by maintaining a suitable output rate of the data from the delay compensation buffer. Related apparatus and methods are also described. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214981 | TRANSMISSION DEVICE, TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND TRANSMISSION PROGRAM - A transmission device ( | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214982 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, NETWORK NODE, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A technology is disclosed with which a mobile terminal moving in a PMIP domain receives various types of prefixes and selects a type of an address to be configured, and route optimization is performed without adding a signaling load on the PMIP domain. According to the technique, when connecting with a home domain, a MN ( | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214983 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COLLISION CODING DEVICES, SYSTEMS, & METHODS - Wireless communication collision coding devices, systems, and methods are provided. According to some embodiments, wireless communication systems can generally comprise a plurality of wireless access points and wireless clients. The wireless access points can be controlled by a network controller. The wireless access points can be configured to enable a plurality of wireless clients to wirelessly connect to the wireless access points. The wireless access points can be configured to encode data packets destined for the wireless clients with a collision coding scheme so that wireless data packets concurrently transmitted from at least two wireless access points colliding in air can be decoded at the wireless clients with the collision coding scheme so that data packets are not affected by collisions with another data packet. Other aspects, embodiments, and features, are also claimed and described. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214984 | METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS PROCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for a random access process in a mobile communication system. According to the exemplary embodiments, in the case where a mobile terminal requests a random access to a network, when the network is not able to promptly allocate a resource for the random access to the mobile terminal due to an insufficient resource, the mobile terminal is maintained in a standby state without repeatedly requesting the random access to the network. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the uplink signal interference caused by the repeated random access request, reduce the possibility of communication contention between the mobile terminals for the access to the mobile communication system, and reduce the power consumption of the mobile terminal. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214985 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL ON BANDWIDTH REQUEST CHANNEL AT MOBILE STATION, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS USING THE SAME, METHOD FOR PERFORMING BANDWIDTH REQUEST PROCEDURE AT BASE STATION, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A method for transmitting a signal on a bandwidth request channel, a mobile station apparatus using the same, a method for performing a bandwidth request procedure in relation to a bandwidth request from a mobile station, and a base station apparatus using the same are disclosed. A mobile station transmits a bandwidth request preamble and a bandwidth request message together to a base station to request a bandwidth. A region of the bandwidth request message may be configured as null tones. In response to the bandwidth request of the mobile station, the base station transmits a BR ACK A-MAP IE indicating reception of the bandwidth request to the mobile station in response to the bandwidth request. The base station transmits an uplink grant to the mobile station by a BR ACK A-MAP IE or a CDMA allocation A-MAP IE. Upon receipt of the uplink grant from the base station, the mobile station transmits uplink scheduled data to the base station. However, if the base station fails to decode the quick access message or the region of the quick access message is filled with null tones, the base station transmits a grant for a bandwidth request header to the mobile station, instead of an uplink grant. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214986 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING CONNECTION PAYLOAD INFORMATION IN MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT - A method and system for encoding connection payload information of a plurality of connection payloads in a Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (PDU) are provided. The method includes encoding connection payload information of a first connection payload from the plurality of connection payloads in a first header of the MAC PDU. The method also includes encoding connection payload information of each of a second set of connection payloads from the plurality of connection payloads in a second header of the MAC PDU, wherein the second set of connection payloads includes the plurality of connection payloads excluding the first connection payload. Further, the method sends the MAC PDU with encoded information. Thereafter, the method also includes a procedure to decode connection payload information of a plurality of connection payloads from a Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (PDU). | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214987 | TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL METHOD AND INFORMATION MEMORY MEDIUM - There is provided a terminal device or the like which can prevent a user from fall in trouble with an unknown third person when the user executes a network game or the like over a computer communication network. As terminal devices establish a connection in an ad-hoc mode, individual unique identification information thereof are exchanged and a communication for a game is carried out, the terminal devices saves the unique identification information of the communication counterparty. When the terminal devices establish a connection in an infrastructure mode, introduction requests each specifying the saved unique identification information are transmitted to a server device, the server device transmits introduction responses each informing an address of the terminal device to the terminal devices which have transmitted an introduction request specifying the unique identification information of the communication counterparty, and the terminal devices carry out a communication for the game. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214988 | METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY SETTING THE NUMBER OF HS-SCCH CHANNELS TO BE USED ON A CELL - Embodiments of the invention relate to methods for dynamically setting the number N of HS-SCCH channels to be used as signalling channels of the HS-DSCH traffic channel in a cell served by a Node B, which comprises, at predefined periods of time:
| 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214989 | Dynamic Selection By A Mobile Station Of Its Home Agent Using Its Preferred Roaming List (PRL) - Methods and systems are provided for dynamic selection by a mobile station of its home agent using its preferred roaming list (PRL). A mobile station maintains a PRL comprising an association between (i) a first set of data identifying a first wireless wide area network (WWAN) and (ii) a first identifier of a first home agent. The mobile station detects a broadcast of the first set of data by the first WWAN. Responsive to detecting the broadcast of the first set of data by the first WWAN, the mobile station connects to the first WWAN. Responsive to connecting to the first WWAN, the mobile station uses the first identifier to register with the first home agent. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100214990 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a communication system in which a communication is performed between a base station and one or more terminals by using one or more communication channels, a control element unit is defined by T OFDM symbols and F subcarriers. A second combination of T and F is determined for a first combination of T and F such that the number of modulation symbols (one OFDM symbol×one subcarrier) included in the control element unit defined by the second combination is closest to the number of modulation symbols included in the control element unit defined by the first combination. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100220647 | METHOD OF OPERATING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND SYSTEM,A COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND A SYSTEM INCLUDING THE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication system, such as UMTS, comprises a scheduler ( | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220648 | Method And Device For Controlling Data Flows At Communication Terminals - The present invention involves traffic management in a communication system ( | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220649 | PATH CONNECTION - If a packet received from a communication terminal is larger in size than a maximum transmission unit used between a wireless base station and a gateway apparatus and also if it cannot be fragmented, an echo request packet of a size not larger than the maximum transmission unit is generated and transmitted to the gateway apparatus. Thereafter, if an echo reply packet corresponding to the echo request packet is received from the gateway apparatus, an ICMP data packet including the value of the maximum transmission unit is generated and transmitted to the communication terminal. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220650 | COEXISTENCE OF DATA STREAMS - A system for transmitting data from two or more data streams on a communication channel between two or more devices. Roughly described, the data from each data stream is transmitted on the channel in the form of data packets, at least one data packet of one or more of the data streams being transmitted in between the data packets of the other data streams. The system is characterised in that the system comprises means to generate or process data packets for at least one of the data streams for transmission, the generated or processed data packets having a size below a certain value. Collisions between data packets of different data streams are thereby reduced. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220651 | Method and apparatus for broadcasting and receiving system information in OFDMA systems - A method for broadcasting system information via a broadcast channel (BCH) in an OFDMA system is provided. The BCH comprises one or more two-dimensional resource blocks. A plurality of pilot tones and a plurality of data tones are positioned within each resource block. The system information is mapped onto the plurality of data tones. In one embodiment, the plurality of pilot tones are located in configurable positions such that pilot tones of the same resource blocks transmitted by different base stations in the OFDMA system are interlaced to reduce pilot-to-pilot collision. In another embodiment, data tones that are located in pilot positions of other adjacent cells are nullified to reduce data-to-pilot collision. In one novel aspect, the property of interlaced pilot patterns and tone nullification is leveraged to estimate interference second-order statistics, which facilitates receiver implementation and improves receiver performance. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220652 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus to be used for a mobile communication system capable of providing communications using plural frequency carriers is disclosed. The base station apparatus includes a frequency carrier selection unit selecting one of a first frequency carrier and a second frequency carrier as a frequency carrier to be used for the communications based on at least one of a service type of the communications and a congestion degree of the communications, the first frequency carrier being used for communications based on allocation in which radio resources are dynamically allocated, the second frequency carrier being used for communications based on allocation in which the radio resources are allocated at every predetermined period. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220653 | MULTI-PATH ROUTING METHOD IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A multi-path routing method is provided a multi-path routing method for selecting appropriate multiple paths when information sensed from a source node is transmitted to a sink node in wireless sensor networks. The source node for transmitting the sensed information first transmits a Hello message to the sink node to identify the existence and position of the sink node. The sink node receives the Hello message and then re-transmits the Hello message with respect to all the received Hello messages. Respective middle nodes accumulate distances between the middle nodes while the Hello message is transmitted to the source node through a reverse path of the Hello message, and all the middle nodes maintain a real distance from the sink node. The source node receiving all the Hello messages can rout a plurality of appropriate paths through Hop-by-hop to the sink node by providing respective weights to an energy remaining amount, an appropriate transmission radius and a real distance from the sink node. Accordingly, priorities can be provided to lifetime of the source node, average energy consumption and the shortest path by adjusting the respective weights when routing the plurality of paths. In addition, appropriate paths can be routed considering the transmission success rate of a path, and a load balancing effect can be obtained using path cost. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220654 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION OVER SDMA - Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally relate to communication, and more specifically, to techniques for transmitting data in parallel, such as spatial division multiple access (SDMA) techniques. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220655 | METHOD AND A MOBILE PHONE TERMINAL ENABLING TO MERGE TELEPHONY SERVICES OVER HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method to merge telephony services over a circuit switched network ( | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220656 | SERVICE REDUNDANCY IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - This disclosure relates to an apparatus and method for providing service redundancy among devices in a communication network. The devices can be, for example, a mobility management entity (MME), a serving gateway (SGW), a PDN gateway (P-GW), a call session control function (CSCF), a SGSN, a GGSN, or any other device implemented on a chassis. The redundancy includes a geographic redundancy where the devices are remotely located from one another to prevent a service outage. The devices can provide redundancy to multiple other devices, such that one device serves as a backup to multiple other devices. The information used to provide service to a mobile node such as user equipment can be backed up on the redundancy device and the device can advertise the same routing information to the network so the network is unaware of any change. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220657 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT RELATING TO COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method and arrangements in a communications system enabled for transmission of several data streams to or from different receivers ( | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220658 | ORDERED AND DUPLICATE-FREE DELIVERY OF WIRELESS DATA FRAMES - Techniques for ordered and duplicate-free delivery of wireless data frames are provided. A source address, a destination address, and a message sequence number are acquired from a wireless data frame. The message sequence number is compared against a last-received message sequence number, and a last-delivered message sequence number. The destination address is also compared to a current address. In response to the compares, a decision is made to forward the wireless data frame to the destination address, discard the wireless frame as a duplicate wireless data frame, queue the wireless data frame, or release the wireless data frame to a next protocol layer. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220659 | Method, Device and System for Differentiating Operators in One Network - Methods, devices and apparatus are provided for differentiating operators in a wireless communications network. Information about the frequency occupied by the air interface resource of a service is received, and corresponding operator information is provided from the configured mapping relation between frequency information and operator information according to the received information about the frequency occupied by the air interface resource of the service. A Base Station Controller (BSC)/Packet Control Function (PCF), and a device and system for differentiating operators in a network for performing the above functions is also provided. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220660 | WIRELESS DATAGRAM TRANSACTION PROTOCOL SYSTEM - Systems are provided for sequencing, delivery acknowledgement, and throttling of data packets over a network layer, such as UDP and SMS. To support devices with limited battery resources, the invention incorporates asymmetric retry logic and/or acknowledgements with overlapping ranges, to minimize the transmissions required for the device. The sender of a data-bearing frame does not need to wait for a frame to be acknowledged before sending the next, such that many frames can be “in flight” at once. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220661 | PACKET CONCATENATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless network includes a transmitting device and a plurality of receiving devices. The transmitting device is configured to receive a plurality of data packets, including a first data packet and a second data packet, prepare a preamble, prepare a signal field for each of the plurality of data packets, including a first signal field based on the first data packet and a second signal field based on the second data packet, and broadcast the preamble, the first signal field, the first data packet, the second signal field, and the second data packet as a concatenated packet. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220662 | BEARER PROCESSING METHOD AND MOBILE MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A bearer processing method and a network device are provided. The method includes: determining whether a corresponding user equipment (UE) exists, if user subscription data recorded in a mobile management device is changed; and initiating a bearer modification or deletion process by the mobile management device according to the determining result with regard to whether the UE exists. The mobile management device includes: a storage unit, adapted to record user subscription data; a determination unit, adapted to determine whether a corresponding UE exists, after the user subscription data recorded in the storage unit is changed; and a trigger unit, adapted to initiate a bearer modification or deletion process according to the determining result with respect to whether the UE exists. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100226308 | node- arbitrated media access control protocol for ad hoc broadcast networks carrying ephemeral information - Techniques for organizing nodes of an ad hoc broadcast network into sets and employing the sets to arbitrate access by the nodes to a shared communications medium. Each node has a copy of a signal library and the node indicates its membership in the set by associating itself with a signal in the library. In one application, the signals are ranked, the set is a queue, and the node's position in the queue is indicated by the rank of the signal associated with the node. Each node has rules for selecting the next signal. The hidden terminal problem is solved by having each node broadcast its tone and all of the other tones it has heard. The techniques are particularly useful for the broadcast of ephemeral information by the nodes. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226309 | BEACONING MODE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to facilitating apparatus interaction. In at least one example embodiment of the present invention, apparatuses may comprise both triggered communication activities and automated communication activities. Triggered communication activities may correspond to, for example, user and/or application instigated actions in a wireless apparatus. Automated activities may occur without any requirement for user intervention, and further, without any notification to the user that an action has occurred. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226310 | INTERFACE SELECTION IN A MOVING NETWORK - A method of establishing a traffic route for a mobile network node attached to a mobile router, where the mobile router has a plurality of upstream interfaces available to it. The method comprises sending from the mobile router to the mobile node, identifiers of the interfaces and of their properties, the identifiers mapping to IPv6 traffic classes or IPv4 type of service. In the case of IPv6, the identifiers may be contained within router advertisement messages broadcast by the mobile router. At the mobile network node, an interface is chosen based upon the identified interface properties. The traffic class or type of service field of at least certain outgoing packets includes the identifier of the chosen interface. At the mobile router, packets are routed across the interface corresponding to the identifier contained in the traffic class or type of service fields, typically using rules created upon detection of a traffic class value in a packet header. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226311 | EFFICIENT PAGING OPERATION FOR FEMTOCELL DEPLOYMENT - Efficient paging operation for femtocell deployment is generally presented. In this regard, a paging controller is introduced including a wired backbone interface to communicate with a plurality of macro base stations and a plurality of femto base stations, and control logic, the control logic to generate a page for a mobile station, and the control logic to transmit the page over the wired backbone interface to a select subset of all base stations, wherein the select subset of all base stations includes base stations that the mobile station is authorized to access. Other embodiments are also described and claimed. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226312 | Apparatus and method for transmitting coexistence beacon protocol packet in cognitive radio wireless communication system - An apparatus and a method for transmitting a Coexistence Beacon Protocol (CBP) packet in a Cognitive Radio (CR) wireless communication system are provided. In the method for transmitting CBP packet in a transmitter that operates in a scalable Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) mode, a priority is given to each channel of one or more channels based at least partly upon channel use statuses of two or more neighbor Wireless Regional Area Networks (WRANs). Whether a Quality of Service (QoS) for CBP packet transmission for each channel is met is sequentially determined according to the respective priority. A channel having a highest priority is selected from the one or more channels meeting the QoS as a channel for CBP packet transmission. A CBP packet is transmitted via the selected channel. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226313 | Proxy Binding Management in Mobile IP Networks - There is provided a method of managing binding information, on behalf of a Mobile Node, at a Home Agent in a Mobile IP network. A record of Correspondent Binding Recept ion and Correspondent Binding Registration is maintained at the Home Agent. The Correspondent Binding Reception record comprises a Home Address of the Mobile Node and a Care-of-Address of a Correspondent Node, and the Correspondent Binding Reception record comprises an IP address of the Correspondent Node and security credentials authenticating that the Home Agent can act on behalf of the Mobile Node. In the event that the Home Agent receives a Binding Update message on behalf of the Mobile Node, the Care of address of the Correspondent Node in the Correspondent Binding Reception record is updated. In the event that the Home Agent sends a Binding Update message on behalf of the Mobile Node, it is sent using the security credentials stored in the Correspondent Binding Reception record. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226314 | METHOD FOR USER EQUIPMENT PERFORMING DIRECT COMMUNICATIONS VIA HNB ACCESS SYSTEMS - A method for User Equipments performing direct communication via HNB access system, the method comprising steps of: Initiating, by a first UE having a unique identifier GII in a closed subscriber group (CSG), a call request to a second UE in the same CSG to inform the HNB access system of the unique identifier GII of the second UE; establishing, by the HNB access system, communication bearer via the HNB access system for the first and the second UEs if the two UEs are under the same HNB access system. With the method for UEs performing direct communication via HNB access system of the present invention, transmission efficiency can be improved upon application of HNB, and network resources can also be saved. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226315 | SCALABLE HEADER EXTENSION - Systems and methods for extending header fields are disclosed. The header field may be extended without changing the current size of the header. Reserve bits may be used to indicate the use of an extended header and the extended header may be store in a variety of locations within the frame, including the frame payload or pad bits. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226316 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PRIORITIZATION OF RETRANSMISSION OF PROTOCOL DATA UNITS TO ASSIST RADIO-LINK-CONTROL RETRANSMISSION - A medium access control (MAC) architecture reduces transmission latency for data block retransmissions. A plurality of data blocks are received and temporarily stored in a first memory (e.g., queue, buffer). The plurality of data blocks are then transmitted. A determination is made as to whether each of the transmitted data blocks was received successfully or needs to be retransmitted because the data block was not received successfully. Each of the transmitted data blocks that needs to be retransmitted is marked and temporarily stored in a second memory having a higher priority than the first memory. The marked data blocks are retransmitted before data blocks stored in the first memory location. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100232352 | PRECODING TECHNIQUE FOR MULTIUSER MIMO BASED ON EIGENMODE SELECTION AND MMSE - The present disclosure proposes a method for preceding of a transmission signal at an access point of a multiuser system based on eigenmode selection and minimum mean square error (MMSE) processing. The most reliable eigenmodes of every multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) channel in the system can be selected at each user terminal and corresponding eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be fed back to the access point. The linear MMSE precoding (beamforming) applied at the access point based on the selected eigenmodes may provide an improved transmission capacity performance compare to techniques from the prior art. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232353 | NEW ARCHITECTURAL MODEL FOR LTE (LONG TERM EVOLUTION) EPC (EVOLVED PACKET CORE) DEPLOYMENT - A system and methodology that provides a new a deployment model for a seamless migration to LTE (long term evolution)/EPC (Evolved packet core) is disclosed. In addition, an intelligent edge gateway (IEG) that can support future distributed architecture and a converged network for service providers is provided. Specifically, the model supports existing data services (e.g. UMTS) and the delivery of LTE services does not affect the existing data services. Moreover, a distributed architecture is employed, such that, local traffic is optimally routed at the edge and backhaul is minimized. The system can also provide support for enhanced Femto cell 3GPP access to a home network. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232354 | NODE QUERY IN AD HOC HOME MESH NETWORK - An embodiment is a technique to collect network and device information. A request for local information is responded to. The request is sent by a remote node in an ad hoc home mesh network. A first node listed in a local route table is queried for node information of the first node. Querying is expanded to a second node in the ad hoc home mesh network using the node information. The second node is a neighbor of the first node. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232355 | ASYMMETRIC BROADBAND DATA NETWORK - An asymmetric wireless network ( | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232356 | LAYER TWO SEGMENTATION TECHNIQUES FOR HIGH DATA RATE TRANSMISSIONS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided to enable a reduction in processing power while handling high data rates. An apparatus includes a processing system configured to service a MAC PDU. Here, the MAC PDU includes a MAC header and at least one MAC SDU. The MAC header includes a transmission sequence number (TSN) having a length greater than 6 bits. Further, the processing system is configured to read the MAC header and to transport the MAC PDU in accordance with the MAC header between a MAC and a PHY utilizing one or more transport blocks over one or more transport channels. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232357 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system which communicates data through communication between a first communication device and a second communication device having common network identification information, wherein a first communication device includes a first communication unit which communicates data to and from other communication device having the common network identification information, a first attachment unit to which a storage device is detachably attached, an issuing unit which obtains network identification information of other communication device and issues network identification information not coinciding with the network identification information of this communication device, and a writing unit which writes the network identification information issued by the issuing unit to the storage device attached to the first attachment unit. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232358 | FRAME BASED, ON-DEMAND SPECTRUM CONTENTION PROTOCOL VECTOR MESSAGING - A frame-based, on-demand spectrum contention protocol provides a fine grain allocation of a shared spectrum resource in a cognitive radio network. Each frame of a plurality of synchronized superframes is allocated independently based on contention criteria. As demands for increased spectrum resources are realized, targeted requests are issued to base stations currently occupying targeted data frames via vector messages. Such messages, carried by a beacon period within each data frame, identify to the current occupier of a data frame which data frames have been targeted for contention. A contention resolution occurs at the base station currently occupying the targeted spectrum resource and the results of which are communicated via other vector messages. After a predetermined period of time a vector message announces the release of the data allowing the contention winner to occupy the contended spectrum resource. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232359 | FRAME BASED, ON-DEMAND SPECTRUM CONTENTION DATA FRAME ACQUISITION - A frame-based, on-demand spectrum contention protocol provides a fine grain allocation of a shared spectrum resource in a cognitive radio network. Each frame of a plurality of synchronized superframes is allocated independently based on contention criteria. As demands for increased spectrum resources are realized, targeted requests are issued to base stations currently occupying targeted data frames. A contention resolution occurs at the base station currently occupying the targeted spectrum resource. The winner of the base station is announced and after a predetermined period of time, the contention winner occupies the contended spectrum resource. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232360 | FRAME-BASED, ON-DEMAND SPECTRUM CONTENTION SOURCE RESOLUTION - A frame-based, on-demand spectrum contention protocol provides a fine grain allocation of a shared spectrum resource in a cognitive radio network. Each frame of a plurality of synchronized superframes is allocated independently based on contention criteria. As demands for increased spectrum resources are realized targeted requests are issued to base stations currently occupying targeted data frames. A contention resolution occurs at the base station currently occupying the targeted spectrum resource. The winner of the base station is announced and after a predetermined period of time the contention winner occupies the contended spectrum resource. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232361 | FRAME BASED, ON-DEMAND SPECTRUM CONTENTION DESTINATION RESOLUTION - A frame-based, on-demand spectrum contention protocol provides a fine grain allocation of a shared spectrum resource in a cognitive radio network. Each frame of a plurality of synchronized superframes is allocated independently based on contention criteria. As demands for increased spectrum resources are realized targeted requests are issued to base stations currently occupying targeted data frames. A contention resolution occurs at the base station currently occupying the targeted spectrum resource. The winner of the base station is announced and after a predetermined period of time the contention winner occupies the contended spectrum resource. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232362 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING POSITION RELATED DATA - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose a method for providing positioning assistance data and other supporting information for positioning methods in a wireless communication system utilizing the long term evolution (LTE) standard. The positioning assistance data may be sent in a packet to a radio network node. The radio network node may broadcast the packet to one or more user equipments. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232363 | METHOD OF HANDLING PACKET ERROR IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of handling packet error for a communication device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of: obtaining a payload from a received protocol data unit (PDU) and verifying the payload according to a predetermined payload format. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232364 | METHOD OF HANDLING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of handling a random access procedure for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method of handling the random access procedure comprises the steps of applying a backoff parameter value associated with the random access procedure according to an operation mode of the mobile device and selecting a backoff time according to a uniform distribution between 0 and the backoff parameter value. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100238857 | CARRIER TIMING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Synchronization of uplink carriers for transmission is disclosed in accordance with different aspects. The uplink carriers that transmit information are configured such that at least one of the uplink carriers is an anchor carrier. When a plurality of carriers are thus configured for the uplink, they are synchronized such that they bear a predetermined phase relationship with each other. The predetermined phase relationship between the plurality of carriers depends on the transmit timing of the anchor carrier or a combination of transmit timings of the anchor carrier and one or more non-anchor carriers comprised within the uplink carriers. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238858 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS OF TERMINAL TO HOME (E)NODEB - A method for controlling access of a terminal to a Home (e)NodeB by a network entity, the terminal accessed to the Home (e)NodeB operated in a closed access mode or a hybrid access mode by using a specific closed subscriber group (CSG) ID, the method comprises: recognizing by the network entity, that an allowed access timer of the specific CSG ID with respect to the Home (e)NodeB has expired; transmitting an Update Bearer Request message to other network entity in order to change a membership of the expired CSG ID; transmitting a Bearer Modify Request message to the Home (e)NodeB in order to change a membership of the expired CSG ID; and updating a bearer with said other network entity, and a bearer with the Home (e)NodeB. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238859 | REDUCING ACCESS CHANNEL DELAY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for reducing access channel delay in a wireless communication system includes a step | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238860 | NETWORK SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - In a network system provided with a plurality of wireless networks each having an access point and one or more wireless communication devices wirelessly connectable to the access point, and a predetermined network adapted to connect the access points of the plurality of wireless networks to each other, a predetermined wireless communication device issues inquiry request of the information to the other wireless communication devices, and then receives the inquiry response from each of the other wireless communication devices receiving the inquiry request, thereby receiving the BSSID. The BSSID thus received is accumulated in the first information table. By searching for the BSSID identical to the BSSID of the wireless network to which the predetermined wireless communication device belongs among the BSSID stored in the information table, the predetermined wireless communication device can detect the wireless communication device connected to the predetermined wireless network as the adjacent projector. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238861 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A radio communication terminal includes a link-usage level calculating section that calculates usage level of a radio link, and a data reception continuation/suspension determining section that determines continuation of data reception or suspension of data reception according to the level of usage calculated by the link-usage level calculating section. The link-usage level calculating section calculates a current usage level indicating a level of usage of the radio link associated with current data reception in the radio communication terminal. The data reception continuation/suspension determining section determines continuation of data reception when the current usage level is equal to or higher than a reference level of usage being a threshold and determines suspension of data reception when the current usage level is lower than the reference level of usage. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238862 | REAL-TIME NETWORK NODE LOCATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A real-time location system and method for a wireless network includes, in one embodiment: (a) obtaining received signal-strength indicator measurements between stationary routers and mobile devices; (b) determining the relative angles of mobile devices from stationary routers using directional antenna systems; and (c) using signal strength and angle information to calculate the location of mobile devices. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238863 | Method and Apparatus for Power Headroom Reporting - A method for performing Power Headroom Reporting (PHR) in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system supports Carrier Aggregation (CA), which enables the UE to perform transmission through multiple carriers. The method includes steps of configuring a plurality of uplink carriers, and generating at least one PHR values, each corresponding to one of the plurality of uplink carriers. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238864 | MOBILE TERMINAL, NETWORK NODE, AND PACKET TRANSFER MANAGEMENT NODE - A technique is disclosed, according to which a race condition between a PMIPv6 binding by a PBU message of PMIPv6 and a CMIPv6 binding by a BU message of CMIPv6 can be resolved. MN | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238865 | Data Burst Communication Techniques For Mobile Communication Devices Operating In Packet Data Sessions - In one illustrative example, a mobile communication device receives and decodes a plurality of packet data bursts over a packet data channel of a serving cell. While receiving and decoding the packet data bursts, the mobile communication device also receives and decodes a plurality of broadcast data bursts over a broadcast control channel of a neighbor cell. When a time conflict exists between receiving and decoding at least one of the packet data bursts and receiving and decoding at least one of the broadcast data bursts, the mobile communication device receives and decodes the at least one packet data burst instead of the at least one broadcast data burst when no imminent call drop between the mobile communication device and the serving cell is identified. On the other hand, the mobile communication device receives and decodes the at least one broadcast data burst instead of the at least one packet data burst when an imminent call drop between the mobile communication device and the serving cell is identified. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238866 | Method for Routing Ad-Hoc Signals - An ad-hoc network is a typically a dynamic collection of nodes capable of communicating therebetween without the aid of pre-established infrastructure. Ad-hoc networks differ from traditional networks in that the topology of interconnections between nodes is inherently dynamic and not fixed. Generally, the routing protocols belong to two groups: proactive and reactive. Proactive protocols attempt to maintain correct and up-to-date routing information at every node. Reactive protocols, in turn, collect necessary routing information only if a pair of nodes are to establish a communication. In accordance with embodiments of the invention a reactive ad-hoc network protocol is disclosed that uses controlled flooding to broadcast packets of information within the ad-hoc network. Furthermore, the ad-hoc network protocol does not maintain up-to-date routing information at every node in an ad-hoc network and does not utilize specific control messages to assure that packets within the ad-hoc network follow optimal paths. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238867 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR REGISTERING IN UNIVERSAL SERVICE INTERFACE SYSTEM - A method, an apparatus, and a system for registering in a USI system are disclosed herein. The method includes: an H-USI system receives a USI registration request message that carries an identifier of a terminal from a V-USI system; and the H-USI system interacts with an H-AAA server according to the USI registration request message to perform USI system registration for the terminal. An apparatus for registering in a USI system is disclosed herein. The apparatus includes a receiving module and a registering module. Through the method and the system disclosed herein, the terminal can be registered in the USI system successfully, and the USI service can be implemented smoothly. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100246479 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING A HIGH SPEED RADIO ACCESS BEARER FOR FOREGROUND APPLICATION - A method and system for establishing and maintaining a high speed tunnel between a mobile device and a network, the method determining whether a foreground application on the mobile device requires the high speed tunnel, and if the foreground application requires the high speed tunnel, closing all tunnels from the mobile device to a network except the tunnel for the foreground application. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246480 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A ROUTE BASED ON LINK METRICS INCORPORATING CHANNEL BANDWIDTH, SPATIAL STREAMS AND/OR GUARD INTERVAL IN A MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MIMO) NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for determining a link metric for a communication link along a path between a source node to a destination node is provided. A node can generate a link metric (LM) for the communication link between the particular node and next-hop node towards the destination node in the path based on a plurality of variables. The node can determine the LM for the communication link based on a plurality of variables including: bandwidth on the communication link, a number of spatial streams used to transmit over the communication link, and a guard interval used used to transmit over the communication link. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246481 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A NUMBER OF SPATIAL STREAMS TO BE USED FOR TRANSMISSION BASED ON PROBING OF CHANNELS - Systems and methods are provided for determining a number of spatial channels to use to transmit a data packet from a source node to a destination node. This determination can be made based on a Probability of Channel non-Correlation (PCC) function that is generated and updated by the source node based on feedback from the destination node. The PCC function indicates a probability of whether a plurality of spatial channels are non-correlated. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246482 | Method and System for Dynamic Adjustment of Power and Frequencies in a Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for dynamic adjustment of power, antenna direction and frequencies in a femtocell network are provided. In this regard, a communication system may comprise a plurality of femtocells, one or more base stations, and a femtocell management entity that coordinates operation of the plurality of femtocells. One or more parameters may be communicated from one of the plurality of femtocells and/or one or more base stations to the femtocell management entity. The femtocell management entity may be enabled to utilize the one or more parameters to determine configuration information for one of the plurality of femtocells and/or for one or more remaining ones of the plurality of femtocells. One of the plurality of femtocells may be enabled to receive the determined configuration information from the femtocell management entity. One of the plurality of femtocells may be configured utilizing the received determined configuration information. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246483 | Method and System for Communication Between a Plurality of Femtocells to Mitigate Interference Between the Femtocells - Aspects of a method and system for communication between a plurality of femtocells to mitigate interference between the femtocells are provided. In this regard, a first of a plurality of femtocells in a network may receive interference information from one or more other femtocells, one or more base stations, and/or one or more communication devices in the network. The first femtocell may determine configuration information for the first femtocell and one or more other femtocells in the network based on the communicated interference information. The first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network may be configured based on the determined configuration information. The interference between the plurality of femtocells may be mitigated based on configuring the first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network based on the determined configuration information. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246484 | COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND LOCATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - The present invention provides a new technique, according to which a mobile router can fulfill functions as a dynamic home agent, in a system where a plurality of mobile routers are in operation, under the management of a service provider belonging to the home agent. According to this technique, the home agent verifies the legitimacy of the mobile router when it receives a Query message and a binding update message requesting permission to fulfill functions as dynamic home agent. Then, after confirming that no other mobile router is currently present, which is fulfilling the functions as dynamic home agent in a set of a plurality of mobile routers, to which this mobile router belongs, it allows said mobile router to operate as the dynamic home agent. Then, even when other mobile router requests the permission to fulfill functions as the dynamic home agent, the request is rejected, and said other mobile router utilizes the mobile router, which is fulfilling functions of the dynamic home agent, as its home agent. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246485 | INFRASTRUCTURE FOR LOCATION DISCOVERY - Techniques are generally described for determining locations of a plurality of communication devices in a network. In some examples, methods for creating a location discovery infrastructure (LDI) for estimating locations of one or more of a plurality of communication nodes may comprise one or more of determining a plurality of locations in the terrain to place a corresponding plurality of beacon nodes, determining a plurality of beacon node groups for the placed beacon nodes, and determining a schedule for the placed beacon nodes to be active. Additional variants and embodiments are also disclosed. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246486 | INTELLIGENT HOTSPOT CONNECTION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Intelligent hotspot connection systems and methods are provided. The intelligent hotspot connection system includes a storage unit, a wireless connection unit, and a processing unit. The storage unit includes a hotspot information database recording at least one property for each of a plurality of hotspots, and a hotspot preference database recording at least one preference inclination, respectively defining a reference weight for the property and signal strength. The processing unit detects the signal strength of the respective hotspots via the wireless connection unit. The processing unit obtains the preference inclination, and calculates a score for the respective hotspots according to the preference inclination, the property and signal strength of the respective hotspots. The processing unit selects and automatically connects to the hotspot with the highest score via the wireless connection unit. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246487 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD THEREOF - In a radio base station apparatus that connects a radio control device and plural radio devices to each other through plural links and transmits and receives data by using a frame, a synchronization unit calculates a difference between a first reference counter and a second reference counter from first and second transmission values and first and second reception values and corrects a count value of the second reference counter based on the difference so as to make the count value of the second reference counter coincide with a count value of the first reference counter. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246488 | WWAN TO ETHERNET CONVERTER AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREOF - A wireless wide area network (WWAN) to Ethernet converter comprises a subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, for accessing data stored in a SIM card; a radio frequency (RF) circuit, for receiving in the WWAM an RF signal associated with the data stored in the SIM card and for converting between the RF signal and a baseband signal; a digital signal processor (DSP), coupled to the RF circuit, for processing the baseband signal; and an Ethernet control device, coupled to the DSP, for converting between the processed baseband signal and an Ethernet signal. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246489 | MIMO OFDMA WITH ANTENNA SELECTION AND SUBBAND HANDOFF - An access node wirelessly coupled to a plurality of access terminals, having a subband scheduler, a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplex elements, and a plurality of antennas. The subband scheduler receives precoded data, and schedules transmission of a preamble signal and a plurality of data streams. The plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplex elements converts the preamble signal and the plurality of data streams into a corresponding preamble tone and a corresponding plurality of data tones. The preamble tone indicates a mapping of the plurality of data tones to one or more of the plurality of access terminals. The plurality of antennas transmits the corresponding preamble tone and the corresponding plurality of data tones in timely fashion for receipt by the plurality of access terminals. The corresponding preamble tone and the corresponding data tones are transmitted over subbands of a code division multiple access (CDMA)-based carrier frequency. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246490 | METHOD FOR HANDLING CORRUPTED SIGNALS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method is provided for combining corrupted messages received in a wireless network which comprises the following steps: (a) receiving a first message transmitted from one of a plurality of communication devices, wherein that first message is received as a corrupted message; (b) following the receipt of the first corrupted message, receiving a first plurality of messages, wherein the first plurality of messages are received as corrupted messages and wherein at least one of the first plurality of corrupted messages is essentially identical to the first message; (c) combining the first corrupted message with the at least one of the first plurality of corrupted messages that is essentially identical to that first message to form a combined message; and (d) deriving from the combined message information which was transmitted within the first message. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246491 | OPERATING METHOD AND APPARATUS ACCORDING TO DATA DUPLICATE RETRANSMISSION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An operating method and an apparatus according to data duplicate retransmission in a mobile communication system are provided. A method of a User Equipment (UE) according to data duplicate retransmission in a mobile communication system includes storing a Media Access Control Protocol Data Unit (MAC PDU) received from an Evolved Node B (ENB) in a soft buffer, decoding the MAC PDU, determining whether the decoding is a first successful decoding of data of the corresponding soft buffer, and determining whether to forward the decoded MAC PDU to an upper layer according to the determination result. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246492 | Method for Routing in a Mobile Ad Hoc Network - The present disclosure relates to mobile ad hoc networks that may include aircraft. Embodiments of the present invention provide a method of providing routing data for use in routing a message from a source node to available destination nodes through a mobile ad hoc network. A list of neighbour nodes corresponding to nodes within range for direct communication is obtained. For each neighbour node, a cost function is used to calculate the lowest costs of sending messages to respective available destination nodes; and routing data is generated based on these lowest costs. A message may be routed to the most suitable neighbour node by reference to the routing data. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246493 | CONTROL APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR CONTROLLING APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - A control apparatus communicable with a plurality of controlled apparatuses includes an acquisition unit configured to acquire information about a communication apparatus within a communication range of the controlled apparatus and information about other communication apparatuses within a communication range of the communication apparatus, and a selection unit configured to select the controlled apparatus that transmits a synchronization signal for synchronization based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246494 | System and Method for Communications Using Spatial Multiplexing with Incomplete Channel Information - A system and method for communications using spatial multiplexing with incomplete channel information are provided. A method for wireless communications includes receiving, at a controller, a reference signal transmitted by a communications device, computing channel statistics based on the received reference signal, computing a first beamforming vector and a second beamforming vector, and transmitting information to the communications device. The reference signal being transmitted using a subset of antennas used for data reception at the communications device, and the controller and the communications device utilize cross-polarized antennas. The computing being based on the channel statistics, the transmitting uses the first beamforming vector and the second beamforming vector, the first beamforming vector precodes information for a first antenna at the communications device, and the second beamforming vector precodes information for a second antenna at the communications device. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246495 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for providing a resource allocation of a Base Station (BS) in a mobile communication system includes, when a Mobile Station (MS) is located in a cell boundary region, locating a transmission frame region for the MS in a duty cycle reduction region. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246496 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING MIMO COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY AND HAVING MULTIPLE RECEIVING ANTENNAS TO BE SELECTED - Before start of streaming, a server apparatus obtains from client apparatuses their respective numbers of antenna combinations, determines a training time t | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246497 | SELECTIVE COMBINING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing duplicate avoidance of broadcast data packets in a (UE). The includes receiving a broadcast data packet from a plurality of cells; storing, if a sequence number of the received broadcast data packet does not fall within a reception window, the broadcast data packet in a buffer and updating the reception window based on the sequence number; determining, if the sequence number of the received broadcast data packet falls within the reception window, whether a broadcast data packet having the sequence number has previously been stored in the buffer; discarding the broadcast data packet, if the broadcast data packet has previously been stored in the buffer; and storing the broadcast data packet in the buffer, if the broadcast data packet has not previously been stored in the buffer. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100254304 | Differential Detection Unit for the Zigbee 802.15.4 Standard - The invention relates to a detection unit for detecting data symbols which are contained in a differentially demodulated signal and to which one respective PN sequence from a supply of sequences can be allocated at the transmission end. The inventive detection unit comprises the following units: a) a sequence supplying unit that is configured for supplying a third group of derived sequences. Said third group of derived sequences is provided with a derived sequence for each first PN sequence, which is assigned to said first PN sequence and can be derived therefrom by means of logical combinations but is not identical thereto while the derived sequences of the third group are different from each other only by cyclically shifting the chip values thereof; b) a correlation unit which is connected to the sequence supplying unit and is configured for calculating correlation results by correlating the differentially demodulated signal with each of the derived sequences of the third group; and c) an evaluation unit that is connected to the correlation unit and is configured for deriving the values of the data symbols by evaluating the correlation results. The invention also relates to a transceiver and an integrated circuit comprising such a detection unit. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254305 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - In mobile communication between a base station and a mobile station, reception quality is prevented from being degraded even when transmission power supplied from a base station is remarkably changed. A code generated in accordance with an amount of change in transmission power is transmitted from the base station to the mobile station. In the mobile station, the code generated by the base station is detected by a detector ( | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254306 | COMMUNICATION ROUTE CONTROLLER, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION ROUTE CONTROLLING METHOD AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A switching server | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254307 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A switching server | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254308 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PEER DISCOVERY IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus supporting enhanced discovery operations in peer to peer networks are described. Peer discovery, based on direct peer to peer discovery between two mobile nodes can be somewhat limited, e.g., due to power limitations, processing power, and/or channel conditions. An access point, e.g., base station, monitors for and receives peer discovery signals conveying a set of identifiers from a wireless communications device. The access point retransmits at least one identifier in the set in a wireless peer to peer communications channel. Thus the access point effectively extends the peer discovery range for wireless communications devices utilizing the peer to peer network. Wireless communications devices can monitor for and recover the rebroadcast peer discovery signals from access points. Thus, via access point signaling a wireless communications device can be made situationally aware of other devices of interest which would be otherwise outside its discovery detection range. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254309 | SYSTEM, DEVICE, AND METHOD FOR UNIFYING DIFFERENTLY-ROUTED NETWORKS USING VIRTUAL TOPOLOGY REPRESENTATIONS - Systems, devices, and methods for routing data through a first and a second ad-hoc network are described. Routing information structured according to a first routing protocol associated with a plurality of nodes in the first network is received at a border node that is part of at least the first and second ad-hoc networks. Routing information structured according to a second routing protocol associated with a plurality of nodes in the second ad-hoc network is also received. The received routing information is translated from the first routing protocol to the second routing protocol, or vice versa, and disseminated to nodes in the first or second ad-hoc networks. Data packets from nodes in the first ad-hoc network are forwarded to nodes in the second ad-hoc network, or vice versa, based in part on the translated routing information. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254310 | PACKET SNIFFER FOR AD HOC NETWORK - A sniffer for an ad-hoc network is described. The sniffer includes an RF transceiver for receiving network packets from an ad-hoc network, the RF transceiver being operable to receive the network packets without the sniffer being connected to the ad-hoc network; a microprocessor connected to the RF transceiver for processing the network packets to create associated FIFO packets; a memory connected to the microprocessor for storing the associated FIFO packets,- and a communications interface for receiving the associated FIFO packets from the memory and for transmitting the associated FIFO packets to a computer. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254311 | Pulse-Coupled Discrete-Time Phase Locked Loops For Wireless Networks - A model of a pulse-coupled discrete-time phase locked loops (PLLs) in a wireless network is provided. The PLLs at each node in the network may have an indeterminate order. A method for securing discrete-time distributed phase locked loops (PLLs) in a wireless network by including an outlier detection scheme in the timing update at each node is also provided. The method may include evaluating each collaborating node based on a weighted average of the clock errors and evaluating the dispersion of clock errors. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254312 | DYNAMICALLY TRANSFORMED CHANNEL SET ROUTING - A crosslayer routing operation in a network of cognitive radios retrieves routing input parameters from a crosslayer interface, creates additional parameters from retrieved parameters, processes retrieved and additional parameters using a knowledge mapping and reasoning engine, utilizes numeric or linguistic results for targeted routing operations, updates a routing knowledge database; and sends relevant routing information to a route controller. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254313 | Address Provisioning in a Mobile Telecommunication System - A method of provisioning an address of a Packet Mobile Switching Centre at a Mobile Station, the Packet Mobile Switching Centre providing an interface between a packet switched domain to which the Mobile Station is attached, and a circuit switched service domain, and the packet switched domain comprising a Mobility Management Entity for handling Mobility Management in respect of the Mobile Station and for performing location updates with the Packet Mobile Switching Centre on behalf of the Mobile Station. The method comprises sending a Location Update request from the Mobility Management Entity to a Mobile Switching Centre server within the Packet Mobile Switching Centre on behalf of the Mobile Station. In response, the Mobile Switching Centre server returns to the Mobility Management Entity a Location Update Accept containing an address of the Packet Mobile Switching Centre. The Mobility Management Entity forwards the address to the Mobile Terminal. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254314 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal comprises a communication unit, a detection unit, and a control unit. The communication unit wirelessly communicates with another communication terminal belonging to a wireless network where communication terminals directly communicate with each other and a communication terminal which does not belong to the wireless network. The detection unit detects a predetermined trigger. The control unit determines whether or not the communication unit is in a busy state with the other communication terminal belonging to the wireless network. The control unit controls the communication unit to prohibit transmission of a positive response to a connection request directed to the wireless network from the communication terminal which does not belong to the wireless network, upon detection of the trigger when determining that the communication unit is in the busy state with the other communication terminal. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254315 | METHOD FOR INDICATING MODULATION MODE IN HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESSING - The present invention discloses a method for indicating a modulation mode in HSDPA, comprising the following steps: a NodeB receiving capability information reported by a terminal, if determining that the terminal supports 64QAM modulation mode, determining a transmission block size, a modulation mode and code channel resource to be indicated based on an capability constraint condition and the capability information, and if the determined modulation mode is the same as a basic modulation mode satisfying requirement of the transmission block size, setting modulation mode information of a HS-SCCH as 0, otherwise setting the modulation mode information of the HS-SCCH as 1, and then sending the HS-SCCH to the terminal. Application of the present invention is compatible with a UE device which supports or does not support 64QAM high order modulation, without changing the current frame structure of the HS-SCCH, thereby achieving functional support of the 64QAM modulation mode. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254316 | Method for Routing Ad-Hoc Signals - An ad-hoc network is a typically a dynamic collection of nodes capable of communicating therebetween without the aid of pre-established infrastructure. Ad-hoc networks differ from traditional networks in that the topology of interconnections between nodes is inherently dynamic and not fixed. Generally, the routing protocols belong to two groups: proactive and reactive. Proactive protocols attempt to maintain correct and up-to-date routing information at every node. Reactive protocols, in turn, collect necessary routing information only if a pair of nodes are to establish a communication. In accordance with embodiments of the invention a reactive ad-hoc network protocol is disclosed that uses controlled flooding to broadcast packets of information within the ad-hoc network. Furthermore, the ad-hoc network protocol does not maintain up-to-date routing information at every node in an ad-hoc network and does not utilize specific control messages to assure that packets within the ad-hoc network follow optimal paths. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254317 | Full duplex network radio bridge with low latency and high throughput - A full duplex radio bridge using two transceivers coupled to a first packet network, one for transmitting data toward another radio bridge coupled to a second packet network, and the other for receiving data transmitted from the first packet network toward said second packet network by a transceiver of the other radio bridge. Each radio bridge is coupled to its packet network through one network port whose transmit data path is coupled to one of the transceivers, and whose receive data path is coupled to receive data from the other transceiver. An inner loop and outer loop is used. Management packets are routed to the various transceivers using the inner loop and outer loop by routing and filtering functions. Payload packets are transmitted from one packet network to the other using only the outer loop. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100254318 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD IN THE DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM - A digital broadcasting system and a data processing method are disclosed. In an aspect of the present invention, the present invention provides a data processing method including receiving a broadcast signal in which main service data and mobile service data are multiplexed, demodulating the received broadcast signal, outputting demodulation time information of a specific position of a broadcast signal frame, and acquiring reference time information contained in the mobile service data frame, setting the reference time information to a system time clock at a specific time based on the demodulation time information and decoding the mobile service data according to the system time clock. | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100260099 | HSPA Evolution Architecture - A telecommunications network, including an evolved base station node having a node controller and a first radio network controller (RNC), the node controller configured to communicate with user terminals, and the first radio network controller configured to communicate with a packet switched component of a core network, but not with a circuit switched component, may further include a second RNC that communicates with the node controller and also communicates with the packet switched component of the core network and a circuit switched component. A method of establishing communication between a user terminal and the core network via the second RNC, when the user terminal has a control plane connection with the evolved base station node, such that the first RNC is the serving RNC (SRNC), may include tunnelling communication set up messages over the control plane between the node controller and the core network via the second RNC. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260100 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING END TO END QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR CELLULAR VOICE TRAFFIC OVER A DATA NETWORK - Embodiments of the disclosed invention include a system and method for providing end to end quality of service for cellular voice traffic over a data network. For example, in one embodiment, the method includes tagging outgoing cellular traffic at a network interface device with a prioritization marking to produce prioritized data and transmitting the prioritized data directly to an access carrier network associated with providing an access line to the cellular network interface device. The method maintains, at the access carrier network, the prioritization marking of the outgoing cellular traffic for routing the outgoing cellular traffic through the access carrier network. The method hands off the prioritized data directly to a cellular service provider network associated with the cellular device via a directly connected network to network interface. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260101 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION FOR DIRECTLY CONNECTED PEERS - Aspects relate to allowing peer nodes that establish a communication through a home agent to move that session to a directly connected link. Thus, the directly connected nodes can exchange packets natively without encapsulation. Further aspects allow a node that does not have any home agent entity to switch from a local network to a global network without losing ongoing sessions. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260102 | COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS ENHANCED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORKS - A method and system for communication in a wireless enhanced control area network including wireless station nodes is provided. One implementation involves each wireless station node employing a wireless communication protocol for wireless communication of control area network (CAN) messages among the wireless station nodes on a wireless communication medium, wherein each CAN message comprises a content-identified data message or an error message. The wireless communication protocol including a medium access control protocol for controlling access to the wireless communication by the wireless station nodes. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260103 | Distributed Antenna System - A wireless communication network employs a distributed antenna system to provide radio coverage. The wireless communication network comprises a plurality of access points providing service in respective coverage areas. The access point within each coverage area connects to a plurality of antennas that are widely distributed within the coverage area. Radio resources at antennas within the overlapping region of two or more neighboring coverage areas are shared by the access points in the neighboring coverage areas according to a multiple access scheme. The sharing of radio resources within the overlapping region of two or more coverage areas allows the overlapping region to be enlarged, thereby providing more time to complete a handover. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260104 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING THE ABSOLUTE GRANT MAPPING TABLE FOR DRIFTING RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - A method for configuring an absolute grant mapping relationship table for a drift radio network controller, comprises: a serving radio network controller informing the drift radio network controller of the absolute grant mapping relationship table used by an enhanced-dedicated channel absolute grant channel (E-AGCH) by signaling; and the drift radio network controller returning a response message to the serving radio network controller after storing the information configured. The present invention guarantees that absolute grant values corresponding to the Node B and the user equipment are obtained from the same absolute grant mapping relationship table, i.e. from the same table of relationships between absolute grant values and indexes, and the allocation and use of the power resource by them are consistent, so that efficient use of resources and security of the system are guaranteed. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260105 | DOMAIN TRANSFER SERVICE CONTINUITY PROVISION TO A MOBILE TERMINAL - The invention refers to a method of providing a service continuity of a communication between a mobile terminal (UE) and a service node (AS) within a communications network (CN), the communication network comprising a first radio access network (RAN | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260106 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE USING PREAMBLE - Provided are a network communication method and a network device using a preamble. According to the network communication method and the network device, network coexistence is easily achieved by using network identification transmitted in the preamble, and an unknown terminal, which has a low reception signal to noise ratio (SNR) and has not yet been connected to an existing network, is easily connected to the existing network. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260107 | REDUCING TIME FOR CALL FAILURE INDICATION - Techniques are disclosed for reducing the time for a wireless communication device originating a group communication, such as a push-to-talk call, to receive a call failure indication on a wireless communications system. In an embodiment, a group communications server receives a request to initiate a call with a target from an originator, and sends a corresponding message to a network node. If the call cannot be completed, the server receives from the network node an internet control message protocol (ICMP) message indicative of there being no connection between the network node and the target wireless communication device. In response to the message, the group communications server sends a status failure message to the originating wireless communication device. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260108 | SETTING UP A REVERSE LINK DATA TRANSMISSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Aspects including methods and apparatuses for setting up a reverse link data transmission within a wireless communications system are disclosed. An access terminal sends, to an access network, an initial data packet in a sequence of data packets including a data portion and a header portion including an identifier of a first type, the identifier of the first type configured to uniquely identify the given access terminal in more than one of a subset of sectors of the wireless communications system. The access network sends a message to the access terminal to (i) assign a dedicated channel to the given access terminal, or to (ii) assign an identifier of a second type to uniquely identify the given access terminal in a single sector of the wireless communications system. The access network thereafter receives additional packets from the access terminal in accordance with the assignment. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260109 | OPTIMIZED INTER-ACCESS POINT PACKET ROUTING FOR IP RELAY NODES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate communicating inter-eNB packets among eNBs in a cluster implemented by a donor eNB. A relay eNB can report an address received from a gateway upstream to one or more eNBs. The one or more eNBs can store the address along with one or more parameters for communicating with the relay eNB. In this regard, disparate eNBs can communicate with the relay eNB by specifying the address in an inter-eNB packet, and upstream eNBs can route the inter-eNB packet to the relay eNB based at least in part on locating the address in a routing table. In this regard, the inter-eNB packets need not pass through the gateway to reach the relay eNB. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260110 | Hierarchical Data Collection Network Supporting Packetized Voice Communications Among Wireless Terminals and Telephones - A packet-based, hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. The network accommodates real time voice transmission both through dedicated, scheduled bandwidth and through a packet-based routing within the confines and constraints of a data network. Conversion and call processing circuitry is also disclosed which enables access devices and personal computers to adapt voice information between analog voice stream and digital voice packet formats as proves necessary. Routing pathways include wireless spanning tree networks, wide area networks, telephone switching networks, internet, etc., in a manner virtually transparent to the user. A voice session and associate call setup simulates that of conventional telephone switching network, providing well-understood functionality common to any mobile, remote or stationary terminal, phone, computer, etc. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260111 | MULTI-FA PERSONAL SUBSCRIBER TERMINAL AND METHOD OF ORDERING PROTOCOL DATA UNIT THEREOF - A multi-FA personal subscriber station and a method of ordering protocol data units thereof having advantages of simultaneously accessing two frequency channels to transmit and receive data and appropriately ordering protocol data units transmitted through each frequency channel, thereby minimizing errors in TCP/IP packet transmission, are disclosed. According to the multi-FA personal subscriber terminal and the method of ordering protocol data units thereof according to exemplary embodiments of the present invention, two frequency channels are simultaneously accessed to transmit and receive data and protocol data units transmitted through each of the frequency channels are ordered, thereby minimizing errors in TCP/IP packet transmission. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260112 | QUICK PAGING IN TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In an orthogonal frequency division multiple access communication system, unused frequency resources during a conventional preamble signal are used for a quick paging mechanism. A set of quick paging signals is sent over the unused frequency resources to signal one or more subscriber stations. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100265880 | CONVERT IP TELEPHONY NETWORK INTO A MOBILE CORE NETWORK - A system includes a terminal, a wireless access network, an IP telephony network, a core network gateway from the IP telephony network to the public mobile phone network and a network device, which connects the wireless access network to the IP telephony network and adapts the IP telephony network services to be used by utilizing the circuit-switched signaling protocols of the terminal. A location updating request is received from the terminal over the wireless access network. Location updating is performed via a core network gateway. The network device performs user registration to the IP telephony network using a domain name formed by the phone number of the user and the domain name of the network device or the numeric IP address as the address connection to be registered and as location data in the IP telephony network. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265881 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EFFICIENT TRANSMISSION OF DCD/UCD MESSAGES IN A WIMAX SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present disclosure propose a method and apparatus for ensuring each mobile station serviced by a base station does not miss a new version of a DCD/UCD message before the new version takes effect. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265882 | USER APPARATUS AND CELL SEARCH METHOD - A user apparatus to be used in a mobile communications system including multiple cells is disclosed. The user apparatus includes a unit which receives a sync channel; a unit which extracts a primary sync channel and a secondary sync channel from the sync channel and conducts a cell search; and a unit which controls, based on a condition for setting an averaging time in a time direction in the cell search, a correlation detection time in a correlation detection performed in the unit which conducts the cell search. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265883 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-SECTOR MIMO CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS - An apparatus for wireless communication is disclosed that includes a processing system configured to communicate with a plurality of sectors in an active set; and receive independent data streams from the plurality of sectors on the same carrier. A method for performing the process is also disclosed herein. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265884 | CIRCUIT-SWITCHED SERVICES OVER SAE/LTE NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for providing both Mobile Terminated, MT, and Mobile Originated, MO, circuit switched (CS) services such as Short Message Service, SMS, services in networks utilizing CS Fallback and CSoLTE-I architectures. An extended SGs interface referred to as SGs+ is implemented between a Mobility Management Entity, MME, in an SAE core network and a Mobile Switching Center Server, MSC-S. The SGs+ interface supports transmission of upper layer CS packet data units while utilizing either connectionless or connection-oriented Signaling Connection Control Part, SCCP, operation. The non access stratum, NAS, signaling support between the User Equipment, UE, and the MME is extended to provide support for both MT SMS and MO SMS service. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265885 | ACCESS POINT SCAN METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM STORING SCAN PROGRAM, AND STATION - In an access point scan method by which a station disconnected from an access point scans for a next access point to which the station can be connected at a predetermined scan interval, the station sets a shorter scan interval when a possibility of connection to the next access point to which the station can be connected is presumed to be high or a need for connection is presumed to be great, and sets a longer scan interval when the possibility of connection is presumed to be low or the need for connection is presumed to be small, based on one of information on the access point to which the station being connected just before disconnection and information on the station. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265886 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PRIORITIZE MOBILE STATION TRANSMISSIONS IN RESPONSE TO NETWORK ACKNOWLEDGMENT POLLING - Methods and apparatus to prioritize mobile station transmissions in response to network acknowledgment polling are disclosed. An example method in a mobile station disclosed herein comprises receiving a request for acknowledgment information expected to be transmitted with data, and transmitting a control message in response to the request if a previously transmitted data block is associated with a tentative acknowledgment state, the control message including acknowledgment information. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265887 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING CONTENTS OF WIRELESS TERMINAL IN HOME NETWORK SYSTEM - Provided is a method for using home network contents of a wireless terminal located outside a home network. The method includes transmitting bandwidth information and wireless terminal information to a contents storage device, when a home gateway receives a remote access request message including the bandwidth information from the wireless terminal; setting, by the home contents storage device, the bandwidth information as a filtering parameter for the wireless terminal; filtering, by the contents storage device, contents available for the wireless terminal and generating a contents list corresponding to the wireless terminal by using the filtering parameter, upon receiving a request for the contents list; and transmitting the generated contents list to the wireless terminal. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265888 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPER FINE POSITIONING WITH NETWORKS IN TIERED STRUCTURE - A super fine positioning apparatus is provided. A super fine positioning apparatus, including: a network module unit comprising a plurality of network modules which processes a signal among a user terminal and a plurality of communication networks, the plurality of communication networks being sorted by a positioning precision; a network module control unit which sequentially selects the plurality of network modules and controls connection to the plurality of network modules; a positioning calculation unit which sequentially connects to the plurality of network modules and calculates a location of the user terminal according to each connection phase; and a database which stores information about the user terminal and provides the network module control unit and positioning calculation unit with the information. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265889 | METHOD FOR RECOGNIZING POSITIONS OF A PLURALITY OF NODES WHICH CONSIST WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A method for recognizing positions of a plurality of nodes which constitute a wireless sensor network is provided, the method comprises generating sub-maps which represent the relative position to neighbor nodes by taking each of the plurality of nodes as a reference; selecting a sub-map which takes a node with the highest connectivity as a reference from among the plurality of nodes; selecting a sub-map which takes a node with the highest connectivity as a reference, except for the node which becomes a reference of the selected sub-map among the nodes which are included in the selected sub-map; integrating the selected sub-maps into one map by matching the same nodes among the nodes which are commonly included in the selected sub-maps; and thereafter correcting positions of nodes which are included in the integrated map to real positions, whereby integrating order of the sub-map is adjusted using an information of the connectivity of the nodes, and the positions of the nodes which constitute the wireless sensor network is constituted are correctly recognized by correcting the position of the nodes. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265890 | TRANSPORT FOR WIRELESS RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A radio access network includes a transport network layer; a radio network layer having a layer 2 network for communicating between entities within the radio network layer by exchanging datagrams having a predetermined format used only within the radio network layer. Accordingly, the present invention provides for a true decoupling at layer 2 between the radio network layer and the transport network layer. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265891 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY ROUTING DATA PACKETS AND MANAGING CHANNEL ACCESS AND BANDWIDTH IN WIRELESS MULTI-HOPPING NETWORKS - A method for routing data packets from a source to a destination in a wireless communication network comprising a plurality of nodes, wherein each node is in uplink-downlink association with at least one neighboring node, and wherein each node comprises a registration table identifying all downlink nodes that are associated with the node, the method comprising: sending an Open Stream message from a source node which specifies a destination node; and receiving the Open Stream message at the uplink node of the source node, wherein the uplink node relays the Open Stream message to the destination node if the destination node is registered in the registration table of the uplink node. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265892 | LAYER-2 IP NETWORKING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE HOSTS - A method and apparatus to enable IP networking for mobile hosts without requiring changes to be made to the TCP/IP stack in the operating system installed on the mobile hosts. The apparatus is an “intelligent device” that can be installed on or connected to a mobile host, and may comprise a software-only logical module, physical hardware, or a combination of both. To a mobile host, the intelligent device emulates a network interface such as an Ethernet card or a telephone modem. The intelligent device appears to an access network just like any regular IP host connected to the access network through a physical network interface device. The intelligent device handles all mobile networking functions for the mobile host, and may control multiple different physical network interface devices to enable a connection to the “best” access network available to the mobile user at his location. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100272010 | APPARATUS FOR EXCHANGING MEDIA CONTENT - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a media gateway having a controller to establish communications with a media processor over a wireline network according to a next generation home network (G.hn) protocol, establish communications with the media processor over a wireless network according to a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) protocol, determine a first measure of communication according to the WiFi protocol, determine a second measure of communication according to the G.hn protocol, and coordinate with the media processor to select one of the wireline network and the wireless network according to the first and second measures of communication for delivery of the media services to the media processor. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272011 | ITERATIVE DECODING WITH CONFIGURABLE NUMBER OF ITERATIONS - Techniques for transmitting and receiving data in a communication system are described. A receiver may iteratively decode a data packet and may obtain better performance with more decoding iterations. The receiver may select the number of decoding iterations based on at least one parameter (e.g., packet size) to tradeoff between decoder throughput and link performance. In one design, a transmitter may obtain a transport format selected based on the number of decoding iterations, process a data packet in accordance with the transport format, and send a transmission of the data packet to the receiver. The receiver may receive the transmission of the data packet and may perform decoding for the data packet for up to the selected number of decoding iterations. The transport format and/or CQI information may be determined based on an expected degradation in link performance due to the receiver performing the selected number of decoding iterations. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272012 | APPARATUS AND A METHOD FOR DETECTING A COMMUNICATION CHANNEL - The present invention provides a method and an apparatus for detecting a communication channel in whose frequency band radio signals are transmitted by different radio signal sources inside a cabin. In this case a wide band antenna receives the radio signals transmitted inside the cabin. Different demodulators are provided, each of which demodulate the radio signals received by the wide band antenna within an associated frequency range of the demodulator. A configuration logic establishes whether, in a frequency hand within a demodulated frequency range, radio signals are being transmitted simultaneously by different radio signal sources. In the case of impermissible signal transmissions of a radio signal source, e.g. when a non-safety-relevant system transmits signals in the same frequency band of a safety-relevant system in the same frequency bands of a safety-relevant system, the non-safety-relevant system is reconfigured by the configuration logic and an alarm or warning signal is generated as an indication of the impermissible condition. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272013 | ESTABLISHING PACKET DATA NETWORK CONNECTIVITY FOR LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS TRAFFIC - Providing for establishment of local Internet Protocol access (LIPA) for cellular communication is provided herein. According to particular aspects of the subject disclosure, provided are mechanisms to identify a request to establish a packet network connection as a request for a LIPA context. Once identified, a local gateway associated with the UE or with a subscriber-deployed base station is identified, and a packet context is established to support LIPA traffic for the UE. Additional mechanisms support UE mobility from one base station to another, including identifying and terminating inactive LIPA contexts. Further, a UE is described that can recognize and facilitate the establishment of a LIPA context for applications executing at the UE. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272014 | Parametric Compression of Rank-1 Analog Feedback - Channel state information in a closed-loop, multiple-input, multiple-output wireless networks is fed back from each mobile station to a base station by first determining a transmit covariance matrix R, and applying a singular value decomposition (SVD) R=UΣV | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272015 | Method For Accelerating System Information Acquisition - Method for transmitting system information from a base station BS, eNB to a user equipment UE, the method includes transmitting a system information SI within a period p, which system information comprises a first part of information MIB, wherein the first part of information comprises an identifier ID, which identifier identifies a modification status of the first part of information MIB, and adapting a boundary b upon which the period p terminates, and upon which a modified system information SI is valid, wherein adapting a boundary b is carried out based on the modification status of the first part of information MIB. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272016 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING TRANSPORT NETWORK INDEPENDENT IP MOBILITY IN MOBILE TERMINAL AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method and system for supporting Internet protocol (IP) mobility independently of the IP version of a transport network are provided. The method includes providing a mobility control apparatus, which maps the home addresses of a plurality of mobile terminals, including first and second mobile terminals, and the Care-of-Addresses (CoAs) of the mobile terminals, and setting a first control tunnel between the mobility control apparatus and the first mobile terminal, the care-of-addresses varying from one transport network to another transport network; setting a second control tunnel between the mobility control apparatus and the second mobile terminal; and enabling the first and second mobile terminals to exchange a data packet with each other through the first and second control tunnels. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272017 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING ADVANCED LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method and apparatus for processing advanced long term evolution (LTE-A) system information (SI) are described. When a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is in an idle mode/state, an LTE-A SI broadcast may be received on at least one downlink (DL) anchor carrier, including a physical DL shared channel (PDSCH) having paging message content. At least one SI-change parameter included in the paging message content may be decoded and processed. The SI-change parameter may include a flag used to indicate an SI change on a logical partition, (a primary or a secondary SI broadcast group information change). When the WTRU is in a connected mode/state, an LTE-A SI-CHANGE-radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) transmission may be received during a modification period (MP), and an SI change may be performed during a subsequent MP. At least one SI-change parameter included in the SI-CHANGE-RNTI transmission may be decoded and processed. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272018 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - The present invention pertains to the technology for avoiding interference between adjacent frequencies occurring on cell boundaries or sector boundaries in a mobile wireless communication system using an OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) scheme. There are a single sector mode of no collaboration between sectors; a sector selection mode of collaborating between sectors to transmit with a specified frequency resource from only one sector, and a collaboration mode of collaborating between sectors to transmit signals from both sectors. Any of the three modes is selected on the basis of measurement results of RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) reported from a mobile station. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272019 | MULTIPLEXING LARGE PAYLOADS OF CONTROL INFORMATION FROM USER EQUIPMENTS - Disclosed is multiplexing transmissions of Uplink Control Information (UCI) signals having variable payloads from User Equipments (UEs). The UCI transmission uses a first format type if its size is less than or equal to a predetermined values and it uses a second format type if its size is greater than a predetermined value. When the first format type is used the UE multiplexing is through a first method while when the second format type is used the UE multiplexing is through a second method which is different than the first method. The structure of the second format type is the same as the structure used for the transmission of data information by UEs. The UEs can also be grouped and UCI transmission can be triggered through the reception of control signaling addressing a group of UEs and indicating UCI transmission by a sub-group of UEs in the group of UEs. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272020 | Telecommunications Network Responsive to Server-Provided Location Information - The invention relates to a telecommunications network for wirelessly establishing a connection with a terminal located at a location in said network by a server. The terminal is identified by a terminal identifier in the telecommunications network. The telecommunications network contains a first network node and a second network node. The first network node is configured for receiving a data unit for the terminal from the server, that is preferably located outside the telecommunications network. The data unit comprises the terminal identifier. The first network node is being configured for receiving a location identifier indicative of the location of the terminal from the server and for deriving an address of the second network node using the location identifier. The derived address of the second network node is then used for transmitting a first connection request for establishing a connection with the derived second network node. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272021 | METHOD, APPARATUSES AND PROGRAM FOR HANDLING PROTOCOL TRANSLATION BETWEEN EPS AND GPRS - The present invention relates to a solution for handling protocol translation issues in a mixed communication protocol network ( | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272022 | SEQUENCE HOPPING METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BASE STATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication terminal apparatus wherein the occurrences of inter-sequence interferences between a reference signal preceding a sequence hopping and a reference signal following the sequence hopping can be reduced so as to improve the randomizing effect achieved by the sequence hopping. In this apparatus, a sequence number deciding part ( | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272023 | GATEWAY DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A gateway device includes a communication unit communicating a frame signal conforming to an IuUP (Iu User Plane) protocol with a wireless base station controller connected to a circuit switching network; a determination unit determining whether the frame signal received by the communication unit satisfies a predetermined condition or not; a conversion unit converting information included in the frame signal to information to be set in a flow control signal of an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) when the frame signal satisfies the predetermined condition; and a flow control signal transmission unit transmitting the flow control signal to a communication device in the IMS. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272024 | INTELLIGENT PICO-CELL FOR TRANSPORT OF WIRELESS DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS OVER WIRELINE NETWORKS - In one embodiment a pico cell may be used to detect a presence of a wireless device and receive a wireless signal from the wireless device. The wireless signal may then be converted from a protocol used by the wireless device to a converted signal in a protocol suitable for use with a broadband connection. The converted signal may then be transmitted over the broadband connection. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272025 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICES IN AN EVOLVED PACKET NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method, system and device for processing circuit switched (CS) services in an evolved packet network. The method includes: by a mobility management entity (MME), receiving a mobile terminated (MT) service indication from a mobile switching center (MSC); sending the MT service indication to user equipment (UE); and receiving an MT service response returned by the UE and performing subsequent operations according to the MT service response. In the method of the present invention, when an MT service arrives, the MME does not trigger the evolved NodeB (eNodeB) to hand over the packet switched (PS) services of the UE but notifies the UE of the MT service and performs subsequent operations according to the MT service response returned by the UE, thus avoiding the waste of network resources caused by a meaningless handover of PS services. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272026 | Communication Nodes for Use with an Ad-Hoc Network - Communication nodes for use with a wireless ad-hoc communication network are disclosed. In an embodiment of the present invention, the communication node comprises a transducer, which generates a signal in response to an external signal. The ad-hoc network communication is supported in part by static communication nodes, which defined an organized infrastructure network in order to achieve the various functions of the transducers. In another embodiment, the communication node for use with a wireless ad-hoc network does not include a transducer. Such communication nodes are preferred for use with a less structured network with virtually no infrastructure and allow for being used with expanding and contracting networks. Mobile communication nodes mostly support the propagation of signals. However, pseudo-static or static communication nodes are also used in wireless communication ad-hoc networks. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272027 | Communication Nodes for Use with an Ad-Hoc Network - Communication nodes for use with a wireless ad-hoc communication network are disclosed. In an embodiment of the present invention, the communication node comprises a transducer, which generates a signal in response to an external signal. The ad-hoc network communication is supported in part by static communication nodes, which defined an organized infrastructure network in order to achieve the various functions of the transducers. In another embodiment, the communication node for use with a wireless ad-hoc network does not include a transducer. Such communication nodes are preferred for use with a less structured network with virtually no infrastructure and allow for being used with expanding and contracting networks. Mobile communication nodes mostly support the propagation of signals. However, pseudo-static or static communication nodes are also used in wireless communication ad-hoc networks. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100278099 | Methods for Transmitting and Receiving Data and Communication Devices - A method for transmitting data from a first communication device to a second communication device, comprising generating a message, wherein the message comprises data to be sent to the second communication device, a source address and a destination address, associating a first address of the first communication device as the source address for the message, associating a first address of the second communication device as the destination address for the message, determining a second address of the first communication device, determining a second address of the second communication device, replacing the first address of the first communication device with the second address of the first communication device as the source address for the message, replacing the first address of the second communication device with the second address of the second communication device as the destination address for the message, and sending the message. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278100 | EXTENDED RANGE VOICE OVER IP WIMAX DEVICE - A method implemented in a mobile station (“MS”). When the MS transmits, it generates radio frequency (“RF”) energy. To limit exposure to RF energy, regulatory agencies determined a maximum transmit power for mobile stations. The amount of RF energy considered safe is that generated when the MS is transmitting continuously at the maximum transmit power for a predetermined period. The method first determines whether the maximum transmit power is too low to effect communication between the MS and a base station. If it is, the transmit power is increased and if possible, the data transmit rate of outbound data is reduced to at or below a data rate threshold that reduces the RF energy generated by the mobile station to an amount considered safe. Then, any data having a data transmit rate less than or equal to the data rate threshold is transmitted at the increased transmit power. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278101 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF MAINTAINING A CONNECTION IN A NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for maintaining a connection between two hosts in a multi-hop network comprising at least one network node disposed between the two hosts and a network element, e.g., a NAT, designed to release the connection after a period of inactivity. The method includes determining a first node in which a keep-alive message will terminate after crossing a network element designed to release the connection after a period of inactivity, and sending a keep-alive data packet configured to terminate in the first node after crossing the network element designed to release the connection. The keep-alive packet configured to terminate in the first node after crossing the network element designed to release the connection may be sent within a time period less than the time period of inactivity after which the network element would release the connection. The method allows for a connection to be kept open without waking up a client device and/or without activating air interface procedures. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278102 | DATA FLOW ROUTING IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORK - A data flow from a source to a destination is routed in a multi-hop wireless network. Nodes are searched in the multi-hop wireless network for information of route metrics for the nodes, the information of the route metrics are received, a route that has a most optimal route metric for the data flow are determined based on the route metrics and a data flow metric of the data flow, and the data flow are received from the source via the route at the destination in the multi-hop wireless network. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278103 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF AN AVERAGING PARAMETER FOR PCINR AND RSSI - A system and method for adaptive control of an averaging parameter in a communications network may include an averaging parameter adaptive control module (APAC) that is associated with a base station and that includes one or more processors configured to generate a first averaging parameter that is transmitted by the base station to a mobile station communicating with the base station. The mobile station may use the first averaging parameter to generate first channel condition information that indicates a condition of a communication channel. First feedback information including the first channel condition information may be received at the base station. The APAC may generate a second averaging parameter using the first averaging parameter and the first feedback information and may transmit the second averaging parameter from the base station to the mobile station, thereby adaptively controlling the second averaging parameter based on the first feedback information. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278104 | Computing Device and Communications Framework - A computing device having communications framework for a protocol stack. The framework includes a number of layers, each layer representing a layer in a protocol stack. At each layer, a protocol is a bearer of an upper adjacent layer. Each layer is arranged to monitor the availability of one or more alternate bearer layers below. Where there is more than one alternate bearer layer below, a layer is said to be mobile. In the event of a new bearer layer becoming available at a mobile layer, a decision is made as to whether or not to migrate to that bearer layer based on established policies in the mobile layer and, optionally, on communication with higher layers or with the client application. If the decision to migrate is positive, the mobile layer then ensures establishment of the new bearer layer and initiates and completes migration to it. The client of a connection active over the connection stack need not be disturbed by mobility events within the stack providing the connection. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278105 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING RADIO LINK CONTROL (RLC) DATA BLOCKS - In one aspect, the invention provides apparatuses and methods for wirelessly transmitting application data utilizing priority information for each radio link control (RLC) data block transmitted. Advantageously, the application data with a relatively high transmission priority is not substantially delayed by the transmission of application data with substantially lower transmission priorities. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278106 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION - A method for receiving control information for data reception at a specific user equipment in a communication system in which at least one data transmission mode is used to transmit data of the at least one UE is disclosed. The method receives the control information including a first field and a second field, in which the first field indicates a data transmission mode of the specific user equipment (UE) and the second field indicates a resource block via which the data is transmitted, and receives the data by decoding the control information. As a result, a method for constructing control information required for receiving control data of a localized-mode UE and a distributed-mode UE can be recognized. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278107 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR SELECTING A PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK USING UNLICENSED ACCESS NETWORKS - When a mobile station (MS) seeks access to a public land mobile network (PLMN) via an unlicensed or generic access networks (GAN) it first registers with a default GAN. If the default GAN is unable to serve the MS at its current location, it redirects the MS to other GANs serving the same of different PLMNs. However, when using the existing registration and redirection process, an MS has no means of knowing what services are provided by a specific combination of GAN and PLMN. In accordance with the present invention this is achieved by indicating for each PLMN and serving GANC an operation mode supported by the GANC. This operation mode being indicative of the interface used for communication between the GANC and PLMN it serves. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278108 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING LOCAL IP ACCESS IN A FEMTO CELL OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for providing a local IP access service to a User Equipment (UE) attached to a femtocell including a Packet Data Network (PDN) gateway function in a wireless communication system. A method includes receiving a service request from a User Equipment (UE), transmitting an initial UE message including information on a local gateway to a Mobility Management Entity (MME), storing bearer information carried in an initial context setup request transmitted by the MME, receiving a Packet Data Network (PDN) connectivity request from the UE, forwarding the PDN connectivity request to the MME, receiving a create session request from the MME, and establishing a radio bearer with the local gateway, the local gateway being co-located with the femtocell. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278109 | MULTIPLEXING LARGE PAYLOADS OF CONTROL INFORMATION FROM USER EQUIPMENTS - Disclosed is multiplexing transmissions of Uplink Control Information (UCI) signals having variable payloads from User Equipments (UEs). The UCI transmission uses a first format type if its size is less than or equal to a predetermined values and it uses a second format type if its size is greater than a predetermined value. When the first format type is used the UE multiplexing is through a first method while when the second format type is used the UE multiplexing is through a second method which is different than the first method. The structure of the second format type is the same as the structure used for the transmission of data information by UEs. The UEs can also be grouped and UCI transmission can be triggered through the reception of control signaling addressing a group of UEs and indicating UCI transmission by a sub-group of UEs in the group of UEs. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278110 | GATEWAY DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A gateway device includes a communication unit communicating a frame signal conforming to an IuUP (Iu User Plane) protocol with a wireless base station controller connected to a circuit switching network; a determination unit determining whether the frame signal received by the communication unit satisfies a predetermined condition or not; a conversion unit converting information included in the frame signal to information to be set in a call control signal of an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) when the frame signal satisfies the predetermined condition; and a call control signal transmission unit transmitting the call control signal to a communication device in the IMS. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278111 | DUMMY PADDING SUB-HEADER IN MAC PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - An approach is provided for padding a protocol data unit. A protocol data unit is generated. A dummy padding sub-header is inserted within a header of the protocol data unit. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278112 | BINDING UPDATE METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE USED FOR SAME - Disclosed is a technique for providing a binding updating method and the like, capable of reducing the number of messages, and hence the power consumption of terminals and processing time required for binding update between both terminals. According to the technique, a first mobile terminal sends a second mobile terminal a first pair of messages including predetermined information on the first mobile terminal to acquire predetermined information on the second terminal. The second mobile terminal sends the first mobile terminal a second pair of messages including the predetermined information on the second mobile terminal. The first mobile terminal sends a third message to which authentication information is added, the authentication information generated based on the predetermined information on the second mobile terminal. The second mobile terminal sends a fourth message including response information to the third message and to which authentication information is added, the authentication information generated based on the predetermined information on the first mobile terminal. When the authentication information from the first mobile terminal is valid, the second mobile terminal updates binding information, while when the authentication information from the second mobile terminal is valid, the first mobile terminal updates the binding information. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278113 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING BEARER UNDER ISR MECHANISM - A method and a system for processing a bearer under an idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) mechanism are provided. The method for processing a bearer under an ISR mechanism includes the following steps. A mobility management network element acquires an access mode of a current network. The mobility management network element notifies a serving gateway (SGW) of the access mode of the current network, so that the SGW processes bearer according to the access mode of the current network. It can be ensured that the access mode of the current network is consistent with the access mode for a policy and charging control (PCC) strategy adopted during a bearing procedure under the ISR mechanism. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278114 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNALS BASED ON SEGMENTED ACCESS SCHEME AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING SEQUENCE FOR THE SAME - A segmented access based signal transmitting/receiving method and a sequence allocating method for the same are disclosed. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method of transmitting a signal of a user equipment in a communication system includes selecting a channel in accordance with at least one selected from the group consisting of a signal attenuation extent of a downlink signal to the user equipment and a speed of the user equipment from channels differently provided based on at least one selected from the group consisting of the signal attenuation extent of the downlink signal and the speed of the user equipment and transmitting the signal using the selected channel. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278115 | Wireless Base Station Apparatus, Frequency Deviation Detecting Method, And Mobile Communication System - A wireless base station apparatus includes a path detecting unit configured to detect a preamble signal sent from a terminal and obtain a back-diffusion timing; a back-diffusion unit configured to execute back-diffusion processing on a message signal sent from the terminal, by using the back-diffusion timing reported from the path detecting unit; and a calculating unit configured to calculate a frequency deviation of the message signal that has been subjected to the back-diffusion processing, based on a pilot signal of the message signal that has been subjected to the back-diffusion processing. The path detecting unit includes an information detecting unit configured to detect a frequency deviation of the preamble signal when detecting the preamble signal and supply the frequency deviation of the preamble signal to the calculating unit as initial value information. The calculating unit includes an information adding unit that calculates the frequency deviation of the message signal by using the initial value information. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278116 | Method and Device for Information Transfer - A method for information transfer includes: determining, by a source Mobility Management Network Element (MMNE) of a source Access Network (AN), version number of GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP) used between the source MMNE and a destination MMNE of a destination AN; and transmitting, by the source MMNE, user information corresponding to the version number of the GTP used between the source MMNE and the destination MMNE to the destination MMNE. The embodiment of the invention also provides a device for information transfer. With the embodiment of present invention, corresponding user information transfer may be realized. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100284326 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A mobile communication system that is a wireless communication system using the AMC scheme and does not require any transmission/reception of control signals between a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus during controlling of the transmission/reception of the mobile station apparatus. In this mobile communication system, the mobile station apparatus measures reception quality of a downlink signal transmitted by the base station apparatus, and uses an uplink control channel to transmit, to the base station apparatus, downlink signal quality information (CQI) corresponding to the measured reception quality. The base station apparatus receives the downlink signal quality information CQI to control the data transmission to the mobile station apparatus. The base station apparatus judges whether the downlink signal quality information CQI transmitted by the mobile station apparatus is present, and controls, based on the result of this judgment, the downlink signal to be transmitted to the mobile station apparatus. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284327 | Policy Enforcement Within an IP Network - A method and network node for generating and applying policy rules in an IP network. A Policy Enforcement Function (PEF) is implemented in a node such as a Gateway GPRS Service Node (GGSN) routing packet flows to and from network users. An Application Function (AF) determines source and destination addressing information for a packet flow and sends the information to a Policy and Charging Decision Function in a Policy and Charging Control Function (PCRF) having access to service and mobility policies for network users. The PCRF generates policy rules based on the addressing information and the appropriate service and mobility policies. The PCRF sends the policies rules to the PEF for application to the traffic flow. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284328 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A connection adapter is disposed intervening between a communication module for connection to a radio packet communication network and high-level equipment. The connection adapter transmits a communication request for second high level equipment to a management computer after connecting to the radio packet communication network. The management computer sends a calling message to second connection adapter. Upon receipt of the calling message, the second connection adapter connects to the radio packet communication network. Then, each of the connection adapter relay the communication between the high-level equipments. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284329 | LOCAL MOBILITY MANAGEMENT APPARATUS FOR TOTAL MOBILITY MANAGEMENT, AND TOTAL MANAGEMENT METHOD AND SYSTEM - A local mobility management apparatus for total mobility management, and a total mobility management method and system are provided. A local domain mobility registration request message on a terminal is received from a mobile access gateway that receives a network attach message including information on a home agent from the terminal moving from a first local domain to a second local domain, a location of the terminal in an area managed by the mobile access gateway is registered, and a global domain mobility registration request message for reporting registration of the location to the home agent is transmitted. Accordingly, it is possible to remove a side effect generated in a case where a transmission order of a local domain mobility registration request message and a global domain mobility registration request message is disordered and provide an efficient mobility management. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284330 | Radio Telecommunications Network Node and Method of Adjusting Routing Table Up-date Interval - A method of adjusting a routing table update interval in a node of an ad-hoc radio telecommunications network comprising: reducing the routing table update interval by dividing it by a first constant value if a local change in the network is detected by the node. If a remote change in the network is detected by the node a rate of routing table exchange is increased by a second constant value. If no network change is detected by the node the rate of routing table exchange is reduced by the second constant value, wherein the rate of routing table exchange is reciprocal of the routing table update interval. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284331 | MOBILE IP ROUTE OPTIMIZATION IN IP VERSION TRANSITION SCENARIOS - The invention relates to a method for routing packets in a system of packet-switched networks using different internet protocol versions. The system comprises a plurality of home agents, at least one mobile node and at least one correspondent node. A first mobile node is configured with at least one topologically correct internet protocol address of a first internet protocol version and is located in a network supporting at least routing of packets having a header of the first internet protocol version. The method comprises the following steps. Communication is requested with a first correspondent node being configured with at least an internet protocol address of a second internet protocol version and being located in a network supporting at least the routing of packets having a header of the second internet protocol version, by an application on the first mobile node. A first of the plurality of home agents is located in proximity to a direct path between the first mobile node and the first correspondent node, the first home agent being located in a network supporting at least the routing of packets to the first mobile node with the packets having a header of the first internet protocol version and the routing of packets to the first correspondent node with the packets having a header of the second internet protocol version. Bootstrapping is carried out with the first home agent to obtain a first home address of the second internet protocol version and other communication parameters. The first mobile node's location is registered with the first home agent by sending a first binding update message comprising a first mobile node's topologically correct address of the first internet protocol version as care-of address and the first home address as home address; and the first home agent is used in bi-directional tunnelling mode, the outer header of the tunnelled packets using the first internet protocol version and the inner header of the tunnelled packets using the second internet protocol version, for communication with the first correspondent node, with the communication parameters set up in the bootstrapping step and the first home address as home address. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284332 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN MULTI CARRIER WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - There is provided a method in which a base station transmits downlink data in a wireless access system supporting multi-carriers. The method comprising negotiating with a terminal about a sleep mode parameter including information on a sleep window and a listening window, if the terminal is operating in a sleep mode, transmitting information on a carrier used for data transmission among the multi-carriers to the terminal through at least one of a medium access control (MAC) header, a MAC control message, and a control channel and transmitting data to the terminal based on the information during the listening window. Accordingly, waste of radio resources can be prevented by making efficient use of the multi-carriers even though the terminal is operating in the sleep mode. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284333 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA SESSION SUSPEND CONTROL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate data session suspend control in a multi-radio wireless communication system based on user equipment capability. As described herein, various techniques are provided herein whereby a wireless communication network with which a user device communicates can suspend a data session and/or other communication session associated with the user device upon identifying that the user device has moved to a disparate communication network based on the transmitter/receiver capabilities of the user device. In one example herein, a mobility management entity and/or other network management entity can determine whether to perform suspend control based on an event notification from another network based on user capability. In another example herein, a network to which a user device moves can determine whether to send an event notification to another network associated with the user device based on capabilities of the user device. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284334 | ASYNCHRONOUS MULTI-CHANNEL ADAPTATION METHOD FOR WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORK - There is provided an asynchronous multi-channel adaptation method. An asynchronous multi-channel adaptation method according to an aspect of the invention may include: a channel scanning operation in which a new node, participating in a wireless ad-hoc network, scans channels and selects a receiving channel thereof; and a receiving channel information transmission operation in which the new node transmits information on the selected receiving channel thereof to a neighboring node. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284335 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A telecommunication system includes a first node, a second node and a network. The first node is configured with a set of predefined functions and a group of addresses of the telecommunication network such that a session setup request targeted to any address in the group of addresses is routed to the first node, and each address in the group of addresses is associated with at least one of the predefined functions. The second node is configured to send a session setup request to a target address that corresponds to an address in the group of addresses. The first node is configured to determine the function to be performed on the basis of the target address in the session setup request. Information delivery from the second node to the first node is implemented quickly. In the second node the power consumption may be significantly reduced. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284336 | METHOD FOR SELECTING A POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION SERVER ON A NON-ROAMING SCENE - The present invention discloses a method for selecting a policy and charging rules function server in a non-roaming scenario to achieve that the PCC policies for each IP-CAN session are determined only by one PCRF. The method comprises of a Diameter Routing Agent (DRA) establishing an association relationship table in which IP Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session information and corresponding address information of a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) server are stored; and when a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) entity and a Gateway Control Function Entity (GWCF) requests the PCRF for or to update a Policy and Charging Control (PCC) policy of one IP-CAN session, or when an Application Function (AF) entity sends application information or service information down to the PCRF, obtaining the address information of the PCRF associated with said IP-CAN session from said DRA, then performing subsequent processing. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284337 | AD-HOC COMMUNICATION RADIO MODULE, AD-HOC COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING AN AD-HOC COMMUNICATION RADIO MODULE - An ad-hoc communication radio module is provided, which may include at least one of an ad-hoc communication reception circuit; and an ad-hoc communication transmission circuit; and an ad-hoc communication-protocol-stack-external control interface for the ad-hoc communication-protocol-stack-external control of the ad-hoc communication reception circuit or of the ad-hoe communication transmission circuit. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284338 | Method and Transmitting Unit for Reducing a Risk of Transmission Stalling - The present invention relates to a method and a transmitting unit for reducing a risk of transmission stalling between a transmitting unit and a receiving unit in a communication network system comprising said transmitting unit arranged to transmit data blocks to said receiving unit. Each data block comprises a block sequence number and transmitted data blocks are stored in a transmission buffer. A transmission buffer window is arranged to control the flow of retransmission of said transmitted data blocks. When the block sequence number has been acknowledged in a piggybacked acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement field, it is only set as acknowledged upon receipt of a packet uplink acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement message or a packet downlink acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement message comprising an acknowledgement for said block sequence number. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284339 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CYCLIC PREFIX LENGTH INFORMATION - A method of transmitting cyclic prefix length information when wireless access systems having different cyclic prefix lengths coexist is disclosed. The method of transmitting cyclic prefix length information comprises including the cyclic prefix length information in a preamble; and transmitting the preamble to a receiving end, whereby a transmitter can notify the receiving end of a current cyclic prefix length. Also, in a specific interval where a super frame header is defined, a single cyclic prefix length is used in a legacy support mode and a legacy disable mode, and cyclic prefix length information of other data or control channel is included in the super frame header and then transmitted to the receiving end. If different CP lengths are used in a legacy support mode of an evolved system, it is possible to solve a problem in detecting a control channel or a data channel, which may occur as the CP lengths are not distinguished from each other after preamble detection. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284340 | METHOD OF PACKET RETRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION AND WIRELESS DEVICE EMPLOYING THE SAME - A first wireless device communicates data to a second wireless device. The first wireless device employs at least one of a first interleaving scheme and a first sub-carrier mapping scheme to produce a first data packet from a first plurality of data bits, and transmits the first data packet to the second wireless device. When the first data packet is not received correctly by the second wireless device, then the first wireless device employs at least one of a second interleaving scheme and a second sub-carrier mapping scheme to create a second data packet from the first plurality of data bits, and transmits the second data packet to the second wireless device. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284341 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING MULTIPLE QUALITY OF SERVICE LEVELS IN A WIRELESS PACKET DATA SERVICES CONNECTION - The packets generated by each of multiple packet data applications are provided to a single Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) stack and a single High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) framing layer to convert data packets into byte streams suitable for transmission through Radio Link Protocol (RLP) connections. Each of the resultant multiple byte streams is then provided to one of multiple RLP connections having different retransmission and delay properties. The RLP connection selected for sending data from each application is based on the grade of service most appropriate for the application. At the receiver, the data from the multiple RLP connections is provided to a single PPP stack. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284342 | Wireless Communication System, Transmitting Device And Receiving Device - A wireless communication system has a transmitting device and a receiving device that perform communication by using a multi-carrier signal, wherein the receiving device includes a quality generating unit generating each piece of receiving quality information on each pilot channel for transmitting each pilot signal, a determining unit determining the number of pilot channels needed in the multi-carrier signal based on the receiving quality information, and a notifying unit transmitting a signal requesting the determined number of pilot channels to the transmitting device, and the transmitting device includes an allocation unit determining allocations of pilot signals in the direction of the time axis and in the direction of the frequency axis, corresponding to a requested number of pilot channels, and a transmitting unit transmitting the multi-carrier signal having the determined pilot signal allocations. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284343 | PROVIDING A DATA FUNCTION IN AN ACCESS GATEWAY NODE - An access gateway node couples a control node to an external data network, where the control node and access gateway node are for use in a wireless communications network. The access gateway node comprises a data function to route packets containing traffic data between the control node and the external data network. An interface to the control node enables exchange of control messages between the data function and a control function in the control node. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284344 | RADIO PROTOCOL FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Radio protocol for a next generation mobile communication system is disclosed including a radio link control layer for connecting to an upper layer through a service access point provided in advance and for connecting to a lower layer through a plurality of logic channels provided in advance The radio link control layer includes at least one radio link control entity for transmission/reception of data to/from up-link or down-link according to a form of a data transmission mode. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100290387 | AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION OF BP MERGER IN MULTI-BAND OFDM ALLIANCE (MBOA) ULTRA WIDE BAND (UWB) SYSTEMS - The current MBOA UWB MAC protocol requires a device that detects alien devices to include a BP Switch IE in its beacon so that its neighbors may learn the presence of the alien devices and follow that device to relocate their beacons in a coordinated fashion. However, during the transition period of beacon relocation, that device may decide to halt the relocation process as required by the standard and such decisions also have to be received by its neighbors. In such a case, a BP switch IE will be generated by that device which includes a BPST offset equal to a length of a superframe. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100290388 | INTEGRATED INTERNET MULTIMEDIA AND COMPUTING ACCESS INTERACTIVE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device for integrated interactive multimedia and access to remote computing power and data storage capabilities. The communication device is present in a network and converts the signals received from the network into audio, video or web content. Further, the communication |
